m Commands

m-factor

m-factor

Syntax

m-factor kbps

no m-factor

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>sath>accept-crit-tmpl m-factor)

Full Context

configure test-oam service-activation-testhead acceptance-criteria-template m-factor

Description

This command configures the margin by which the observed throughput is off from the configured throughput to determine whether a service test passes or fails.

The M-factor is used with cir-threshold and pir-threshold values for different test types to determine whether a test passes or fails.

  • type cir

    If the measured throughput is less than the difference of the configured CIR threshold and the M-factor, the test fails.

  • type cir-pir

    If the measured throughput is less than the difference of the configured PIR threshold and the M-factor, the test fails.

  • type policing

    • If the measured throughput is less than the difference of the configured PIR threshold and the M-factor, the test fails.

    • If the measured throughput is greater than the sum of the configured PIR threshold and the M-factor, the test fails.

  • type performance

    If the measured throughput is less than the difference of the configured PIR threshold and the M-factor, the test fails.

The no form of this command removes the M-factor.

Default

no m-factor

Parameters

kbps

Specifies the value, in kb/s, to use for the M-factor.

Values

1 to 400,000,000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

ma-index-range

ma-index-range

Syntax

ma-index-range start ma-index end ma-index

no ma-index-range

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>md-auto-id ma-index-range)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm md-auto-id ma-index-range

Description

This command specifies the range of indexes used by SR OS to automatically assign an index to ETH-CFM associations that are created in model-driven interfaces without an index explicitly specified by the user or client.

An association created with an explicitly-specified index cannot use an index in this range. In classic CLI and SNMP, the ID range cannot be changed while objects exist inside the previous or new range. In MD interfaces, the range can be changed, which causes any previously existing objects in the previous ID range to be deleted and re-created using a new ID in the new range.

The no form of this command removes the range values.

See the md-auto-id command for further details.

Parameters

start ma-index

Specifies the lower value of the index range. The value must be less than or equal to the end value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

end ma-index

Specifies the upper value of the index range. The value must be greater than or equal to the start value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host>host-ident mac)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>host-ident mac)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host host-identification mac

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host host-identification mac

Description

This command specifies the MAC address to match for a host lookup.

Note:

This command is only used when mac is configured as one of the match-list parameters.

The no form of this command removes the MAC address from the configuration.

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>vrrp mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>vrrp mac)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface mac

configure service vprn interface vrrp mac

configure service vprn network-interface mac

configure service vprn interface mac

configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep mac

configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to a VPRN IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface on which the SAP is configured.

Parameters

ieee-mac-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface mac

All

  • configure service vprn interface mac
  • configure service vprn interface vrrp mac
  • configure service vprn network-interface mac
  • configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp mac

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep mac

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp mac)

Full Context

debug service id ppp mac

Description

This command shows PPP packets for the specified MAC address.

Parameters

ieee-address

Sets debugging for the specified MAC address.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mac-protect mac)

Full Context

configure service vpls mac-protect mac

Description

This command specifies the 48-bit IEEE 802.3 MAC address.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac [ieee-address]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if mac)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if mac)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface mac

configure service ies interface mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IES IP interface.

For Routed Central Office (CO), a group interface has no IP address explicitly configured but inherits an address from the parent subscriber interface when needed. For example, a MAC will respond to an ARP request when an ARP is requested for one of the IPs associated with the subscriber interface through the group interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on (the default MAC address assigned to the interface, assigned by the system).

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface mac

All

  • configure service ies interface mac

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mcr-default-gtw mac)

Full Context

configure service vpls mcr-default-gtw mac

Description

This command relates to a system configured for Dual Homing in L2-TPSDA. It defines the MAC address used when the system sends out a gratuitous ARP on an active SAP after a ring heals or fails in order to attract traffic from subscribers on the ring with connectivity to that SAP.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no mac

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the address in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format (cannot be all zeros).

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mac)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group mac)

[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel mac)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group mac)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3 mac)

[Tree] (config>lag mac)

[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path mac)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mac)

Full Context

configure port ethernet mac

configure port tdm e1 channel-group mac

configure eth-tunnel mac

configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mac

configure port tdm e3 mac

configure lag mac

configure port sonet-sdh path mac

configure port tdm ds3 mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ethernet port, Link Aggregation Group (LAG), Ethernet tunnel, or BCP-enabled port or sub-port.

Only one MAC address can be assigned to a port. When multiple mac commands are entered, the last command overwrites the previous command. When the command is issued while the port is operational, IP will issue an ARP, if appropriate, and BPDUs are sent with the new MAC address.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address to the default value.

By default, a MAC address is assigned by the system from the chassis MAC address pool. The use of an all-zeroes MAC address indicates that an operational MAC address should be assigned from the chassis MAC address pool.

Default

mac 00:00:00:00:00:00

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

All

  • configure port ethernet mac
  • configure lag mac

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

  • configure port tdm ds3 mac
  • configure port tdm e1 channel-group mac
  • configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mac
  • configure port tdm e3 mac

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure eth-tunnel mac
  • configure port sonet-sdh path mac

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>ethernet mac)

Full Context

configure eth-tunnel ethernet mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ethernet port, Link Aggregation Group (LAG), Ethernet tunnel, or BCP-enabled port or sub-port.

Only one MAC address can be assigned to a port. When multiple mac commands are entered, the last command overwrites the previous command. When the command is issued while the port is operational, IP will issue an ARP, if appropriate, and BPDUs are sent with the new MAC address.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address to the default value.

Default

no mac

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses 6-byte unicast mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) of the MEP. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>proxy-arp-nd>mac-list mac)

Full Context

configure service proxy-arp-nd mac-list mac

Description

This command configures the proxy ARP or ND MAC address information.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC address.

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the MAC address added to the list. The MAC list can be empty or contain up to 10 addresses.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address [create] black-holemac ieee-address [create] sap sap-id monitor {fwd-status}

mac ieee-address [create] spoke-sdp sdp-id:vc-id monitor {fwd-status}

no mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>static-mac mac)

Full Context

configure service vpls static-mac mac

Description

This command assigns a conditional static MAC address entry to an SPBM B-VPLS SAP/spoke-SDP allowing external MACs for single and multi-homed operation.

For the 7450 ESS or 7750 SR, this command also assigns a conditional static MAC address entry to an EVPN VPLS SAP/spoke-SDP.

Static MACs are used for PBB Epipe and I-VPLS services that may terminate external to SPBM. If this is configured under a Control B-VPLS the interface referenced will not use IS-IS for this neighbor. This may also be configured under a User B-VPLS where the corresponding interface is not supported under the Control B-VPLS.

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the static MAC address to an SPBM/sdp-binding interface.

Values

6-byte mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) Cannot be all zeros.

sap-id

Specifies the SAP identifier.

sdp-id

Specifies the SDP identifier.

Values

1 to 17407

vc-id

Specifies the virtual circuit identifier.

Values

1 to 4294967295

create

Mandatory keyword used to create a static MAC.

fwd-status

Specifies that this static mac is based on the forwarding status of the SAP or spoke-SDP for multi-homed operation.

black-hole

Specifies for TLS FDB entries defined on a local SAP the value 'sap', remote entries defined on an SDP have the value 'sdp'.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap mac)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ipipe SAP.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the SAP to the default value.

Default

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface where the SAP is configured.

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac mac-filter-id

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>ingress>filter mac)

[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>egress>filter mac)

Full Context

configure service template epipe-sap-template ingress filter mac

configure service template epipe-sap-template egress filter mac

Description

This command associates an existing MAC filter policy with the template.

This command is only supported in 'classic' configuration-mode (configure system management-interface configuration-mode classic).

Parameters

mac-filter-id

Specifies the MAC filter policy. The specified filter ID must already exist within the created MAC filters. The filter policy must already exist within the created MAC filters.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac

Syntax

mac name

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>ingress>filter-name mac)

[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>egress>filter-name mac)

Full Context

configure service template epipe-sap-template ingress filter-name mac

configure service template epipe-sap-template egress filter-name mac

Description

This command associates an existing IP filter policy with the template.

Parameters

name

Specifies the MAC filter policy name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address [mask six-byte-mask]

no mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>mac-list mac)

Full Context

configure service mac-list mac

Description

This command adds a protected MAC address entry.

The no form of this command removes the protected MAC address entry.

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the address in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format (cannot be all zeros), up to 30 characters.

six-byte-mask

Specifies the mask address in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format (cannot be all zeros), up to 30 characters.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>interface mac)

Full Context

configure service vpls interface mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to a VPLS IP interface.

For Routed Central Office (CO), a group interface has no IP address explicitly configured but inherits an address from the parent subscriber interface when needed. For example, a MAC will respond to an ARP request when an ARP is requested for one of the IPs associated with the subscriber interface through the group interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

mac

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Default

The system chassis MAC address.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac name

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>egress>filter-name mac)

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>ingress>filter-name mac)

Full Context

configure service template vpls-sap-template egress filter-name mac

configure service template vpls-sap-template ingress filter-name mac

Description

This command associates an existing IP filter policy with the template.

Parameters

name

Specifies the MAC filter policy name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>arp-host mac)

Full Context

debug service id arp-host mac

Description

This command displays ARP host events for a particular MAC address.

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx (cannot be all zeros)

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>igmp-snooping mac)

Full Context

debug service id igmp-snooping mac

Description

This command shows IGMP packets for the specified MAC address.

The no form of this command disables the MAC debugging.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>mld mac)

Full Context

debug service id mld-snooping mac

Description

This command shows MLD packets for the specified MAC address.

The no form of this command disables the MAC debugging.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

[no] mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>host-connectivity-verify mac)

Full Context

debug service id host-connectivity-verify mac

Description

This command displays Subscriber Host Connectivity Verification (SHCV) events for a particular MAC address.

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx (cannot be all zeros)

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac

Syntax

mac mac-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>vrrp mac)

Full Context

configure service ies interface ipv6 vrrp mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IES IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on (the default MAC address assigned to the interface, assigned by the system).

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac mac-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vrrp mac)

Full Context

configure service ies interface vrrp mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IES IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on (the default MAC address assigned to the interface, assigned by the system).

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if mac)

Full Context

configure router interface mac

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IP interface. Only one MAC address can be assigned to an IP interface. When multiple mac commands are entered, the last command overwrites the previous command.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

no mac

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the IP interface in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac mac-address

no mac

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>vrrp mac)

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>vrrp mac)

Full Context

configure router interface vrrp mac

configure router interface ipv6 vrrp mac

Description

This command sets an explicit MAC address used by the virtual router instance overriding the VRRP default derived from the VRID.

Changing the default MAC address is useful when an existing HSRP or other non-VRRP default MAC is in use by the IP hosts using the virtual router IP address. Many hosts do not monitor unessential ARPs and continue to use the cached non-VRRP MAC address after the virtual router becomes master of the host’s gateway address.

The mac command sets the MAC address used in ARP responses when the virtual router instance is master. Routing of IP packets with mac-address as the destination MAC is also enabled. The mac setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router or indeterminate connectivity by the attached IP hosts will result. All VRRP advertisement messages are transmitted with mac-address as the source MAC.

The command can be configured in both non-owner and owner vrrp nodal contexts.

The mac command can be executed at any time and takes effect immediately. When the virtual router MAC on a master virtual router instance changes, a gratuitous ARP is immediately sent with a VRRP advertisement message. If the virtual router instance is disabled or operating as backup, the gratuitous ARP and VRRP advertisement message is not sent.

The no form of the command restores the default VRRP MAC address to the virtual router instance.

Default

no mac

Parameters

mac-address

The 48-bit MAC address for the virtual router instance in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC, and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac index name mac-name

no mac index

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>client-mac-list mac)

[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>server-mac-list mac)

Full Context

configure system security ssh client-mac-list mac

configure system security ssh server-mac-list mac

Description

This command configures SSH MAC algorithms for SR OS as an SSH server or an SSH client.

The no form of this command removes the specified mac index.

Default

no mac index

Parameters

index

Specifies the index of the algorithm in the list.

Values

1 to 255

mac-name

Specifies the algorithm for calculating the message authentication code.

Values

The following table lists the default client and server algorithms used for SSHv2.

Table 1. SSHv2 Default client and server algorithms

index

mac-name

200

hmac-sha2-512

210

hmac-sha2-256

215

hmac-sha1

220

hmac-sha1-96

225

hmac-md5

240

hmac-md5-96

Platforms

All

mac

Syntax

mac mac-id [create]

no mac mac-id

Context

[Tree] (config>card>mda>xconnect mac)

[Tree] (config>card>xiom>mda>xconnect mac)

Full Context

configure card mda xconnect mac

configure card xiom mda xconnect mac

Description

This command creates a loopback in the MAC chip. It does not require the allocation of a faceplate. After the loopback is instantiated, a PXC can be configured on top of it.

For a list of MAC chip IDs per forwarding complex (datapath), use the show datapath datapath-id datapath-id command.

When considering loopback creation, the operation should consider the MAC chip’s bandwidth capacity and the bandwidth utilization of all the faceplate ports connected to it.The selection of MAC chips for loopback creation should be taken into consideration.

The no form of this command removes the MAC ID from the configuration.

Parameters

mac-id

Specifies the MAC ID.

Values

1 to 12

create

Keyword used to create the MAC ID instance. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure card mda xconnect mac

7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-2se, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

  • configure card xiom mda xconnect mac

mac-address

mac-address

Syntax

[no] mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>acct-plcy>include-radius-attribute mac-address)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>auth-policy>include-radius-attribute mac-address)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt radius-accounting-policy include-radius-attribute mac-address

configure subscriber-mgmt authentication-policy include-radius-attribute mac-address

Description

This command enables the generation of the client MAC address RADIUS attribute.

The no form of this command disables the generation of the client MAC address RADIUS attribute.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address ieee-address

no mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>ue-query mac-address)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw ue-query mac-address

Description

This command enables matching on UEs with the specified MAC address.

The no form of this command disables matching on the MAC address.

Default

no mac-address

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the ethernet MAC address.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address mac-address

no mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

Full Context

configure eth-ring path eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure eth-tunnel path eth-cfm mep mac-address

Description

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts the MAC address of the MEP back to that of the port (if the MEP is on a SAP) or the bridge (if the MEP is on a spoke SDP).

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

Values

6-byte unicast mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) of the MEP. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address mac-address

no mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>router>if>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

Full Context

configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure lag eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure router interface eth-cfm mep mac-address

Description

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts to the MAC address of the MEP back to the default, that of the port, since this is SAP based.

Default

no mac-address

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

Values

6-byte unicast mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) of the MEP. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address mac-address

no mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

Full Context

configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address

Description

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts the MAC address of the MEP back to that of the port (if the MEP is on a SAP) or the bridge (if the MEP is on a spoke).

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

Values

6-byte mac-address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MEP. Must be unicast. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address mac-address

no mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure service vpls eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep mac-address

Description

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts the MAC address of the MEP back to that of the port (if the MEP is on a SAP) or the bridge (if the MEP is on a spoke).

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the MEP

Values

6-byte mac-address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MEP. Must be unicast. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm mac-address)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mac-address

configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep mac-address

configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on.

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mac-address

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep mac-address
  • configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address

mac-address

Syntax

[no] mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>acct-include-attributes mac-address)

[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>auth-include-attributes mac-address)

Full Context

configure aaa isa-radius-policy acct-include-attributes mac-address

configure aaa isa-radius-policy auth-include-attributes mac-address

Description

This command enables the generation of the client MAC address RADIUS attribute.

Default

no mac-address

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address mac-address

no mac-address

Context

[Tree] (config>system>satellite>tdm-sat mac-address)

[Tree] (config>system>satellite>eth-sat mac-address)

Full Context

configure system satellite tdm-sat mac-address

configure system satellite eth-sat mac-address

Description

This command configures the MAC address for the associated satellite chassis. This MAC address is used to validate the identity of an satellite that attempts to associate with the local host.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC address for the associated satellite.

Parameters

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the associated satellite chassis; do not use a broadcast or multicast MAC. Enter the MAC address in either of the following formats: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

  • configure system satellite tdm-sat mac-address

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure system satellite eth-sat mac-address

mac-address

Syntax

mac-address ieee-address

no mac-address ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x>per-host-authentication>allowed-source-macs mac-address)

Full Context

configure port ethernet dot1x per-host-authentication allowed-source-macs mac-address

Description

This command configures the host MAC address on the allowed MAC list.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC address from the list.

Default

no mac

Parameters

ieee-address

Specifies the MAC address.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Platforms

All

mac-advertisement

mac-advertisement

Syntax

[no] mac-advertisement

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn mac-advertisement)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-evpn mac-advertisement

Description

This command enables the advertisement in BGP of the learned macs on SAPs and SDP bindings. When the mac-advertisement is disabled, the local macs will be withdrawn in BGP.

Default

mac-advertisement

Platforms

All

mac-criteria

mac-criteria

Syntax

[no] mac-criteria

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress mac-criteria)

Full Context

configure qos sap-ingress mac-criteria

Description

This command is used to enter the node to create or edit policy entries that specify MAC criteria.

The mac-criteria based SAP ingress policies are used to select the appropriate ingress queue and corresponding forwarding class for matched traffic.

Router implementation will exit on the first match found and execute the actions in accordance with the accompanying action command. For this reason, entries must be sequenced correctly from most to least explicit.

The no form of this command deletes all the entries specified under this node. When mac-criteria entries are removed from a SAP ingress policy, the mac-criteria is removed from all services where that policy is applied.

Platforms

All

mac-da-hashing

mac-da-hashing

Syntax

[no] mac-da-hashing

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only mac-da-hashing)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters mac-da-hashing

Description

This command specifies whether subscriber traffic egressing a LAG SAP has its egress LAG link selected by a function of the MAC destination address instead of the subscriber ID.

This command is only meaningful if subscriber management is enabled and can be configured for a VPLS service.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-da-hashing

Syntax

mac-da-hashing

no mac-da-hashing

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>sub-sla-mgmt mac-da-hashing)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap sub-sla-mgmt mac-da-hashing

Description

This command specifies whether subscriber traffic egressing a LAG SAP has its egress LAG link selected by a function of the MAC destination address instead of the subscriber ID.

The no form of this command reverts to the default setting.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-duplication

mac-duplication

Syntax

mac-duplication

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn mac-duplication)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-evpn mac-duplication

Description

Commands in this context configure the BGP EVPN MAC duplication parameters.

Platforms

All

mac-filter

mac-filter

Syntax

mac-filter mac-filter-id entry entry-id [entry-id]

no mac-filter mac-filter-id [entry entry-id]

Context

[Tree] (config>mirror>mirror-source mac-filter)

Full Context

configure mirror mirror-source mac-filter

Description

This command enables mirroring of packets that match specific entries in an existing MAC filter.

The mac-filter command directs packets which match the defined list of entry IDs to be mirrored to the mirror destination referenced by the mirror-dest-service-id of the mirror-source.

The MAC filter must already exist in order for the command to execute. Filters are configured in the config>filter context. If the MAC filter does not exist, an error will occur. If the filter exists but has not been associated with a SAP or IP interface, an error is not be generated but mirroring will not be enabled (there are no packets to mirror). Once the filter is defined to a SAP or MAC interface, mirroring is enabled.

If the MAC filter is defined as ingress, only ingress packets are mirrored. Ingress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination prior to any ingress packet modifications.

If the MAC filter is defined as egress, only egress packets are mirrored. Egress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination after all egress packet modifications.

An entry-id within a MAC filter can only be mirrored to a single mirror destination. If the same entry-id is defined multiple times, an error occurs and only the first mirror-source definition is in effect.

By default, no packets matching any MAC filters are mirrored. Mirroring of MAC filter entries must be explicitly defined.

The no form of this command, without the entry keyword, removes mirroring on all entry-id’s within the mac-filter-id.

When the no command is executed with the entry keyword and one or more entry-id’s, mirroring of that list of entry-id’s is terminated within the mac-filter-id. If an entry-id is listed that does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. If an entry-id is listed that is not currently being mirrored, no error will occur for that entry-id and the command will execute normally.

Parameters

mac-filter-id

Specifies the MAC filter ID whose entries are mirrored. If the mac-filter-id does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. Mirroring of packets will commence once the mac-filter-id is defined on a SAP.

entry-id

Specifies the MAC filter entries to use as match criteria for packet mirroring. The entry keyword begins a list of entry-id’s for mirroring. Multiple entry-id entries may be specified with a single command. Each entry-id must be separated by a space. Up to 8 entry IDs may be specified in a single command.

Each entry-id must exist within the mac-filter-id. If the entry-id is renumbered within the MAC filter definition, the old entry-id is removed from the list and the new entry-id will need to be manually added to the list if mirroring is still desired.

If no entry-id entries are specified in the command, mirroring will not occur for that MAC filter ID. The command will have no effect.

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

[no] mac-filter mac-filter-id

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-block-reservation>li-reserved-block mac-filter)

Full Context

configure li li-filter-block-reservation li-reserved-block mac-filter

Description

This command configures to which normal MAC filters the entry reservation is applied.

This command is only supported in 'classic' configuration-mode (configure system management-interface configuration-mode classic).

Parameters

mac-filter-id

Specifies the filter identification identifies the normal MAC filters.

Values

{filter-id | filter-name}

filter-id:

1 to 65535

filter-name:

up to 64 characters (filter-name is an alias for input only. The filter-name gets replaced with an id automatically by SR OS in the configuration).

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

[no] mac-filter mac-filter-id

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-assoc>li-mac-fltr mac-filter)

Full Context

configure li li-filter-associations li-mac-filter mac-filter

Description

Specifies the MAC filter(s) into which the entries from the specified li-mac-filter are to be inserted. The li-mac-filter and mac-filter must already exist before the association is made. If the normal MAC filter is deleted then the association is also removed (and not re-created if the MAC filter comes into existence in the future).

The no form of this command removes the MAC filter ID from the configuration.

Parameters

mac-filter-id

Specifies a filter identification to identify the MAC filter.

Values

1 to 65536, name: up to 64 characters

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

mac-filter mac-filter-id entry entry-id [entry-id] [ intercept-id intercept-id [intercept-id]] [session-id [session-id] [[session-id]]]

no mac-filter mac-filter-id

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-source mac-filter)

Full Context

configure li li-source mac-filter

Description

This command enables lawful interception (LI) of packets that match specific entries in an existing MAC filter. Multiple entries can be created using unique entry-id numbers within the filter. The router implementation exits the filter on the first match found and executes the actions in accordance with the accompanying action command. For this reason, entries must be sequenced correctly from most to least explicit.

An entry may not have any match criteria defined (in which case, everything matches) but must have at least the keyword action for it to be considered complete. Entries without the action keyword will be considered incomplete and hence will be rendered inactive.

An entry-id within an MAC filter can only be intercepted to a single destination. If the same entry-id is defined multiple times, an error occurs and only the first definition is in effect.

The no form of this command removes the specified entry from the IP or MAC filter. Entries removed from the IP or MAC filter are immediately removed from all services or network ports where that filter is applied.

Parameters

mac-filter-id

Specifies the MAC filter ID. If the mac-filter-id does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute.

entry-id

The MAC filter entries to use as match criteria.

intercept-id

Specifies the intercept-id that is inserted into the packet header for all mirrored packets of the associated li-source entry. This intercept-id can be used (for example by a downstream LI gateway) to identify the particular LI session to which the packet belongs. For all types of li-source entries (filter, nat, sap, subscriber), when the mirror service is configured with ip-udp-shim routable encap, an intercept-id field (as part of the routable encap) is always present in the mirrored packets. If there is no intercept-id configured for an li-source entry, then the default value will be inserted. When the mirror service is configured with ip-gre routable encap, no intercept-id is inserted and none should be specified against the li-source entries.

Values

1 to 4294967295 (32b) — For nat li-source entries that are using a mirror service that is not configured with routable encapsulation

Values

1 to 1,073,741,824 (30b) — For all types of li-source entries that are using a mirror service with routable ip-udp-shim encapsulation and no direction-bit.

Values

1 to 536,870,912 (29b) — For all types of li-source entries that are using a mirror service with routable ip-udp-shim encapsulation and with the direction-bit enabled.

session-id

Specifies the session-id that is inserted into the packet header for all mirrored packets of the associated li-source entry. This session-id can be used (for example by a downstream LI gateway) to identify the particular LI session to which the packet belongs. The session-id is only valid and used for mirror services that are configured with ip-udp-shim routable encap (config>mirror>mirror-dest>encap>ip-udp-shim). For all types of li-source entries (filter, nat, sap, or subscriber), when the mirror service is configured with ip-udp-shim routable encap, a session-id field (as part of the routable encap) is always present in the mirrored packets. If there is no session-id configured for an li-source entry, then the default value will be inserted. When a mirror service is configured with ip-gre routable encap, no session-id is inserted and none should be specified against the li-source entries.

Values

1 to 4,294,967,295 (32b)

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

mac-filter mac-filter-id entry entry-id [entry-id]

no mac-filter mac-filter-id [entry entry-id]

Context

[Tree] (debug>mirror-source mac-filter)

Full Context

debug mirror-source mac-filter

Description

This command enables mirroring of packets that match specific entries in an existing MAC filter.

The mac-filter command directs packets which match the defined list of entry IDs to be mirrored to the mirror destination referenced by the mirror-dest-service-id of the mirror-source.

The MAC filter must already exist in order for the command to execute. Filters are configured in the config>filter context. If the MAC filter does not exist, an error will occur. If the filter exists but has not been associated with a SAP or IP interface, an error is not be generated but mirroring will not be enabled (there are no packets to mirror). Once the filter is defined to a SAP or MAC interface, mirroring is enabled.

If the MAC filter is defined as ingress, only ingress packets are mirrored. Ingress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination prior to any ingress packet modifications.

If the MAC filter is defined as egress, only egress packets are mirrored. Egress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination after all egress packet modifications.

An entry-id within a MAC filter can only be mirrored to a single mirror destination. If the same entry-id is defined multiple times, an error occurs and only the first mirror-source definition is in effect.

By default, no packets matching any MAC filters are mirrored. Mirroring of MAC filter entries must be explicitly defined.

The no form of this command command, without the entry keyword, removes mirroring on all entry-id’s within the mac-filter-id.

When the no command is executed with the entry keyword and one or more entry-id’s, mirroring of that list of entry-id’s is terminated within the mac-filter-id. If an entry-id is listed that does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. If an entry-id is listed that is not currently being mirrored, no error will occur for that entry-id and the command will execute normally.

Parameters

mac-filter-id

Specifies the MAC filter ID whose entries are mirrored. If the mac-filter-id does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. Mirroring of packets will commence once the mac-filter-id is defined on a SAP.

entry-id

Specifies the MAC filter entries to use as match criteria for packet mirroring. The entry keyword begins a list of entry-id’s for mirroring. Multiple entry-id entries may be specified with a single command. Each entry-id must be separated by a space. Up to 8 entry IDs may be specified in a single command.

Each entry-id must exist within the mac-filter-id. If the entry-id is renumbered within the MAC filter definition, the old entry-id is removed from the list and the new entry-id will need to be manually added to the list if mirroring is still desired.

If no entry-id entries are specified in the command, mirroring will not occur for that MAC filter ID. The command will have no effect.

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

mac-filter filter-id [create] [ name name]

mac-filter {filter-id | filter-name}

no mac-filter {filter-id | filter-name}

Context

[Tree] (config>filter mac-filter)

Full Context

configure filter mac-filter

Description

This command creates a configuration context for the specified MAC filter policy.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC filter policy. A filter policy cannot be deleted until it is removed from all objects where it is applied.

Parameters

filter-id

Specifies the MAC filter policy ID expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 65535

create

Keyword required to create the configuration context. After it is created, the context can be enabled with or without the create keyword.

name

Sets an optional filter name, up to 64 characters in length, to a given filter. This filter name can then be used in configuration references, display, and show commands throughout the system. A defined filter name can help the service provider or administrator to identify and manage filters within the SR OS platforms.

To create a filter, you must assign a filter ID, however, after it is created, either the filter ID or filter name can be used to identify and reference a filter.

If a name is not specified at creation time, then SR OS assigns a string version of the filter-id as the name.

Filter names may not begin with an integer (0 to 9).

Values

name: 64 characters maximum

filter-name

Specifies a string of up to 64 characters uniquely identifying this MAC filter policy.

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

[no] mac-filter

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter mac-filter)

Full Context

configure system security management-access-filter mac-filter

Description

This command configures a management access MAC-filter.

Platforms

All

mac-filter

Syntax

[no] mac-filter

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>cpm-filter mac-filter)

Full Context

configure system security cpm-filter mac-filter

Description

Commands in this context configure CPM MAC-filter parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mac-filter

Syntax

ip-filter src-filter-id [src-entry src-entry-id] to dst-filter-id [dst-entry dst-entry-id] [overwrite]

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>copy mac-filter)

Full Context

configure filter copy mac-filter

Description

This command copies an existing filter entry for a specific filter ID to another filter ID. The copy command is a configuration level maintenance tool used to create new entries using an existing filter policy. If overwrite is not specified, an error will occur if the destination filter entry exists.

Parameters

src-filter-id

Specifies the source filter policy from which the copy command will attempt to copy. The filter policy must exist within the context of the preceding keyword (mac-filter).

dst-filter-id

Specifies the destination filter policy to which the copy command will attempt to copy. If the overwrite keyword is not specified, the filter entry ID cannot already exist in the destination filter policy. If the overwrite keyword is present, the destination entry ID may or may not exist.

overwrite

Specifies that the destination filter entry may exist. If it does, everything in the existing destination filter entry will be completely overwritten with the contents of the source filter entry. If the destination filter entry exists, either overwrite must be specified or an error message will be returned. If overwrite is specified, the function of copying from source to destination occurs in a "break before make” manner and therefore should be handled with care.

Platforms

All

mac-filter-name

mac-filter-name

Syntax

[no] mac-filter-name filter-name

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-block-reservation>li-reserved-block mac-filter-name)

Full Context

configure li li-filter-block-reservation li-reserved-block mac-filter-name

Description

This command configures a MAC filter in which the reservation is done through name.

The no form of this command removes the MAC filter name.

Parameters

filter-name

Specifies the MAC filter name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

All

mac-filter-name

Syntax

[no] mac-filter-name filter-name

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-assoc>li-mac-fltr mac-filter-name)

Full Context

configure li li-filter-associations li-mac-filter mac-filter-name

Description

This command associates a MAC filter with a specified LI MAC filter through its name.

The no form of this command removes the MAC filter name.

Parameters

filter-name

Specifies the MAC filter name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

All

mac-format

mac-format

Syntax

mac-format format

no mac-format

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>match-radprox-cache mac-format)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host match-radius-proxy-cache mac-format

Description

This command specifies the format of MAC address used for matching incoming DHCP DISCOVER against the RADIUS proxy cache.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mac-format "aa:"

Parameters

format

Specifies the format string that specifies the format of MAC address.

Values

mac-format: (only when match is equal to mac)

like ab: for 00:0c:f1:99:85:b8

or XY- for 00-0C-F1-99-85-B8

or mmmm. for 0002.03aa.abff

or xx for 000cf19985b8

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-format

Syntax

mac-format mac-format

no mac-format

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gy mac-format)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>nasreq mac-format)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gx mac-format)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gy mac-format

configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy nasreq mac-format

configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gx mac-format

Description

This command configures the format of the MAC address when reported in Gx, Gy, or NASREQ application message AVPs such as Calling-Station-Id or User-Name.

The no form of this command resets the command to the default setting.

Default

mac-format ab

Parameters

mac-format

Specifies the MAC address format.

Values

like ab: for 00:0c:f1:99:85:b8

or XY- for 00-0C-F1-99-85-B8

or mmmm. for 0002.03aa.abff

or xx for 000cf19985b8

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-format

Syntax

mac-format mac-format

no mac-format

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>track-mobility mac-format)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>track-mobility mac-format)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range track-mobility mac-format

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range track-mobility mac-format

Description

This command configures how the MAC address is represented by the RADIUS proxy server.

Default

no mac-format "aa:"

Parameters

mac-format

Specifies how the MAC address is represented by the RADIUS proxy server.

Values

mac-format

like ab: for 00:0c:f1:99:85:b8

or XY- for 00-0C-F1-99-85-B8

or mmmm. for 0002.03aa.abff

or xx for 000cf19985b8

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-learning-options

mac-learning-options

Syntax

[no] mac-learning-options

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options

Description

This command configures additional methods by which the BNG learns the subscriber host MAC.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-linking

mac-linking

Syntax

mac-linking ip-address

no mac-linking

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host mac-linking)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host mac-linking)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host mac-linking

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host mac-linking

Description

This command associates this IPv6 host to the specified IPv4 host through the learned MAC address. A learned MAC from the IPv6 host is associated with the IPv4 host and vice versa.

The no form of this command removes the IP address from the configuration.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-list

mac-list

Syntax

mac-list name [create]

no mac-list name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>proxy-arp-nd mac-list)

Full Context

configure service proxy-arp-nd mac-list

Description

This command creates a list of MAC addresses that can be pointed at from the service for a specified IP. The list may contain up to 10 MAC addresses; an empty list is also allowed.

The MAC list allows on-the-fly changes, but a change in the list deletes the proxy entries for all the IPs using that list.

The no form of the command deletes the entire MAC-list. Deleting a MAC list is only possible if it is not referenced in the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the MAC address list, which can be up to 32 characters.

create

Mandatory keyword to create a MAC list.

Platforms

All

mac-list

Syntax

mac-list name

no mac-list

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>proxy-arp>dynamic mac-list)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>proxy-nd>dynamic mac-list)

Full Context

configure service vpls proxy-arp dynamic mac-list

configure service vpls proxy-nd dynamic mac-list

Description

This command associates a previously created MAC list to a dynamic IP. The MAC list is created using the configure service proxy-arp-nd mac-list command.

The no form of the command deletes the association of the MAC list and the dynamic IP.

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the MAC list previously created using the configure service proxy-arp-nd mac-list command.

Platforms

All

mac-list

Syntax

mac-list name [create]

no mac-list name

Context

[Tree] (config>service mac-list)

Full Context

configure service mac-list

Description

This command configures a MAC list name. The MAC list is composed of a list of MAC addresses and masks, which along with Auto-Learn Mac Protect (ALMP) can be used to exclude certain MACs from being protected in a given object. This is typically used on SAPs and spoke SDPs configured with ALMP where certain MACs must be able to move to other objects (for example, VRRP virtual MACs).

The no form of this command removes the MAC list name.

Parameters

name

Specifies the MAC list name, up to 32 characters.

create

Keyword used to create the MAC list.

Platforms

All

mac-move

mac-move

Syntax

[no] mac-move

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-move)

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template mac-move)

Full Context

configure service vpls mac-move

configure service template vpls-template mac-move

Description

Commands in this context configure MAC move attributes. A sustained high re-learn rate can be a sign of a loop somewhere in the VPLS topology. Typically, STP detects loops in the topology, but for those networks that do not run STP, the mac-move feature is an alternative way to protect your network against loops.

When enabled in a VPLS, mac-move monitors the re-learn rate of each MAC. If the rate exceeds the configured maximum allowed limit, it disables the SAP where the source MAC was last seen. The SAP can be disabled permanently (until a shutdown/no shutdown command is executed) or for a length of time that grows linearly with the number of times the specified SAP was disabled. You have the option of marking a SAP as non-blockable in the config>service>vpls>sap>limit-mac-move or config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>limit-mac-move contexts. This means that when the re-learn rate has exceeded the limit, another (blockable) SAP will be disabled instead.

The mac-move command enables the feature at the service level for SAPs and spoke-SDPs, as only those objects can be blocked by this feature. Mesh SDPs are never blocked, but their re-learn rates (sap-to-mesh/spoke-to-mesh or vice versa) are still measured.

The operation of this feature is the same on the SAP and spoke-SDP. For example, if a MAC address moves from SAP to SAP, from SAP to spoke-SDP, or between spoke-SDPs, one will be blocked to prevent thrashing. If the MAC address moves between a SAP and mesh SDP or spoke-SDP and mesh SDP combinations, the respective SAP or spoke-SDP will be blocked.

mac-move will disable a VPLS port when the number of relearns detected has reached the number of relearns needed to reach the move-frequency in the 5-second interval. For example, when the move-frequency is configured to 1 (relearn per second) mac-move will disable one of the VPLS ports when 5 relearns were detected during the 5-second interval because then the average move-frequency of 1 relearn per second has been reached. This can already occur in the first second if the real relearn rate is 5 relearns per second or higher.

The no form of this command disables MAC move.

Platforms

All

mac-move-level

mac-move-level

Syntax

mac-move-level {primary | secondary| tertiary}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template mac-move-level)

Full Context

configure service template vpls-sap-template mac-move-level

Description

When a SAP is instantiated using vpls-sap-template, if the MAC move feature is enabled at VPLS level, the command mac-move-level indicates whether the sap should be populated as primary-port, secondary-port, or tertiary-port in the instantiated VPLS.

If configured to the default, SAP is populated as a tertiary-port.

Default

no mac-move-level

Platforms

All

mac-name

mac-name

Syntax

mac-name name ieee-address

no mac-name name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>pbb mac-name)

Full Context

configure service pbb mac-name

Description

This command configures the MAC name for the MAC address. It associates an ASCII name with an IEEE MAC to improve the PBB Epipe configuration. It can also change the dest-BMAC in one place instead of 1000s of Epipe.

Parameters

name

Specifies the MAC name up to 32 characters in length.

ieee-address

Specifies the MAC address assigned to the MAC name. The value should be input in either a xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format.

Platforms

All

mac-notification

mac-notification

Syntax

mac-notification

Context

[Tree] (config>service mac-notification)

Full Context

configure service mac-notification

Description

This command controls the settings for the MAC notification message.

The MAC notification message must be generated under the following events:

  1. When enabled in the BVPLS using no shutdown, a MAC notification will be sent for every active MC-LAG link. The following 3 cases assume no shutdown in the BVPLS.

  2. Whenever a related MC-LAG link becomes active (the related MC-LAG link has at least 1 SAP associated with the BVPLS) if the MC-LAG peering is initialized and the PE peers are synchronized.

  3. First SAP on an active MC-LAG is associated (via IVPLS/Epipe) with the BVPLS.

  4. The link between IVPLS/Epipe and BVPLS is configured and there are I-SAPs configured on an active MC-LAG link.

The MAC notification is not sent for the following events:

  1. Change of source-bmac or source-bmac-lsb

  2. On changes of use-sap-bmac parameter

  3. If MC-LAG peering is not (initialized and in sync).

Platforms

All

mac-notification

Syntax

mac-notification

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-notification)

Full Context

configure service vpls mac-notification

Description

This command controls the settings for the MAC notification message.

The MAC notification message must be generated under the following events:

  1. When enabled in the BVPLS using no shutdown, a MAC notification will be sent for every active MC-LAG link. The following three cases assume no shutdown in the BVPLS.

  2. Whenever a related MC-LAG link becomes active (the related MC-LAG link has at least 1 SAP associated with the BVPLS) if the MC-LAG peering is initialized and the PE peers are synchronized.

  3. First SAP on an active MC-LAG is associated (via IVPLS/Epipe) with the BVPLS

  4. The link between IVPLS/Epipe and BVPLS is configured and there are I-SAPs configured on an active MC-LAG link.

The MAC notification is not sent for the following events:

  1. Change of source-bmac or source-bmac-lsb

  2. On changes of use-sap-bmac parameter

  3. If MC-LAG peering is not (initialized and in sync).

Platforms

All

mac-ping

mac-ping

Syntax

mac-ping service service-id destination dst-ieee-address [source src-ieee-address] [fc fc-name [profile {in | out}]] [size octets] [ttl vc-label-ttl] [count send-count] [return-control] [interval interval] [timeout timeout]

Context

[Tree] (config>saa>test>type mac-ping)

[Tree] (oam mac-ping)

Full Context

configure saa test type mac-ping

oam mac-ping

Description

This command determines the existence of an egress SAP binding of a given MAC within a VPLS service.

A mac-ping packet is sent via the data plane.

A mac-ping is forwarded along the flooding domain if no MAC address bindings exist. If MAC address bindings exist, then the packet is forwarded along those paths, provided they are active. A response is generated only when there is an egress SAP binding for that MAC address or if the MAC address is a "local” OAM MAC address associated with the device’s control plan.

A mac-ping reply can be sent using the data plane or the control plane. The return-control option specifies the reply be sent using the control plane. If return-control is not specified, the request is sent using the data plane.

A mac-ping with data plane reply can only be initiated on nodes that can have an egress MAC address binding. A node without a FDB and without any SAPs cannot have an egress MAC address binding, so it is not a node where replies in the data plane are trapped and sent up to the control plane.

A control plane request is responded to via a control plane reply only.

By default, MAC OAM requests are sent with the system or chassis MAC address as the source MAC. The source option allows overriding of the default source MAC for the request with a specific MAC address.

When a source ieee-address value is specified and the source MAC address is locally registered within a split horizon group (SHG), then this SHG membership is used as if the packet originated from this SHG. In all other cases, SHG 0 (zero) is used. If the mac-trace is originated from a non-zero SHG, such packets do not go out to the same SHG.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.

Values

1 to 2147483647

service-name: up to 64 characters

dst-ieee-address

Specifies the destination MAC address for the OAM MAC request.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

src-ieee-address

Specifies the source MAC address from which the OAM MAC request originates. By default, the system MAC address for the chassis is used.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

Default

The system MAC address.

fc-name

Specifies that the fc parameter be used to test the forwarding class of the MPLS echo request packets. The actual forwarding class encoding is controlled by the network egress LSP-EXP mappings.

Values

be, l2, af, l1, h2, ef, h1, nc

Default

be

profile {in | out}

Specifies the profile state of the MPLS echo request encapsulation.

Default

out

octets

Specifies the MAC OAM request packet size in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded to the specified size with a 6 byte PAD header and a byte payload of 0xAA as necessary. If the octet size specified is less than the minimum packet, the minimum sized packet necessary to send the request is used.

Values

1 to 9198

vc-label-ttl

Specifies the TTL value in the VC label for the OAM MAC request, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Default

255

send-count

Specifies the number of messages to send, expressed as a decimal integer. The count parameter is used to override the default number of message requests sent. Each message request must either time out or receive a reply before the next message request is sent. The message interval value must be expired before the next message request is sent.

Values

1 to 100

Default

1

return-control

Specifies the MAC OAM reply to a data plane MAC OAM request be sent using the control plane instead of the data plane.

interval

Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.

If the interval is set to 1 second where the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.

Values

1 to 10

Default

1

timeout

Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the message request. Upon the expiration of message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.

Values

1 to 10

Default

5

Platforms

All

mac-pinning

mac-pinning

Syntax

[no] mac-pinning

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp mac-pinning)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap mac-pinning)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint mac-pinning)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp mac-pinning)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp mac-pinning

configure service vpls sap mac-pinning

configure service vpls endpoint mac-pinning

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mac-pinning

Description

This command disables re-learning of MAC addresses on other SAPs within the VPLS. The MAC address will remain attached to a given SAP for duration of its age-timer.

The age of the MAC address entry in the FDB is set by the age timer. If mac-aging is disabled on a given VPLS service, any MAC address learned on a SAP or SDP with mac-pinning enabled will remain in the FDB on this SAP or SDP forever.

Every event that would otherwise result in re-learning is logged (MAC address; original-SAP; new-SAP).

When a SAP or spoke SDP is part of a Residential Split Horizon Group (RSHG), MAC pinning is activated at creation of the SAP. Otherwise MAC pinning is not enabled by default.

The no form of the command enables re-learning of MAC addresses.

Note:

MAC addresses learned during DHCP address assignment (DHCP snooping enabled) are not impacted by this command. MAC-pinning for such addresses is implicit.

Default

no mac-pinning

Platforms

All

mac-pinning

Syntax

[no] mac-pinning

Context

[Tree] (config>service>pw-template mac-pinning)

Full Context

configure service pw-template mac-pinning

Description

Enabling this command will disable re-learning of MAC addresses on other SAPs within the service. The MAC address will remain attached to a given SAP for duration of its age-timer.

The age of the MAC address entry in the FDB is set by the age timer. If mac-aging is disabled on a given VPLS service, any MAC address learned on a SAP or SDP with mac-pinning enabled will remain in the FDB on this SAP or SDP forever. Every event that would otherwise result in re-learning will be logged (MAC address; original-SAP; new-SAP).

When a SAP or spoke SDP is part of a Residential Split Horizon Group (RSHG), MAC pinning is activated at creation of the SAP. Otherwise MAC pinning is not enabled by default.

Note:

For 7750 SR and 7450 ESS, MAC addresses learned during DHCP address assignment (DHCP snooping enabled) are not impacted by this command. MAC-pinning for such addresses is implicit.

Default

no mac-pinning

Platforms

All

mac-policy

mac-policy

Syntax

mac-policy mac-policy-id [create]

no mac-policy mac-policy-id

Context

[Tree] (config>macsec mac-policy)

Full Context

configure macsec mac-policy

Description

This command configures MAC address policy groups.

The no form of this command removes the MAC address policy group configuration.

Parameters

mac-policy-id

Specifies the value of the MAC address policy.

Values

0 to 4294967295

create

Mandatory keyword used to create the configuration.

Platforms

All

mac-populate

mac-populate

Syntax

mac-populate {service-id | service service-name} mac ieee-address [flood] [ age seconds] [force] [ target-sap sap-id]

Context

[Tree] (oam mac-populate)

Full Context

oam mac-populate

Description

This command populates the FDB with an OAM-type MAC entry indicating the node is the egress node for the MAC address and optionally floods the OAM MAC association throughout the service. The mac-populate command installs an OAM MAC into the service FDB indicating the device is the egress node for a MAC address. The MAC address can be bound to a SAP (the target-sap) or can be associated with the control plane in that any data destined to the MAC address is forwarded to the control plane (CPM). As a result, if the service on the node has neither a FDB nor an egress SAP, then it is not allowed to initiate a mac-populate.

The MAC address that is populated in the FDBs in the provider network is given a type OAM, so that it can be treated distinctly from regular dynamically learned or statically configured MACs. Note that OAM MAC addresses are operational MAC addresses and are not saved in the device configuration. An exec file can be used to define OAM MACs after system initialization.

The force option in mac-populate forces the MAC in the table to be type OAM in the case it already exists as a dynamic, static or an OAM induced learned MAC with some other type binding.

An OAM-type MAC cannot be overwritten by dynamic learning and allows customer packets with the MAC to either ingress or egress the network while still using the OAM MAC entry.

The flood option causes each upstream node to learn the MAC (that is, populate the local FDB with an OAM MAC entry) and to flood the request along the data plane using the flooding domain. The flooded mac-populate request is sent via the data plane.

An age can be provided to age an OAM MAC using a specific interval. By default, OAM MAC addresses are not aged and can be removed with a mac-purge or with an FDB clear operation.

When split horizon group (SHG) is configured, the flooding domain depends on which SHG the packet originates from. The target-sap sap-id value dictates the originating SHG information.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.

Values

1 to 2147483647

service-name

Specifies the name of the service to diagnose or manage. 64 characters maximum.

ieee-address

Specifies the MAC address to be populated.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

flood

Sends the OAM MAC populate to all upstream nodes.

seconds

Specifies the age for the OAM MAC, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 65535

Default

3600

force

Converts the MAC to an OAM MAC.

sap-id

Specifies the local target SAP bound to a service on which to associate the OAM MAC. By default, the OAM MAC is associated with the control place, that is, it is associated with the CPU on the router.

When the target-sap sap-id value is not specified the MAC is bound to the CPM or CFM. The originating SHG is 0 (zero). When the target-sap sap-id value is specified, the originating SHG is the SHG of the target-sap.

Values

null

port-id | bundle-id | bpgrp-id | lag-id | aps-id

dot1q

port-id | bundle-id | bpgrp-id | lag-id | aps-id | pw-id:[qtag1| cp-conn-prof-id]

qinq

port-id | bundle-id | bpgrp-id | lag-id | pw-id:[qtag1 cp-conn-prof-id].[qtag2 | cp-conn-prof-id]

cp

keyword

conn-prof-id

1 to 8000

cem

slot/mda/port.channel

ima-grp

bundle-id [:vpi/vci | vpi | vpi1.vpi2 | cp.conn-prof-id]

cp

keyword

conn-prof-id

1 to 8000

port-id

slot/mda/port[.channel]

esat-id/slot/port

pxc-id.sub-port

aps-id

aps-group-id[.channel]

aps

keyword

group-id

1 to 128

ccag-id

ccag-id.path-id[cc-type]:cc-id

ccag

keyword

id

1 to 8

path-id

a | b

cc-type

.sap-net | .net-sap

cc-id

1 to 4094

eth-tunnel

eth-tunnel-id[:eth-tun-sap-id]

id

1 to 1024

eth-tun-sap-id

0 to 4094

lag-id

lag-id

lag

keyword

id

1 to 800

pw-id

pw-id

pw

keyword

id

1 to 10239

qtag1

* | 0 to 4094

qtag2

* | null | 0 to 4094

tunnel-id

tunnel-id.private | public:tag

tunnel

keyword

id

1 to 16

tag

0 to 4094

Platforms

All

mac-prefix

mac-prefix

Syntax

mac-prefix mac-prefix

no mac-prefix

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-svc-chain mac-prefix)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt isa-service-chaining mac-prefix

Description

This command configures the unique MAC prefix per ISA and per outside service for all NAT group configured for service-chaining.

The no form of this command removes the MAC prefix from the configuration.

Parameters

mac-prefix

Specifies the MAC prefix, up to eight characters, including separators.

Values

format AA:BB:CC

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mac-protect

mac-protect

Syntax

[no] mac-protect

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-protect)

Full Context

configure service vpls mac-protect

Description

This command indicates if this MAC is protected on the MAC protect list. When enabled, the agent will protect the MAC from being learned or re-learned on a SAP, spoke SDP or mesh SDP that has restricted learning enabled. The MAC protect list is used in conjunction with restrict-protected-src, restrict-unprotected-dst and auto-learn-mac-protect.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Platforms

All

mac-purge

mac-purge

Syntax

mac-purge {service-id | service service-name} target ieee-address [flood] [force] [register]

Context

[Tree] (oam mac-purge)

Full Context

oam mac-purge

Description

This command removes an OAM-type MAC entry from the FDB and optionally floods the OAM MAC removal throughout the service. A mac-purge can be sent via the forwarding path or via the control plane.

When sending the MAC purge using the data plane, the TTL in the VC label is set to 1.

A MAC address is purged only if it is marked as OAM. A mac-purge request is an HVPLS OAM packet, with the following fields. The Reply Flags is set to 0 (since no reply is expected), the Reply Mode and Reserved fields are set to 0. The Ethernet header has source set to the (system) MAC address, the destination set to the broadcast MAC address. There is a VPN TLV in the FEC Stack TLV to identify the service domain.

If the register option is provided, the R bit in the Address Delete flags is turned on.

The flood option causes each upstream node to be sent the OAM MAC delete request and to flood the request along the data plane using the flooding domain. The flooded mac-purge request is sent via the data plane.

The register option reserves the MAC for OAM testing where it is no longer an active MAC in the FDB for forwarding, but it is retained in the FDB as a registered OAM MAC. Registering an OAM MAC prevents relearns for the MAC based on customer packets. Relearning a registered MAC can only be done through a mac-populate request. The originating SHG is always 0 (zero).

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.

Values

1 to 2147483647

service-name

Specifies the name, up to 64 characters, of the service to diagnose or manage.

ieee-address

Specifies the MAC address to be purged.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

flood

Sends the OAM MAC purge to all upstream nodes.

force

Purges the entry regardless of the entry’s originating node.

register

Reserves the MAC for OAM testing.

Platforms

All

mac-refresh

mac-refresh

Syntax

mac-refresh refresh interval

no mac-refresh

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap mac-refresh)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap mac-refresh

Description

This command specifies the interval between ARP requests sent on this Ipipe SAP. When the SAP is first enabled, an ARP request will be sent to the attached CE device and the received MAC address will be used in addressing unicast traffic to the CE. Although this MAC address will not expire while the Ipipe SAP is enabled and operational, it is verified by sending periodic ARP requests at the specified interval.

The no form of this command restores mac-refresh to the default value.

Default

mac-refresh 14400

Parameters

refresh interval

Specifies the interval, in seconds, between ARP requests sent on this Ipipe SAP.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

All

mac-subnet-length

mac-subnet-length

Syntax

mac-subnet-length subnet-length

no mac-subnet-length

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-subnet-length)

Full Context

configure service vpls mac-subnet-length

Description

This command specifies the number of bits to be considered when performing MAC learning (MAC source) and MAC switching (MAC destination). Specifically, this value identifies how many bits, starting from the beginning of the MAC address are used. For example, if the mask-value of 28 is used, MAC learning only performs a lookup for the first 28 bits of the source MAC address when comparing with existing FDB entries. Then, it installs the first 28 bits in the FDB while zeroing out the last 20 bits of the MAC address. When performing switching in the reverse direction, only the first 28 bits of the destination MAC address are used to perform a FDB lookup to determine the next hop.

The no form of this command switches back to full MAC lookup.

Default

mac-subnet-length 48

Parameters

subnet-length

Specifies the number of bits to be considered when performing MAC learning or MAC switching.

Values

24 to 48

Platforms

All

mac-trace

mac-trace

Syntax

mac-trace service service-id destination ieee-address [source ieee-address] [fc fc-name [profile {in | out}]] [size octets] [min-ttl vc-label-ttl] [max-ttl vc-label-ttl] [probe-count send-count] [return-control] [interval interval] [timeout timeout]

Context

[Tree] (oam mac-trace)

[Tree] (config>saa>test>type mac-trace)

Full Context

oam mac-trace

configure saa test type mac-trace

Description

This command displays the hop-by-hop path for a destination MAC address within a VPLS.

The MAC traceroute operation is modeled after the IP traceroute utility which uses ICMP echo request and reply packets with increasing TTL values to determine the hop-by-hop route to a destination IP. The MAC traceroute command uses Nokia OAM packets with increasing TTL values to determine the hop-by-hop route to a destination MAC.

In a MAC traceroute, the originating device creates a MAC ping echo request packet for the MAC to be tested with increasing values of the TTL. The echo request packet is sent via the data plane and awaits a TTL exceeded response or the echo reply packet from the device with the destination MAC. The devices that reply to the echo request packets with the TTL exceeded and the echo reply are displayed.

When a source ieee-address value is specified and the source MAC address is locally registered within a split horizon group (SHG), then this SHG membership is used as if the packet originated from this SHG. In all other cases, SHG 0 (zero) is used. Note that if the mac-ping is originated from a non-zero SHG, such packets do not go out to the same SHG.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.

This variant of the command is only supported in the classic configuration-mode (configure system management-interface configuration-mode classic).

Values

{id | svc-name}

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

up to 64 characters

destination ieee-address

Specifies the destination MAC address to be traced.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

source ieee-address

The source MAC address from which the OAM MAC request originates. By default, the system MAC address for the chassis is used.

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

Default

The system MAC address

fc-name

Specifies the forwarding class to test the forwarding class of the ICMP echo request packets. The actual forwarding class encoding is controlled by the network egress LSP-EXP mappings.

Values

be, l2, af, l1, h2, ef, h1, nc

Default

be

profile {in | out}

Specifies the profile state of the ICMP echo request encapsulation.

Default

out

octets

Specifies the MAC OAM request packet size in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded to the specified size with a 6 byte PAD header and a byte payload of 0xAA as necessary. If the octet size specified is less than the minimum packet, the minimum sized packet necessary to send the request is used.

Values

1 to 9198

min-ttl vc-label-ttl

Specifies the minimum TTL value in the VC label for the MAC trace test, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Default

1

max-ttl vc-label-ttl

Specifies the maximum TTL value in the VC label for the MAC trace test, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Default

4

send-count

Specifies the number of MAC OAM requests sent for a TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 100

Default

1

return-control

Specifies the MAC OAM reply to a data plane MAC OAM request be sent using the control plane instead of the data plane.

interval

Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.

If the interval is set to 1 second, and the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.

Values

1 to 10

Default

1

timeout

Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the message request. Upon the expiration of message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.

Values

1 to 60

Default

5

Platforms

All

mac-translation

mac-translation

Syntax

[no] mac-translation

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext mac-translation)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext mac-translation)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext mac-translation

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext mac-translation

Description

This command enables MAC address translation for HLE services.

The no form of this command disables MAC address translation for HLE services.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

macsec

macsec

Syntax

macsec

Context

[Tree] (config macsec)

Full Context

configure macsec

Description

Commands in this context configure MACsec, including the MACsec MKA profile.

Platforms

All

macsec

Syntax

[no] macsec

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x macsec)

Full Context

configure port ethernet dot1x macsec

Description

This command configures MACsec under this port.

Platforms

All

macsec-encrypt

macsec-encrypt

Syntax

[no] macsec-encrypt

Context

[Tree] (config>macsec>connectivity-association macsec-encrypt)

Full Context

configure macsec connectivity-association macsec-encrypt

Description

This command specifies that all PDUs are encrypted and authenticated (ICV payload).

The no form of this command specifies that all PDUs are transmitted with cleartext, but still authenticated and have the trailing ICV.

Default

macsec-encrypt

Platforms

All

main-ct-retry-limit

main-ct-retry-limit

Syntax

main-ct-retry-limit number

no main-ct-retry-limit

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp main-ct-retry-limit)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template main-ct-retry-limit)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp main-ct-retry-limit

configure router mpls lsp-template main-ct-retry-limit

Description

This command configures the maximum number of retries the LSP primary path should be retried with the LSP Diff-Serv main Class Type (CT).

When an unmapped LSP primary path goes into retry, it uses the main CT until the number of retries reaches the value of the new main-ct-retry-limit parameter. If the path did not come up, it must start using the backup CT at that point in time. By default, this parameter is set to infinite value. The new main-ct-retry-limit parameter has no effect on an LSP primary path which retries due to a failure event.

An unmapped LSP primary path is a path which has never received a Resv in response to the first Path message sent. This can occur when performing a "shut/no-shut” on the LSP or LSP primary path or when the node reboots. An unmapped LSP primary path goes into retry if the retry timer expired or the head-end node received a PathErr message before the retry timer expired.

If the user entered a value of the main-ct-retry-limit parameter that is greater than the value of the LSP retry-limit, the number of retries will still stop when the LSP primary path reaches the value of the LSP retry-limit. In other words, the meaning of the LSP retry-limit parameter is not changed and always represents the upper bound on the number of retries. The unmapped LSP primary path behavior applies to both CSPF and non-CSPF LSPs.

The no form of this command sets the parameter to the default value of zero (0) which means the LSP primary path will retry forever.

Default

no main-ct-retry-limit

Parameters

number

Specifies the number of times MPLS will attempt to re-establish the LSP primary path using the Diff-Serv main CT. Allowed values are integers in the range of zero (0) to 10,000, where zero indicates to retry infinitely.

Values

0 to 1000, integer

Platforms

All

maintenance-policy

maintenance-policy

Syntax

[no] maintenance-policy maintenance-policy-name

Context

[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing maintenance-policy)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing maintenance-policy

Description

This command configures a named maintenance policy that can be applied to SR Policy candidate paths that are either statically configured or imported via BGP. A maintenance policy is used to configure seamless BFD and protection for an SR Policy candidate path.

A maintenance policy must be administratively disabled in order to change any of the parameters.

A maintenance policy cannot be enabled unless a mode, bfd-enable, and bfd-template are configured.

If a maintenance-template is administratively disabled, then all candidate paths to which it is applied are deprogrammed from the data path.

The no form of this command removes the specified maintenance policy.

Parameters

maintenance-policy-name

Specifies the name of the maintenance policy, up to 32 characters and cannot start with a space or underscore.

Platforms

All

maintenance-policy

Syntax

[no] maintenance-policy maintenance-policy-name

Context

[Tree] (conf>router>segment-routing>sr-policies>policy maintenance-policy)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing sr-policies static-policy maintenance-policy

Description

This command applies a named maintenance policy to the static SR policy path. The maintenance policy must exist under the configure router segment-routing context.

The no form of this command removes the specified maintenance policy.

Parameters

maintenance-policy-name

Specifies the name of the maintenance policy, up to 32 characters and cannot start with a space or underscore.

Platforms

All

managed-configuration

managed-configuration

Syntax

[no] managed-configuration

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)

[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if managed-configuration)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 managed-configuration

configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration

configure service vprn router-advertisement interface managed-configuration

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration

configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy managed-configuration

configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 managed-configuration

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration

configure router router-advertisement interface managed-configuration

Description

This command sets or resets managed address configuration flag for this group-interface. This flag indicates that DHCPv6 is available for address configuration in addition to any address auto-configured using stateless address auto-configuration. See RFC 3315 for additional details.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no managed-configuration

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 managed-configuration
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
  • configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy managed-configuration
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 managed-configuration
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration

All

  • configure router router-advertisement interface managed-configuration
  • configure service vprn router-advertisement interface managed-configuration

managed-routes

managed-routes

Syntax

managed-routes

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host managed-routes)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host managed-routes)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host managed-routes

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host managed-routes

Description

Commands in this context configure managed route parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

managed-vlan-list

managed-vlan-list

Syntax

managed-vlan-list

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap managed-vlan-list)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap managed-vlan-list

Description

Commands in this context configure VLAN ranges to be managed by a management VPLS. The list indicates, for each SAP, the ranges of associated VLANs that will be affected when the SAP changes state. This managed-vlan-list is not used when STP mode is MSTP in which case the vlan-range is taken from the config>service>vpls>stp>msti configuration.

This command is only valid when the VPLS in which it is entered was created as a management VPLS.

Platforms

All

management

management

Syntax

management [create]

no management

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn management)

Full Context

configure service vprn management

Description

Commands in this context configure node management within the VPRN.

Parameters

create

Keyword used to create a management server entry.

Platforms

All

management

Syntax

management

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security management)

Full Context

configure system security management

Description

Commands in this context allow access to management servers.

Platforms

All

management-access-filter

management-access-filter

Syntax

[no] management-access-filter

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security management-access-filter)

Full Context

configure system security management-access-filter

Description

This command creates the context to edit management access filters and to reset match criteria.

Management access filters control all traffic in and out of the CPM. They can be used to restrict management of the router by other nodes outside either specific (sub)networks or through designated ports.

Management filters, as opposed to other traffic filters, are enforced by system software.

The no form of this command removes management access filters from the configuration.

Platforms

All

management-interface

management-interface

Syntax

management-interface

Context

[Tree] (config>system management-interface)

Full Context

configure system management-interface

Description

Commands in this context configure the capabilities of router management interfaces such as CLI and NETCONF.

Platforms

All

management-interface

Syntax

management-interface

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security management-interface)

Full Context

configure system security management-interface

Description

Commands in this context configure the selection of a management interface for hash configuration. The management interfaces are classic-cli, md-cli, netconf, or grpc.

Platforms

All

manager

manager

Syntax

manager manager-name [create]

no manager manager-name

Context

[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>remote-management manager)

Full Context

configure system management-interface remote-management manager

Description

Commands configured in this context take precedence over command values specified directly in the configure management-interface remote-management context.

If a command is not configured in this context, the command setting is inherited from the higher level context.

The no form of this command removes the remote manager configuration.

Default

system-name

Parameters

manager-name

Specifies the name of the remote manager, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

manager-address

manager-address

Syntax

manager-address ip-address | fqdn

no manager-address

Context

[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>remote-management>manager manager-address)

Full Context

configure system management-interface remote-management manager manager-address

Description

This command configures the destination IP address or FQDN of the manager.

The no form of this command removes the configured IP address or FQDN of the configured manager.

Parameters

ip-address

Specifies the IP address, up to 255 characters.

fqdn

Specifies the FQDN, up to 255 characters.

Platforms

All

manager-port

manager-port

Syntax

manager-port port

no manager-port

Context

[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>remote-management>manager manager-port)

Full Context

configure system management-interface remote-management manager manager-port

Description

This command assigns a destination TCP port to be used for opening gRPC connections to the specified remote manager.

The no form of this command reverts the destination TCP port for the remote manager to the default gRPC port (57400).

Parameters

port

Specifies the TCP destination port.

Values

1 to 65535

Default

57400

Platforms

All

manual

manual

Syntax

manual

Context

[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn>eth-seg>service-carving manual)

Full Context

configure service system bgp-evpn ethernet-segment service-carving manual

Description

Commands in this context manually configure the service-carving algorithm, that is, configure the EVIs or ISIDs for which the PE is DF.

Platforms

All

manual-keying

manual-keying

Syntax

[no] manual-keying

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel manual-keying

configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying

configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying

configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying

Description

This command configures Security Association (SA) for manual keying. When enabled, the command specifies whether this SA entry is created manually, by the user, or dynamically by the IPsec sub-system.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel manual-keying

VSR

  • configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying
  • configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying
  • configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying

map

map

Syntax

[no] map

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>pcp-server-policy>opcode map)

Full Context

configure service nat pcp-server-policy opcode map

Description

This command enables/disables support for the map opcode.

Default

no map

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

map-domain

map-domain

Syntax

map-domain domain-name [create]

no map-domain

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat map-domain)

Full Context

configure service nat map-domain

Description

This command creates a MAP domain template, which is used to define MAP rules and parameters specific to the MAP domain. A MAP domain represents a set of CEs that share the same default gateway (BR's IPv6 prefix - DMR rule) and a set of basic MAP rules (BMRs). As a bordering node between the IPv6 and IPv4 realm, the BR performs stateless IPv4 and IPv6 translation based on MAP rules.

A MAP domain can be instantiated within a routing context by referencing an existing MAP domain template in the context.

Parameters

domain-name

Specifies the name of the MAP domain, up to 32 characters. The MAP domain name has local significance.

Platforms

VSR

map-domain

Syntax

map-domain domain-name

no map-domain domain-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>map map-domain)

[Tree] (config>router>nat>map map-domain)

Full Context

configure service vprn nat map map-domain

configure router nat map map-domain

Description

This command instantiates a MAP-T domain within a routing context, assuming that the MAP-T domain template is administratively enabled (no shutdown). When the MAP-T is instantiated, the forwarding for the MAP-T domain is enabled and its routes can be exported in routing protocols.

Multiple MAP-T domains can be instantiated within a routing context.

Interactions:

The referenced MAP domain is defined under the config>service>nat context.

Parameters

domain-name

Specifies the name of the MAP domain template, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

VSR

mapping-limit

mapping-limit

Syntax

mapping-limit limit

no mapping-limit

Context

[Tree] (config>service>upnp>upnp-policy mapping-limit)

Full Context

configure service upnp upnp-policy mapping-limit

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of UPnP mapping per subscriber.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default

mapping-limit 256

Parameters

limit

Specifies the upper limit of the number of UPnP mappings per subscriber.

Values

1 to 256

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mapping-rule

mapping-rule

Syntax

mapping-rule map-rule-name [create]

no mapping-rule map-rule-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>map-domain mapping-rule)

Full Context

configure service nat map-domain mapping-rule

Description

This command provides a CLI context for configuring MAP rules.

Parameters

map-rule-name

Specifies the name of the MAP rule; the name has a local significance.

Platforms

VSR

mapping-server

mapping-server

Syntax

[no] mapping-server

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>segment-routing mapping-server)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing mapping-server

Description

Commands in this context configures the Segment Routing mapping server feature in an IS-IS instance.

SR mapping server enables the configuration and advertisement, via IS-IS, of the node SID index for IS-IS prefixes of routers which are in the LDP domain. This is performed in the router acting as a mapping server, which uses a prefix-SID sub-TLV within the SID/Label binding TLV in IS-IS.

The no form of this command deletes all node SID entries in the IS-IS instance.

Platforms

All

mapping-server

Syntax

[no] mapping-server

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>segm-rtng mapping-server)

Full Context

configure router ospf segment-routing mapping-server

Description

Commands in this context configure the Segment Routing mapping server feature in an OSPF instance.

The mapping server feature allows the configuration and advertisement in OSPF of the node SID index for OSPF prefixes of routers which are in the LDP domain. This is performed in the router acting as a mapping server and using a prefix-SID sub-TLV within the Extended Prefix Range TLV in OSPF.

The no form of this command deletes all node SID entries in the OSPF instance.

Platforms

All

maps-to

maps-to

Syntax

maps-to fc fc-name profile profile

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>post-policer-mapping>fc maps-to)

Full Context

configure qos post-policer-mapping fc maps-to

Description

This command remaps the forwarding class and profile state of an egress policed packet that is to be mapped to another forwarding class and profile, where the profile state is that of the resulting profile after the packet has been processed by the egress policer.

The new forwarding class is used to select the egress queue on which the post-policer traffic is placed. The new profile is used to determine the congestion control handling in that queue, specifically the drop tail or slope that is applied to the traffic.

The maps-to command parameters can be overwritten by reissuing the command with a different FC or profile.

The traffic remarking is based on the marking configured for the forwarding class and profile of the traffic after being policed but before it is remapped.

Parameters

fc-name

Specifies one of the eight forwarding classes supported by the system.

Values

be, l2, af, l1, h2, ef, h1, nc

profile

Specifies one of the egress packet profile states.

Values

exceed, in, inplus, out

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mark

mark

Syntax

mark entity high percentage-high low percentage-low

no mark entity

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>wlan-gw-group>watermarks mark)

Full Context

configure isa wlan-gw-group watermarks mark

Description

This command enables a watermark notification. If the watermark is set, it generates a notification when the corresponding resource consumption goes above the high percentage. No additional notifications are sent until resource consumption goes under the low watermark, upon which, a notification is sent indicating the high watermark is no longer hit.

The no form of this command disables the watermark notification.

Parameters

entity

Specifies which watermark to set.

Values

user-equipment | bridge-domain | radius-proxy-client

percentage-high

Specifies the high watermark in percentage of total resources available.

Values

1 to 100

percentage-low

Specifies the low watermark in percentage of total resources available.

Values

0 to 99

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mask

mask

Syntax

mask type ppp-match-type {[prefix-string prefix-string | prefix-length prefix-length] [suffix-string suffix-string | suffix-length suffix-length]}

no mask type ppp-match-type

mask type ipoe-match-type {[prefix-string prefix-string | prefix-length prefix-length] [suffix-string suffix-string | suffix-length suffix-length]}

no mask type ipoe-match-type

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe mask)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp mask)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe mask

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp mask

Description

This command configures a mask for the specified match type. The masking is applied on the parameter when performing an LUDB lookup to identify a host.

The no form of this command removes the mask from the configuration.

Parameters

ppp-match-type

Specifies the parameter on which the mask should be applied for an LUDB lookup to identify a PPP host.

Values

circuit-id, mac, remote-id, sap-id, service-name, username

ipoe-match-type

Specifies the parameter on which the mask should be applied for an LUDB lookup to identify an IPoE host.

Values

circuit-id, option60, remote-id, sap-id, string, system-id

prefix-string

Specifies a substring that is stripped of the start of the incoming parameter value before it is matched against the value configured in the LUDB host identification.

This string can only contain printable ASCII characters. The "*” character is a wildcard that matches any substring. If a "\" character is masked, use the escape key so it becomes "\\".

This command option is unsupported when the ppp-match-type equals mac.

Values

up to 127 characters, "*”

prefix-length

Specifies the number of characters to remove from the start of the incoming parameter value before it is matched against the value configured in the LUDB host identification.

When used with the mac parameter, it specifies the number of bits to remove from the start of the MAC address. For example, if the MAC address is 0a:0b:0c:0d:0e:0f, to obtain the last bit for matching purposes (match an odd or even MAC address), the prefix length is 47. The result in this example would be a binary number of 1 (0xf = 1111).

Values

1 to 127

suffix-string

Specifies a substring that is stripped of the end of the incoming parameter value before it is matched against the value configured in the LUDB host identification.

This string can only contain printable ASCII characters. The "*” character is a wildcard that matches any substring. If a "\" character is masked, use the escape key so it becomes "\\".

This command option is unsupported when the ppp-match-type equals mac.

Values

up to 127 characters

suffix-length

Specifies the number of characters to remove from the end of the incoming parameter value before it is matched against the value configured in the LUDB host identification.

When used with the mac command option, the number of bits to remove from the end of the MAC address is specified.

Values

1 to 127

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mask

Syntax

mask mask-value [type {included | excluded}]

no mask

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>snmp>view mask)

Full Context

configure system security snmp view mask

Description

The mask value and the mask type, along with the oid-value configured in the view command, determines the access of each sub-identifier of an object identifier (MIB subtree) in the view.

Each bit in the mask corresponds to a sub-identifier position. For example, the most significant bit for the first sub-identifier, the next most significant bit for the second sub-identifier, and so on. If the bit position on the sub-identifier is available, it can be included or excluded.

For example, the MIB subtree that represents MIB-II is 1.3.6.1.2.1. The mask that catches all MIB-II would be 0xfc or 0b11111100.

Only a single mask may be configured per view and OID value combination. If more than one entry is configured, each subsequent entry overwrites the previous entry.

The no form of this command removes the mask from the configuration.

Parameters

mask-value

The mask value associated with the OID value determines whether the sub-identifiers are included or excluded from the view. (Default: all 1s)

The mask can be entered either:

  • In hex. For example, 0xfc.

  • In binary. For example, 0b11111100.

Note:

If the number of bits in the bit mask is less than the number of sub-identifiers in the MIB subtree, then the mask is extended with ones until the mask length matches the number of sub-identifiers in the MIB subtree.

type

Specifies to include or exclude MIB subtree objects.

Values

included - All MIB subtree objects that are identified with a 1 in the mask are available in the view.

excluded - All MIB subtree objects that are identified with a 1 in the mask are denied access in the view.

Default

included

Platforms

All

mask-reply

mask-reply

Syntax

[no] mask-reply

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>icmp mask-reply)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if mask-reply)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>icmp mask-reply)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if mask-reply)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if>icmp mask-reply)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface icmp mask-reply

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface mask-reply

configure service ies interface icmp mask-reply

configure service vprn interface mask-reply

configure service vprn network-interface icmp mask-reply

Description

This command enables responses to Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) mask requests on the router interface.

If a local node sends an ICMP mask request to the router interface, the mask-reply command configures the router interface to reply to the request.

By default, the router instance replies to mask requests.

The no form of this command disables replies to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

Default

mask-reply — Specifies to reply to ICMP mask requests.

Platforms

All

  • configure service vprn interface mask-reply
  • configure service vprn network-interface icmp mask-reply
  • configure service ies interface icmp mask-reply
  • configure service vprn interface icmp mask-reply

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface mask-reply

mask-reply

Syntax

[no] mask-reply

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>git>ipv4>icmp mask-reply)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt group-interface-template ipv4 icmp mask-reply

Description

This command enables responses to ICMP mask requests on the router interface. If a local node sends an ICMP mask request to the router interface, the router interface replies to the request.

By default, the router instance replies to mask requests.

The no form of this command disables replies to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

Default

mask-reply

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mask-reply

Syntax

[no] mask-reply

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>icmp mask-reply)

Full Context

configure router interface icmp mask-reply

Description

This command enables responses to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

If a local node sends an ICMP mask request to the router interface, the mask-reply command configures the router interface to reply to the request.

The no form of this command disables replies to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

Default

mask-reply — Replies to ICMP mask requests.

Platforms

All

master-int-inherit

master-int-inherit

Syntax

[no] master-int-inherit

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>vrrp master-int-inherit)

Full Context

configure service ies interface ipv6 vrrp master-int-inherit

Description

This command allows the master instance to dictate the master down timer (non-owner context only).

Default

no master-int-inherit

Platforms

All

master-int-inherit

Syntax

[no] master-int-inherit

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vrrp master-int-inherit)

Full Context

configure service ies interface vrrp master-int-inherit

Description

This command allows the master instance to dictate the master down timer (non-owner context only).

Default

no master-int-inherit

Platforms

All

master-int-inherit

Syntax

[no] master-int-inherit

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>vrrp master-int-inherit)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>vrrp master-int-inherit)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp master-int-inherit

configure service vprn interface vrrp master-int-inherit

Description

This command allows the master instance to dictate the master down timer (non-owner context only).

Default

no master-int-inherit

Platforms

All

master-int-inherit

Syntax

[no] master-int-inherit

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>vrrp master-int-inherit)

[Tree] (config>router>if>vrrp master-int-inherit)

Full Context

configure router interface ipv6 vrrp master-int-inherit

configure router interface vrrp master-int-inherit

Description

This command enables the virtual router instance to inherit the master VRRP router’s advertisement interval timer which is used by backup routers to calculate the master down timer.

The master-int-inherit command is only available in the non-owner nodal context and is used to allow the current virtual router instance master to dictate the master down timer for all backup virtual routers. The master-int-inherit command has no effect when the virtual router instance is operating as master.

If master-int-inherit is not enabled, the locally configured message-interval must match the master’s VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field value or the message is discarded.

The no form of the command restores the default operating condition which requires the locally configured message-interval to match the received VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field value. The virtual router instance does not inherit the master VRRP router’s advertisement interval timer and uses the locally configured message interval.

Default

no master-int-inherit

Platforms

All

master-only

master-only

Syntax

master-only {true | false}

Context

[Tree] (config>system>ptp>port master-only)

Full Context

configure system ptp port master-only

Description

This command is used to restrict the local port to never enter the timeReceiver state. Use the command to ensure that the 7750 SR never draws synchronization from the attached external device.

This parameter is only effective when the profile is set to g8275dot1-2014 or g8275dot2-2016.

Note:

The ITU-T G.8275.1 (07/2014) recommendation used the term notSlave for this functionality; however, the IEEE has added this capability into the next edition of the 1588 standard using the term masterOnly. These are equivalent.

Default

master-only true

Parameters

true

Enables the master-only parameter of the PTP port.

false

Disables the master-only parameter of the PTP port.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

master-selection-mode

master-selection-mode

Syntax

master-selection-mode mode

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>aarp master-selection-mode)

Full Context

configure application-assurance aarp master-selection-mode

Description

This command configures the AARP mode of operation with the peer instance. The modes affect the AARP state machine behavior according to the desired behavior. Minimize-switchover will change AARP state based on Master ISA failure, and be non-revertive in that when the priority ISA returns a switch does not occur, which is optimal for AA flow identification. Inter-chassis efficiency mode considers both priority (revertive) and the endpoint status of the AARP instance and will switch activity in case of EP failure in order to avoid sending all the traffic over the ICL. The priority-based-balance mode will be revertive after a priority master returns to service, but excludes EP status. The master-selection-mode configuration must match on both peer AARP instances, or the AARP operational status will stay down.

Default

master-selection-mode minimize-switchovers

Parameters

mode

Specifies the AARP master selection mode.

Values

minimize-switchovers — Optimal AA flow detection continuity by minimizing AARP switchovers.

inter-chassis-efficiency — Minimizes inter-chassis traffic.

priority-based-balance — AA load balance between AARP peers based on configured priority.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

match

Syntax

match {circuit-id | mac | remote-id}

match option [number] [option6 [number]

match option6 [number]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>match-radprox-cache match)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host match-radius-proxy-cache match

Description

This command specifies in what DHCPv6 option to retrieve the value to be used as lookup key in the RADIUS proxy cache.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

match mac

Parameters

circuit-id

Specifies to use the circuit Id to match against.

mac

Specifies the MAC address to match against.

remote-id

Specifies the remote ID to match against.

option number

Specifies the option number that the DHCP server uses to send the identification strings to the client.

Values

1 to 254

option6 number

Specifies the DHCPv6 option to retrieve the value to be used as lookup key in the RADIUS proxy cache.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policy>chrg-fltr>entry match)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group policy charging-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context configure the match criterion for a AA charging-filter entry.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-svc-chain>vas-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt isa-service-chaining vas-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context configure the match criterion for a VAS filter entry.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match [next-header next-header]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>ingr-ipv6>entry match)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>egr-ipv6>entry match)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level ingress-ipv6-filter-entries entry match

configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level egress-ipv6-filter-entries entry match

Description

This command configures the match criteria for this IP filter entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number accepted in DBH for IPv6 filter entries.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name accepted in DBH for IPv6 filter entries.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match [protocol protocol-id]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>egr-ip>entry match)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>ingr-ip>entry match)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level egress-ip-filter-entries entry match

configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level ingress-ip-filter-entries entry match

Description

This command configures the match criteria for this IP filter entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

protocol-id

Specifies the protocol ID or protocol name accepted in DHB.

Values

protocol-number — [0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name — none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match protocol {any | icmp | tcp | udp | gre}

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-filter>ipv6>entry match)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt isa-filter ipv6 entry match

Description

This command creates a match context for this entry. The protocol value specifies which Layer-4 protocol the packet should match.

The no form of this command removes the match context of this entry.

Default

match protocol any

Parameters

protocol

Specifies that the only supported match context is protocol.

any

Specifies to match any protocol.

icmp

Specifies to match ICMP packets in a v4 filter.

tcp

Specifies to match TCP packets.

udp

Specifies to match UDP packets.

gre

Specifies to match GRE over IP packets.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

[no] match

Context

[Tree] (config>service>mrp>mrp-policy>entry match)

Full Context

configure service mrp mrp-policy entry match

Description

This command creates the context for entering/editing match criteria for the mrp-policy entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed. In the current implementation just one match criteria (ISID based) is possible in the entry associated with the mrp-policy. Only one match statement can be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>dynamic-neighbor match)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp group dynamic-neighbor match

Description

This command configures match conditions for the dynamic neighbors.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

[no] match

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log>filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure service vprn log filter entry match

Description

This command creates context to enter/edit match criteria for a filter entry. When the match criteria is satisfied, the action associated with the entry is executed.

If more than one match parameter (within one match statement) is specified, then all the criteria must be satisfied (AND functional) before the action associated with the match is executed.

Use the match command to display a list of the valid applications.

Match context can consist of multiple match parameters (application, event-number, severity, subject), but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Default

no match

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policy>aqp>entry match)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group policy app-qos-policy entry match

Description

Commands in this context configure flow match rules for this AQP entry. A flow matches this AQP entry only if it matches all the match rules defined (logical and of all rules). If no match rule is specified, the entry will match all flows.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>sess-fltr>entry match)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group session-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context configure session conditions for this entry.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>transit-prefix-policy>entry match)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group transit-prefix-policy entry match

Description

Commands in this context configure transit prefix policy entry match criteria.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

[no] match

Context

[Tree] (debug>app-assure>group>traffic-capture match)

Full Context

debug application-assurance group traffic-capture match

Description

This command configures debugging for traffic match criteria.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match protocol ip-protocol

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>nat-classifier>entry match)

Full Context

configure service nat nat-classifier entry match

Description

This command configures an IP protocol to be used as a nat-classifier match criterion. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

The no form of the command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Default

match protocol udp

Parameters

protocol ip-protocol

Specifies the text value representing the IP protocol to be used as a match criterion.

Values

udp, tcp

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match

Syntax

match [frame-type frame-type]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter>li-mac-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure li li-filter li-mac-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context configure match criteria for the filter entry and specifies an Ethernet frame type for the entry.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured then all criteria must be satisfied (and function) for a match to occur.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry.

Parameters

frame-type

Filters can continue to be edited by all users even when an li-source references an entry in that filter.

Values

802dot3, 802dot2-llc, 802dot2-snap, ethernet_II

Default

802dot3

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [protocol protocol-id]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter>li-ip-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure li li-filter li-ip-filter entry match

Description

This command enables context to enter match criteria for LI IPv4 filter and optionally allows specifying protocol value to match on.

If more than one match criterion are configured then all criteria must be satisfied for a match to occur (logical "AND”). Multiple criteria must be configured within a single match context for a given entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry.

Parameters

protocol-id

Configures the decimal value representing the IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. Well known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17).

Values

0 to 255 (values can be expressed in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary - DHB)

Keywords for the 7750 SR:

none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

Keywords for the 7450 ESS:

none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

* — udp/tcp wildcard

Table 2. Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [next-header next-header]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>li>li-filter>li-ipv6-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure li li-filter li-ipv6-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context enter match criteria for an LI IPv6 filter and optionally allows specification IPv6 next-header value to match on.

If more than one match criterion are configured, then all criteria must be satisfied for a match to occur (logical "AND”). Multiple criteria must be configured within a single match context for a given entry.

The no form removes the match criteria for the entry.

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

Specifies the IPv6 next header to match. This parameter is analogous to the protocol parameter used in IP filter match criteria.

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [protocol protocol-id]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>ip-criteria>entry match)

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>ip-criteria>entry match)

Full Context

configure qos sap-egress ip-criteria entry match

configure qos sap-ingress ip-criteria entry match

Description

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for SAP QoS policy match criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

It is possible that a SAP policy includes the dscp map command, the dot1p map command, and an IP match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action. The order of precedence is as follows:

  1. 802.1p bits

  2. DSCP

  3. IP quintuple or MAC headers

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters

protocol protocol-id

Specifies an IP protocol to be used as a SAP QoS policy match criterion.

The protocol type such as TCP / UDP / OSPF is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17)

IP Protocol Names lists the IP protocols and their respective IDs and descriptions.

Values

The following values apply to the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS:

protocol-id: 0 to 255 protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary

keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

Values

The following values apply to the 7450 ESS:

keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

* — udp/tcp wildcard

Table 3. IP Protocol Names

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for their IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Schedule Transfer Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [next-header next-header]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)

Full Context

configure qos sap-ingress ipv6-criteria entry match

configure qos sap-egress ipv6-criteria entry match

Description

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for ingress SAP QoS policy match IPv6 criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (logical AND) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be created per entry.

A SAP ingress policy may include the dscp map command, the dot1p map command, and an IPv6 match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the following order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action.

  1. 802.1p bits

  2. DSCP

  3. IP quintuple or MAC headers

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

Specifies the IPv6 next header to match.

On the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS, the protocol type such as TCP, UDP, or OSPF is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6) and UDP(17).

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [frame-type {802dot3 | 802dot2-llc | 802dot2-snap | ethernet-II | atm}]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>mac-criteria>entry match)

Full Context

configure qos sap-ingress mac-criteria entry match

Description

This command creates a context for entering/editing match MAC criteria for ingress SAP QoS policy match criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match will be executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters

frame-type

The frame-type keyword configures an Ethernet frame type or an ATM frame type to be used for the MAC filter match criteria.

Values

802dot3, 802dot2-llc, 802dot2-snap, ethernet_II, atm

Default

802dot3

802dot3

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.3.

802dot2-llc

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 LLC.

802dot2-snap

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 SNAP.

ethernet-II

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet Type II.

atm

Specifies the frame type as ATM cell. The user is not allowed to configure entries with frame type of atm and a frame type of other supported values in the same QoS policy. This parameter applies only to the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [protocol protocol-id]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>network>ingress>ip-criteria>entry match)

[Tree] (config>qos>network>egress>ip-criteria>entry match)

Full Context

configure qos network ingress ip-criteria entry match

configure qos network egress ip-criteria entry match

Description

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for a network QoS policy. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with it is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, then all criteria must be satisfied before the associated action with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

A network QoS policy can include the DSCP map command, the dot1p map command (ingress only), the prec map command (egress only), and an IP match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action. The order of precedence is as follows:

  • 802.1p bits (ingress only)

  • DSCP

  • prec (egress only)

  • IP quintuple

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry identifier.

Parameters

protocol protocol-id

Specifies an IP protocol to be used as an ingress or egress network QoS policy match criterion.

The protocol type is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), and UDP(17).

Values

protocol-id: 0 to 255 protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary

keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

* — udp/tcp wildcard

Protocol ID Descriptions lists the protocols and their protocol IDs and descriptions.

Table 4. Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for their IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Schedule Transfer Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [next-header next-header]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>network>ingress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)

[Tree] (config>qos>network>egress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)

Full Context

configure qos network ingress ipv6-criteria entry match

configure qos network egress ipv6-criteria entry match

Description

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for a network QoS policy match IPv6 criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (logical AND) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be created per entry.

A network policy can include the DSCP map command, the dot1p map command (ingress only), the prec map command (egress only), and an IPv6 match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the following order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action.

  • 802.1p bits (ingress only)

  • DSCP

  • prec (egress only)

  • IP quintuple

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry identifier.

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

Specifies the next header to match.

The protocol type is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), and UDP(17).

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match field-value instance instance-id

no match field-value

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>queue-group-redirect-list match)

Full Context

configure qos queue-group-redirect-list match

Description

This command configures the value of the field in the ingress or egress packet which, when matched, will cause the packet to be redirected to the specified queue group instance. The field-value is dependent on the setting of the type and therefore must be a valid VXLAN VNI.

A maximum of 16 match statements are supported in a queue group redirect list.

The no form of this command removes the match statement from the redirect list.

Parameters

field-value

Specifies the value of the field in the ingress or egress packet which, when matched, will cause the packet to be redirected to the specified queue group instance. Because the only permitted type is vxlan-vni, the field must be a valid VXLAN VNI. The VNI can be specified in any of the available formats but is always shown in decimal.

Values

1 to 16777215 (Decimal)

0x1 to 0xFFFFFF (Hexadecimal)

0b1 to 0b111111111111111111111111 (Binary)

instance-id

Specifies the instance of the queue group template to which the VXLAN traffic is redirected. The traffic can be redirected to the default instance, which is the instance specified with the QoS policy under the SAP ingress or egress.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [protocol protocol-id]

match protocol none

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>ip-exception>entry match)

Full Context

configure filter ip-exception entry match

Description

Commands in this context enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry. More precisely, the command can be entered multiple times but this only results in modifying the protocol-id. and does not affect the underlying match criteria configuration.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the filter entry and sets the protocol-id of the match command to none (keyword). As per above, match protocol none is however not equivalent to no match.

Default

match protocol none

Parameters

protocol-id

Sets an IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. The protocol type, such as TCP or UDP, is identified by its respective protocol number.

Values

protocol-number: [0..255]D

[0x0..0xFF]H

[0b0..0b11111111]B

protocol-name:0 to 255 in decimal format. Values can also be specified in hexadecimal format, in binary format, or using the following keywords:

IPv4 filter keywords: none (default), icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

IP exception filter keywords: none, icmp, igmp, ospf-igp, pim, rsvp, tcp, udp, vrrp

* — udp/tcp wildcard

Table 5. Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

sctp

132

Stream Control Transmission Protocol

Platforms

VSR

match

Syntax

match [{protocol protocol-id | protocol-list protocol-list-name}]

match protocol none

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>ip-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure filter ip-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be created per entry. More precisely, the protocol command can be entered multiple times but this only results in modifying the protocol-id. Matching on more than one protocol can be achieved using the protocol-list match criteria in an IP filter policy.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the filter entry and sets the protocol-id of the match command to none. However, match protocol none is not equivalent to no match.

Default

match protocol none

Parameters

protocol-id

protocol-number | protocol-name

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion. The value can be expressed as a decimal integer, or in hexadecimal or binary format.

Values

[0..255]D, [0x0..0xFF]H, [0b0..0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

IPv4 filter keywords: none (default), icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* — udp/tcp

Table 6. Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

sctp

132

Stream Control Transmission Protocol

protocol-list-name

Specifies the name of the protocol list, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [next-header next-header]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>ipv6-exception>entry match)

Full Context

configure filter ipv6-exception entry match

Description

Commands in this context enter match criteria for the IPv6 filter exception. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the IPv6 filter exception.

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

Specifies the next header to match.

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

VSR

match

Syntax

match [{next-header protocol-id | next-header-list protocol-list-name}]

match next-header none

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>ipv6-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure filter ipv6-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be created per entry. More precisely, the next-header command can be entered multiple times, but this only results in modifying the protocol-id. Matching on more than one protocol can be achieved using the next-header-list match criteria.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the filter entry and sets the protocol-id of the match command to none. However, match next-header none is not equivalent to no match.

Default

match next-header none

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

Specifies the IPv6 next header to match. This parameter is analogous to the protocol parameter used in IPv4 filter match command.

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

protocol-list-name

Specifies the name of the protocol list, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [frame-type {802dot3 | 802dot2-llc | 802dot2-snap | ethernet_II}]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>mac-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure filter mac-filter entry match

Description

This command creates the context for entering/editing match criteria for the filter entry and specifies an Ethernet frame type for the entry.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of the command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters

frame-type

Keyword used to configure an Ethernet frame type to be used for the MAC filter match criteria.

Default

802dot3

Values

802dot3, 802dot2-llc, 802dot2-snap, ethernet_II

802dot3

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.3.

802dot2-llc

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 LLC.

802dot2-snap

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 SNAP.

ethernet_II

Specifies the frame type is Ethernet Type II.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

[no] match

Context

[Tree] (config>log>filter>filter-id>entry match)

Full Context

configure log filter filter-id entry match

Description

This command creates context to enter/edit match criteria for a filter entry. When the match criteria is satisfied, the action associated with the entry is executed.

If more than one match parameter (within one match statement) is specified, then all the criteria must be satisfied (AND functional) before the action associated with the match is executed.

Use the application command to display a list of the valid applications.

Match context can consist of multiple match parameters (application, event-number, severity, subject), but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

match

Syntax

match [frame-type frame-type]

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>mac-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure system security management-access-filter mac-filter entry match

Description

This command configures math criteria for this MAC filter entry.

Parameters

frame-type

Specifies the type of MAC frame to use as match criteria.

Values

802dot3 | 802dot2-llc | 802dot2-snap | 802dot1ag | ethernet_II

Default

802dot3

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match [protocol protocol-id]

no match

Context

[Tree] (cfg>sys>sec>cpm>ip-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure system security cpm-filter ip-filter entry match

Description

Commands in this context enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed. If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured then all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters

protocol

Sets an IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. The protocol type such as TCP or UDP is identified by its respective protocol number.

protocol-id

Sets the decimal value representing the IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. Well known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17). The no form the command removes the protocol from the match criteria.

Values

1 to 255 (values can be expressed in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary) keywords - none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp, * — udp/tcp wildcard

Table 7. IP Protocol Names

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for their IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

match

Syntax

match [next-header next-header]

no match

Context

[Tree] (cfg>sys>sec>cpm>ipv6-filter>entry match)

Full Context

configure system security cpm-filter ipv6-filter entry match

Description

This command specifies match criteria for the IP filter entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters

next-header

protocol-number, protocol-name

Specifies the next header to match.

The protocol type such as TCP, UDP or OSPF is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6) and UDP(17).

protocol-number

Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

[0 to 255]D

[0x0 to 0xFF]H

[0b0 to 0b11111111]B

protocol-name

Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.

Values

none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp

* - udp/tcp wildcard

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

match

Syntax

match command-string

no match

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>profile>entry match)

Full Context

configure system security profile entry match

Description

This command configures a command or subtree commands in subordinate command levels are specified.

Evaluation stops when the first match is found, so subordinate levels cannot be modified with subsequent action commands. More specific action commands should be entered with a lower entry number or in a profile that is evaluated prior to this profile.

All commands below the hierarchy level of the matched command are denied.

The no form of this command removes a match condition.

Parameters

command-string

Specifies the CLI command or CLI tree level that is the scope of the profile entry.

Platforms

All

match

Syntax

match

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>dynamic-neighbor match)

Full Context

configure router bgp group dynamic-neighbor match

Description

This command configures match conditions for the dynamic neighbors.

Platforms

All

match-circuit-id

match-circuit-id

Syntax

[no] match-circuit-id

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>dhcp match-circuit-id)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>dhcp match-circuit-id)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>dhcp match-circuit-id)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface dhcp match-circuit-id

configure service vprn subscriber-interface dhcp match-circuit-id

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface dhcp match-circuit-id

Description

This command enables Option 82 circuit ID on relayed DHCP packet matching. For routed CO, the group interface DHCP relay process is stateful. When packets are relayed to the server the virtual router ID, transaction ID, SAP ID, and client hardware MAC address of the relayed packet are tracked.

When a response is received from the server the virtual router ID, transaction ID, and client hardware MAC address must be matched to determine the SAP on which to send the packet out. In some cases, the virtual router ID, transaction ID, and client hardware MAC address are not guaranteed to be unique.

When the match-circuit-id command is enabled this as part of the key is used to guarantee correctness in our lookup. This is only needed when dealing with an IP aware DSLAM that proxies the client hardware MAC address.

The no form of this command disables Option 82 circuit ID on relayed DHCP packet matching.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match-list

match-list

Syntax

match-list ppp-match-type-1 [ppp-match-type-2]

no match-list

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp match-list)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp match-list

Description

This command specifies the type of matching done to identify a host. There are different match-types for PPPoE hosts of which a maximum of three can be specified.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

match-type-x

Specifies up to three matching types to identify a host.

Values

For PPP: circuit-id, derived-id, mac, remote-id, sap-id, encap-tag-range, encap-tag-separate-range, service-name, username

Note:

The format of remote-id in IPv6 is different that the format of remote-id in IPv4; IPv6 remote-id contains enterprise-id filed that is also honored in matching.

circuit-id — Specifies to use the circuit ID to match against.

derived-id — Specifies the value extracted by Python script during processing of DHCP Discover/Solicit/Request/Renew/Rebind Messages (client to server bound messages). The value is stored in the DHCP Transaction Cache (DTC) in a variable named alc.dtc.derivedId. This value has a lifespan of a DHCP transaction (a single pair of messages exchanged between the client and the server, for example DHCP Discover and DHCP Offer).

encap-tag-separate-range — Specifies the match encapsulation inner and outer tag in two separate ranges.

encap-tag-range — Specifies to match tag ranges for inner and outer tags.

mac — Specifies to use the MAC address to match against.

remote-id — Specifies to use the remote ID to match against.

sap-id — Specifies the SAP ID on which DHCPv4 packet are received. The SAP ID is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,4) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group-interface CLI hierarchy, the group interface and the service ID must be known before the SAP ID can be used for LUDB match.

service-id — Specifies the service ID of the ingress SAP for DHCPv4 packets. The service ID is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,3) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay.

system-id — Specifies the system ID of the node name configured under the system>name CLI hierarchy. The system ID is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,1) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group interface CLI hierarchy, the group interface and the service-id must be known before the system ID can be used for LUDB match.

username — Specifies the user name.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match-list

Syntax

match-list ipoe-match-type-1 [ipoe-match-type-2]

no match-list

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe match-list)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe match-list

Description

This command specifies the type of matching done to identify a host. There are different match-types for IPoE hosts of which a maximum of four can be specified.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

match-type-x

Specifies up to four matching types to identify a host.

Values

For IPoE: circuit-id, derived-id, dual-stack-remote-id, encap-tag-range, encap-tag-separate-range, ip, mac, option60, remote-id, sap-id, service-id, string, system-id

Note:

The format of remote-id in IPv6 is different that the format of remote-id in IPv4; IPv6 remote-id contains enterprise-id filed that is also honored in matching.

circuit-id — Specifies to use the circuit ID to match against.

derived-id — Specifies the value extracted by Python script during processing of DHCP Discover/Solicit/Request/Renew/Rebind Messages (client to server bound messages). The value is stored in the DHCP Transaction Cache (DTC) in a variable named alc.dtc.derivedId. This value has a lifespan of a DHCP transaction (a single pair of messages exchanged between the client and the server, for example DHCP Discover and DHCP Offer).

dual-stack-remote-id — Specifies the enterprise-id in IPv6 remote-id is stripped off before LUDB matching is performed. Processing of IPv4 remote ID remains unchanged. This will allow a single host entry in LUDB for dual-stack host where host identification is performed based on the remote ID field.

encap-tag-separate-range — Specifies the match encapsulation inner and outer tag in two separate ranges.

encap-tag-range — Specifies to match tag ranges for inner and outer tags.

ip — Specifies the source IPv4/IPv6 address of a data-trigger packet.

mac — Specifies to use the MAC address to match against.

option-60 — Specifies to use Option60 to match against.

remote-id — Specifies to use the remote ID to match against.

sap-id — Specifies the SAP ID on which DHCPv4 packet are received. The SAP ID is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,4) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group interface CLI hierarchy, the group interface and the service ID must be known before the SAP ID can be used for LUDB match.

service-id — Specifies the service ID of the ingress SAP for DHCPv4 packets. The service ID is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,3) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay.

string — Specifies the custom string configured under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. The string is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,5) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group-interface CLI hierarchy, the group-interface and the service ID must be known before the string can be used for LUDB match.

system-id — Specifies the system ID of the node name configured under the system>name CLI hierarchy. The system ID is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,1) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group interface CLI hierarchy, the group interface and the service ID must be known before the system ID can be used for LUDB match.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match-list

Syntax

match-list

Context

[Tree] (config>ipsec>client-db match-list)

Full Context

configure ipsec client-db match-list

Description

This command enables the match list context on a client database. The match list defines the match input used during IPsec’s tunnel setup. If there are multiple inputs configured in the match list, then they all must have matches before the system considers a client entry is a match.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match-list

Syntax

match-list

Context

[Tree] (config>qos match-list)

Full Context

configure qos match-list

Description

This command is used to enter the context to create or edit match lists used in QoS policies.

Platforms

All

match-list

Syntax

match-list

Context

[Tree] (config>filter match-list)

Full Context

configure filter match-list

Description

This command enables the configuration context for match lists to be used in filter policies (IOM/FP and CPM).

Platforms

All

match-peer-id-to-cert

match-peer-id-to-cert

Syntax

[no] match-peer-id-to-cert

Context

[Tree] (config>ipsec>ike-policy match-peer-id-to-cert)

Full Context

configure ipsec ike-policy match-peer-id-to-cert

Description

This command enables checking the IKE peer's ID matches the peer's certificate when performing certificate authentication.

Default

no match-peer-id-to-cert

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

match-qinq-dot1p

match-qinq-dot1p

Syntax

match-qinq-dot1p {top | bottom}

no match-qinq-dot1p

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

configure service ies interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

Description

This command specifies which dot1Q tag position dot1P bits in a QinQ encapsulated packet should be used to evaluate dot1P QoS classification.

The match-qinq-dot1p command allows the top or bottom PBits to be used when evaluating the applied sap-ingress QoS policy’s dot1P entries. The top and bottom keywords specify which position should be evaluated for QinQ encapsulated packets.

By default, the bottom-most service delineating dot1Q tag’s dot1P bits are used. Default QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation defines the default behavior for dot1P evaluation when the match-qinq-dot1p command is not executed.

Table 8. Default QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port/SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

The no form of this command restores the default dot1p evaluation behavior for the SAP.

Default

no match-qinq-dot1p (no filtering based on p-bits)

(top or bottom must be specified to override the default QinQ dot1p behavior)

Parameters

top

The top parameter is mutually exclusive to the bottom parameter. When the top parameter is specified, the topmost PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Top Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the top parameter is specified.

Table 9. Top Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port/SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

bottom

The bottom parameter is mutually exclusive to the top parameter. When the bottom parameter is specified, the bottom most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the bottom parameter is specified.

Table 10. Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port/SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

QinQ/QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Platforms

All

  • configure service vpls sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
  • configure service ies interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

match-qinq-dot1p

Syntax

match-qinq-dot1p {top | bottom}

no match-qinq-dot1p de

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

Full Context

configure service epipe sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

configure service ipipe sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

Description

This command specifies which Dot1Q tag position Dot1P bits in a QinQ encapsulated packet should be used to evaluate Dot1P QoS classification.

The match-qinq-dot1p command allows the top or bottom PBits to be used when evaluating the applied sap-ingress QoS policy’s Dot1P entries. The top and bottom keywords specify which position should be evaluated for QinQ encapsulated packets.

The setting also applies to classification based on the DE indicator bit.

The no form of this command reverts the dot1p and de bits matching to the default tag.

By default, the bottom most service delineating Dot1Q tags Dot1P bits are used. Default QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation defines the default behavior for Dot1P evaluation. Top or bottom must be specified to override the default QinQ dot1p behavior.

Table 11. Default QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port/SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Default

no match-qinq-dot1p (no filtering based on p-bits)

Parameters

top

The top parameter is mutually exclusive to the bottom parameter. When the top parameter is specified, the top most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Top Position QinQ dpt1p Evaluation Behavior defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the top parameter is specified.

Table 12. Top Position QinQ dpt1p Evaluation Behavior

Port/SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

bottom

The bottom parameter and the top parameter are mutually exclusive. When the bottom parameter is specified, the bottom most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the bottom parameter is specified.

Table 13. Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port/SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Table 14. Egress SAP Types

Egress SAP Type

Ingress Packet Preserved Dot1P State

Marked (or Remarked) PBits

Null

No preserved Dot1P bits

None

Null

Preserved Dot1P bits

Preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

No preserved Dot1P bits

New PBits marked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

Preserved Dot1P bits

Preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

TopQ

No preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

TopQ

Preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value, BottomQ PBits preserved

QinQ

No preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

QinQ

Preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

The QinQ and TopQ SAP PBit/DEI bit marking follows the default behavior defined in the preceding table when qinq-mark-top-only is not specified.

The dot1p dot1p-value command must be configured without the qinq-mark-top-only parameter to remove the TopQ PBits only marking restriction.

A QinQ-encapsulated Ethernet port can have two different sap types:

For a TopQ SAP type, only the outer (top) tag is explicitly specified. For example, sap 1/1/1:10.*

For QinQ SAP type, both inner (bottom) and outer (top) tags are explicitly specified. For example, sap 1/1/1:10.100.

Platforms

All

match-qinq-dot1p

Syntax

match-qinq-dot1p {top | bottom}

no match-qinq-dot1p

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p

Description

This command specifies which Dot1Q tag position Dot1P bits in a QinQ encapsulated packet should be used to evaluate Dot1P QoS classification.

The match-qinq-dot1p command allows the top or bottom PBits to be used when evaluating the applied sap-ingress QoS policy’s Dot1P entries. The top and bottom keywords specify which position should be evaluated for QinQ encapsulated packets.

The no form of this command restores the default dot1p evaluation behavior for the SAP.

By default, the bottom most service delineating Dot1Q tags Dot1P bits are used. Dot1P Default Behavior defines the default behavior for Dot1P evaluation when the match-qinq-dot1p command is not executed.

Table 15. Dot1P Default Behavior

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

null

none

none

null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

null

Dot1Q PBits

null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

none (Default SAP)

none

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Default

no match-qinq-dot1p - No filtering based on p-bits.

top or bottom must be specified to override the default QinQ dot1p behavior.

Parameters

top

The top parameter is mutually exclusive to the bottom parameter. When the top parameter is specified, the top most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Dot1P Evaluation Behavior defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the top parameter is specified.

Table 16. Dot1P Evaluation Behavior

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

null

none

none

null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

none (Default SAP)

none

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

bottom

The bottom parameter is mutually exclusive to the top parameter. When the bottom parameter is specified, the bottom most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. The following tables define the bottom position QinQ and TopQ SAP dot1p evaluation and the default dot1p explicit marking actions.

Table 17. Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

null

none

none

null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

null

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

none (default SAP)

none

Dot1Q

Dot1P (default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Table 18. Default Dot1P Explicit Marking Actions

Egress SAP Type

Ingress Packet Preserved Dot1P State

Marked (or Remarked) PBits

null

no preserved Dot1P bits

none

null

preserved Dot1P bits

preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

no preserved Dot1P bits

new PBits marked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

preserved Dot1P bits

preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

TopQ

no preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

TopQ

preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value, BottomQ PBits preserved

QinQ

no preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

QinQ

preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

The dot1p dot1p-value command must be configured without the qinq-mark-top-only parameter to remove the TopQ PBits only marking restriction.

Platforms

All

match-radius-proxy-cache

match-radius-proxy-cache

Syntax

match-radius-proxy-cache

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host match-radius-proxy-cache)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host match-radius-proxy-cache

Description

Commands in this context configure RADIUS proxy cache match parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max

max

Syntax

max num-sessions

no max

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>firewall-policy>session-limits max)

[Tree] (config>service>nat>up-nat-policy>session-limits max)

[Tree] (config>service>nat>nat-policy>session-limits max)

Full Context

configure service nat firewall-policy session-limits max

configure service nat up-nat-policy session-limits max

configure service nat nat-policy session-limits max

Description

This command configures the session limit of this policy. The session limit is the maximum number of sessions allowed for a subscriber associated with this policy.

Default

max 65535

Parameters

num-sessions

Specifies the session limit.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service nat firewall-policy session-limits max

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service nat up-nat-policy session-limits max
  • configure service nat nat-policy session-limits max

max-admin-down-time

max-admin-down-time

Syntax

max-admin-down-time [[down-interval] | infinite]

no max-admin-down-time

Context

[Tree] (config>lag>bfd>family max-admin-down-time)

Full Context

configure lag bfd family max-admin-down-time

Description

This command specifies the maximum amount of time the router will continue to forward traffic over a link after the micro-BFD sessions has transitioned to a Down state because it received an ADMIN-DOWN state from the far-end. This timer provide the administrator the configured amount of time to disable or de-provision the micro-BFD session on the local node before forwarding is halted over the associated link(s).

The no form of this command removes the time interval from the configuration.

Default

max-admin-down-time 0

Parameters

down-interval

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds.

Values

-1 to 3600

infinite

Specifies no end time to forward traffic.

Platforms

All

max-advertisement

max-advertisement

Syntax

max-advertisement seconds

no max-advertisement

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 max-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 max-advertisement)

Full Context

configure service vprn router-advert interface max-advertisement

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement

configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy max-advertisement

configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement

configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 max-advertisement

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 max-advertisement

Description

This command specifies the maximum time allowed between sending unsolicited router advertisements from this interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-advertisement 1800

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the maximum advertisement interval, in seconds.

Values

900 to 1800

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-advertisement-interval

max-advertisement-interval

Syntax

[no] max-advertisement-interval seconds

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if max-advertisement-interval)

[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if max-advertisement-interval)

Full Context

configure service vprn router-advertisement interface max-advertisement-interval

configure router router-advertisement interface max-advertisement-interval

Description

This command configures the maximum interval between sending router advertisement messages.

Default

max-advertisement-interval 600

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the maximum interval in seconds between sending router advertisement messages.

Values

4 to 1800

Platforms

All

max-age

max-age

Syntax

max-age max-age

no max-age [max-age]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template>stp max-age)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp max-age)

Full Context

configure service template vpls-template stp max-age

configure service vpls stp max-age

Description

This command indicates how many hops a BPDU can traverse the network starting from the root bridge. The message age field in a BPDU transmitted by the root bridge is initialized to 0. Each other bridge will take the message_age value from BPDUs received on their root port and increment this value by 1. The message_age therefore reflects the distance from the root bridge. BPDUs with a message age exceeding max-age are ignored.

STP uses the max-age value configured in the root bridge. This value is propagated to the other bridges via the BPDUs.

The no form of this command returns the max age to the default value.

Default

max-age 20

Parameters

max-age

The max info age for the STP instance in seconds. Allowed values are integers in the range 6 to 40.

Platforms

All

max-attempts

max-attempts

Syntax

max-attempts count

max-attempts infinite

no max-attempts

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gy>efh>interim-c max-attempts)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gy extended-failure-handling interim-credit max-attempts

Description

This command configures the maximum number of attempts made to establish a new Diameter Gy session with the Online Charging Server (OCS) when Extended Failure Handling (EFH) is active.

A new attempt is made when the volume or time interim credit of a rating group is consumed or when the validity time expires for a rating group.

When the maximum number of attempts is reached, the user session associated with the Diameter session is terminated (the corresponding subscriber hosts are deleted from the system).

The no form of this command resets the value to the default value.

Default

max-attempts 10

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number attempts that is made to establish a Diameter Gy session with the OCS when EFH is active.

Values

1 to 4294967295

infinite

Specifies that an unlimited number of attempts is made to establish a Diameter Gy session with the OCS when EFH is active.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-auth-req

max-auth-req

Syntax

max-auth-req max-auth-request

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x max-auth-req)

Full Context

configure port ethernet dot1x max-auth-req

Description

This command configures the maximum number of times that the router will send an access request RADIUS message to the RADIUS server. If a reply is not received from the RADIUS server after the specified number attempts, the 802.1x authentication procedure is considered to have failed.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

max-auth-req 2

Parameters

max-auth-request

The maximum number of RADIUS retries.

Values

1 to 10

Platforms

All

max-avg

max-avg

Syntax

max-avg percent

no max-avg

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>highplus-slope max-avg)

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>high-slope max-avg)

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>exceed-slope max-avg)

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>low-slope max-avg)

Full Context

configure qos slope-policy highplus-slope max-avg

configure qos slope-policy high-slope max-avg

configure qos slope-policy exceed-slope max-avg

configure qos slope-policy low-slope max-avg

Description

Sets the exceed, low, high, or highplus Random Early Detection (RED) slope position for the shared buffer average utilization value where the packet discard probability rises directly to one. The percent parameter is expressed as a percentage of the shared buffer size.

The no form of this command restores the max-avg value to the default setting. If the current start-avg setting is larger than the default, an error will occur and the max-avg setting will not be changed to the default.

Default

max-avg 100 - Highplus slope default is 100% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

max-avg 90 — High slope default is 90% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

max-avg 75 — Low slope default is 75% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

max-avg 55 — Exceed slope default is 55% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

Parameters

percent

The percentage of the shared buffer space for the buffer pool at which point the drop probability becomes one. The value entered must be greater or equal to the current setting of start-avg. If the entered value is smaller than the current value of start-avg, an error will occur and no change will take place.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

max-bandwidth

max-bandwidth

Syntax

max-bandwidth bandwidth-in-mbps

no max-bandwidth

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth

configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth

Description

This command configures the maximum bandwidth that auto-bandwidth allocation is allowed to request for an LSP.

The LSP maximum applies whether the bandwidth adjustment is triggered by normal adjust-interval expiry, the overflow limit having been reached, or manual request.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

The max-bandwidth must be greater than the min-bandwidth.

Default

max-bandwidth 100000

Parameters

bandwidth-in-mbps

Specifies the maximum bandwidth in Mb/s.

Values

0 to 6400000

Platforms

All

max-bulk-duration

max-bulk-duration

Syntax

max-bulk-duration milliseconds

no max-bulk-duration

Context

[Tree] (config>system>snmp max-bulk-duration)

Full Context

configure system snmp max-bulk-duration

Description

This command sets the maximum duration to process an SNMP request before bulk responses are returned to avoid a timeout on the management system when a lot of information is returned in the response.

Default

no max-bulk-duration

Parameters

milliseconds

Specifies the maximum duration to process requests before bulk responses are returned.

Values

100 to 5000

Platforms

All

max-burst

max-burst

Syntax

max-burst number

no max-burst

Context

[Tree] (config>router>rsvp>msg-pacing max-burst)

Full Context

configure router rsvp msg-pacing max-burst

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of RSVP messages that are sent in the specified period under normal operating conditions.

Default

max-burst 650

Parameters

number

Specifies the maximum number of RSVP messages to be sent in increments of 10.

Values

100 to 1000

Platforms

All

max-burst-size

max-burst-size

Syntax

max-burst-size size [bytes | kilobytes]

no max-burst-size

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-acct-template>policer max-burst-size)

Full Context

configure router policy-acct-template policer max-burst-size

Description

This command configures the MBS for the policer. When this threshold value is exceeded, packets are considered violating and are dropped.

When this value is not configured, the default value is dependent on the peak-rate setting. When peak-rate is set to max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (overriding an explicitly configured MBS value), the default value is 16 megabytes; otherwise the value is capped at 3988 kilobytes with a minimum of 256 bytes.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters

size

Specifies the maximum number of RSVP messages to be sent in increments of 10.

Values

0 to 16777216 | default

bytes

Specifies that the value is in bytes.

kilobytes

Specifies that the value is in kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-bypass-associations

max-bypass-associations

Syntax

max-bypass-associations integer

no max-bypass-associations

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls max-bypass-associations)

Full Context

configure router mpls max-bypass-associations

Description

This command allows the user to set a maximum number of LSP primary path associations with each manual or dynamic bypass LSP that is created in the system.

By default, a Point of Local Repair (PLR) node will associate a maximum of 1000 primary LSP paths with a given bypass before using the next available manual bypass or signaling a new dynamic bypass.

Note that a new bypass LSP may need to be signaled if the constraint of a given primary LSP path is not met by an existing bypass LSP even if the max-bypass-associations for this bypass LSP has not been reached.

The no form of this command reinstates the default value of this parameter.

Default

max-bypass-associations 1000

Parameters

integer

Configures the number of LSP primary path associations

Values

100 to 131072

Platforms

All

max-bypass-plr-associations

max-bypass-plr-associations

Syntax

max-bypass-plr-associations plr-value

no max-bypass-plr-associations

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls max-bypass-plr-associations)

Full Context

configure router mpls max-bypass-plr-associations

Description

This command enables the configuration of the maximum number of Points of Local Repair (PLRs) per RSVP-TE bypass LSP.

A PLR summarizes the constraints applied to the computation of the path of the bypass LSP. It consists of the avoid link/node constraint, and potentially other TE constraints such as exclude SRLG, that are needed to protect against the failure of the primary path of the RSVP-TE LSP that is associated with this bypass LSP.

Additional PLRs with the same avoid link/node constraint are associated with the same bypass to minimize the number of bypass LSPs created. This command controls the maximum number of such PLRs.

Because MPLS saves only the PLR constraints of the first LSP that triggered the dynamic bypass creation, subsequent LSPs for the same avoid link/node and with the non-strict bypass SRLG disjointness enabled may be associated with the same bypass. This is even in cases where there exists a bypass LSP path that strictly satisfies the SRLG constraint.

When the maximum PLRs per bypass is configured with a value of 1, MPLS triggers the signaling of a new dynamic bypass LSP for each new PLR and saves each PLR constraint separately with its own bypass. As a result, when MPLS re-optimizes a bypass LSP it guarantees that SRLG disjointness of that PLR are checked and enforced.

The no form of this command returns the command to its default value.

Default

max-bypass-plr-associations 16

Parameters

plr-value

Configures the number of LSP primary path associations

Values

1 to 16

Default

16

Platforms

All

max-cleared

max-cleared

Syntax

max-cleared maximum

Context

[Tree] (config>system>alarms max-cleared)

Full Context

configure system alarms max-cleared

Description

This command configures the maximum number of cleared alarms that the system will store and display.

Default

max-cleared 500

Parameters

maximum

Specifies the maximum number of cleared alarms, up to 500.

Platforms

All

max-completed

max-completed

Syntax

max-completed unsigned

Context

[Tree] (config>system>script-control>script-policy max-completed)

Full Context

configure system script-control script-policy max-completed

Description

This command is used to configure the maximum number of script run history status entries to keep.

Default

max-completed 1

Parameters

unsigned

Specifies the maximum number of script run history status entries to keep.

Values

1 to 1500

Default

1

Platforms

All

max-conn-prefix

max-conn-prefix

Syntax

max-conn-prefix count

no max-conn-prefix

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server>prefix max-conn-prefix)

Full Context

configure test-oam twamp server prefix max-conn-prefix

Description

This command configures the maximum number of control connections by clients with an IP address in a specific prefix. A new control connection is rejected if accepting it would cause either the prefix limit defined by this command or the server limit (max-conn-server) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

max-conn-prefix 32

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of control connections.

Values

0 to 64

Default

32

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-conn-server

max-conn-server

Syntax

max-conn-server count

no max-conn-server

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server max-conn-server)

Full Context

configure test-oam twamp server max-conn-server

Description

This command configures the maximum number of TWAMP control connections from all TWAMP clients. A new control connection is rejected if accepting it would cause either this limit or a prefix limit (max-conn-prefix) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

max-conn-server 32

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of control connections.

Values

0 to 64

Default

32

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-data-size

max-data-size

Syntax

max-data-size bytes

Context

[Tree] (config>sflow>receiver max-data-size)

Full Context

configure sflow receiver max-data-size

Description

This configures the maximum data size for sFlow UDP datagrams sent to the collector.

To restore default configuration, execute max-data-size 1400.

Default

max-data-size 1400

Parameters

bytes

Specifies the data size.

Values

200 to 1500

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-debounce-time

max-debounce-time

Syntax

max-debounce-time max-debounce-time

no max-debounce-time

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>mc>peer>mcr>ring>in-band-control-path max-debounce-time)

[Tree] (config>redundancy>mc>peer>mc>l3-ring>in-band-control-path max-debounce-time)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ring ring in-band-control-path max-debounce-time

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer multi-chassis l3-ring in-band-control-path max-debounce-time

Description

This command configures the inband control path maximum debounce time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-debounce-time 10

Parameters

max-debounce-time

Specifies the maximum debounce time on the transition of the operational state of the inband control connection.

Values

5 to 200 seconds

Platforms

All

max-decrement

max-decrement

Syntax

max-decrement {percent percent-of-admin-pir | rate rate-in-kilobits-per-second}

no max-decrement

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>adv-config-policy>child-control>offered-measurement max-decrement)

Full Context

configure qos adv-config-policy child-control offered-measurement max-decrement

Description

This command is used to limit how fast a child queue or policer can 'give up’ bandwidth that it has been allotted from the virtual scheduler in a single iteration. If the child’s new offered rate has decreased by more than the maximum decrement limit, the system ignores the new offered rate and instead uses the old offered rate less the maximum decrement limit.

A possible reason to define a maximum decrement limit is to allow a child queue or policer to hold on to a portion of bandwidth that has been distributed by the parent virtual scheduler in case the child’s offered rate fluctuates in an erratic manor. The max-decrement limit has a dampening effect to changes in the offered rate.

A side effect of using a maximum decrement limit is that unused bandwidth allocated to the child queue or policer will not be given to another child as quickly. This may result in an underrun of the virtual scheduler’s aggregate rate.

The max-decrement limit has no effect on any increase in a child’s offered rate. If the rate increase is above the change sensitivity, the new offered rate is immediately used.

If the max-decrement command is used with a percent-based value, the decrement limit will be a function of the configured PIR value on the policer or queue. In this case, care should be taken that the child is either configured with an explicit PIR rate (other than max) or the child’s administrative PIR is defined using the percent-rate command with the local parameter enabled if an explicit value is not desired. When a maximum PIR is in use on the child, the system attempts to interpret the maximum child forwarding rate. This rate could be very large if the child is associated with multiple ingress or egress ports.

Except for the overall cap on the offered input into the virtual scheduler, the child’s administrative PIR has no effect on the calculated sensitivity if an explicit rate is specified.

If the child’s administrative PIR is modified while a percent based max-decrement is in effect, the system automatically uses the new relative maximum decrement limit value the next time the child’s offered rate is determined.

When the max-decrement command is not specified or removed, the virtual scheduler does not limit a decreasing offered rate to a specific limit.

The no form of this command is used to remove any currently configured maximum decrement limit for all child policers and queues associated with the policy.

Parameters

percent-of-admin-pir

When the percent qualifier is used, this parameter specifies the percentage of the child’s administrative PIR that should be used as the decrement limit to offered rate change. If a value of 100 or 100.00 is used, the system will interpret this equivalent to no max-decrement.

Values

1.00 to 100.00

rate-in-kilobits-per-second

When the rate qualifier is used, this parameter specifies an explicit rate, in kb/s, that should be used as the child’s offered rate change sensitivity value. If a rate sensitivity of 0 is specified, the system interprets this equivalent to no max-decrement.

Values

0 to 100,000,000

Platforms

All

max-description-size

max-description-size

Syntax

max-description-size size

no max-description-size

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>pcp-server-policy max-description-size)

Full Context

configure service nat pcp-server-policy max-description-size

Description

This command specifies the maximum length of mapping descriptions made by the PCP servers using this PCP policy.

Default

max-description-size 64

Parameters

size

Specifies the maximum length of mapping descriptions made by the PCP servers.

Values

1 to 64

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-drop-count

max-drop-count

Syntax

max-drop-count count

no max-drop-count

Context

[Tree] (config>service>sdp>keep-alive max-drop-count)

Full Context

configure service sdp keep-alive max-drop-count

Description

This command configures the number of consecutive SDP keepalive failed request attempts or remote replies that can be missed after which the SDP is operationally downed. If the max-drop-count consecutive keepalive request messages cannot be sent or no replies are received, the SDP-ID will be brought operationally down by the keepalive SDP monitoring.

The no form of this command reverts the max-drop-count count value to the default settings.

Default

max-drop-count 3

Parameters

count

Specifies the number of consecutive SDP keepalive requests that are failed to be sent or replies missed, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 5

Platforms

All

max-ecmp-routes

max-ecmp-routes

Syntax

max-ecmp-routes max-routes

no max-ecmp-routes

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp max-ecmp-routes)

Full Context

configure router ldp max-ecmp-routes

Description

This command sets the maximum number of ECMP routes that LDP may use to resolve the next hop for a FEC.

Note:

The system-wide maximum number of ECMP routes is limited by the config>router>ecmp command. This command, under the LDP context, simply allows LDP to use more than 32 routes, if they are available in RTM or TTM. When configured, the actual number of ECMP routes used by LDP is therefore min[config>router>ecmp, config>router>ldp>max-ecmp-routes].

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-ecmp-routes 32

Parameters

max-routes

Specifies the maximum number of routes.

Values

1 to 64

Platforms

All

max-entries

max-entries

Syntax

max-entries count

no max-entries

Context

[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache max-entries)

Full Context

configure python python-policy cache max-entries

Description

This command configures the maximum number of Python cache entries that can be stored in the cache of this Python policy.

If the limit has been reached, a Python exception will be thrown when requested to store another data structure.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-entries 128000

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of cache entries allowed.

Values

1 to 1000000

Platforms

All

max-entries

Syntax

max-entries max-entries

no shutdown

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>evt-log max-entries)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group event-log max-entries

Description

This command configures the number of entries in the buffer.

Default

max-entries 500

Parameters

max-entries

Specifies the maximum number of entries for the event log.

Values

1 to 100000

Default

500

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-entries

Syntax

max-entries max-entries

no max-entries

Context

[Tree] (conf>router>segment-routing>srv6>loc>static-function max-entries)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6 locator static-function max-entries

Description

This command configures the maximum number of entries from the function field that must be reserved for static End, End.X, or a service SID function assignment.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-entries 1

Parameters

max-entries

Specifies the maximum number of entries for the SRv6 locator.

Values

1 to 1048575

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-entries

Syntax

max-entries max-entries

no max-entries

Context

[Tree] (conf>router>sr>srv6>ms>block>static-function max-entries)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6 micro-segment block static-function max-entries

Description

This command configures the maximum number of entries from the function field that must be reserved for static uA or a micro-service SID function assignment. This value must be smaller than the number of local micro-SIDs, calculated as: 2^sid-length - 1024 * global-sid-entries.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-entries 1

Parameters

max-entries

Specifies the maximum number of entries for the SRv6 micro-segment locator.

Values

1 to 1048575

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-entry-lifetime

max-entry-lifetime

Syntax

max-entry-lifetime [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

no max-entry-lifetime

Context

[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache max-entry-lifetime)

Full Context

configure python python-policy cache max-entry-lifetime

Description

This command configures the maximum allowed lifetime for each entry of the Python cache of this Python policy.

When adding data to the Python cache the lifetime of the given object must always be specified. If the specified lifetime is bigger than the configured value, then the value of the max-entry-lifetime will be used instead of the lifetime that was specified.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-entry-lifetime days 1

Parameters

days days

Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in days.

Values

0 to 7

Default

1

hrs hours

Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in hours.

Values

0 to 23

min minutes

Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in minutes.

Values

0 to 59

sec seconds

Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in seconds.

Values

0 to 59

Platforms

All

max-fail

max-fail

Syntax

max-fail no-response-count

no max-fail

Context

[Tree] (config>saa>test>type-multi-line>lsp-trace>sr-policy max-fail)

Full Context

configure saa test type-multi-line lsp-trace sr-policy max-fail

Description

This command configures the maximum number of consecutive MPLS echo requests that do not receive a reply before the trace operation fails for a TTL.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-fail 5

Parameters

no-response-count

Specifies the maximum number of consecutive MPLS echo requests, expressed as a decimal integer, that do not receive a reply before the trace operation fails for a TTL.

Values

1 to 255

Default

5

Platforms

All

max-files-number

max-files-number

Syntax

max-files-number number

Context

[Tree] (config>call-trace max-files-number)

Full Context

configure call-trace max-files-number

Description

This command configures the maximum number of files call trace can create.

Default

max-files-number 200

Parameters

number

Specifies the maximum number of all call trace log files stored on all compact flash cards together.

Values

1 to 1024

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-fragment-delay

max-fragment-delay

Syntax

max-fragment-delay milliseconds

no max-fragment-delay

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>mlppp max-fragment-delay)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-fragment-delay)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-fragment-delay)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>mlppp max-fragment-delay)

Full Context

configure service vprn l2tp group mlppp max-fragment-delay

configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-fragment-delay

configure router l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-fragment-delay

configure router l2tp group mlppp max-fragment-delay

Description

This command is applicable only to LNS. It determines the maximum fragment delay caused by the transmission that will be imposed on a link.

Fragmentation can be used to interleave high priority packet in-between low priority fragments on a MLPPPoX session with a single link or on a MLPPPoX session with multiple links to better load balance traffic over multiple member links.

Default

no max-fragment-delay

Parameters

milliseconds

Specifies the interval, in milliseconds.

Values

5 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

max-groups

max-groups

Syntax

max-groups max-groups

no max-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if max-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if max-groups)

Full Context

configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-groups

configure service vprn igmp interface max-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of groups for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed.

The no form of this command removes the value.

Parameters

max-groups

Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-groups

All

  • configure service vprn igmp interface max-groups

max-groups

Syntax

max-groups value

no max-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>if max-groups)

Full Context

configure service vprn mld interface max-groups

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed.

Default

0 (no limit to the number of groups)

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

All

max-groups

Syntax

max-groups value

no max-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if max-groups)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim interface max-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of groups for which PIM can have downstream state based on received PIM Joins on this interface. This does not include IGMP local receivers on the interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of groups.

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

All

max-groups

Syntax

max-groups value

no max-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>if max-groups)

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface max-groups)

Full Context

configure router igmp interface max-groups

configure router igmp group-interface max-groups

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed. This command is applicable for IPv4 and IPv6.

The no form of the command sets no limit to the number of groups.

Default

no max-groups

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

All

  • configure router igmp interface max-groups

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router igmp group-interface max-groups

max-groups

Syntax

max-groups [1..16000]

no max-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mld>if max-groups)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface max-groups)

Full Context

configure router mld interface max-groups

configure router mld group-interface max-groups

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. New groups are not allowed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-groups 0 (no limit to the number of groups)

Parameters

1..16000

Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

All

  • configure router mld interface max-groups

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router mld group-interface max-groups

max-groups

Syntax

max-groups [value]

no max-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim>interface max-groups)

Full Context

configure router pim interface max-groups

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which PIM can have local receiver information based on received PIM reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed. This command is applicable for IPv4 and IPv6.

The no form of this command sets no limit to the number of groups.

Default

no max-groups

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

All

max-grp-sources

max-grp-sources

Syntax

max-grp-sources max-group-sources

no max-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if max-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>interface max-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if max-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure service vprn igmp interface max-grp-sources

configure service vprn mld interface max-grp-sources

configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-grp-sources 0

Parameters

max-grp-sources

Specifies the maximum number of group source.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

All

  • configure service vprn mld interface max-grp-sources
  • configure service vprn igmp interface max-grp-sources

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-grp-sources

max-grp-sources

Syntax

max-grp-sources value

no max-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>if max-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface max-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure router igmp interface max-grp-sources

configure router igmp group-interface max-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default

no max-grp-sources

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of group sources.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

All

  • configure router igmp interface max-grp-sources

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router igmp group-interface max-grp-sources

max-grp-sources

Syntax

max-grp-sources [grp-source]

no max-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface max-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>if max-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure router mld group-interface max-grp-sources

configure router mld interface max-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-grp-sources 0 (no limit to the number of sources)

Parameters

grp-source

Specifies the maximum number of group sources.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router mld group-interface max-grp-sources

All

  • configure router mld interface max-grp-sources

max-held-sessions

max-held-sessions

Syntax

max-held-sessions max-held-sessions

no max-held-sessions

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>gtp max-held-sessions)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt gtp max-held-sessions

Description

This command configures the maximum number of GTP sessions to be held while their UE is disconnected.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-held-sessions 2000

Parameters

max-held-sessions

Specifies the maximum number of GTP sessions.

Values

0 to 500000

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-history-esp-key-records

max-history-esp-key-records

Syntax

max-history-esp-key-records max-records

no max-history-esp-key-records

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records)

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)

[Tree] (config>ipsec>trans-mode-prof max-history-esp-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records

configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records

configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records

configure ipsec ipsec-transport-mode-profile max-history-esp-key-records

configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records

Description

This command enables the system to keep records of CHILD-SA keys. There is a system wide limit of maximum number of IPsec tunnels that save keys. If the number of tunnel exceeds that limit, the system does not save keys for the new tunnels. Contact Nokia support for details of the limitation.

This command is ignored if the config>ipsec>no show-ipsec-keys command is configured.

The no form of this command prevents the system from keeping records.

Default

no max-history-esp-key-records

Parameters

max-records

Specifies the maximum number of recent records.

Values

1 to 48

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records
  • configure ipsec ipsec-transport-mode-profile max-history-esp-key-records
  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records

VSR

  • configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
  • configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
  • configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records

max-history-ike-key-records

max-history-ike-key-records

Syntax

max-history-ike-key-records max-records

no max-history-ike-key-records

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records)

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>manual-keying max-history-ike-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records)

[Tree] (config>ipsec>trans-mode-prof max-history-ike-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records

configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying max-history-ike-key-records

configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records

configure ipsec ipsec-transport-mode-profile max-history-ike-key-records

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records

configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records

configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records

Description

This command enables the system to keep records of IKE-SA keys for the corresponding ipsec-gw, ipsec-tunnel, or ipsec-transport-mode-profile.

This command is ignored if the config>ipsec>no show-ipsec-keys command is enabled. There is a system-wide limit for the maximum number of IPsec tunnels that save keys. If the number of tunnels exceeds that limit, the system does not save keys for the new tunnels. Contact Nokia support for details of the limitation.

The no form of this command prevents the system from keeping records.

Default

no max-history-ike-key-records

Parameters

max-records

Specifies the maximum number of recent records.

Values

1 to 3

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records
  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records
  • configure ipsec ipsec-transport-mode-profile max-history-ike-key-records
  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records

VSR

  • configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying max-history-ike-key-records
  • configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records
  • configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records

max-igmp-latency

max-igmp-latency

Syntax

max-igmp-latency milli-seconds

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if max-igmp-latency)

Full Context

configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface max-igmp-latency

Description

After the subscriber requests a fast channel change using RTCP, the video ISA bursts the video content as unicast to the subscriber. When the unicasted content has caught up to the multicast, the video ISA sends a notification message using RTCP to the subscriber to switch over to multicast with an IGMP request. When the notification message from the video ISA is sent, the max-igmp-latency timer starts. The video ISA continues to send unicast video until the max-igmp-latency expires or until the subscriber, using RTCP, informs the video ISA of the exact sequence number to stop (whichever occurs first). The max-igmp-latency is the maximum delay that the multicast router takes to respond and deliver the multicast upon the subscriber IGMP request.

Parameters

milli-seconds

Specifies the maximum delay in milliseconds.

Values

10 to 1000

Default

100

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

max-lanext-bd

max-lanext-bd

Syntax

max-lanext-bd [value]

no max-lanext-bd

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw max-lanext-bd)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw max-lanext-bd)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw max-lanext-bd

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw max-lanext-bd

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of HLE BDs for this group interface.

The no form of this command disables HLE for the group interface.

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of Bridged Domains for this interface.

Values

1 to 131071

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-lease-time

max-lease-time

Syntax

max-lease-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

no max-lease-time

Context

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool max-lease-time)

Full Context

configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool max-lease-time

Description

This command configures the maximum lease time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-lease-time days 10

Parameters

max-lease-time

Specifies the maximum lease time.

Values

days

0 to 3650

hours

0 to 23

minutes

0 to 59

seconds

0 to 59

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-lifetime

max-lifetime

Syntax

max-lifetime hours

no max-lifetime

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gy>ccrt-replay max-lifetime)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gx>ccrt-replay max-lifetime)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gy ccrt-replay max-lifetime

configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gx ccrt-replay max-lifetime

Description

This command specifies the maximum period of time that CCR-T messages for Diameter Gx or Gy sessions that belong to the Diameter application policy are replayed.

The no form of this command resets the maximum lifetime to the default value setting.

Default

max-lifetime 24

Parameters

hours

Specifies the maximum lifetime after which the CCR-T messages are no longer replayed.

Values

1 to 24

Default

24

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-links

max-links

Syntax

max-links max-links

no max-links

Context

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-links)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-links)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>mlppp max-links)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>mlppp max-links)

Full Context

configure router l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-links

configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-links

configure service vprn l2tp group mlppp max-links

configure router l2tp group mlppp max-links

Description

This command is applicable only to LNS. It determines the maximum number of links that can be put in a bundle.

Any attempt of a session to join a bundle that is above the max-link limit will be rejected.

If interleaving is configured, it is recommended that max-links be set to 1 or a version of the command is used (no max-links). Both have the same effect.

The configuration under the tunnel hierarchy will override the configuration under the group hierarchy.

The no form of this command limits the number of links in the bundle to 1.

Default

no max-links

Parameters

max-links

Specifies the maximum number of links in a bundle.

Values

1 to 8

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

max-list-length

max-list-length

Syntax

max-list-length unlimited

max-list-length count

no max-list-length

Context

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>tunnel-sel max-list-length)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>tunnel-sel max-list-length)

Full Context

configure router l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-list-length

configure service vprn l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-list-length

Description

This command specifies the number of tunnels or peers that can be in the tunnel-selection-blacklist. If a tunnel or peer needs to be added to the denylist and the denylist is full, the system removes the item (tunnel or peer) from the denylist that was in this denylist for the longest time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-list-length unlimited

Parameters

unlimited

Specifies there is no limit.

count

Specifies how many items (tunnels or peers) can be in the denylist.

Values

1 to 65635

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-lockout-hosts

max-lockout-hosts

Syntax

max-lockout-hosts hosts

no max-lockout-hosts

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>host-lockout-plcy max-lockout-hosts)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt host-lockout-policy max-lockout-hosts

Description

When a client enters lockout, authentication and ESM host creation is suppressed. A lightweight context maintains the lockout state and the timeouts for the client in lockout. This command allows the number of lockout contexts to be configured per SAP. If the number of existing contexts reaches the configured count, incoming hosts that fail authentication or creation are not subject to lockout, and are retried as normal.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-lockout-hosts 100

Parameters

hosts

Specifies the maximum number of lockout host.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-mac

max-mac

Syntax

max-mac [value]

no max-mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access max-mac)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access max-mac)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access max-mac

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access max-mac

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of allowed MAC addresses on the access side of HLE.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-mac 20

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of MAC entries in bridged domains.

Values

1 to 128

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-mac

Syntax

max-mac [value]

no max-mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>xconnect max-mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>xconnect max-mac)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw ranges range vrgw lanext xconnect max-mac

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw ranges range vrgw lanext xconnect max-mac

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of allowed MAC in the bridge domain.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-mac 20

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of MAC entries in bridged domains.

Values

1 to 128

max-mac

Syntax

max-mac [value]

no max-mac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>network max-mac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>network max-mac)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext network max-mac

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext network max-mac

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of allowed VM MAC addresses on the access side of HLE.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-mac 20

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of VM MAC entries in bridged domains.

Values

1 to 128

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-msg-count

max-msg-count

Syntax

max-msg-count count

Context

[Tree] (config>system>telemetry>notification-bundling max-msg-count)

Full Context

configure system telemetry notification-bundling max-msg-count

Description

This command sets the maximum number of notifications that can be bundled in a single telemetry message.

The no form of this command returns the message count to the default value.

Default

max-msg-count 100

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum of notifications that can be bundled in a single telemetry message.

Values

2 to 1000

Platforms

All

max-msg-size

max-msg-size

Syntax

max-msg-size number

no max-msg-size

Context

[Tree] (config>system>grpc max-msg-size)

Full Context

configure system grpc max-msg-size

Description

This command configures the maximum rx message size that can be received.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-msg-size 512

Parameters

number

Specifies the message size, in MB.

Values

1 to 1024

Default

512

Platforms

All

max-nbr-mac-addr

max-nbr-mac-addr

Syntax

max-nbr-mac-addr table-size

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template max-nbr-mac-addr)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan max-nbr-mac-addr)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp max-nbr-mac-addr)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap max-nbr-mac-addr)

Full Context

configure service template vpls-sap-template max-nbr-mac-addr

configure service vpls vxlan max-nbr-mac-addr

configure service vpls spoke-sdp max-nbr-mac-addr

configure service vpls sap max-nbr-mac-addr

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of FDB entries for both learned and static MAC addresses for this instance.

When the configured limit is reached, no new addresses are learned from the SAP or spoke SDP until at least one FDB entry is aged out or cleared.

When the configured limit is reached and the discard-unknown-source command is enabled for this instance, packets with unknown source MAC addresses are discarded. If discard-unknown-source is disabled, the packets are forwarded if their destination MAC addresses are known, or flooded if their destination MAC addresses are unknown.

However, if the configure service vpls discard-unknown command is enabled, packets with unknown destination MAC addresses are discarded, even if the limit of FDB entries on the specific VPLS instance is not reached.

The no form of this command restores the global MAC learning limitations for this instance.

Default

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Parameters

table-size

Specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed in the FDB of this service.

Values

1 to 511999 for the 7750 SR

1 to 131071 for the 7450 ESS

Platforms

All

  • configure service template vpls-sap-template max-nbr-mac-addr
  • configure service vpls sap max-nbr-mac-addr
  • configure service vpls spoke-sdp max-nbr-mac-addr

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service vpls vxlan max-nbr-mac-addr

max-nbr-mac-addr

Syntax

max-nbr-mac-addr table-size

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Context

[Tree] (config>service>pw-template max-nbr-mac-addr)

Full Context

configure service pw-template max-nbr-mac-addr

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of FDB entries for both learned and static MAC addresses for this instance.

When the configured limit is reached, no new addresses are learned from the SAP or spoke SDP until at least one FDB entry is aged out or cleared.

When the configured limit is reached and the discard-unknown-source command is enabled for this instance, packets with unknown source MAC addresses are discarded. If discard-unknown-source is disabled, the packets are forwarded if their destination MAC addresses are known, or flooded if their destination MAC addresses are unknown.

However, if the configure service vpls discard-unknown command is enabled, packets with unknown destination MAC addresses are discarded, even if the limit of FDB entries on the specific VPLS instance is not reached.

The no form of this command restores the global MAC learning limitations for this instance.

Default

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Parameters

table-size

Specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed in the FDB of this service.

Values

1 to 511999

Platforms

All

max-nbr-mac-addr

Syntax

max-nbr-mac-addr table-size

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint max-nbr-mac-addr)

Full Context

configure service vpls endpoint max-nbr-mac-addr

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of FDB entries for both learned and static MAC addresses for this instance.

When the configured limit is reached, no new addresses are learned from the SAP or spoke SDP until at least one FDB entry is aged out or cleared. Packets with unknown source MAC addresses are still forwarded if their destination MAC addresses are known, or flooded if their destination MAC addresses are unknown.

The no form of this command restores the global MAC learning limitations for this instance.

Default

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Parameters

table-size

Specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed in the FDB of this service.

Values

1 to 511999 for the 7750 SR

1 to 131071 for the 7450 ESS

Platforms

All

max-nbr-of-leases

max-nbr-of-leases

Syntax

max-nbr-of-leases max-nbr-of-leases

no max-nbr-of-leases

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>dhcp6-server max-nbr-of-leases)

Full Context

configure service ies interface ipv6 dhcp6-server max-nbr-of-leases

Description

This command configures the maximum number of lease states installed by the DHCPv6 server function allowed on this interface.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

max-nbr-of-leases 8000

Parameters

max-nbr-of-leases

Specifies the maximum number of lease states installed by the DHCPv6 server function allowed on this interface.

Values

0 to 8000

Platforms

All

max-num-groups

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups count

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping max-num-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping max-num-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mld-snooping max-num-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping max-num-groups

configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-groups

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-groups

configure service vpls sap mld-snooping max-num-groups

configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping max-num-groups

configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-groups

Description

This command defines the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined on this SAP or SDP. If the node receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

no max-num-groups

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined on this SAP or SDP.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

All

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-trk max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command disables the check.

Default

no max-num-groups

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

Values

1 to 196607

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups.

Values

0 to 16000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-trk max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Default

no max-num-groups

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

Values

1 to 196607

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

Values

1 to 196607

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined on an MSAP or SDP. If the router receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined on an MSAP or SDP.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups count

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>mld-policy max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy max-num-groups

Description

This command defines the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined. If the router receives a join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-snooping max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

Values

1 to 196607

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups max-num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Default

no max-num-groups

Parameters

max-num-groups

Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

Values

1 to 196607

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups num-groups

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>pim-snooping max-num-groups)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>pim-snooping max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service vpls spoke-sdp pim-snooping max-num-groups

configure service vpls sap pim-snooping max-num-groups

Description

This command configures the maximum groups for PIM snooping.

Parameters

num-groups

Specifies the maximum groups for PIM snooping.

Values

1 to 16000

Platforms

All

max-num-groups

Syntax

max-num-groups count

no max-num-groups

Context

[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)

Full Context

configure service pw-template igmp-snooping max-num-groups

Description

This command defines the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined. If the router receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

Default

no max-num-groups

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

All

max-num-grp-sources

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax

max-num-grp-sources [max-num-grp-sources]

no max-num-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy max-num-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy max-num-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-grp-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax

max-num-grp-sources [max-num-grp-sources]

no max-num-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>igmp-trk max-num-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-grp-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax

max-num-grp-sources [max-num-grp-sources]

no max-num-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>mld-policy max-num-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy max-num-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources are not allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-grp-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax

[no] max-num-grp-sources [number]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources are not allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

number

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 32000

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax

max-num-grp-sources [1 to 32000]

no max-num-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources

configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources

configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources

Description

This command defines the maximum number of multicast SGs that can be joined on this SAP or SDP. If the node receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of SGs, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command disables the check.

Default

no max-num-grp-sources

Parameters

1 to 32000

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Platforms

All

  • configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources
  • configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources
  • configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax

max-num-grp-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-grp-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources

Description

This command configures the max number of multicast (S,G)s allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command disables the check.

Default

no max-num-grp-sources

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 32000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-sources

max-num-sources

Syntax

max-num-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy max-num-sources)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy max-num-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources.

The no form of this command disables the command.

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-sources

Syntax

max-num-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-sources

Syntax

max-num-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>mld-policy max-num-sources)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy max-num-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed per group.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-sources

Syntax

max-num-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-snooping max-num-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 1000

max-num-sources

Syntax

max-num-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources

configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-sources

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-sources

configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-sources

Description

This command defines the maximum number of multicast sources that can be joined on this SAP or SDP. If the node receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of sources, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed per group.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources

All

  • configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-sources
  • configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-sources
  • configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-sources

max-num-sources

Syntax

max-num-sources max-num-sources

no max-num-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters

max-num-sources

Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-num-ue

max-num-ue

Syntax

max-num-ue maximum

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>tunnel-query max-num-ue)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw tunnel-query max-num-ue

Description

This command enables matching only on tunnels that have, at most, the specified number of UEs connected.

Default

max-num-ue 4294967295

Parameters

maximum

Specifies the maximum number of UEs.

Values

0 to 4294967295

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-path

max-path

Syntax

max-path max-paths

no max-path

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>ldp-treetrace>path-discovery max-path)

Full Context

configure test-oam ldp-treetrace path-discovery max-path

Description

This command configures the maximum number of ECMP paths the path discovery attempts to discover for each run every interval minute.

The no form of this command resets the time out to its default value.

Default

no max-path

Parameters

max-paths

Specifies the tree discovery maximum path.

Values

1 to 128

Platforms

All

max-payload-length

max-payload-length

Syntax

max-payload-length direction direction [create]

no max-payload-length direction direction

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter max-payload-length)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter max-payload-length

Description

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing drops due to the GTP filter maximum payload length. A maximum payload length drop TCA can be created for traffic generated from the subscriber side of AA (from-sub) or for traffic generated from the network toward the AA subscriber (to-sub). The create keyword is mandatory when creating a maximum payload length drop TCA.

Parameters

direction

Specifies the traffic direction.

Values

from-sub, to-sub

create

Keyword used to create the TCA.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-payload-length

Syntax

max-payload-length bytes

no max-payload-length

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-filter max-payload-length)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter max-payload-length

Description

This command specifies the maximum allowed GTP payload size.

The no form of this command removes this GTP message length filter.

Default

no max-payload-length

Parameters

bytes

Specifies the packet length in bytes.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-peer

max-peer

Syntax

max-peer max-peer

no max-peer

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x>macsec>sub-port max-peer)

Full Context

configure port ethernet dot1x macsec sub-port max-peer

Description

This command configures the max peer allowed under this MACsec instance.

Note:

The peer establishment is a race condition and first come first serve. On any security zone, only 32 peers can be supported. See SA Exhaustion Behavior for more details.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

no max-peer

Parameters

max-peer

The maximum number of peers supported on this port.

Values

0 to 32

Platforms

All

max-percent-rate

max-percent-rate

Syntax

max-percent-rate percentage [local-limit | reference-port-limit]

no max-percent-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root max-percent-rate)

Full Context

configure qos policer-control-policy root max-percent-rate

Description

This command configures the maximum percentage rate for the policer control policy.

The no form of this command removes the configuration.

Parameters

percentage

Specifies the percentage.

Values

0.01 to 100.00

local-limit

Keyword used to specify the local limit.

reference-port-limit

Keyword used to specify the reference port limit.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-prob

max-prob

Syntax

max-prob percent

no max-prob

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>high-slope max-prob)

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>highplus-slope max-prob)

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>low-slope max-prob)

[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>exceed-slope max-prob)

Full Context

configure qos slope-policy high-slope max-prob

configure qos slope-policy highplus-slope max-prob

configure qos slope-policy low-slope max-prob

configure qos slope-policy exceed-slope max-prob

Description

This command sets the exceed, low, high, or highplus Random Early Detection (RED) slope position for the maximum non-one packet discard probability value before the packet discard probability rises directly to one. The percent parameter is expressed as a percentage of packet discard probability where always discard is a probability of 1. A max-prob value of 80 represents 80% of 1, or a packet discard probability of 0.8.

The no form of this command restores the max-prob value to the default setting.

Default

max-prob 80

Parameters

percent

The maximum drop probability percentage corresponding to the max-avg, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

max-rate

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate percent percent-rate

max-rate pir-rate

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>hw-agg-shap-sched-plcy max-rate)

Full Context

configure qos hw-agg-shaper-scheduler-policy max-rate

Description

This command configures the maximum frame-based rate of the hardware aggregate shaper scheduler policy expressed as a percentage of the port rate or as the PIR rate.

The no form of this command removes the rate from the configuration.

Parameters

percent-rate

Specifies the percentage rate.

Values

0.01 to 100.00

pir-rate

Specifies the PIR rate in kb/s.

Values

1 to 6400000000, max

Platforms

7750 SR-1, 7750 SR-s

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate {rate | max}

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>ingress>policer-control-policy max-rate)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>egress>policer-control-policy max-rate)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile ingress policer-control-policy max-rate

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile egress policer-control-policy max-rate

Description

This command defines the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s decrement rate. A parent policer is created for each time the policer-control-policy is applied to either a SAP or subscriber instance. Packets that are not discarded by the child policers associated with the SAP or subscriber instance are evaluated against the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket.

For each packet, the bucket is first decremented by the correct amount based on the decrement rate to derive the current bucket depth. The current depth is then compared to one of two discard thresholds associated with the packet. The first discard threshold (discard-unfair) is applied if the FIR (Fair Information Rate) leaky bucket in the packet’s child policer is in the confirming state. The second discard threshold (discard-all) is applied if the child policer's FIR leaky bucket is in the exceed state. Only one of the two thresholds is applied per packet. If the current depth of the parent policer PIR bucket is less than the threshold value, the parent PIR bucket is in the conform state for that particular packet. If the depth is equal to or greater than the applied threshold, the bucket is in the violate state for the packet.

If the result is "conform,” the bucket depth is increased by the size of the packet (plus or minus the per-packet-offset setting in the child policer) and the packet is not discarded by the parent policer. If the result is "violate,” the bucket depth is not increased and the packet is discarded by the parent policer. When the parent policer discards a packet, any bucket depth increases (PIR, CIR and FIR) in the parent policer caused by the packet are canceled. This prevents packets that are discarded by the parent policer from consuming the child policers PIR, CIR and FIR bandwidth.

The policer-control-policy root max-rate setting may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-rate max

Parameters

rate

Specifies the max rate in kilobits per second. Defining the rate value is mutually exclusive with the max parameter. The rate (in kilobits per second) value must be defined as an integer that represents the number of kilobytes that the parent policer is decremented per second. The actual decrement is performed per packet based on the time that has elapsed since the last packet associated with the parent policer.

Values

0 to 2000000000

max

Specifies the maximum frame-based bandwidth limit of this policer. The max parameter is mutually exclusive with defining a rate (in kilobits per second) value. When max is specified, the parent policer does not enforce a maximum rate on the aggregate throughput of the child policers. This is the default setting when the policer-control-policy is first created and is the value that the parent policer returns to when a no max-rate command is executed. In order for the parent policer to be effective, a rate (in kilobits per second) value should be specified.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate {rate | max}

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>network>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>acc>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

Full Context

configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-control-override max-rate

configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-control-override max-rate

Description

This command defines the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s decrement rate. A parent policer is created for each time the policer-control-policy is applied to either a SAP or subscriber instance. Packets that are not discarded by the child policers associated with the SAP or subscriber instance are evaluated against the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket.

For each packet, the bucket is first decremented by the correct amount based on the decrement rate to derive the current bucket depth. The current depth is then compared to one of two discard thresholds associated with the packet. The first discard threshold (discard-unfair) is applied if the FIR (Fair Information Rate) leaky bucket in the packet’s child policer is in the confirming state. The second discard threshold (discard-all) is applied if the child policer's FIR leaky bucket is in the exceed state. Only one of the two thresholds is applied per packet. If the current depth of the parent policer PIR bucket is less than the threshold value, the parent PIR bucket is in the conform state for that particular packet. If the depth is equal to or greater than the applied threshold, the bucket is in the violate state for the packet.

If the result is "conform,” the bucket depth is increased by the size of the packet (plus or minus the per-packet-offset setting in the child policer) and the packet is not discarded by the parent policer. If the result is "violate,” the bucket depth is not increased and the packet is discarded by the parent policer. When the parent policer discards a packet, any bucket depth increases (PIR, CIR and FIR) in the parent policer caused by the packet are canceled. This prevents packets that are discarded by the parent policer from consuming the child policers PIR, CIR and FIR bandwidth.

The policer-control-policy root max-rate setting may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Default

max-rate max

Parameters

rate

Specifies that a kilobits-per-second value is mutually exclusive with the max keyword. The kilobits-per-second value must be defined as an integer that represents the number of kilobytes that the parent policer will be decremented per second. The actual decrement is performed per packet based on the time that has elapsed since the last packet associated with the parent policer.

Values

0 to 2000000000

max

The max keyword is mutually exclusive with defining a kilobits-per-second value. When max is specified, the parent policer does not enforce a maximum rate on the aggregate throughput of the child policers. This is the default setting when the policer-control-policy is first created and is the value that the parent policer returns to when no max-rate is executed. In order for the parent policer to be effective, a kilobits-per-second value should be specified.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate pir-rate

max-rate percent percent-rate

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)

Full Context

configure port tdm e1 channel-group egress-scheduler-override max-rate

configure port sonet-sdh path egress-scheduler-override max-rate

configure port tdm ds1 channel-group egress-scheduler-override max-rate

configure port ethernet egress-scheduler-override max-rate

configure port tdm e3 egress-scheduler-override max-rate

configure port tdm ds3 egress-scheduler-override max-rate

Description

This command overrides the max-rate parameter found in the port-scheduler-policy associated with the port. When a max-rate is defined at the port or channel level, the port scheduler policies max-rate parameter is ignored.

The egress-scheduler-override max-rate command supports a parameter that allows the override command to restore the default of not having a rate limit on the port scheduler. This is helpful when the port scheduler policy has an explicit maximum rate defined and it is desirable to remove this limit at the port instance.

The no form of this command removes the maximum rate override from the egress port or channels port scheduler context. Once removed, the max-rate parameter from the port scheduler policy associated with the port or channel will be used by the local scheduler context.

Parameters

pir-rate

Specifies the explicit maximum frame based bandwidth limit, in kilobits per second. This value overrides the QoS scheduler policy rate.

Values

For Ethernet: 1 to 6400000000, max

For SONET-SDH and TDM: 1 to 3200000000, max

percent-rate

Specifies the percent rate.

Values

0.01 to 100.00

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

  • configure port tdm ds1 channel-group egress-scheduler-override max-rate
  • configure port tdm ds3 egress-scheduler-override max-rate
  • configure port tdm e3 egress-scheduler-override max-rate
  • configure port tdm e1 channel-group egress-scheduler-override max-rate

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure port sonet-sdh path egress-scheduler-override max-rate

All

  • configure port ethernet egress-scheduler-override max-rate

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate rate

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>egress>hs-sched-ovr max-rate)

Full Context

configure port ethernet egress hs-scheduler-overrides max-rate

Description

This command overrides the max-rate configured in the HS scheduler policy applied to the port egress.

The no form of this command removes the max-rate override from the port egress configuration.

Parameters

rate

Specifies the explicit maximum frame based bandwidth limit, in megabits per second. This parameter is required when executing this command.

Values

1 to 100000, max

Platforms

7750 SR-7/12/12e

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate {rate | max}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override max-rate)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Parameters

rate

Specifies the rate override in kilobits per second.

Values

1 to 6400000000

max

Specifies the maximum rate override.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
  • configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
  • configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
  • configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
  • configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate {rate | max}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service vpls sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes an explicit rate value from the aggregate rate therefore returning it to its default value.

Parameters

rate | max

Specifies the max rate override in kilobits per second or use the maximum

Values

1 to 6400000000, max

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate {rate | max}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service ies interface sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

Parameters

rate | max

Specifies the rate override in kilobits per second or use the maximum override value.

Values

1 to 6400000000, max

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate {rate | max}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-control-override max-rate

configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Parameters

rate | max

Specifies the rate override in kilobits per second or use the maximum override value.

Values

1 to 6400000000, max

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate rate

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root max-rate)

Full Context

configure qos policer-control-policy root max-rate

Description

The max-rate command defines the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s decrement rate. A parent policer is created for each time the policer-control-policy is applied to either a SAP or subscriber instance for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or multiservice site instance for the 7950 XRS. Packets that are not discarded by the child policers associated with the SAP or subscriber or multiservice site instances are evaluated against the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket.

For each packet, the bucket is first decremented by the correct amount based on the decrement rate to derive the current bucket depth. The current depth is then compared to one of two discard thresholds associated with the packet. The first discard threshold (discard-unfair) is applied if the FIR (Fair Information Rate) leaky bucket in the packet’s child policer is in the confirming state. The second discard threshold (discard-all) is applied if the child policer's FIR leaky bucket is in the exceed state. Only one of the two thresholds is applied per packet. If the current depth of the parent policer PIR bucket is less than the threshold value, the parent PIR bucket is in the conform state for that particular packet. If the depth is equal to or greater than the applied threshold, the bucket is in the violate state for the packet.

If the result is "conform,” the bucket depth is increased by the size of the packet (plus or minus the per-packet-offset setting in the child policer) and the packet is not discarded by the parent policer. If the result is "violate,” the bucket depth is not increased and the packet is discarded by the parent policer. When the parent policer discards a packet, any bucket depth increases (PIR, CIR and FIR) in the parent policer caused by the packet are canceled. This prevents packets that are discarded by the parent policer from consuming the child policers PIR, CIR, and FIR bandwidth.

The policer-control-policy root max-rate setting may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Parameters

rate

The kilobits-per-second value must be defined as an integer that represents the number of kilobytes that the parent policer will be decremented per second. The actual decrement is performed per packet, based on the time that has elapsed since the last packet associated with the parent policer.

Values

1 to 6400000000, max

max

When max is specified, the parent policer does not enforce a maximum rate on the aggregate throughput of the child policers. This is the default setting when the policer-control-policy is first created and is the value that the parent policer returns to when no max-rate is executed. In order for the parent policer to be effective, a kilobits-per-second value should be specified.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate rate

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>hs-scheduler-policy max-rate)

Full Context

configure qos hs-scheduler-policy max-rate

Description

This command defines an explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit for the HS scheduler policy scheduler context. If a maximum rate is defined that is smaller than the port rate, the port is rate-limited to the configured megabits per second value. This command can be executed at any time for any non-default existing HS scheduler policy.

The no form of the command removes an explicit rate value from the HS scheduler policy. After the explicit rate value is removed, all instances of the scheduler policy on HSQ egress ports are allowed to run at the available line rate unless the instance has a max rate override in place.

Parameters

rate

Specifies the explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit, in megabits per second. This parameter is required when executing this command.

Values

1 to 100000, max

Platforms

7750 SR-7/12/12e

max-rate

Syntax

max-rate pir-rate

max-rate percent percent-rate

no max-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy max-rate)

Full Context

configure qos port-scheduler-policy max-rate

Description

This command defines an explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit for the port scheduler policies scheduler context. By default, when a scheduler policy is associated with a port or channel, the instance of the scheduler on the port automatically limits the bandwidth to the lesser of port or channel line rate and a possible egress-rate value (for Ethernet ports). If a max-rate is defined that is smaller than the port or channel rate, the expressed kilobits per second value is used instead. The max-rate command is another way to sub-rate the port or channel. This command can be used on channels only on the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR.

The max-rate command may be executed at any time for an existing port-scheduler-policy. When a new max-rate is given for a policy, the system evaluates all instances of the policy to see if the configured rate is smaller than the available port or channel bandwidth. If the rate is smaller and the maximum rate is not currently overridden on the scheduler instance, the scheduler instance is updated with the new maximum rate value.

The max-rate value defined in the policy may be overridden on each scheduler instance. If the maximum rate is explicitly defined as an override on a port or channel, the policies max-rate value has no effect.

The no form of this command removes an explicit rate value from the port scheduler policy. When removed, all instances of the scheduler policy on egress ports or channel are allowed to run at the available line rate unless the instance has a max-rate override in place.

Parameters

pir-rate

Specifies the PIR rate, in kilobits per second.

Values

1 to 6400000000, max

percent percent-rate

Specifies the percent rate.

Values

0.01 to 100.00

Platforms

All

max-retries-estab

max-retries-estab

Syntax

max-retries-estab max-retries

no max-retries-estab

Context

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp max-retries-estab)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-estab)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group max-retries-estab)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group max-retries-estab)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-estab)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp max-retries-estab)

Full Context

configure router l2tp max-retries-estab

configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel max-retries-estab

configure router l2tp group max-retries-estab

configure service vprn l2tp group max-retries-estab

configure router l2tp group tunnel max-retries-estab

configure service vprn l2tp max-retries-estab

Description

This command configures the number of retries allowed for this L2TP tunnel while it is established, before its control connection goes down.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Default

no max-retries-estab

Parameters

max-retries

Specifies the maximum number of retries for an established tunnel.

Default

no max-retries-estab

Values

2 to 7

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-retries-not-estab

max-retries-not-estab

Syntax

max-retries-not-estab max-retries

no max-retries-not-estab

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-not-estab)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group max-retries-not-estab)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group max-retries-not-estab)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp max-retries-not-estab)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp max-retries-not-estab)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-not-estab)

Full Context

configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel max-retries-not-estab

configure service vprn l2tp group max-retries-not-estab

configure router l2tp group max-retries-not-estab

configure router l2tp max-retries-not-estab

configure service vprn l2tp max-retries-not-estab

configure router l2tp group tunnel max-retries-not-estab

Description

This command configures the number of retries allowed for this L2TP tunnel while it is not established, before its control connection goes down.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Default

no max-retries-not-estab

Parameters

max-retries

Specifies the maximum number of retries for non-established tunnels.

Default

no max-retries-not-estab

Values

2 to 7

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-routes

max-routes

Syntax

max-routes routes

no max-routes

Context

[Tree] (config>aaa>route-downloader max-routes)

Full Context

configure aaa route-downloader max-routes

Description

This command determines the upper limits for total number of routes to be received and accepted by the system. The total number is inclusive of both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses and no differentiation is needed across protocols. It includes the sum of both. Once this limit is reached, the download process stops sending new access-requests until the next download-interval expires.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-routes 200000

Parameters

routes

Specifies the maximum number of the routes imported.

Values

1 to 200000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-rx-defect-window

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax

max-rx-defect-window seconds

no max-rx-defect-window

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

Full Context

configure eth-tunnel path eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure eth-ring path eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure lag eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

Description

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.

Values

1 to 86400

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax

max-rx-defect-window seconds

no max-rx-defect-window

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

Full Context

configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service ipipe sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

Description

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.

Values

1 to 86400

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax

max-rx-defect-window seconds

no max-rx-defect-window

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service vpls eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

Description

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.

Values

1 to 86400

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax

max-rx-defect-window seconds

no max-rx-defect-window

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

Description

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window

Values

1 to 86400

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
  • configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax

max-rx-defect-window seconds

no max-rx-defect-window

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

Description

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window

Values

1 to 86400

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
  • configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax

max-rx-defect-window seconds

no max-rx-defect-window

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)

Full Context

configure router interface eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window

Description

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.

Values

1 to 86400

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-sess-prefix

max-sess-prefix

Syntax

max-sess-prefix count

no max-sess-prefix

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server>prefix max-sess-prefix)

Full Context

configure test-oam twamp server prefix max-sess-prefix

Description

This command configures the maximum number of concurrent TWAMP-Test sessions by clients with an IP address in a specific prefix. A new test session (described by a Request-TW-Session message) is rejected if accepting it would cause either the limit defined by this command or the server limit (max-sess-server) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

max-sess-prefix 32

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of concurrent test sessions.

Values

0 to 128

Default

32

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-sess-server

max-sess-server

Syntax

max-sess-server count

no max-sess-server

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server max-sess-server)

Full Context

configure test-oam twamp server max-sess-server

Description

This command configures the maximum number of concurrent TWAMP-Test sessions across all allowed clients. A new test session (described by a Request-TW-Session message) is rejected if accepting it would cause either the limit defined by this command or a prefix limit (max-sess-prefix) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

max-sess-server 32

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of concurrent test sessions.

Values

0 to 128

Default

32

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

max-sessions

max-sessions

Syntax

max-sessions sessions

no max-sessions

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if max-sessions)

Full Context

configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface max-sessions

Description

This command configures the per-client maximum number of sessions.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-sessions 256

Parameters

sessions

Specifies the per-client maximum number of sessions.

Values

1 to 65536

Default

256

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

max-sessions

Syntax

max-sessions number

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>dynamic-neighbor>interface max-sessions)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>dynamic-neighbor>interface max-sessions)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp group dynamic-neighbor interface max-sessions

configure router bgp group dynamic-neighbor interface max-sessions

Description

This command configures the maximum number of dynamic sessions that are allowed to be set up on the interface as a result of accepting sessions from link-local addresses or initiating sessions by receiving IPv6 router advertisements.

Default

max-sessions 1

Parameters

number

Specifies the maximum number of sessions.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

All

max-sessions-per-cid

max-sessions-per-cid

Syntax

max-sessions-per-cid sessions [allow-sessions-without-cid]

no max-sessions-per-cid

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>ppp-policy max-sessions-per-cid)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt ppp-policy max-sessions-per-cid

Description

This command configures the maximum number of PPPoE sessions with the same Agent Circuit ID that can be active on the same SAP or MSAP. The limit is enforced in the discovery phase, prior to PAP or CHAP authentication and is based on the Agent Circuit ID sub-option that is present in the vendor-specific PPPoE access loop identification tag added in PADI and PADR messages by a PPPoE intermediate agent.

When the optional allow-sessions-without-cid keyword is specified, PPPoE sessions without an Agent Circuit ID can be established. The configured sessions limit does not apply to these sessions.

By default, there is no limit for the number of PPPoE sessions with the same Agent Circuit ID that are active on the same SAP or MSAP. Sessions without Agent Circuit ID can be established.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

no max-sessions-per-cid

Parameters

sessions

Specifies the maximum number of sessions with the same circuit ID that can be active on the same SAP or MSAP.

Values

1 to 8190

allow-sessions-without-cid

Specifies to enable support for PPPoE sessions without a circuit ID while a max-sessions-per-cid limit is configured on a SAP or MSAP.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-sessions-per-mac

max-sessions-per-mac

Syntax

max-sessions-per-mac maximum

no max-sessions-per-mac

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host>plcy-parms max-sessions-per-mac)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host ppp-policy-parameters max-sessions-per-mac

Description

This command configures the maximum number of PPPoE sessions created per MAC address. This number overrides the value defined within the PPPoE policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

no max-sessions-per-mac

Parameters

maximum

Specifies the maximum PPP sessions that can be opened for the given MAC address.

Values

1 to 8191

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-sessions-per-mac

Syntax

max-sessions-per-mac sessions [allow-same-circuit-id-for-dhcp]

no max-sessions-per-mac

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>ppp-policy max-sessions-per-mac)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt ppp-policy max-sessions-per-mac

Description

This command sets the maximum PPP sessions that can be opened for a given MAC address.

To enable IPv4 address allocation using the internal DHCPv4 client for multiple PPPoE sessions on a single SAP and having the same MAC address and circuit-ID, the optional CLI parameter allow-same-circuit-id-for-dhcp should be added. The SR OS local DHCP server detects the additional vendor-specific options inserted by the internal DHCPv4 client and use an extended unique key for lease allocation.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters

sessions

Specifies the maximum PPP sessions that can be opened for the given MAC address.

Values

1 to 8191

allow-same-circuit-id-for-dhcp

Sets the support for IPv4 address allocation using the internal DHCPv4 client for multiple PPPoE sessions on a single SAP that have the same MAC address and circuit ID.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-setup-time

max-setup-time

Syntax

max-setup-time [[up-interval] | infinite]

no max-setup-time

Context

[Tree] (config>lag>bfd>family max-setup-time)

Full Context

configure lag bfd family max-setup-time

Description

This command specifies the maximum amount of time the router will forward traffic over a link that has transitioned from Standby to Active, before the micro-BFD session must be fully established (Up state).

The no form of this command returns the timer value to the default (0) which indicates that forwarding will not start until the BFD session is established.

Default

max-setup-time infinite

Parameters

up-interval

Specifies the amount of time, in milliseconds.

Values

-1 to 60000

infinite

Specifies no end time to forward traffic.

Platforms

All

max-size

max-size

Syntax

max-size size

no max-size

Context

[Tree] (config>open-flow>of-switch>flowtable max-size)

Full Context

configure open-flow of-switch flowtable max-size

Description

This command configures the size for the specified flow table. The OpenFlow switch instance must be shutdown to modify this parameter.

The no form of this command restores the default size.

Default

max-size 1000

Parameters

size

Specifies the maximum size limit for the flow table. The size limit is a total for both IPv4 and IPv6.

Values

1 to 262144

Default

1000

Platforms

All

max-sources

max-sources

Syntax

max-sources max-sources

no max-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>interface max-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if max-sources)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if max-sources)

Full Context

configure service vprn mld interface max-sources

configure service vprn igmp interface max-sources

configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-sources

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of sources, the sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new sources will not be allowed.

Parameters

sources

Specifies the maximum number of sources for this interface.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

All

  • configure service vprn igmp interface max-sources
  • configure service vprn mld interface max-sources

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-sources

max-sources

Syntax

max-sources value

no max-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface max-sources)

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>if max-sources)

Full Context

configure router igmp group-interface max-sources

configure router igmp interface max-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for this group-interface.

Parameters

value

Specifies the maximum number of group sources.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router igmp group-interface max-sources

All

  • configure router igmp interface max-sources

max-sources

Syntax

max-sources [grp-source]

no max-sources

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mld>if max-sources)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface max-sources)

Full Context

configure router mld interface max-sources

configure router mld group-interface max-sources

Description

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for this interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no max-sources

Parameters

grp-source

Specifies the maximum number of group sources for this interface.

Platforms

All

  • configure router mld interface max-sources

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router mld group-interface max-sources

max-sr-labels

max-sr-labels

Syntax

max-sr-labels label-stack-size [additional-frr-labels labels]

no max-sr-labels

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp max-sr-labels)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template max-sr-labels)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp max-sr-labels

configure router mpls lsp-template max-sr-labels

Description

This command configures the maximum number of labels which the ingress LER can push for a given SR-TE LSP.

This command is used to allow room to insert additional transport, service, and other labels when packets are forwarded in a given context.

The max-sr-labels label-stack-size value should reflect the desired maximum label stack of the primary path of the SR-TE LSP.

The value in additional-frr-labels labels should reflect additional labels inserted by remote LFA for the backup next-hop of the SR-TE LSP.

The sum of both label values represents the worst case transport of SR label stack size for this SR-TE LSP and is populated by MPLS in the TTM such that services and shortcut applications can check it to decide if a service can be bound or a route can be resolved to this SR-TE LSP.

The maximum label stack supported by the router is always signaled by PCC in the PCEP Open object as part of the as SR-PCE-CAPABILITY TLV. It is referred to as the Maximum Stack Depth (MSD).

In addition, the per-LSP value for the max-sr-labels option, if configured, is signaled by PCC to PCE in the Segment-ID (SID) Depth value in a METRIC object for both a PCE computed LSP and a PCE controlled LSP. PCE will compute and provide the full explicit path with TE-links specified. If there is no path with the number of hops lower than the MSD value, or the Segment-ID (SID) Depth value if signaled, a reply with no path will be returned to PCC.

For a PCC controlled LSP, if the label stack returned by the TE-DB’s hop-to-label translation exceeds the per LSP maximum SR label stack size, the LSP is brought down.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

max-sr-labels 6 additional-frr-labels 1

Parameters

label-stack-size

Specifies the label stack size.

Values

1 to 11

additional-frr-labels labels

Specifies the addition FRR labels.

Values

0 to 3

Platforms

All

max-srte-pce-init-lsps

max-srte-pce-init-lsps

Syntax

max-srte-pce-init-lsps max-number

no max-srte-pce-init-lsps

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pcep>pcc max-srte-pce-init-lsps)

Full Context

configure router pcep pcc max-srte-pce-init-lsps

Description

This command configures the maximum number of PCE-initiated SR-TE LSPs that can be created by the router.

The no form of the command sets this value to the default.

Default

max-srte-pce-init-lsps 8191

Parameters

max-number

Specifies the maximum number of SR-TE PCE-initiated LSPs.

Values

0 to 8191

Platforms

All

max-stats

max-stats

Syntax

[no] max-stats

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>ingr-stats>p2p-template-lsp max-stats)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>egr-stats max-stats)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>egr-stats max-stats)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>ingr-stats>p2mp-template-lsp max-stats)

Full Context

configure router mpls ingress-statistics p2p-template-lsp max-stats

configure router mpls lsp-template egr-stats max-stats

configure router mpls lsp egr-stats max-stats

configure router mpls ingress-statistics p2mp-template-lsp max-stats

Description

This command enables accounting and statistical data collection. When applying accounting policies the data, by default, is collected in the appropriate records and written to the designated billing file.

When the no max-stats command is issued the statistics are still accumulated by the forwarding engine. However, the CPU will not obtain the results and write them to the billing file. If a subsequent max-stats command is issued then the counters written to the billing file include all the traffic while the no max-stats command was in effect.

Default

max-stats

Platforms

All

max-suppress

max-suppress

Syntax

max-suppress minutes

no max-suppress

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>damping max-suppress)

Full Context

configure router policy-options damping max-suppress

Description

This command configures the maximum suppression parameter for the route damping profile.

This value indicates the maximum time, expressed in minutes, that a route can remain suppressed.

The no form of this command removes the maximum suppression parameter from the damping profile.

Default

no max-suppress

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the maximum suppression time, in minutes, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 720

Platforms

All

max-throughput-octet-count

max-throughput-octet-count

Syntax

[no] max-throughput-octet-count

Context

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-from-sub-cntr max-throughput-octet-count)

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-to-sub-cntr max-throughput-octet-count)

Full Context

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific from-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-octet-count

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific to-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-octet-count

Description

This command includes the maximum throughput as measured in the octet count.

The no form of this command excludes the maximum throughput octet count.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-throughput-packet-count

max-throughput-packet-count

Syntax

[no] max-throughput-packet-count

Context

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-to-sub-cntr max-throughput-packet-count)

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-from-sub-cntr max-throughput-packet-count)

Full Context

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific to-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-packet-count

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific from-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-packet-count

Description

This command includes the maximum throughput as measured in the packet count.

The no form of this command excludes the maximum throughput packet count.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-throughput-stats

max-throughput-stats

Syntax

[no] max-throughput-stats

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>aa-sub max-throughput-stats)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group statistics aa-sub max-throughput-stats

Description

This command enables the collection of max-throughput statistics.

The no form of this command disables the collection.

Default

no max-throughput-stats

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-throughput-timestamp

max-throughput-timestamp

Syntax

[no] max-throughput-timestamp

Context

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-from-sub-cntr max-throughput-timestamp)

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-to-sub-cntr max-throughput-timestamp)

Full Context

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific from-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-timestamp

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific to-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-timestamp

Description

This command includes the timestamp of the maximum throughput. This command only applies to the 7750 SR.

The no form of this command excludes the timestamp.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-time

max-time

Syntax

max-time minutes

no max-time

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time)

Full Context

configure service vprn l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time

configure router l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time

Description

This command configures time for which an entity (peer or a tunnel) are kept in the denylist.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

max-time 5

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the maximum time a tunnel or peer may remain in the denylist.

Values

1 to 60

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-time-granularity

max-time-granularity

Syntax

[no] max-time-granularity time

Context

[Tree] (config>system>telemetry>notification-bundling max-time-granularity)

Full Context

configure system telemetry notification-bundling max-time-granularity

Description

This command sets the maximum time interval during which telemetry notifications are bundled. All bundled notifications will have the same timestamp, which is the timestamp of the bundle.

The no form of this command returns the time granularity to the default value.

Default

max-time-granularity 100

Parameters

time

Specifies the maximum time interval during which telemetry notifications are bundled, in milliseconds.

Values

1 to 1000

Platforms

All

max-ttl

max-ttl

Syntax

max-ttl ttl-value

no max-ttl

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>ldp-treetrace>path-discovery max-ttl)

Full Context

configure test-oam ldp-treetrace path-discovery max-ttl

Description

This command configures the maximum number of hops the path discovery traces in the path of each FEC to be discovered.

The no form of this command resets the time out to its default value.

Default

no max-ttl

Parameters

ttl-value

Specifies the maximum label time-to-live value for an LSP trace request during the tree discovery.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

All

max-tx-delay

max-tx-delay

Syntax

max-tx-delay deci-seconds

no max-tx-delay

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-rprt-dest max-tx-delay)

Full Context

configure mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest max-tx-delay

Description

This command specifies the time interval before the packet starts transmitting towards the destination. When an IGMP event is encoded and ready to be transported, a buffer for the packet is allocated (if not already existent). The events are written into this buffer. Along with the initial buffer creation, a timer is started. The trigger for the transmission of the packet is either the TX buffer being filled up to 1400 B, or the timer expiry, whichever comes first.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

deci-seconds

Specifies the maximum delay after which any cached reports are flushed to the reporting destination.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

max-tx-delay

Syntax

max-tx-delay deciseconds

no max-tx-delay

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>syslog>syslog-export-policy max-tx-delay)

Full Context

configure service nat syslog syslog-export-policy max-tx-delay

Description

This command enables aggregation of flow log messages within a syslog frame. It introduces a delay during which logs are collected in each BB-ISA so they can be sent in a single syslog message to conserve system resources and network bandwidth.

When aggregation is enabled, generation of a syslog frame carrying multiple flow logs is triggered by one of the two events (whichever occurs first):

  • Expiry of the max-tx-delay timer

  • Exceeding MTU size

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default

max-tx-delay 3

Parameters

deciseconds

Specifies the maximum time a syslog message is delayed in the system's output buffer.

Values

1 to 100

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

max-ve-id

max-ve-id

Syntax

max-ve-id value

no max-ve-id

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-vpls max-ve-id)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-vpls max-ve-id

Description

This command configures the allowed range for the VE-id value: locally configured and received in a NLRI. Configuration of a VE-id higher than the value specified in this command is not allowed.

Also upon reception of a higher VE-id in an NLRI imported in this VPLS instance (RT is the configured import RT) the following action must be taken:

  • a trap must be generated informing the operator of the mismatch.

  • NLRI must be dropped

  • no service labels are to be installed for this VE-id

  • no new NLRI must be generated if a new offset is required for VE-id.

The no form of this command sets the max-ve-id to un-configured. The BGP VPLS status should be administratively down for "no max-ve-id” to be used.

The max-ve-id value can be changed without shutting down bgp-vpls if the newly provisioned value does not conflict with the already configured local VE-ID. If the value of the local-VE-ID is higher than the new max-ve-id value the command is rejected. The operator needs to decrease first the VE-ID before running the command.

The actions taken for other max-ve-id values are as follows:

  • max-ve-id value higher than all VE-IDs (local and received) is allowed and there are no effects.

  • max-ve-id higher than the local VE-ID but smaller than the remote VE-IDs:

    • Provisioning is allowed

    • A warning message will be generated stating that "Higher VE-ID values were received in the BGP VPLS context. Related pseudowires will be removed.”

    • The pseudowires associated with the higher VE-IDs will be removed locally.

    • This is a situation that should be corrected by the operator as the pseudowire may be down just at the local PE, consuming unnecessarily core bandwidth. The higher VE-IDs should be removed or lowered.

If the max-ve-id has increased a BGP route refresh is sent to the VPLS community to get the routes which might have been rejected earlier due to max-ve-id check. A max-ve-id value needs to be provisioned for BGP VPLS to be in "no shutdown” state.

Default

no max-ve-id

Parameters

value

Specifies the allowed range of [1-value] for the VE-id. The configured value must be bigger than the existing VE-ids

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

All

max-wait-to-advertise

max-wait-to-advertise

Syntax

max-wait-to-advertise seconds

no max-wait-to-advertise

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>convergence>family max-wait-to-advertise)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp convergence family max-wait-to-advertise

Description

This command configures the maximum amount of time that BGP waits until it starts advertising IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers. For IPv4-unicast routes, seconds is measured from the time when the first peer that supports the IPv4-unicast address family comes up. For IPv6-unicast routes seconds is measured from the time when the first peer that negotiates the IPv6-unicast address family comes up.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router and advertise their complete set of IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes (followed by the applicable End of RIB marker).

The no form of this command implements the default value, which is three times the value of the min-wait-to-advertise time limit.

Default

no max-wait-to-advertise

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes are advertised to peers.

Values

0 to 3600

Platforms

All

max-wait-to-advertise

Syntax

max-wait-to-advertise seconds

no max-wait-to-advertise

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>convergence>family max-wait-to-advertise)

Full Context

configure router bgp convergence family max-wait-to-advertise

Description

This command configures the maximum amount of time that BGP waits until it starts advertising IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers. For IPv4-unicast routes, the time limit value is measured from the time when the first peer that supports the IPv4-unicast address family comes up. For IPv6-unicast routes the time limit value is measured from the time when the first peer that negotiates the IPv6-unicast address family comes up.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router and advertise their complete set of IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes (followed by the applicable End of RIB marker).

The no form of this command implements the default value, which is three times the value of the min-wait-to-advertise time-limit.

Default

no max-wait-to-advertise

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes are advertised to peers.

Values

0 to 3600

Platforms

All

maximum-cert-chain-depth

maximum-cert-chain-depth

Syntax

maximum-cert-chain-depth level

no maximum-cert-chain-depth

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>pki maximum-cert-chain-depth)

Full Context

configure system security pki maximum-cert-chain-depth

Description

This command defines the maximum depth of certificate chain verification. This number is applied system wide.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

maximum-cert-chain-depth 7

Parameters

level

Specifies the maximum depth level of certificate chain verification, range from 1 to 7. the certificate under verification is not counted in. for example, if this parameter is set to 1, then the certificate under verification must be directly signed by trust anchor CA.

Values

1 to 7

Platforms

All

maximum-client-lead-time

maximum-client-lead-time

Syntax

maximum-client-lead-time [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

no maximum-client-lead-time

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)

Full Context

configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure router dhcp server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure router dhcp6 server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time

configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time

Description

The command configures the maximum time that a DHCP server can extend client’s lease time beyond the lease time currently known by the DHCP partner node. In dual-homed environment, the initial lease time for all DHCP clients is by default restricted to MCLT. Consecutive DHCP renews can extend the lease time beyond the MCLT.

The maximum client lead time (MCLT) is a safeguard against IP address/prefix duplication in cases of a lease synchronization failure when local-remote failover model is deployed.

Once the intercommunication link failure between the redundant DHCP servers is detected, the DHCP IP address range configured as remote will not be allowed to start delegating new leases until the MCLT + partner-down-delay intervals expire. This is to ensure that the new lease that was delegated from the local IP address-range/prefix on one node but was never synchronized due to the intercommunication link failure, will expire before the same IP address/prefix is allocated from the remote IP address-range/prefix on the other node.

However, the already existing (and synchronized) lease times can be renewed from the remote IP address range at any time, regardless of the state of the intercommunication link (operational or failed).

Lease synchronization failure can be caused either by a node failure, or a failure of the link over which the DHCP leases are synchronized (intercommunication link). Synchronization failure detection can take up to 3 seconds.

During the failure, the DHCP lease time for the new clients is restricted to MCLT while for the existing clients the lease time will over time (by consecutive DHCP renews) be gradually reduced to the MCLT.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

maximum-client-lead-time min 10

Parameters

maximum-client-lead-time

Specifies the maximum client lead time.

Values

hrs hours

1 to 23

min minutes

1 to 59

sec seconds

1 to 59

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

maximum-data-transmission

maximum-data-transmission

Syntax

maximum-data-transmission bytes

no maximum-data-transmission

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>queue maximum-data-transmission)

Full Context

configure qos sap-egress queue maximum-data-transmission

Description

This command sets the maximum amount of data transmitted at a single scheduling opportunity. If the frame to be scheduled is longer than the configured amount of data, the entire frame is still transmitted. This command is applicable only to FP4 and FP5 chipsets.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

maximum-data-transmission 8192 for FP4

maximum-data-transmission 20480 for FP5

Parameters

bytes

Specifies the maximum amount of data transmitted.

Values

512 to 32768

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

maximum-declined

maximum-declined

Syntax

maximum-declined maximum-declined

no maximum-declined

Context

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>subnet maximum-declined)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>subnet maximum-declined)

Full Context

configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet maximum-declined

configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet maximum-declined

Description

This command configures the maximum number of declined addresses allowed.

The no form of the reverts to the default.

Default

maximum-declined 64

Parameters

maximum-declined

Specifies the maximum number of declined addresses allowed.

Values

0 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

maximum-ipv6-routes

maximum-ipv6-routes

Syntax

maximum-ipv6-routes number [log-only] [ threshold percentage]

no maximum-ipv6-routes

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn maximum-ipv6-routes)

Full Context

configure service vprn maximum-ipv6-routes

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of remote IPv6 routes that can be held within a VPN routing/ forwarding (VRF) context. The local, host, static and aggregate routes are not counted.

The VPRN service ID must be in a shutdown state in order to modify maximum-routes command parameters.

If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then the offending RIP peer (if applicable) is brought down (but the VPRN instance remains up). BGP peering will remain up but the exceeding BGP routes will not be added to the VRF.

The maximum route threshold can dynamically change to increase the number of supported routes even when the maximum has already been reached. Protocols will resubmit their routes which were initially rejected.

The no form of this command disables any limit on the number of routes within a VRF context. The threshold will not be raised. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default

0 or disabled

Parameters

number

Specifies an integer that specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.

Values

1 to 2147483647

log-only

Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.

threshold percentage

Specifies the percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be set. There are two warnings, the first is a mid-level warning at the threshold value set and the second is a high-level warning at level between the maximum number of routes and the mid-level rate ([mid+max] / 2).

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

maximum-original-datagram

maximum-original-datagram

Syntax

[no] maximum-original-datagram

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>icmp>ipv6 maximum-original-datagram)

Full Context

configure test-oam icmp ipv6 maximum-original-datagram

Description

This command enables the original datagram field of the ICMPv6 error message to be a maximum of 1232 bytes.

The no form of this command may result in an original datagram field of the ICMPv6 error message smaller than 1232 bytes be built smaller.

Default

no maximum-original-datagram

Platforms

All

maximum-p2mp-spmsi

maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Syntax

maximum-p2mp-spmsi range

no maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>provider-tunnel>selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi)

Full Context

configure service vpls provider-tunnel selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi

configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of S-PMSI tunnels for the MVPN or EVPN service. When the limit is reached, no more RSVP P2MP S-PMSI or LDP P2MP S-PMSI are created and traffic over the datathreshold stays on I-PMSI.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

maximum-p2mp-spmsi 10

Parameters

range

Specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnel for the MVPN or VPLS.

Values

1 to 4000

Default

10

Platforms

All

maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Syntax

maximum-p2mp-spmsi range

no maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Context

[Tree] (config>router>gtm>provider-tunnel>selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi)

Full Context

configure router gtm provider-tunnel selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnels for the GTM. When the limit is reached, no more RSVP P2MP S-PMSI or LDP P2MP S-P MSI tunnels are created and traffic over the data-threshold will stay on I-PMSI.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default

maximum-p2mp-spmsi 10

Parameters

range

Specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnels for the GTM.

Values

1 to 4000

Default

10

Platforms

All

maximum-paths

maximum-paths

Syntax

maximum-paths max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as | exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]

no maximum-paths

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>multi-path maximum-paths)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp multi-path maximum-paths

Description

This command sets ECMP multi-path parameters that apply to all address families for that BGP multi-path. For some address families it is possible to override these settings on a per address family basis.

When multi-path is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The actual distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may be equal or unequal (that is, based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community).

To qualify as a multi-path, a non-best route must meet the following criteria (some criteria are controlled by this command):

  • The multi-path route must be the same type of route as the best path (same AFI/SAFI and, in some cases, same next-hop resolution method).

  • The multi-path route must be tied with the best path for all criteria of greater significance than next-hop cost, except for criteria that are configured to be ignored.

  • If the best path selection reaches the next-hop cost comparison, the multi-path route must have the same next-hop cost as the best route unless the unequal-cost option is configured.

  • The multi-path route must not have the same BGP next-hop as the best path or any other multi-path route.

  • The multi-path route must not cause the ECMP limit of the routing instance to be exceeded (configured using the ecmp command with a value in the range 1 to 64).

  • The multi-path route must not cause the applicable max-paths limit to be exceeded. If the best path is an EBGP learned route and the ebgp option is used, the ebgp-max-paths limit overrides the max-paths limit. If the best path is an IBGP-learned route and the ibgp option is used, the ibgp-max-paths limit overrides the max-paths limit. All path limits are configurable up to a maximum of 64. Multi-path is effectively disabled if a value is set to 1.

  • The multi-path route must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path if the restrict same-neighbor-as option is configured. By default, any path with the same AS path length as the best path (regardless of neighbor AS) is eligible for multi-path.

  • The route must have the same AS path as the best path if the restrict exact-as-path option is configured. By default, any path with the same AS path length as the best path (regardless of the actual AS numbers) is eligible for multi-path.

The no form of this command disables BGP multi-path.

Default

no maximum-paths

Parameters

max-paths

Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix/NLRI if ebgp-max-paths or ibgp-max-paths does not apply.

Values

1 to 64

egp-max-paths

Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route.

Values

1 to 64

ibgp-max-paths

Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route.

Values

1 to 64

restrict same-neighbor-as

Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.

restrict exact-as-path-as

Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.

unequal-cost

Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.

Platforms

All

maximum-paths

Syntax

maximum-paths max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as | exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]

no maximum-paths

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>multi-path maximum-paths)

Full Context

configure router bgp multi-path maximum-paths

Description

This command sets ECMP multipath parameters that apply to all address families for that BGP multipath. For some address families it is possible to override these settings on a per address family basis.

When multipath is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The actual distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may be equal or unequal (that is, based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community).

The no form of this command disables BGP multipath.

Default

no maximum-paths

Parameters

max-paths

Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix/NLRI if ebgp-max-paths or ibgp-max-paths does not apply.

Values

1 to 64

ebgp-max-paths

Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route.

Values

1 to 64

ibgp-max-paths

Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route.

Values

1 to 64

restrict same-neighbor-as

Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.

restrict exact-as-path

Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.

unequal-cost

Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.

Platforms

All

maximum-recovery-time

maximum-recovery-time

Syntax

maximum-recovery-time interval

no maximum-recovery-time

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp>graceful-restart maximum-recovery-time)

Full Context

configure router ldp graceful-restart maximum-recovery-time

Description

This command configures the local maximum recovery time.

The no form of this command returns the default value.

Default

no maximum-recovery-time (which equals a value of 120 seconds)

Parameters

interval

Specifies the length of time in seconds.

Values

15 to 1800

Platforms

All

maximum-routes

maximum-routes

Syntax

maximum-routes number [log-only] [ threshold percentage]

no maximum-routes

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn maximum-routes)

Full Context

configure service vprn maximum-routes

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of remote routes that can be held within a VPN routing/ forwarding (VRF) context. The local, host, static and aggregate routes are not counted.

The VPRN service ID must be in a shutdown state in order to modify maximum-routes command parameters.

If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then the offending RIP peer (if applicable) is brought down (but the VPRN instance remains up). BGP peering will remain up but the exceeding BGP routes will not be added to the VRF.

The maximum route threshold can dynamically change to increase the number of supported routes even when the maximum has already been reached. Protocols will resubmit their routes which were initially rejected.

The no form of this command disables any limit on the number of routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default

0 or disabled — The threshold will not be raised.

Parameters

number

An integer that specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.

Values

1 to 2147483647

log-only

Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.

threshold percentage

The percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be set. There are two warnings, the first is a mid-level warning at the threshold value set and the second is a high-level warning at level between the maximum number of routes and the mid-level rate ([mid+max] / 2).

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

maximum-sid-depth

maximum-sid-depth

Syntax

maximum-sid-depth

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>segm-rtng maximum-sid-depth)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing maximum-sid-depth

Description

Commands in this context configure a manual override of the Maximum Segment Depths (MSD) that is announced by the router.

Platforms

All

maximum-sid-depth

Syntax

maximum-sid-depth

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>segm-rtng maximum-sid-depth)

Full Context

configure router ospf segment-routing maximum-sid-depth

Description

Commands in this context configure a manual override of the Maximum Segment Depths (MSD) that is announced by the router.

Platforms

All

mbb

mbb

Syntax

mbb [detail]

no mbb

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>mpls>event mbb)

Full Context

debug router mpls event mbb

Description

This command debugs the state of the most recent invocation of the make-before-break (MBB) functionality.

The no form of the command disables the debugging.

Parameters

detail

Displays detailed information about MBB events.

Platforms

All

mbb-prefer-current-hops

mbb-prefer-current-hops

Syntax

[no] mbb-prefer-current-hops

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls mbb-prefer-current-hops)

Full Context

configure router mpls mbb-prefer-current-hops

Description

This command implements a new option in the CSPF path computation during a Make-Before-Break (MBB) procedure of an RSVP LSP.

When MPLS performs an MBB for the primary or secondary path of a P2P LSP, or the S2L path of a P2MP LSP, and the new mbb-prefer-current-hops option is enabled in MPLS context, CSPF will select a path, among equal-cost candidate paths, with the most overlapping links with the current path. Normally, CSPF selects the path randomly.

The procedures of the new MBB CSPF path selection apply to LSP without the least-fill option enabled. If the least-fill rule results in a different path, the LSP path will be moved though. Users can still favor stability over least-fill condition by applying a larger value to the parameter least-fill-min-thd under the MPLS context such that a path will only be moved when the difference of the least-available bandwidth becomes significant enough between the most used links in the equal cost paths. If that difference is not significant enough, CSPF will select the path with the most overlapping links instead of selecting a path randomly.

The procedures when the new mbb-prefer-current-hops option is enabled apply to all MBB types. Thus, it applies to the auto-bandwidth MBB, the configuration change MBB, the soft preemption MBB, the TE graceful shutdown MBB, the delayed retry MBB (for SRLG secondary LSP path), the path change MBB, the timer resignal MBB, and the manual resignal MBB.

During the FRR global revertive MBB, CSPF selects a random link among the ones available between the PLR node and the Merge Point node, including the failed link if it has restored in the meantime. These links cannot be checked for overlap with the current path.

The TE graceful shutdown MBB will still avoid the link or node that is in maintenance and the soft preemption MBB will still avoid the link that is overbooked.

For an inter-area LSP, this feature applies to the subset of the path from the ingress LER to the exit ABR.

The procedures of this feature are not applied to a zero bandwidth CSPP LSP, including an auto-bandwidth CSPF LSP while its operational bandwidth is zero, and to a non-CSPF LSP.

Platforms

All

mbs

mbs

Syntax

mbs percent-of-pool

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>bw-plcy>t2-paths>secondary-paths>queue-parameters mbs)

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>bw-plcy>t2-paths>primary-paths>queue-parameters mbs)

Full Context

configure mcast-management bandwidth-policy t2-paths secondary-paths queue-parameters mbs

configure mcast-management bandwidth-policy t2-paths primary-paths queue-parameters mbs

Description

This command configures the override for the default Maximum Buffer Size (MBS) for each individual path’s queue. The queues MBS threshold defines the point at which all packets destined for the queue are discarded based on queue depth. The defined threshold also provides context for the queues drop-tail parameter.

The mbs percent-of-pool parameter is defined as a percentage of the total pool size. The system allows the sum of all MBS values to equal more than 100% allowing for oversubscription of the pool.

For the primary-path and secondary-path queues, the mbs percent is applied to a single queue for each path.

The no form of this command is used to restore the path queues default MBS value.

Parameters

percent-of-pool

Specifies the percent of buffers from the total buffer pool space for the number of buffers, expressed as a decimal integer. If 10 MB is the total buffers in the buffer pool, a value of 10 would limit the maximum queue size to 1MB (10%) of buffer space for the forwarding class queue. If the total size is increased to 20MB, the existing value of 10 would automatically increase the maximum size of the queue to 2MB.

Values

0 to 100

Default

Primary:

7

Secondary:

40

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>dynamic-queue mbs)

Full Context

configure qos sap-egress dynamic-queue mbs

Description

This command configures the maximum buffer space (MBS) allowed for the dynamic queue. The MBS is applied to each dynamic queue and is not shared.

Default

no mbs (auto)

Parameters

size

Specifies that the MBS as an integer representing the required size.

Values

0 to 1073741824

default (auto)
bytes

Specifies that the value given for the size variable is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define the size.

kilobytes

Specifies that the value given for the size variable is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kilobytes. The optional kilobytes and bytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define the size.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>egress>qos>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile egress qos queue mbs

Description

This command configures the maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an egress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer is available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size to the size as configured in the QoS policy.

Parameters

size

This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

Values

0 to 1073741824, default

bytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes.

kilobytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>ingress>qos>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile ingress qos queue mbs

Description

The Maximum Burst Size (MBS) command configures the explicit definition of the maximum number of buffers allowed for a specific queue.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the number of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sap-ingress context for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer is available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope does not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size to the size as configured in the QoS policy.

Parameters

size

This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

Values

0 to 1073741824, default

bytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value is in bytes.

kilobytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value is in kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>ingress>qos>policer mbs)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>egress>qos>policer mbs)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile ingress qos policer mbs

configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile egress qos policer mbs

Description

This command configures the MBS for the QoS policer.

The no form of this command returns the MBS to its default value. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Parameters

size

This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

bytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes.

kilobytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure service vprn sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue mbs

configure service ies interface sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

configure service vprn sap egress queue-override queue mbs

Description

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS is a mechanism to override the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an egress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer is available when needed or that the packets RED slope is not forced the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

If the CBS value is larger than the MBS value, an error will occur, preventing the MBS change.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue.

Default

mbs default

Parameters

size

This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

Values

0 to 1073741824, default

bytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes.

kilobytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kb/s.

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

configure service vpls sap egress queue-override queue mbs

Description

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packets RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting correct CBS parameters and controlling CBS over-subscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS assigned to the queue to the default value.

Default

mbs default

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether the size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 1073741824

default

bytes

When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value given in bytes.

kilobytes

When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue's MBS value given in kilobytes.

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs burst-size

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-policer mbs)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt isa-policer mbs

Description

This command specifies the maximum burst-size value of this policer.

The no form of this command reverts to its default.

Default

mbs 0

Parameters

burst-size

The maximum burst-size in kbytes.

Values

0 to 131071

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobyte] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>access>qgrp>policer-over>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>network>qgrp>policer-over>plcr mbs)

Full Context

configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-override policer mbs

configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-override policer mbs

Description

This command configures the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low priority violate threshold. For ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high priority packets use the policer’s high priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low priority packets use the policer’s low priority violate threshold.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represent the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer’s offered rate is equal to or less than the policer’s defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an sla-profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command reverts the policer to its default MBS size. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

bytes

When bytes is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the policer’s MBS value given in bytes.

kilobytes

When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the policer’s MBS value given in kilobytes.

default

Keyword that reverts the MBS to its default value.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>egr>qgrp>qover>q mbs)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egr>qgrp>qover>q mbs)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>ing>qgrp>qover>q mbs)

Full Context

configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue mbs

configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue mbs

configure port ethernet access ingress queue-group queue-overrides queue mbs

Description

The Maximum Burst Size (MBS) command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue. The value is given in kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The queue-group or network egress QoS context for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packets RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

This command applies to egress queue group queues as the queue-delay is only supported on egress queues. This command the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default

mbs default

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 1073741824

bytes

When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in bytes.

kilobytes

When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in kilobytes.

default

Keyword that reverts the MBS to its default value.

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

configure service ipipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs

configure service cpipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs

configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

configure service epipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs

configure service epipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command is used to restore the MBS to the default value. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Default

no mbs

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

bytes

When bytes is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the policer MBS value in bytes.

kilobytes

When kilobytes is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the policer MBS value in kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
  • configure service ipipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs
  • configure service epipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs
  • configure service epipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
  • configure service cpipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs

configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs

configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

configure service ipipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs

configure service cpipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

Description

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. A queue uses its MBS value to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the number of buffers allowed by the MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope associated with a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed to have buffer available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting correct CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS assigned to the queue to the default value.

Default

mbs default

Parameters

size

The size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of kilobytes or bytes of buffering allowed for the queue. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets.

Values

0 to 1073741824, default

bytes

Indicates that the size parameter value is expressed in bytes.

kilobytes

Indicates that the size parameter is expressed in kilobytes.

Platforms

All

  • configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
  • configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
  • configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
  • configure service ipipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
  • configure service cpipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-override>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-override>plcr mbs)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap egress policer-override policer mbs

configure service vpls sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command restores the MBS to the default value. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Default

no mbs

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying MBS override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-override>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-override>plcr mbs)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

configure service ies interface sap egress policer-override policer mbs

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command restores the MBS setting to the default value. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Default

no mbs

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying MBS override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-override>plcr mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-override>plcr mbs)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-override policer mbs

configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-override policer mbs

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command restores the MBS to the default value. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Default

no mbs

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying MBS override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue mbs

configure service vprn interface sap ingress queue-override queue mbs

Description

This command can be used to override specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

If the CBS value is larger than the MBS value, an error will occur, preventing the MBS change.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default

mbs default

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether the size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 1073741824

default

bytes

When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue'sMBS value given in bytes.

kilobytes

When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue's MBSvalue given in kilobytes.

default

Keyword that reverts the MBS to its default value.

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs congested-mbs

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policer>congestion-override mbs)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group policer congestion-override mbs

Description

This command configures the maximum burst size for the policer. It is recommended that MBS is configured larger than twice the MTU for the traffic handled by the policer to allow for some burstiness of the traffic. MBS is configurable for single-bucket, dual-bucket bandwidth and flow setup rate policers only.

The no form of this command removes the congested MBS value from the configuration.

Default

mbs 0

Parameters

congested-mbs

Specifies the maximum burst size, in kbytes, when the access-network-level, which the subscriber belongs to, is in a congested state.

Values

0 to 131071

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs maximum-burst-size

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>tod-override mbs)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group tod-override mbs

Description

This command provides a mechanism to configure the maximum burst size for the policer. It is recommended that MBS is configured larger than twice the MTU for the traffic handled by the policer to allow for some burstiness of the traffic. MBS is configurable for single-bucket, dual-bucket bandwidth and flow setup rate policers only.

The no form of this command resets the MBS value to its default.

Default

mbs 0

Parameters

maximum-burst-size

Specifies an integer value defining either size, in kbytes, for the MBS of the bandwidth policer, or flow count for the MBS of the flow setup rate policers.

Values

0 to 131071

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>dyn-policer mbs)

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>dyn-policer mbs)

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>policer mbs)

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>policer mbs)

Full Context

configure qos sap-egress dynamic-policer mbs

configure qos sap-ingress dynamic-policer mbs

configure qos sap-egress policer mbs

configure qos sap-ingress policer mbs

Description

This command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold. For ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. At egress, inplus-profile, and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s MBS size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the queue to its default MBS size. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Parameters

size [bytes | kilobytes]

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2683435456, default

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure qos sap-ingress dynamic-policer mbs
  • configure qos sap-egress dynamic-policer mbs

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure qos sap-ingress policer mbs
  • configure qos sap-egress policer mbs

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure qos sap-egress queue mbs

configure qos sap-ingress queue mbs

Description

This command configures the maximum number of buffers allowed for a specific queue. The value is given in bytes or kilobytes and overrides the default value for the context.

The no form of this command returns the policer to its default MBS.

Default

no mbs

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes.

Default

kilobyte

default

Sets the MBS to its default value.

bytes

Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in bytes.

Values

0 to 2688000

kilobytes

Specifies the value is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in kilobytes.

Values

0 to 2625

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs percent

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>network-queue>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure qos network-queue queue mbs

Description

This command specifies the relative amount of buffer pool space for the maximum buffers for a specific ingress network FP forwarding class queue or egress network port forwarding class queue. The value is entered as a percentage.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted its total allowed buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded its maximum amount of buffers, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed to have a buffer available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. In order to safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers), set proper CBS parameters and control CBS oversubscription. Another safeguard is to properly set the RED slope parameters for the needs of the network queues.

The MBS can sometimes be smaller than the CBS. This will result in a portion of the CBS for the queue to be unused and should be avoided.

The no form of this command returns the MBS for the queue to the default for the forwarding class.

Parameters

percent

The percent of buffers from the total buffer pool space for the maximum number of buffers, expressed as a decimal integer. If 10 Mbytes is the total buffer space in the buffer pool, a value of 10 would limit the maximum queue size to 1 Mbyte (10%) of buffer space for the forwarding class queue. If the total size is increased to 20 Mbytes, the existing value of 10 would automatically increase the maximum size of the queue to 2 Mbytes.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>egr>qgrp>policer mbs)

[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>ing>qgrp>policer mbs)

Full Context

configure qos queue-group-templates egress queue-group policer mbs

configure qos queue-group-templates ingress queue-group policer mbs

Description

This command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue in bytes or kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The port>ethernet>access>ingress>queue-group and port>ethernet>access>egress>queue-group contexts for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope that a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

When configured on an egress queue group queue, this command and the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive. In order to change between the mbs and queue-delay parameters, the current parameter must be removed before adding the new parameter; that is, changing from mbs to queue-delay requires a no mbs before the queue-delay is configured and changing from queue-delay to mbs requires a no queue-delay before the mbs is configured. If queue-delay is configured for an egress queue group queue, it is not possible to override the MBS for that queue.

For policers, this command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold.

At ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold.

At egress, inplus-profile and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size to its default value. By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Default

default

Parameters

size

For queues, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes or kilobytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kbytes, enter the value 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets. For policers, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes for the policer's MBS. The queue MBS maximum value used is constrained by the pool size in which the queue exists and by the shared pool space in the corresponding megapool.

Values

0 to 2683435456

Default value: 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicitly configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

[bytes | kilobytes]

Specifies bytes or kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

default

Sets the MBS to its default value.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs

Syntax

mbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>egr>qgrp>queue mbs)

[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>ing>qgrp>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure qos queue-group-templates egress queue-group queue mbs

configure qos queue-group-templates ingress queue-group queue mbs

Description

This command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue in bytes or kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The port>ethernet>access>ingress>queue-group and port>ethernet>access>egress>queue-group contexts for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope that a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

When configured on an egress queue group queue, this command and the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive. In order to change between the mbs and queue-delay parameters, the current parameter must be removed before adding the new parameter; that is, changing from mbs to queue-delay requires a no mbs before the queue-delay is configured and changing from queue-delay to mbs requires a no queue-delay before the mbs is configured. If queue-delay is configured for an egress queue group queue, it is not possible to override the MBS for that queue.

For policers, this command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold.

At ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold.

At egress, inplus-profile and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned by the queue.

Default

default

Parameters

size

For queues, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes or kilobytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kbytes, enter the value 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets. For policers, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes for the policer's MBS. The queue MBS maximum value used is constrained by the pool size in which the queue exists and by the shared pool space in the corresponding megapool.

Values

0 to 1048576 or default

Minimum configurable non-zero value: 6 kbytes on an FP2, 7680 bytes on an FP3, and 16 kbytes on an FP4

Minimum non-zero default value: maximum of 10 ms of CIR, or 6 kbytes on an FP2, 7680 bytes on an FP3, and 16 kbytes on an FP4

[bytes | kilobytes]

Specifies bytes or kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

default

Sets the MBS to its default value.

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs percent

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>shared-queue>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure qos shared-queue queue mbs

Description

This command specifies the relative amount of the buffer pool space for the maximum buffers for a specific ingress shared queue.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted its total allowed buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded its maximum amount of buffers, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers).

The MBS size can sometimes be smaller than the CBS. This will result in a portion of the CBS for the queue to be unused and should be avoided.

Default

The queue MBS defaults are listed in Queue MBS Default Values.

Table 19. Queue MBS Default Values

Queue

Default MBS

1

50

2

50

3

50

4

25

5

50

6

50

7

25

8

25

9

50

10

50

11

50

12

25

13

50

14

50

15

25

16

25

Parameters

percent

The percent of buffers from the total buffer pool space for the maximum amount of buffers, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

mbs

Syntax

mbs mbs

no mbs

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>cpm-queue>queue mbs)

Full Context

configure system security cpm-queue queue mbs

Description

This command specifies the maximum queue depth to which a queue can grow.

Parameters

mbs

Specifies the maximum burst size in kbytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mbs-contribution

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [bytes | kilobytes] [fixed]

no mbs-contribution

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>egr>plcr-ctrl-plcy>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>ing>plcr-ctrl-plcy>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile egress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile ingress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

This command is used to configure the policy-based burst tolerance for a parent policer instance created when the policy is applied to a SAP or subscriber context. The system uses the parent policer’s min-thresh-separation value, the priority level’s mbs-contribution value and the number of child policers currently attached to the priority level to derive the priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion of burst tolerance within the local priority level. The shared-portion and fair-portions for each priority level are then used by the system to calculate each priority level’s discard-unfair threshold and discard-all threshold.

The value for a priority level’s mbs-contribution within the policer-control-policy may be overridden on the SAP or subscriber sub-profile where the policy is applied in order to allow fine tuning of the discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds relevant to the needs of the local child policers on the object.

Accumulative Nature of Burst Tolerance for a Parent Policer Priority Level

When defining mbs-contribution, the specified size may only be a portion of the burst tolerance associated with the priority level. The packets associated with the priority level share the burst tolerance of lower within the parent policer. As the parent policer PIR bucket depth increases during congestion, the lower priority packets eventually experience discard based on each priority’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds. Assuming congestion continues once all the lower priority packets have been prevented from consuming bucket depth, the burst tolerance for the priority level is consumed by its own packets and any packets associated with higher priorities.

The Effect of Fair and Unfair Child Policer Traffic at a Parent Policer Priority Level

The system continually monitors the offered rate of each child policer on each parent policer priority level and detects when the policer is in a congested state (the aggregate offered load is greater than the decrement rate defined on the parent policer). As previously stated, the result of congestion is that the parent policer's bucket depth will increase until it eventually hovers around either a discard-unfair or discard-all threshold belonging to one of the priority levels. This threshold is the point where enough packets are being discarded that the increment rate and decrement rate begin to even out. If only a single child policer is associated to the priority level, the discard-unfair threshold is not used since fairness is only applicable when multiple child policers are competing at the same priority level.

When multiple child policers are sharing the congested priority level, the system uses the offered rates and the parenting parameters of each child to determine the fair rate per child when the parent policer is unable to meet the bandwidth needs of each child. The fair rate represents the number of bandwidth that each child at the priority level should receive relative to the other children at the same level according to the policer control policy instance managing the child policers. This fair rate is applied as the decrement rate for each child's FIR bucket. Changing a child’s FIR rate does not modify the number of packets forwarded by the parent policer for the child’s priority level. It simply modifies the forwarded ratio between the children on that priority level. Since each child FIR bucket has some level of burst tolerance before marking its packets as unfair, the current parent policer bucket depth may at times rise above the discard-unfair threshold. The mbs-contribution value provides a means to define how much separation is provided between the priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all threshold to allow the parent policer to absorb some of the FIR burst before reaching the priority’s discard-all threshold.

This level of fair aggregate burst tolerance is based on the decrement rate of the parent policer’s PIR bucket while the individual fair bursts making up the aggregate are based on each child’s FIR decrement rate. The aggregate fair rate of the priority level is managed by the system with consideration of the current rate of traffic in higher priority levels. In essence, the system ensures that for each iteration of the child FIR rate calculation, the sum of the child FIR decrement rates plus the sum of the higher priority traffic increment rates equals the parent policers decrement rate. This means that dynamic numbers of higher priority traffic can be ignored when sizing a lower priority’s fair aggregate burst tolerance. Consider the following:

  • The parent policer decrement rate is set to 20 Mb/s (max-rate 20,000).

  • A priority level’s fair burst size is set to 30 kbytes (mbs-contribution 30 kbytes).

  • Higher priority traffic is currently taking 12 Mb/s.

  • The priority level has three child policers attached.

  • Each child’s PIR MBS is set to 10 kbytes, which makes each child’s FIR MBS 10 kbytes.

  • The children want 10 Mb/s, but only 8 Mb/s is available,

  • Based on weights, the children's FIR rates are set as follows:

    FIR Rate

    FIR MBS

    Child 1

    4 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 2

    3 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 3

    1 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

The 12 Mb/s of the higher priority traffic and the 8 Mb/s of fair traffic equal the 20 Mb/s decrement rate of the parent policer.

It is clear that the higher priority traffic is consuming 12 Mb/s of the parent policer’s decrement rate, leaving 8 Mb/s of decrement rate for the lower priority’s fair traffic.

  • The burst tolerance of child 1 is based on 10 kbytes above 4 Mb/s,

  • The burst tolerance of child 2 is based on 10 kbytes above 3 Mb/s,

  • The burst tolerance of child 3 is based on 10 kbytes above 1 Mb/s.

If all three children burst simultaneously (unlikely), they will consume 30 kbytes above 8 Mb/s. This is the same as the remaining decrement rate after the higher priority traffic.

Parent Policer Total Burst Tolerance and Downstream Buffering

The highest in-use priority level’s discard-all threshold is the total burst tolerance of the parent policer. In some cases the parent policer represents downstream bandwidth capacity and the max-rate of the parent policer is set to prevent overrunning the downstream bandwidth. The burst tolerance of the parent policer defines how much more traffic may be sent beyond the downstream scheduling capacity. In the worst case scenario, when the downstream buffering is insufficient to handle the total possible burst from the parent policer, downstream discards based on lack of buffering may occur. However, in all likelihood, this is not the case.

In most cases, lower priority traffic in the policer is responsible for the greater part of congestion above the parent policer rate. Since this traffic is discarded with a lower threshold, this lowers the effective burst tolerance even while the highest priority traffic is present.

Configuring a Priority Level's MBS Contribution Value

In the most conservative case, a priority level’s mbs-contribution value may be set to be greater than the sum of child policer’s mbs and one max-size-frame per child policer. This ensures that even in the absolute worst case where all the lower priority levels are simultaneously bursting to the maximum capacity of each child, enough burst tolerance for the priority’s children will exist if they also burst to their maximum capacity.

Since simply adding up all the child policer’s PIR MBS values may result in large overall burst tolerances that are not ever likely to be needed, you should consider some level of burst oversubscription when configuring the mbs-contribution value for each priority level. The number of oversubscription should be determined based on the needs of each priority level.

Using the Fixed Keyword to Create Deterministic Parent Policer Discard Thresholds

In the default behavior, the system ignores the mbs-contribution values for a priority level on a subscriber or SAP parent policer when a child policer is not currently associated with the level. This prevents additional burst tolerance from being added to higher priority traffic within the parent policer.

This does cause fluctuations in the defined threshold values when child policers are added or removed from a parent policer instance. If this behavior is undesirable, the fixed keyword may be used which causes the mbs-contribution value to always be included in the calculation of parent policer’s discard thresholds. The defined mbs-contribution value may be overridden on a subscriber sla-profile or on a SAP instance, but the fixed nature of the contribution cannot be overridden.

If the defined mbs-contribution value for the priority level is zero, the priority level will have no effect on the parent policer’s defined discard thresholds. A packet associated with the priority level will use the next lower priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds.

The form of this command returns the policy’s priority level’s MBS contribution to the default value. When changed, the thresholds for the priority level and all higher priority levels for all instances of the parent policer is recalculated.

Parameters

size [bytes | kilobytes]

The size parameter is required when executing the mbs-contribution command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the priority’s specific portion of accumulative MBS for the priority level in bytes or kilobytes which is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is assumed. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the priority level’s mbs-contribution value has been overridden.

Values

0 to 16777216

bytes | kilobytes:

The bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. Size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

fixed

This optional fixed keyword is used to force the inclusion of the defined mbs-contribution value in the parent policer’s discard threshold calculations. If the mbs-contribution command is executed without the fixed keyword, the fixed calculation behavior for the priority level is removed.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [bytes | kilobytes]

no mbs-contribution

Context

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>access>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ing>network>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

This command configures the policy-based burst tolerance for a parent policer instance created when the policy is applied to a SAP or subscriber context. The system uses the parent policer’s min-thresh-separation value, the priority level’s mbs-contribution value and the number of child policers currently attached to the priority level to derive the priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion of burst tolerance within the local priority level. The shared-portion and fair-portions for each priority level are then used by the system to calculate each priority level’s discard-unfair threshold and discard-all threshold.

The value for a priority level’s mbs-contribution within the policer-control-policy may be overridden on the SAP or subscriber sub-profile where the policy is applied in order to allow fine tuning of the discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds relevant to the needs of the local child policers on the object.

Accumulative Nature of Burst Tolerance for a Parent Policer Priority Level

When defining mbs-contribution, the specified size may only be a portion of the burst tolerance associated with the priority level. The packets associated with the priority level share the burst tolerance of lower within the parent policer. As the parent policer PIR bucket depth increases during congestion, the lower priority packets eventually experience discard based on each priority’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds. Assuming congestion continues once all the lower priority packets have been prevented from consuming bucket depth, the burst tolerance for the priority level will be consumed by its own packets and any packets associated with higher priorities.

The Effect of Fair and Unfair Child Policer Traffic at a Parent Policer Priority Level

The system continually monitors the offered rate of each child policer on each parent policer priority level and detects when the policer is in a congested state (the aggregate offered load is greater than the decrement rate defined on the parent policer). As previously stated, the result of congestion is that the parent policer's bucket depth will increase until it eventually hovers around either a discard-unfair or discard-all threshold belonging to one of the priority levels. This threshold is the point where enough packets are being discarded that the increment rate and decrement rate begin to even out. If only a single child policer is associated to the priority level, the discard-unfair threshold is not used since fairness is only applicable when multiple child policers are competing at the same priority level.

When multiple child policers are sharing the congested priority level, the system uses the offered rates and the parenting parameters of each child to determine the fair rate per child when the parent policer is unable to meet the bandwidth needs of each child. The fair rate represents the amount of bandwidth that each child at the priority level should receive relative to the other children at the same level according to the policer control policy instance managing the child policers. This fair rate is applied as the decrement rate for each child’s FIR bucket. Changing a child’s FIR rate does not modify the amount of packets forwarded by the parent policer for the child’s priority level. It simply modifies the forwarded ratio between the children on that priority level. Since each child FIR bucket has some level of burst tolerance before marking its packets as unfair, the current parent policer bucket depth may at times rise above the discard-unfair threshold. The mbs-contribution value provides a means to define how much separation is provided between the priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all threshold to allow the parent policer to absorb some amount of FIR burst before reaching the priority’s discard-all threshold.

This level of fair aggregate burst tolerance is based on the decrement rate of the parent policer’s PIR bucket while the individual fair bursts making up the aggregate are based on each child’s FIR decrement rate. The aggregate fair rate of the priority level is managed by the system with consideration of the current rate of traffic in higher priority levels. In essence, the system ensures that for each iteration of the child FIR rate calculation, the sum of the child FIR decrement rates plus the sum of the higher priority traffic increment rates equals the parent policers decrement rate. This means that dynamic amounts of higher priority traffic can be ignored when sizing a lower priority’s fair aggregate burst tolerance. Consider the following:

  • The parent policer decrement rate is set to 20 Mb/s (max-rate 20,000).

  • A priority level’s fair burst size is set to 30 kbytes (mbs-contribution 30 kilobytes).

  • Higher priority traffic is currently taking 12 Mb/s.

  • The priority level has three child policers attached.

  • Each child’s PIR MBS is set to 10 kbytes, which makes each child’s FIR MBS 10 kbytes.

  • The children want 10 Mb/s, but only 8 Mb/s is available.

  • The following table describes the FIR rates of the children based on weights.

    Table 20. FIR Rates of the Children Based on Weights

    FIR Rate

    FIR MBS

    Child 1

    4 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 2

    3 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 3

    1 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

The 12 Mb/s of the higher priority traffic and the 8 Mb/s of fair traffic equal the 20 Mb/s decrement rate of the parent policer.

It is clear that the higher priority traffic is consuming 12 Mb/s of the parent policer’s decrement rate, leaving 8 Mb/s of decrement rate for the lower priority’s fair traffic.

  • The burst tolerance of child 1 is based on 10 kbytes above 4 Mb/s,

  • The burst tolerance of child 2 is based on 10 kbytes above 3 Mb/s,

  • The burst tolerance of child 3 is based on 10 kbytes above 1 Mb/s.

If all three children burst simultaneously (unlikely), they will consume 30 kbytes above 8 Mb/s. This is the same as the remaining decrement rate after the higher priority traffic.

Parent Policer Total Burst Tolerance and Downstream Buffering

The highest in-use priority level’s discard-all threshold is the total burst tolerance of the parent policer. In some cases the parent policer represents downstream bandwidth capacity and the max-rate of the parent policer is set to prevent overrunning the downstream bandwidth. The burst tolerance of the parent policer defines how much more traffic may be sent beyond the downstream scheduling capacity. In the worst case scenario, when the downstream buffering is insufficient to handle the total possible burst from the parent policer, downstream discards based on lack of buffering may occur. However, in all likelihood, this is not the case.

In most cases, lower priority traffic in the policer will be responsible for the greater part of congestion above the parent policer rate. Since this traffic is discarded with a lower threshold, this lowers the effective burst tolerance even while the highest priority traffic is present.

Configuring a Priority Level's MBS Contribution Value

In the most conservative case, a priority level’s mbs-contribution value may be set to be greater than the sum of child policer’s MBS and one max-size-frame per child policer. This ensures that even in the absolute worst case where all the lower priority levels are simultaneously bursting to the maximum capacity of each child, enough burst tolerance for the priority’s children will exist if they also burst to their maximum capacity.

Since simply adding up all the child policer’s PIR MBS values may result in large overall burst tolerances that are not ever likely to be needed, you should consider some level of burst oversubscription when configuring the mbs-contribution value for each priority level. The amount of oversubscription should be determined based on the needs of each priority level.

Using the Fixed Keyword to Create Deterministic Parent Policer Discard Thresholds

In the default behavior, the system ignores the mbs-contribution values for a priority level on a subscriber or SAP parent policer when a child policer is not currently associated with the level. This prevents additional burst tolerance from being added to higher priority traffic within the parent policer.

This does cause fluctuations in the defined threshold values when child policers are added or removed from a parent policer instance. If this behavior is undesirable, the fixed keyword may be used which causes the mbs-contribution value to always be included in the calculation of parent policer’s discard thresholds. The defined mbs-contribution value may be overridden on a subscriber SLA profile or on a SAP instance, but the fixed nature of the contribution cannot be overridden.

If the defined mbs-contribution value for the priority level is zero, the priority level will have no effect on the parent policer’s defined discard thresholds. A packet associated with the priority level will use the next lower priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds.

The no form of this command reverts to the policy’s priority level’s MBS contribution to the default value. When changed, the thresholds for the priority level and all higher priority levels for all instances of the parent policer are recalculated.

Default

no mbs-contribution

Parameters

size

Specifies that the size parameter is required when executing the mbs-contribution command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the priority’s specific portion amount of accumulative MBS for the priority level in bytes or kilobytes which is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is assumed. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the priority level’s mbs-contribution value has been overridden. Clearing an override on parent policer instance causes this value to be enforced.

Values

0 to 16777216

bytes, kilobytes

Specifies that the bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [bytes | kilobytes]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default

no mbs-contribution

Parameters

size

Specifies the mbs-contribution override value.

Values

1 to 16777216 | default

bytes

Specifies that size is expressed in bytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.

kilobytes

Specifies that size is expressed in kilobytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
  • configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
  • configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
  • configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
  • configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service vpls sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default

no mbs-contribution

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying MBS contribution override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 16777216 or default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service ies interface sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default

no mbs-contribution

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying MBS contribution override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 16777216 or default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [bytes | kilobytes]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default

no mbs-contribution

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying MBS contribution override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 16777216 or default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbs-contribution

Syntax

mbs-contribution size [bytes | kilobytes] [fixed]

no mbs-contribution

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)

Full Context

configure qos policer-control-policy root priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution

Description

The mbs-contribution command is used to configure the policy-based burst tolerance for a parent policer instance created when the policy is applied to a SAP, or a subscriber context for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or a 7950 XRS multiservice site. The system uses the parent policer’s min-thresh-separation value, the priority level’s mbs-contribution value, and the number of child policers currently attached to the priority level to derive the priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion of burst tolerance within the local priority level. The shared-portion and fair-portions for each priority level are then used by the system to calculate each priority level’s discard-unfair threshold and discard-all threshold. The mbs-contribution is the minimum separation between two adjacent active discard-all thresholds.

The value for a priority level’s mbs-contribution within the policer-control-policy may be overridden on the SAP, or subscriber sub-profile (applies to the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR) or multiservice site (for 7950 XRS) where the policy is applied in order to allow fine tuning of the discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds relevant to the needs of the local child policers on the object.

Accumulative Nature of Burst Tolerance for a Parent Policer Priority Level

When defining mbs-contribution, the specified size may only be a portion of the burst tolerance associated with the priority level. The packets associated with the priority level share the burst tolerance of lower within the parent policer. As the parent policer PIR bucket depth increases during congestion, the lower priority packets eventually experience discard based on each priority’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds. Assuming congestion continues when all the lower priority packets have been prevented from consuming bucket depth, the burst tolerance for the priority level will be consumed by its own packets and any packets associated with higher priorities.

The Effect of Fair and Unfair Child Policer Traffic at a Parent Policer Priority Level

The system continually monitors the offered rate of each child policer on each parent policer priority level and detects when the policer is in a congested state (the aggregate offered load is greater than the decrement rate defined on the parent policer). As previously stated, the result of congestion is that the parent policer's bucket depth will increase until it eventually hovers around either a discard-unfair or discard-all threshold belonging to one of the priority levels. This threshold is the point where enough packets are being discarded that the increment rate and decrement rate begin to even out. If only a single child policer is associated with the priority level, the discard-unfair threshold is not used since fairness is only applicable when multiple child policers are competing at the same priority level.

When multiple child policers are sharing the congested priority level, the system uses the offered rates and the parenting parameters of each child to determine the fair rate per child when the parent policer is unable to meet the bandwidth needs of each child. The fair rate represents the amount of bandwidth that each child at the priority level should receive relative to the other children at the same level according to the policer control policy instance managing the child policers. This fair rate is applied as the decrement rate for each child's FIR bucket. Changing a child’s FIR rate does not modify the number of packets forwarded by the parent policer for the child’s priority level. It just modifies the forwarded ratio between the children on that priority level. Since each child FIR bucket has some level of burst tolerance before marking its packets as unfair, the current parent policer bucket depth may at times rise above the discard-unfair threshold. The mbs-contribution value provides a means to define how much separation is provided between the priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all threshold to allow the parent policer to absorb some amount of FIR burst before reaching the priority’s discard-all threshold.

This level of fair aggregate burst tolerance is based on the decrement rate of the parent policer’s PIR bucket while the individual fair bursts making up the aggregate are based on each child’s FIR decrement rate. The aggregate fair rate of the priority level is managed by the system with consideration of the current rate of traffic in higher priority levels. In essence, the system ensures that for each iteration of the child FIR rate calculation, the sum of the child FIR decrement rates plus the sum of the higher priority traffic increment rates equals the parent policers decrement rate. This means that dynamic amounts of higher priority traffic can be ignored when sizing a lower priority’s fair aggregate burst tolerance. Consider the following:

  • The parent policer decrement rate is set to 20 Mb/s (max-rate 20,000).

  • A priority level’s fair burst size is set to 30 kbytes (mbs-contribution 30 kbytes).

  • Higher priority traffic is currently taking 12 Mb/s.

  • The priority level has three child policers attached.

  • Each child’s PIR MBS is set to 10 kbytes, which makes each child’s FIR MBS 10 kbytes.

  • The children want 10 Mb/s, but only 8 Mb/s is available

  • Based on weights, the children's FIR rates are set as follows:

    FIR Rate

    FIR MBS

    Child 1

    4 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 2

    3 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 3

    1 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

The 12 Mb/s of the higher priority traffic and the 8 Mb/s of fair traffic equal the 20 Mb/s decrement rate of the parent policer.

It is clear that the higher priority traffic is consuming 12 Mb/s of the parent policer’s decrement rate, leaving 8 Mb/s of decrement rate for the lower priority’s fair traffic.

  • The burst tolerance of child 1 is based on 10 kbytes above 4 Mb/s.

  • The burst tolerance of child 2 is based on 10 kbytes above 3 Mb/s.

  • The burst tolerance of child 3 is based on 10 kbytes above 1 Mb/s.

If all three children burst simultaneously (unlikely), they will consume 30 kbytes above 8 Mb/s. This is the same as the remaining decrement rate after the higher priority traffic.

Parent Policer Total Burst Tolerance and Downstream Buffering

The highest in-use priority level’s discard-all threshold is the total burst tolerance of the parent policer. In some cases, the parent policer represents downstream bandwidth capacity and the max-rate of the parent policer is set to prevent overrunning the downstream bandwidth. The burst tolerance of the parent policer defines how much more traffic may be sent beyond the downstream scheduling capacity. In the worst-case scenario, when the downstream buffering is insufficient to handle the total possible burst from the parent policer, downstream discards based on lack of buffering may occur. However, in all likelihood, this is not the case.

In most cases, lower priority traffic in the policer will be responsible for the greater part of congestion above the parent policer rate. Since this traffic is discarded with a lower threshold, this lowers the effective burst tolerance even while the highest priority traffic is present.

Configuring a Priority Level's MBS Contribution Value

In the most conservative case, a priority level’s mbs-contribution value may be set to be greater than the sum of child policer’s mbs and one max-size-frame per child policer. This ensures that even in the absolute worst case where all the lower priority levels are simultaneously bursting to the maximum capacity of each child, enough burst tolerance for the priority’s children will exist if they also burst to their maximum capacity.

Since simply adding up all the child policer’s PIR MBS values may result in large overall burst tolerances that are not ever likely to be needed, consider some level of burst oversubscription when configuring the mbs-contribution value for each priority level. The amount of oversubscription should be determined based on the needs of each priority level.

Using the Fixed Keyword to Create Deterministic Parent Policer Discard Thresholds

In the default behavior, the system ignores the mbs-contribution values for a priority level on a subscriber for 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or a multiservice site for 7950 XRS, or SAP parent policer when a child policer is not currently associated with the level. This prevents additional burst tolerance from being added to higher priority traffic within the parent policer.

This does cause fluctuations in the defined threshold values when child policers are added or removed from a parent policer instance. If this behavior is undesirable, the fixed keyword may be used that causes the mbs-contribution value to always be included in the calculation of parent policer’s discard thresholds. The defined mbs-contribution value may be overridden on a subscriber sla-profile for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or on a multiservice site for the 7950 XRS, or on a SAP instance, but the fixed nature of the contribution cannot be overridden.

If the defined mbs-contribution value for the priority level is zero, the priority level will have no effect on the parent policer’s defined discard thresholds. A packet associated with the priority level will use the next lower priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s priority level’s MBS contribution to the default value. When changed, the thresholds for the priority level and all higher priority levels for all instances of the parent policer will be recalculated.

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when executing the mbs-contribution command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the priority’s specific portion amount of accumulative MBS for the priority level. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the priority level’s mbs-contribution value has been overridden.

Values

0 to 4194304 or default (applies to the 7450 ESS)

0 to 16777216 or default (applies to the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS)

Default

8

bytes | kilobytes:

This parameter indicates whether the size is expressed in bytes or kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

fixed

The optional fixed keyword is used to force the inclusion of the defined mbs-contribution value in the parent policer’s discard threshold calculations. If the mbs-contribution command is executed without the fixed keyword, the fixed calculation behavior for the priority level is removed.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mbytes

mbytes

Syntax

mbytes {mbytes | disable}

no mbytes

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>client mbytes)

[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>server mbytes)

Full Context

configure system security ssh key-re-exchange client mbytes

configure system security ssh key-re-exchange server mbytes

Description

This command configures the maximum bytes to be transmitted before a key re-exchange is initiated by the server.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

mbytes 1024

Parameters

mbytes

Specifies the number of megabytes, on a SSH session, after which the SSH client initiates the key-re-exchange.

Values

1 to 64000

Default

1024

disable

Specifies that a session will never timeout. To re-enable mbytes, enter the command without the disable option.

Platforms

All

mc-constraints

mc-constraints

Syntax

mc-constraints

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp>mcac mc-constraints)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping mcac mc-constraints

Description

Commands in this context configure the level and its associated bandwidth for a bundle or a logical interface.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mc-constraints

Syntax

mc-constraints

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping>mcac mc-constraints)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mcac mc-constraints

configure service vpls sap mld-snooping mcac mc-constraints

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast CAC constraints.

Platforms

All

mc-constraints

Syntax

mc-constraints

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>if>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if>mcac mc-constraints)

Full Context

configure service vprn mld interface mcac mc-constraints

configure service vprn mld group-interface mcac mc-constraints

configure service vprn igmp group-interface mcac mc-constraints

configure service vprn igmp interface mcac mc-constraints

configure service vprn pim interface mcac mc-constraints

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast CAC constraints.

Platforms

All

  • configure service vprn igmp interface mcac mc-constraints
  • configure service vprn mld interface mcac mc-constraints
  • configure service vprn pim interface mcac mc-constraints

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn igmp group-interface mcac mc-constraints
  • configure service vprn mld group-interface mcac mc-constraints

mc-constraints

Syntax

mc-constraints

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim>interface>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>interface>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>router>mcac>policy>bundle mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>interface>mcac mc-constraints)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)

Full Context

configure router pim interface mcac mc-constraints

configure router igmp group-interface mcac mc-constraints

configure router mld interface mcac mc-constraints

configure router mcac policy bundle mc-constraints

configure router igmp interface mcac mc-constraints

configure router mld group-interface mcac mc-constraints

Description

Commands in this context configure the level and its associated bandwidth for a bundle or a logical interface.

Platforms

All

  • configure router mld interface mcac mc-constraints
  • configure router pim interface mcac mc-constraints
  • configure router mcac policy bundle mc-constraints
  • configure router igmp interface mcac mc-constraints

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router igmp group-interface mcac mc-constraints
  • configure router mld group-interface mcac mc-constraints

mc-ecmp-balance

mc-ecmp-balance

Syntax

[no] mc-ecmp-balance

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-balance)

Full Context

configure router pim mc-ecmp-balance

Description

This command enables multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links based on the number of (S, G) distributed over each link. When enabled, each new multicast stream that needs to be forwarded over an ECMP link is compared to the count of (S, G) already using each link, so that the link with the fewest (S, G) is chosen.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled command.

The no form of this command disables multicast ECMP balancing.

Platforms

All

mc-ecmp-balance

Syntax

[no] mc-ecmp-balance

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mc-ecmp-balance)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim mc-ecmp-balance

Description

This command enables multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links based on the number of (S, G) distributed over each link. When enabled, each new multicast stream that needs to be forwarded over an ECMP link is compared to the count of (S, G) already using each link, so that the link with the fewest (S, G) is chosen.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled command.

The no form of this command disables multicast ECMP balancing.

Platforms

All

mc-ecmp-balance-hold

mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Syntax

mc-ecmp-balance-hold minutes

no mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold)

Full Context

configure router pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Description

This command defines a hold period that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link. It is also used periodically to rebalance if channels have been removed from the ECMP link.

If the ECMP interface has not changed in the hold period and if no multicast streams have been removed, then no action is taken when the timer triggers.

This parameter should be used to avoid excessive changes to the multicast distribution.

A rebalance will not occur to multicast streams that have a priority greater than the configured ecmp-opt-threshold.

The no form of this command removes the minutes value from the configuration.

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the hold time, in minutes, that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link.

Values

2 to 600

Platforms

All

mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Syntax

mc-ecmp-balance-hold minutes

no mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Description

This command configures the hold time for multicast balancing over ECMP links.

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the hold time, in minutes, that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link.

Platforms

All

mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Syntax

mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled [rebalance]

no mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Description

This command enables hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links and causes PIM joins to be distributed over the multiple ECMP paths based on a hash of S and G (and possibly next-hop IP address). When a link in the ECMP set is removed, the multicast flows that were using that link are redistributed over the remaining ECMP links using the same hash algorithm. When a link is added to the ECMP set new joins may be allocated to the new link based on the hash algorithm, but existing multicast flows using the other ECMP links stay on those links until they are pruned.

Hash-based multicast balancing is supported for both IPv4 and IPv6.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-balance command. Using this command and the lag-usage-optimization command on mixed port speed LAGs is not recommended, because some groups may be forwarded incorrectly.

The no form of this command disables the hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links.

The no form of this command means that the use of multiple ECMP paths if enabled at the config>router or config>service>vprn context is controlled by the existing implementation and CLI commands mc-ecmp-balance.

Default

no mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Parameters

rebalance

Specifies to rebalance flows to newly added links immediately, instead of waiting until they are pruned.

Platforms

All

mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Syntax

[no] mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled [rebalance]

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled)

Full Context

configure router pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Description

This command enables hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links and causes PIM joins to be distributed over the multiple ECMP paths based on a hash of S and G (and possibly next-hop IP address). When a link in the ECMP set is removed, the multicast flows that were using that link are redistributed over the remaining ECMP links using the same hash algorithm. When a link is added to the ECMP set new joins may be allocated to the new link based on the hash algorithm, but existing multicast flows using the other ECMP links stay on those links until they are pruned.

Hash-based multicast balancing is supported for both IPv4 and IPv6.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-balance command. Using this command and the lag-usage-optimization command on mixed port speed LAGs is not recommended, because some groups may be forwarded incorrectly.

The no form of this command disables the hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links.

Default

no mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Parameters

rebalance

Specifies to rebalance flows to newly added links immediately, instead of waiting until they are pruned.

Platforms

All

mc-endpoint

mc-endpoint

Syntax

[no] mc-endpoint

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-endpoint)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-endpoint

Description

This command specifies that the endpoint is multi-chassis. This value should be the same on both MC-EP peers for the pseudowires that must be part of the same group.

The no form of this command removes the endpoint from the MC-EP. Single chassis behavior applies.

Default

no mc-endpoint

Platforms

All

mc-endpoint

Syntax

mc-endpoint mc-ep-id

no mc-endpoint

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint mc-endpoint)

Full Context

configure service vpls endpoint mc-endpoint

Description

This command specifies the identifier associated with the multi-chassis endpoint. This value should be the same on both MC-EP peers for the pseudowires that must be part of the same group.

The no form of this command removes the endpoint from the MC-EP. Single chassis behavior applies.

Default

no mc-endpoint

Parameters

mc-ep-id

Specifies a multi-chassis endpoint ID

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

All

mc-enh-load-balancing

mc-enh-load-balancing

Syntax

[no] mc-enh-load-balancing

Context

[Tree] (config>system>load-balancing mc-enh-load-balancing)

Full Context

configure system load-balancing mc-enh-load-balancing

Description

This command enables enhanced egress multicast load balancing behavior for Layer 3 multicast. When enabled, the router will spray the multicast traffic using as hash inputs from the packet based on lsr-load-balancing, l4-load-balancing and system-ip-load-balancing configurations. That is, an ingress LER or IP PE will spray traffic based on the IP hash criteria: SA/DA + optional Layer 4 port + optional system IP egress LER or LSR will spray traffic based on label or IP hash criteria outlined above or both based on configuration of lsr-load-balancing, l4-load-balancing, and system-ip-load-balancing.

The no form of the command preserves the default behavior for per flow hashing of multicast traffic.

Default

no mc-enh-load-balancing

Platforms

All

mc-ep-peer

mc-ep-peer

Syntax

mc-ep-peer name

mc-ep-peer ip-address

no mc-ep-peer

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint>mc-ep mc-ep-peer)

Full Context

configure service vpls endpoint mc-endpoint mc-ep-peer

Description

This command adds multi-chassis endpoint object.

The no form of this command removes the multi-chassis endpoint object.

Default

no mc-ep-peer

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the multi-chassis endpoint peer

ip-address

Specifies the IP address of multi-chassis endpoint peer

Platforms

All

mc-handover

mc-handover

Syntax

mc-handover percentage

no mc-handover

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if>sd mc-handover)

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if>pip mc-handover)

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if>hd mc-handover)

Full Context

configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface sd mc-handover

configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface pip mc-handover

configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface hd mc-handover

Description

This command sets the rate at which the Fast Channel Change (FCC) server will send unicast data to the FCC client during the handover to the multicast stream.

The no form of the command returns the parameter to the default value.

Default

mc-handover 25

Parameters

percentage

Specifies the percentage of nominal bandwidth.

Values

HD:

0 to 100

SD and PIP:

0 to 600

Default

25

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

mc-ipsec

mc-ipsec

Syntax

[no] mc-ipsec

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-ipsec)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ipsec

Description

Commands in this context configure multi-chassis peer parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mc-ipsec-non-forwarding

mc-ipsec-non-forwarding

Syntax

[no] mc-ipsec-non-forwarding tunnel-grp-id

Context

[Tree] (config>vrrp>policy>priority-event mc-ipsec-non-forwarding)

Full Context

configure vrrp policy priority-event mc-ipsec-non-forwarding

Description

This command configures an instance of a multi-chassis IPsec tunnel-group Priority Event used to override the base priority value of a VRRP virtual router instance depending on the operational state of the event.

Parameters

tunnel-grp-id

Identifies the multi-chassis IPsec tunnel group whose non-forwarding state is monitored by this priority control event.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mc-lag

mc-lag

Syntax

[no] mc-lag

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-lag)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-lag

Description

Commands in this context configure multi-chassis LAG operations and related parameters.

The no form of this command administratively disables multi-chassis LAG. MC-LAG can be issued only when mc-lag is shutdown.

Default

no mc-lag

Platforms

All

mc-lag

Syntax

mc-lag

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>redundancy mc-lag)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm redundancy mc-lag

Description

Commands in this context configure the MC-LAG specific ETH-CFM redundancy parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mc-maximum-routes

mc-maximum-routes

Syntax

mc-maximum-routes number [log-only] [ threshold threshold]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn mc-maximum-routes)

Full Context

configure service vprn mc-maximum-routes

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of multicast routes that can be held in the form of this command in a VPN routing or forwarding (VRF) context. When this limit is reached, a log and SNMP trap are sent. If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then no new joins are processed.

The no form of this command disables the limit of multicast routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default

no mc-maximum-routes

Parameters

number

Specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.

Values

1 to 2147483647

log-only

Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.

threshold

Specifies the percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be sent.

Values

0 to 100

Default

10

Platforms

All

mc-maximum-routes

Syntax

mc-maximum-routes number [log-only] [ threshold threshold]

no mc-maximum-routes

Context

[Tree] (config>router mc-maximum-routes)

Full Context

configure router mc-maximum-routes

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of multicast routes that can be held within a VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) context. When this limit is reached, a log and SNMP trap are sent. If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then no new joins will be processed.

The no form of this command disables the limit of multicast routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default

no mc-maximum-routes

Parameters

number

Specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.

Values

1 to 2147483647

log-only

Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.

threshold

Specifies the percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be sent.

Values

0 to 100

Default

10

Platforms

All

mc-ring

mc-ring

Syntax

mc-ring

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-ring)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ring

Description

Commands in this context configure the multi-chassis ring parameters.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mc-ring

Platforms

All

mc-ring

Syntax

[no] mc-ring

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync mc-ring)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync mc-ring

Description

This command specifies whether multi-chassis ring information shoud be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer.

Default

no mc-ring

Platforms

All

mcac

mcac

Syntax

mcac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>snooping mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>igmp-snooping mcac)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp snooping mcac

configure service pw-template igmp-snooping mcac

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast CAC policy parameters and constraints for this interface.

Platforms

All

mcac

Syntax

mcac

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp mcac)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping mcac

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast CAC parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mcac

Syntax

mcac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mld-snooping mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping mcac)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping mcac

configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping mcac

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mcac

configure service vpls sap mld-snooping mcac

configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping mcac

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping mcac

Description

This command configures multicast CAC policy and constraints for this interface.

Platforms

All

mcac

Syntax

mcac

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>if mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>grp-if mcac)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if mcac)

Full Context

configure service vprn igmp group-interface mcac

configure service vprn mld interface mcac

configure service vprn igmp interface mcac

configure service vprn mld group-interface mcac

configure service vprn pim interface mcac

Description

This command configures multicast CAC policy and constraints for this interface.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn mld group-interface mcac
  • configure service vprn igmp group-interface mcac

All

  • configure service vprn igmp interface mcac
  • configure service vprn mld interface mcac
  • configure service vprn pim interface mcac

mcac

Syntax

mcac

Context

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>interface mcac)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface mcac)

[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface mcac)

[Tree] (config>router>pim>if mcac)

[Tree] (config>router mcac)

[Tree] (config>router>mld>interface mcac)

Full Context

configure router igmp interface mcac

configure router mld group-interface mcac

configure router igmp group-interface mcac

configure router pim interface mcac

configure router mcac

configure router mld interface mcac

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast CAC parameters.

Platforms

All

  • configure router igmp interface mcac
  • configure router mcac
  • configure router mld interface mcac
  • configure router pim interface mcac

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure router mld group-interface mcac
  • configure router igmp group-interface mcac

mcast-capacity

mcast-capacity

Syntax

mcast-capacity primary-percentage secondary secondary-percentage

no mcast-capacity

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>chassis-level>plane-capacity mcast-capacity)

Full Context

configure mcast-management chassis-level per-mcast-plane-capacity mcast-capacity

Description

This command configures the primary and secondary multicast plane capacities used when the full complement of possible switch fabrics in the system is not up (at least one possible switch fabric is not provisioned or is down). The rates are defined as a percentage of the total multicast plane capacity which is configured using the total-capacity command.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default

mcast-capacity 87.50 secondary 87.50

Parameters

primary-percentage

Specifies the percentage of the total multicast plane capacity to be used for primary multicast planes.

secondary-percentage

Specifies the percentage of the total multicast plane capacity to be used for secondary multicast planes.

Values

0.01 to 100

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-1x-48D, 7750 SR-1x-92S, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mcast-ipv4

mcast-ipv4

Syntax

[no] mcast-ipv4

Context

[Tree] (config>cflowd>collector>export-filter>family mcast-ipv4)

Full Context

configure cflowd collector export-filter family mcast-ipv4

Description

This command filters multicast IPv4 flow data from being sent to the associated collector.

The no form of this command removes the filter, allowing multicast IPv4 flow data to be sent to the associated collector.

Default

no mcast-ipv4

Platforms

All

mcast-ipv6

mcast-ipv6

Syntax

[no] mcast-ipv6

Context

[Tree] (config>cflowd>collector>export-filter>family mcast-ipv6)

Full Context

configure cflowd collector export-filter family mcast-ipv6

Description

This command filters multicast IPv6 flow data from being sent to the associated collector.

The no form of this command removes the filter, allowing multicast IPv6 flow data to be sent to the associated collector.

Default

no mcast-ipv6

Platforms

All

mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope

mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope

Syntax

mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope {mac-based | sg-based}

no mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope)

Full Context

configure service vpls mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope

Description

This command specifies the forwarding scope used for IPv6 multicast traffic when PIM snooping for IPv6 is enabled.

By default, the scope is mac-based; IPv6 snooped multicast traffic is forwarded is based on the low-order 32 bits of the destination IPv6 address.

When the scope is configured as sg-based, the IPv6 snooped multicast traffic is forwarded based on both its full source (if specified in the join) and destination IPv6 address. SG-based forwarding is only supported on FP3- (or higher) based line cards.

PIM snooping for IPv6 must be disabled to change the forwarding mode within a VPLS service between mac-based and sg-based.

The no form of this command configures the router to use the default value.

Default

mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope mac-based

Parameters

mac-based

Sets forwarding for PIM-snooped IPv6 multicast traffic based on the low-order 32 bits of its destination IPv6 address.

sg-based

Sets forwarding for PIM-snooped IPv6 multicast traffic based on its full source (if specified in the join) and destination IPv6 address.

Platforms

All

mcast-management

mcast-management

Syntax

mcast-management

Context

[Tree] (config mcast-management)

Full Context

configure mcast-management

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast management parameters. The mcast-management CLI node contains the bandwidth-policy and multicast-info-policy definitions. The bandwidth-policy is used to manage the ingress multicast paths into the switch fabric. The multicast-info-policy defines how each multicast channel is handled by the system. The policy may be used by the ingress multicast bandwidth manager, the ECMP path manager and the egress multicast CAC manager.

The mcast-management node always exists and contains the default bandwidth-policy and the default multicast-info-policy. Enter the mcast-management node when editing, deleting or creating a bandwidth policy or multicast info policy. The default bandwidth policy and multicast-info-policy cannot be edited or deleted.

A chassis-level node within multicast-management is used to control the switch fabric multicast planes replication limits. The switch fabric multicast planes are the individual multicast spatial replication contexts available in the system.

Platforms

All

mcast-path-management

mcast-path-management

Syntax

mcast-path-management

Context

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress mcast-path-management)

Full Context

configure card fp ingress mcast-path-management

Description

This CLI node contains the forwarding plane settings for ingress multicast path management. Enter the node to configure the bandwidth-policy and the administrative state of ingress multicast path management.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-1x-48D, 7750 SR-1x-92S, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mcast-pool

mcast-pool

Syntax

mcast-pool percent-of-total percent-of-buffers resv-cbs percent-of-pool slope-policy policy-name

no mcast-pool

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>bw-plcy mcast-pool)

Full Context

configure mcast-management bandwidth-policy mcast-pool

Description

This command configures the ingress multicast path management buffer pool. The pool is used by the primary and secondary path queues through which all ingress managed multicast traffic must flow. The parameters may be used to configure the size of the pool relative to the total ingress buffer space, the amount of reserved CBS buffers within the pool and the slope policy used to manage early congestion detection functions in the shared portion of the pool.

Care should be taken when managing the buffer pool space as changes to the systems buffer pool behavior can have negative effects on multicast and unicast forwarding.

Sizing the Pool

The percent-of-total command defines how much of the total ingress buffer pool space for the MDA is dedicated for multicast channels managed by the bandwidth policy. Since multicast typically has a higher scheduling priority through the switch fabric, the buffer pool does not need to be large. By default, the system reserves 10% of the buffers on the ingress side of the MDA once multicast path management is enabled.

Reserved CBS Portion of the Pool

The multicast pool is divided into two portions; reserved and shared. The reserved portion is used by the multicast path queues until they cross there individual CBS thresholds. Since the CBS thresholds are configured as percentages and the percentages can oversubscribe the reserved portion of the pool, it is possible for some of the queues CBS buffer allocation to be met by the shared portion of the pool. By default, 50% of the pool is defined as reserved. This may be changed using the resv-cbs percentage parameter.

Shared Portion WRED Slopes

The shared portion of the buffer pool is used by queues that have crossed over their CBS thresholds. Since the total MBS values for the multicast path queues may oversubscribe the pool size, a buffer congestion control mechanism is supported within the pool in the form of two WRED slopes. The slope-policy parameter defines how the slopes are configured and whether they are activated. Each packet entering a path queue is defined as high or low priority within the queue based on the channel’s preference value relative to the cong-priority-threshold command. When getting a shared buffer of a high priority packet, the high WRED slope is used. Low priority packets use the low WRED slope.

The no form of this command returns the managed multicast path pool to its default settings.

Parameters

percent-of-buffers

Specifies the percentage of ingress buffers that is allocated to the multicast pool.

Values

1 to 50

Default

10

percent-of-pool

Specifies the percentage of the pool that is reserved for multicast path queues within their CBS threshold.

Values

1 to 100

Default

50

slope-policy-name

Specifies the WRED slopes within the multicast pool. Once a slope policy is associated with a buffer pool, it cannot be deleted.

Default

default

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-1x-48D, 7750 SR-1x-92S, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mcast-reporting

mcast-reporting

Syntax

[no] mcast-reporting

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy mcast-reporting)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy mcast-reporting

Description

Commands in this context configure mcast reporting.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mcast-reporting-dest

mcast-reporting-dest

Syntax

mcast-reporting-dest dest-name [create]

no mcast-reporting-dest dest-name

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest)

Full Context

configure mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest

Description

This command creates a multicast reporting destination hierarchy in CLI under which parameters defining this destination can be specified. The destination refers to an external node that collects and analyze IGMP events.

The multicast reporting destination is associated with a name that each subscriber can reference to send the IGMP related events.

It can be also referenced in the host tracking policy in case that IGMP events are related to the host tracking feature.

The no form of this command removes the destination name from the configuration.

Parameters

dest-name

Specifies the multicast reporting destination name.

Platforms

All

mcast-reporting-dest

Syntax

[no] mcast-reporting-dest [dest-name]

Context

[Tree] (debug>mcast-mgmt mcast-reporting-dest)

Full Context

debug mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest

Description

This command debugs multicast path management reporting destinations and applies only to the 7750 SR.

Platforms

All

mcast-reporting-dest

Syntax

mcast-reporting-dest dest-name

no mcast-reporting-dest

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy>mcast-reporting mcast-reporting-dest)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy mcast-reporting mcast-reporting-dest

Description

This command references the multicast reporting destination to which IGMP-related events are exported. The multicast-reporting-destination is referenced within the IGMP policy for the subscriber.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters

dest-name

Specifies the name of the multicast reporting destination, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mcast-tunneling

mcast-tunneling

Syntax

[no] mcast-tunneling

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp>targ-session>peer mcast-tunneling)

[Tree] (config>router>ldp>targ-session>peer-template mcast-tunneling)

Full Context

configure router ldp targeted-session peer mcast-tunneling

configure router ldp targeted-session peer-template mcast-tunneling

Description

At the downstream router, the FEC is resolved and the result of the resolution is a Label Mapping advertisement to the upstream peer.

At the upstream router, if the RSVP LSP does not exist to the peer address, the upstream router does not use the T-LDP session for FEC resolution.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

no mcast-tunneling

Platforms

All

mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

Syntax

[no] mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp mcast-upstream-asbr-frr)

Full Context

configure router ldp mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

Description

This command enables ASBR MoFRR.

When ASBR MoFRR is enabled, the local leaf will perform MoFRR for multiple ASBRs; for example, if there are two ASBRs, the local leaf will select one ASBR as the primary and another ASBR as the backup.

If the mcast-upstream-frr command is enabled, disabling ASBR MoFRR will only allow IGP MoFRR in the local AS; for example, a single ASBR will be selected and two separate, disjointed paths will be selected as the primary and backup LSPs from the local leaf to ASBR.

If the mcast-upstream-frr command is disabled, disabling ASBR MoFRR will disable MoFRR entirely.

The no form of the command disables ASBR MoFRR.

Default

no mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

Platforms

All

mcast-upstream-frr

mcast-upstream-frr

Syntax

[no] mcast-upstream-frr

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp mcast-upstream-frr)

Full Context

configure router ldp mcast-upstream-frr

Description

This command enables the mLDP fast upstream switchover feature.

When this command is enabled and LDP is resolving a mLDP FEC received from a downstream LSR, it checks if an ECMP next-hop or a LFA next-hop exist to the root LSR node. If LDP finds one, it programs a primary ILM on the interface corresponding to the primary next-hop and a backup ILM on the interface corresponding to the ECMP or LFA next-hop. LDP then sends the corresponding labels to both upstream LSR nodes. In normal operation, the primary ILM accepts packets while the backup ILM drops them. If the interface or the upstream LSR of the primary ILM goes down causing the LDP session to go down, the backup ILM will then start accepting packets.

In order to make use of the ECMP next-hop, the user must configure the ecmp value in the system to at least 2 using the following command:

configure router ecmp

In order to make use of the LFA next-hop, the user must enable LFA using the following commands:

configure router isis loopfree-alternates

configure router ospf loopfree-alternates

Enabling IP FRR or LDP FRR features is not strictly required since LDP only needs to know where the alternate next-hop to the root LSR is to be able to send the Label Mapping message to program the backup ILM at the initial signaling of the tree. Thus enabling the LFA option is sufficient. If however, unicast IP and LDP prefixes need to be protected, then these features and the mLDP fast upstream switchover can be enabled concurrently.

The mLDP FRR fast switchover relies on the fast detection of loss of **LDP session** to the upstream peer to which the primary ILM label had been advertised. We strongly recommended to perform the following:

  • Enable BFD on all LDP interfaces to upstream LSR nodes. When BFD detects the loss of the last adjacency to the upstream LSR, it will bring down immediately the LDP session which will cause the IOM to activate the backup ILM.

  • If there is a concurrent TLDP adjacency to the same upstream LSR node, enable BFD on the T-LDP peer in addition to enabling it on the interface.

  • Enable the ldp-sync-timer option on all interfaces to the upstream LSR nodes. If an LDP session to the upstream LSR to which the primary ILM is resolved goes down for any other reason than a failure of the interface or of the upstream LSR, routing and LDP will go out of sync. This means the backup ILM will remain activated until the next time SPF is rerun by IGP. By enabling IGP-LDP synchronization feature, the advertised link metric will be changed to max value as soon as the LDP session goes down. This in turn will trigger an SPF and LDP will likely download a new set of primary and backup ILMs.

The no form of this command disables the fast upstream switchover for mLDP FECs.

Default

no mcast-upstream-frr

Platforms

All

mcast-vpn-ipv4

mcast-vpn-ipv4

Syntax

mcast-vpn-ipv4 send send-limit receive [none]

mcast-vpn-ipv4 send send-limit

no mcast-vpn-ipv4

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4)

Full Context

configure router bgp add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4

configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4

configure router bgp group add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4

Description

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast IPv4 VPN routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast IPv4 VPN routes.

The maximum number of multicast paths per IPv4 VPN prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast IPv4 VPN routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast IPv4 VPN to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default

no mcast-vpn-ipv4

Parameters

send-limit

Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast IPv4 VPN prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast IPv4 VPN AFI/SAFI.

Values

1 to 16, none

receive

Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv4 VPN prefix.

none

Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv4 VPN prefix.

Platforms

All

mcast-vpn-ipv6

mcast-vpn-ipv6

Syntax

mcast-vpn-ipv6 send send-limit receive [none]

mcast-vpn-ipv6 send send-limit

no mcast-vpn-ipv6

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6)

Full Context

configure router bgp add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6

configure router bgp group add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6

configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6

Description

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast IPv6 VPN routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast IPv6 VPN routes.

The maximum number of multicast paths per IPv6 VPN prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast IPv6 VPN routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast IPv6 VPN to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default

no mcast-vpn-ipv6

Parameters

send-limit

Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast IPv6 VPN prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast IPv6 VPN AFI/SAFI.

Values

1 to 16, none

receive

Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv6 VPN prefix.

none

Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv6 VPN prefix.

Platforms

All

mcc-mnc-prefix

mcc-mnc-prefix

Syntax

mcc-mnc-prefix imsi-prefix-string

no mcc-mnc-prefix

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-fltr>imsi-apn-fltr>entry mcc-mnc-prefix)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter imsi-apn-filter entry mcc-mnc-prefix

Description

This command configures a matching condition for the IMSI (MCC-MNC) prefix.

Parameters

imsi-prefix-string

Specifies a string of 1 to 6 decimal digits representing the IMSI prefix to be matched against the IMSI IE of the packet, or the special value ANY_IMSI to indicate that an IMSI IE must be present as a matching condition regardless of the IMSI IE value.

If no MCC-MNC prefix is specified, the entry will match GTP packets that have an IMSI IE containing any value.

Values

0 to 999999, ANY_IMSI

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mcr-default-gtw

mcr-default-gtw

Syntax

mcr-default-gtw

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mcr-default-gtw)

Full Context

configure service vpls mcr-default-gtw

Description

Commands in this context configure the default gateway information when using Dual Homing in L2-TPSDA. The IP and MAC address of the default gateway used for subscribers on an L2 MC-Ring are configured in this context. After a ring heals or fails, the system sends out a gratuitous ARP on an active ring SAP in order to attract traffic from subscribers on the ring with connectivity to that SAP.

Platforms

All

mcs

mcs

Syntax

mcs [detail]

no mcs

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>pim-snooping mcs)

Full Context

debug service id pim-snooping mcs

Description

This command enables or disables debugging for PIM snooping multi-chassis synchronization.

Parameters

detail

Provides detailed debugging information

Platforms

All

mcs

Syntax

mcs [ip-int-name]

no mcs

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>igmp mcs)

Full Context

debug router igmp mcs

Description

This command enables debugging for IGMP multicast servers (MCS).

The no form of the command disables the IGMP interface debugging for the specifies interface name.

Parameters

ip-int-name

Debugs the information associated with the specified IP interface name.

Values

IP interface address

Platforms

All

mcs-interval

mcs-interval

Syntax

mcs-interval minutes

mcs-interval use-update-interval

no mcs-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>acct-plcy mcs-interval)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt radius-accounting-policy mcs-interval

Description

This command specifies the interval at which the active BNG in a dual-homed deployment synchronizes subscriber accounting data using MCS to the standby BNG. The MCS interval is a statically configured value or is equal to the configured RADIUS accounting update-interval.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

no mcs-interval

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the interval, in minutes, at which accounting data of the subscriber is synchronized.

Values

5 to 60

use-update-interval

Synchronizes subscriber accounting data at the same time as the RADIUS interim-update. For this, the configured update-interval in the RADIUS accounting policy is used, ignoring RADIUS overrides.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mcs-peer

mcs-peer

Syntax

mcs-peer ip-address sync-tag [sync-tag]

no mcs-peer

Context

[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache mcs-peer)

Full Context

configure python python-policy cache mcs-peer

Description

This command specifies the MCS peer’s address and sync-tag for syncing the cached entries of the python-policy. The sync-tag must be match on both chassis.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

ip-address

Specifies the IPv4 address of the MCS peer.

sync-tag

Specifies the tag for sync, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

mcs-peer

Syntax

mcs-peer ip-address sync-tag sync-tag

no mcs-peer

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw mcs-peer)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw mcs-peer)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mcs-peer

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mcs-peer

Description

This command specifies the MCS peer address and sync-tag for synchronization of ESM and the tunnel state for ESM over soft-GRE with an MCS peer.

The no form of this command specifies no MCS synchronization of WLAN-GW ESM host and tunnel state on this group interface.

Default

no mcs-peer

Parameters

ip-address

Specifies the IPv4 address or the global IPv6 unicast address for an MCS peer.

sync-tag

Specifies the sync tag for synchronization of ESM and the tunnel state for ESM over soft-GRE with an MCS peer.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

md

md

Syntax

md file-url

Context

[Tree] (file md)

Full Context

file md

Description

This command creates a new directory in a file system.

Directories can only be created one level at a time.

Parameters

file-url

Specifies the directory name to be created.

Values

local-url

[cflash-id/][file-path] up to 200 characters, including cflash-id directory length up to 99 each

remote-url

[{ftp:// | tftp://}login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]

up to 247 characters

directory length up to 99 characters each

remote-locn

[hostname | ipv4-address | [ipv6-address]]

ipv4-address

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

interface - up to 32 characters, for link local addresses 255

cflash-id

cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

Platforms

All

md-auto-id

md-auto-id

Syntax

md-auto-id

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-cfm md-auto-id)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm md-auto-id

Description

This command automatically assigns numerical index values for ma-index and md-index in model-driven management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical index as the primary key for ETH-CFM domains and associations. In model-driven interfaces, domains and associations use string names as keys. The domain and association can optionally be created without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical index in model-driven interfaces. In this case, SR OS assigns an index using the configured index range.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

md-auto-id

Syntax

md-auto-id

Context

[Tree] (config>qos md-auto-id)

Full Context

configure qos md-auto-id

Description

This command automatically assigns numerical ID values for QoS policies in model-driven (MD) management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical policy ID as the primary key for sap-ingress, sap-egress, and network QoS policies. In model-driven interfaces, SAP and network policies use string names as keys. The SAP and network policies can optionally be created in MD interfaces without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical policy ID. In this case, SR OS assigns an ID using the configured ID range.

Platforms

All

md-auto-id

Syntax

md-auto-id

Context

[Tree] (config>filter md-auto-id)

Full Context

configure filter md-auto-id

Description

This command automatically assigns numerical ID values for filter policies in model-driven management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical filter ID as the primary key for IP filters, IPv6 filters, and MAC filters. In model-driven interfaces, IP, IPv6, and MAC filters use string names as keys. The filters can optionally be created in MD interfaces without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical filter ID. In this case, SR OS assigns an ID using the configured ID range.

Platforms

All

md-auto-id

Syntax

md-auto-id

Context

[Tree] (config>service md-auto-id)

Full Context

configure service md-auto-id

Description

This command automatically assigns numerical ID values for services, customers, and PW templates in model-driven (MD) management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical service ID, customer ID, and PW template ID as the primary key for services, customers, and PW templates. In model-driven interfaces, services, customers, and PW templates use string names as keys. The services, customers, and PW templates can optionally be created in MD interfaces without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical ID. In this case, SR OS assigns an ID using the configured ID range.

Platforms

All

md-cli

md-cli

Syntax

md-cli

Context

[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli md-cli)

Full Context

configure system management-interface cli md-cli

Description

Commands in this context configure the MD-CLI management interface.

Platforms

All

md-cli

Syntax

md-cli

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>management-interface md-cli)

Full Context

configure system security management-interface md-cli

Description

Commands in this context configure hash-control for the MD-CLI interface.

Platforms

All

md-cli-session

md-cli-session

Syntax

md-cli-session {permit | deny}

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>profile>grpc>rpc-authorization md-cli-session)

Full Context

configure system security profile grpc rpc-authorization md-cli-session

Description

This command configures the use of the MdCli Session RPC for the user profile.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

md-cli-session permit

Parameters

deny

Specifies that the use of MdCli Session RPC is denied.

permit

Specifies that the use of MdCli Session RPC is permitted.

Platforms

All

md-index-range

md-index-range

Syntax

md-index-range start md-index end md-index

no md-index-range

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>md-auto-id md-index-range)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm md-auto-id md-index-range

Description

This command specifies the range of indexes used by SR OS to automatically assign an index to ETH-CFM domains that are created in model-driven interfaces without an index explicitly specified by the user or client.

A domain created with an explicitly-specified index cannot use an index in this range. In classic CLI and SNMP, the ID range cannot be changed while objects exist inside the previous or new range. In MD interfaces, the range can be changed, which causes any previously existing objects in the previous ID range to be deleted and re-created using a new ID in the new range.

The no form of this command removes the range values.

See the md-auto-id command for further details.

Parameters

start md-index

Specifies the lower value of the index range. The value must be less than or equal to the end value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

end md-index

Specifies the upper value of the index range. The value must be greater than or equal to the start value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

md-interfaces

md-interfaces

Syntax

[no] md-interfaces

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>management-interface>output-authorization md-interfaces)

Full Context

configure system security management-interface output-authorization md-interfaces

Description

This command controls output authorization of commands or RPCs for model-driven interfaces that display configuration or state.

When enabled, output authorization is performed for the following commands:

  • MD-CLI info and compare commands

  • NETCONF <get> and <get-config> RPCs

  • gNMI Get RPC

When disabled, output authorization is not performed, which may significantly decrease the system response time by reducing command authorization requests, especially when remote AAA servers are used. Input to edit configuration is always authorized based on the AAA configuration.

By default, authorization checks are performed for configuration and state output.

The no form of this command disables authorization checks, allowing the output to be displayed immediately.

Default

md-interfaces

Platforms

All

md5-salt

md5-salt

Syntax

[no] md5-salt string

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>http-enrich>field md5-salt)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group http-enrich field md5-salt

Description

This command configures an MD5 salt string. The configured string is appended to the parameter before performing MD5 hashing of the field.

The no form of this command removes the configuration of the MD5 salt string.

Default

no md5-salt

Parameters

string

Specifies the MD5 string, up to 16 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mda

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-id

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>wlan-gw-group mda)

Full Context

configure isa wlan-gw-group mda

Description

This command enables an ISA for WLAN-GW functionality.

The no form of this command removes the ISA from the WLAN-GW configuration.

Parameters

mda-id

Indicates the IOM and MDA slot in format slot/mda.

Values

slot — 1 to 10

mda — 1 to 2

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-slot

Context

[Tree] (config>card mda)

Full Context

configure card mda

Description

This mandatory command enables access to a card’s MDA context. In SR OS, MDAs cover MDA and XMA.

Parameters

mda-slot

Specifies the MDA slot number to be configured. Slots are numbered 1 and 2. On vertically oriented slots, the top MDA slot is number 1, and the bottom MDA slot is number 2. On horizontally oriented slots, the left MDA is number 1, and the right MDA slot is number 2.

Values

1, 2

Platforms

All

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-slot

Context

[Tree] (config>card>xiom mda)

Full Context

configure card xiom mda

Description

Configures an MDA-s in one of the slots of an XIOM.

Parameters

mda-slot

Specifies the MDA-s slot number.

Values

1 or 2

Platforms

7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-2se, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-id

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>egress>mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>egress>mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda

configure service vpls spoke-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda

Description

This command specifies an MFIB-allowed MDA destination for an SDP binding configured in the system.

Parameters

mda-id

Specifies an MFIB-allowed MDA destination

Values

slot/mda

slot: 1 to 10

mda: 1, 2

slot/xiom/mda

slot: 1 to 10

xiom: "x1” or "x2”

mda: 1, 2

Platforms

All

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-id

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>tunnel-grp mda)

Full Context

configure isa tunnel-group mda

Description

This command specifies the MDA ID of the MS-ISA as the member of tunnel-group with multi-active enabled. Up to 16 MDA could be configured under the same tunnel-group.

Parameters

mda-id

Specifies the id of MS-ISA.

Values

iom-slot-id/mda-slot-id

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mda

Syntax

mda mda-id [drain]

no mda mda-id

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>lns-group mda)

Full Context

configure isa lns-group mda

Description

This command configures an ISA LNS group MDA.

The no form of the command removes the MDA ID from the LNS group configuration.

Parameters

mda-id

Specifies the MDA identifier.

Values

mda-id:

slot/mda

slot: 1 to 10

mda: 1, 2

drain

Prevents new L2TP sessions being associated with the ISA. If an ISA is removed from the lns-group or if the lns-group be shutdown all associated L2TP sessions will be immediately terminated (and L2TP CDN messages sent to the L2TP peer). View show commands to determine which ISA is terminating which session (show router l2tp session).

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-id

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>nat-group mda)

Full Context

configure isa nat-group mda

Description

This command configures an ISA NAT group MDA.

Parameters

mda-id

Specifies the MDA ID in the slot/mda format.

Values

slot: 1 to 10

mda: 1 to 16

Note:

Available parameter values may differ by platform.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-id

Context

[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>egress>mfib-mda mda)

Full Context

configure service pw-template egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda

Description

This command specifies an MFIB-allowed media adapter destination for an SDP binding configured in the system.

Parameters

mda-id

Specifies an MFIB-allowed media adapters destination.

Values

1, 2

Platforms

All

mda

Syntax

mda mda

no mda

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>tunnel-mem-pool mda)

Full Context

configure isa tunnel-member-pool mda

Description

This command configures an association between an MDA and the tunnel member pool.

The no form of this command removes the association between the MDA and the tunnel member pool.

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the MDA, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mda-type

mda-type

Syntax

mda-type mda-type [level mda-level]

no mda-type

Context

[Tree] (config>card>mda mda-type)

Full Context

configure card mda mda-type

Description

This mandatory command provisions a specific MDA type to the device configuration for the slot. The MDA can be preprovisioned but an MDA must be provisioned before ports can be configured. Ports can be configured once the MDA is properly provisioned.

A maximum of two MDAs can be provisioned on an IOM or XCM. To modify an MDA slot, shut down all port associations.

XMAs are provisioned using MDA commands. A medium severity alarm is generated if an MDA is inserted that does not match the MDA type configured for the slot. This alarm is cleared when the correct MDA is inserted or the configuration is modified. A high severity alarm is raised when an administratively enabled MDA is removed from the chassis. This alarm is cleared if the either the correct MDA type is inserted or the configuration is modified. A low severity trap is issued if an MDA is removed that is administratively disabled.

An MDA can only be provisioned in a slot if the MDA type is allowed in the MDA slot. An error message is generated when an MDA is provisioned in a slot where it is not allowed.

Some MDA hardware can support two different firmware loads. One load includes the base Ethernet functionality, including 10G WAN mode, but does not include 1588 port-based timestamping. The second load includes the base Ethernet functionality and 1588 port-based timestamping, but does not include 10G WAN mode. These are identified as two MDA types that are the same, except for a "-ptp” suffix to indicate the second loadset; for example, x40-10gb-sfp and x40-10gb-sfp-ptp. A hard reset of the MDA occurs when switching between the two provisioned types.

A medium severity alarm is generated if an MDA is inserted that does not match the MDA type configured for the slot. This alarm is cleared when the correct MDA is inserted or the configuration is modified.

A high severity alarm is raised when an administratively enabled MDA is removed from the chassis. This alarm is cleared if the either the correct MDA type is inserted or the configuration is modified. A low severity trap is issued if an MDA is removed that is administratively disabled.

An alarm is raised if partial or complete MDA failure is detected. The alarm is cleared when the error condition ceases.

All parameters in the MDA context remain and if non-default values are required then their configuration remains as it is on all existing MDAs.

New generations of XMAs include variants controlled through hardware and software licensing. For these XMAs, the license level must be provisioned in addition to the MDA type. An XMA cannot become operational unless the provisioned license level matches the license level of the XMA installed into the slot. The set of license levels varies by MDA type.

The provisioned level controls aspects related to connector provisioning and the consumption of hardware egress queues and egress policers. Changes to the provisioned license level may be blocked if configuration that would not be permitted with the new target license level exists.

If the license level is not specified, the level is set to the highest license level for that XMA.

The no form of this command deletes the MDA from the configuration. The MDA must be administratively shut down before it can be deleted from the configuration.

Parameters

mda-type

Specifies the type of MDA selected for the slot position. Values for this attribute vary by platform and release. The release notes include a listing of all supported mda-types and their CLI strings. In addition, the command can be queried to check which mda-types are relevant for the active platform type. Some examples include me6-10gb-spf+ and x4-100g-cfp2.

mda-level

Specifies the MDA level. Possible values vary by MDA type.

Platforms

All

mda-type

Syntax

mda-type mda-type

no mda-type

Context

[Tree] (config>card>xiom>mda mda-type)

Full Context

configure card xiom mda mda-type

Description

This command adds an MDA-s to the device configuration for the slot. The MDA-s type can be preprovisioned, which means that the MDA-s does not have to be installed in the chassis.

An MDA-s must be provisioned before a connector or a port can be configured.

An MDA-s can only be provisioned in a slot that is vacant. No other MDA-s can be provisioned (configured) for that particular slot. To reconfigure a slot position, use the no form of this command to remove the current information.

An MDA-s can only be provisioned in a slot if the MDA-s type is allowed in the slot. An error message is generated if an attempt is made to provision an MDA-s type that is not allowed.

If an MDA-s is inserted that does not match the configured MDA-s type for the slot, then a log event and a facility alarm are raised. The alarm is cleared when the correct MDA-s type is installed or the configuration is modified.

A log event and a facility alarm are raised if an administratively enabled MDA-s is removed from the chassis. The alarm is cleared when the correct MDA-s type is installed or the configuration is modified. A log event is issued when a MDA-s is removed that is administratively disabled.

The no form of this command removes the MDA-s from the configuration.

Parameters

mda-type

Specifies the type of MDA-s to be configured and installed in the slot. Values for this attribute vary by platform and release. The release notes include a listing of all supported mda-types and their CLI strings. In addition, the command can be queried to check which mda-types are relevant for the active platform type.

Platforms

7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-2se, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

mdl

mdl

Syntax

mdl {eic | lic | fic | unit | pfi | port | gen} mdl-string

no mdl [eic | lic | fic | unit | pfi | port | gen]

Context

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mdl)

Full Context

configure port tdm ds3 mdl

Description

This command configures the maintenance data link (MDL) message for a DS-3/E-3.

This command is only applicable if the DS-3/E-3 is using C-bit framing (see the config>port>tdm>ds3 framing command).

The no form of this command removes the MDL string association and stops the transmission of any IDs.

Default

no mdl

Parameters

mdl-string

Specifies an MDL message up to 38 characters long on a DS-3.

eic

Specifies the equipment ID code up to 10 characters long.

lic

Specifies the equipment ID code up to 11 characters long.

fic

Specifies the ID code up to 10 characters long.

unit

Specifies the unit ID code up to 6 characters long.

pfi

Specifies the facility ID code up to 38 characters long.

port

Specifies the port ID code up to 38 characters long.

gen

Specifies the generator number to send in the MDL test signal message up to 38 characters long.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

mdl-transmit

mdl-transmit

Syntax

mdl-transmit {path | idle-signal | test-signal}

no mdl-transmit [path | idle-signal | test-signal]

Context

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mdl-transmit)

Full Context

configure port tdm ds3 mdl-transmit

Description

This command enables the transmission of an MDL message on a DS-3/E-3 over channelized interface.

The no form of this command disables transmission of the specified message or all messages.

Default

no mdl-transmit

Parameters

path

Specifies the MDL path message.

idle-signal

Specifies the MDL idle signal message.

test-signal

Specifies the MDL test signal message.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

mdt-pim

mdt-pim

Syntax

mdt-pim mode {asm | ssm} group-address group-ip-address

no mdt-pim

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective>multistream-spmsi mdt-pim)

Full Context

configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective multistream-spmsi mdt-pim

Description

This command creates a multi-stream MDT that could match many (C-S,C-G)s into a single data MDT.

Parameters

group-ip-address

Specifies the group address of this data MDT, that is the provider group address.

Platforms

All

mdt-type

mdt-type

Syntax

mdt-type {sender-receiver | sender-only | receiver-only}

no mdt-type

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn mdt-type)

Full Context

configure service vprn mvpn mdt-type

Description

This command allows restricting MVPN instance per PE node to a specific role. By default, MVPN instance on a given PE node assumes the role of being a sender as well as receiver. This creates a mesh of MDT/PMSI across all PE nodes from this PE.

This command provides an option to configure either a sender-only or receiver-only mode per PE node. Restricting the role of a PE node prevents creating full mesh of MDT/PMSI across all PE nodes that are participating in MVPN instance.

auto-rp-discovery cannot be enabled together with mdt-type sender-only or mdt-type receiver-only, or wildcard-spmsi configurations.

The no version of this command restores the default (sender-receiver).

Default

mdt-type sender-receiver

Parameters

sender-receiver

Specifies MVPN has both sender and receivers connected to PE node.

sender-only

Specifies MVPN has only senders connected to PE node.

receiver-only

Specifies MVPN has only receivers connected to PE node.

Platforms

All

meas-interval

meas-interval

Syntax

meas-interval {5-mins | 15-mins | 1-hour | 1-day} [create]

no meas-interval {5-mins | 15-mins | 1-hour | 1-day}

Context

[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session meas-interval)

Full Context

configure oam-pm session meas-interval

Description

This command establishes the parameters of the individual measurement intervals utilized by the session. Multiple measurement intervals may be specified within the session. A maximum of three different measurement intervals may be configured under each session.

The no form of this command deletes the specified measurement interval.

Parameters

meas-interval

Specifies the duration of the measurement interval.

Values

1-min, 5-mins, 15-mins, 1-hour, 1-day

create

Creates the measurement interval.

Platforms

All

measurement-template

measurement-template

Syntax

measurement-template template-name [create]

no measurement-template template-name

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>link-meas measurement-template)

Full Context

configure test-oam link-measurement measurement-template

Description

This command configures a measurement template identifier that can be assigned to the IP interface by name.

Configuration modifications can be made to the measurement template without disabling the template and while IP interfaces are actively referencing the measurement-template. Refer to the 7250 IXR OAM and Diagnostics Guide for more information about which modifications will cause the test on associated IP interfaces to "Terminate” and restart.

The no form of this command removes the template name. A measurement template can be removed if no interfaces are referencing the template.

Parameters

template-name

Specifies the measurement template name, up to 64 characters.

create

Keyword used to create the measurement template. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

measurement-template

Syntax

measurement-template [64 chars max]

no measurement-template

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>if-attr>delay>dyn measurement-template)

Full Context

configure router interface if-attribute delay dynamic measurement-template

Description

This command specifies the measurement template name used on the interface. The measurement-template associated with the interface can be changed without disabling the test protocol used to carry the test packet. Changing or removing the measurement-template associated with the IP interface stops the test and removes all test results for the IP interface.

The no form of this command removes the measurement-template, which stops the test and removes all test results for the interface.

Default

no measurement-template

Parameters

64 chars max

Specifies the measurement template name, up to 64 characters

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

med-out

med-out

Syntax

med-out {number | igp-cost}

no med-out

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>bgp-prng-plcy med-out)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt bgp-peering-policy med-out

Description

This command enables advertising the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) and assigns the value used for the path attribute for the MED advertised to BGP peers if the MED is not already set.

The specified value can be overridden by any value set with a route policy.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default where the MED is not advertised.

Parameters

number

Specifies the MED path attribute value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

0 to 4294967295

igp-cost

Specifies that the MED is set to the IGP cost of the given IP prefix.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

med-out

Syntax

med-out {number | igp-cost}

no med-out

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp med-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group med-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor med-out)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp med-out

configure service vprn bgp group med-out

configure service vprn bgp group neighbor med-out

Description

This command enables advertising the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) and assigns the value used for the path attribute for the MED advertised to BGP peers if the MED is not already set.

The specified value can be overridden by any value set via a route policy.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default where the MED is not advertised.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

Default

no med-out

Parameters

number

Specifies the MED path attribute value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

0 to 4294967295

igp-cost

Specifies the MED is set to the IGP cost of the given IP prefix.

Platforms

All

med-out

Syntax

med-out {number | igp-cost}

no med-out

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor med-out)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group med-out)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp med-out)

Full Context

configure router bgp group neighbor med-out

configure router bgp group med-out

configure router bgp med-out

Description

This command enables advertising the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) and assigns the value used for the path attribute for the MED advertised to BGP peers if the MED is not already set.

The specified value can be overridden by any value set via a route policy.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default where the MED is not advertised.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

Default

no med-out

Parameters

number

Specifies the MED path attribute value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

0 to 4294967295

igp-cost

Sets MED to the IGP cost of the given IP prefix.

Platforms

All

medium-duration-flow-count

medium-duration-flow-count

Syntax

[no] medium-duration-flow-count

Context

[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-sub-cntr medium-duration-flow-count)

Full Context

configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific aa-sub-counters medium-duration-flow-count

Description

This command includes the medium duration flow count in the AA subscriber's custom record. This command only applies to the 7750 SR.

The no form of this command excludes the medium duration flow count.

Default

no medium-duration-flow-count

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

member

member

Syntax

member port-id

no member

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path member)

Full Context

configure eth-tunnel path member

Description

This command associates a port with the path defined under the Ethernet tunnel. If the operator wants to replace an existing member port or control tag, the whole path needs to be shutdown first. The alternate path will be activated as a result keeping traffic interruption to a minimum. Then the whole path must be deleted, the alternate path precedence modified to primary before re-creating the new path.

The following port-level configuration needs to be the same across the two member ports of an Ethernet tunnel:

  • port>ethernet>access>{ingress|egress}>queue-group

  • port>ethernet>egress-scheduler-policy

  • port>access>egress>pool

  • port>ethernet>dot1q-etype

  • port>ethernet>qinq-etype

  • port>ethernet>pbb-etype

  • port>ethernet>mtu

The Ethernet tunnel will inherit the configuration from the first member port for these parameters. Additional member port that is added must have the same configuration.

The operator is allowed to update these port parameters only if the port is the sole member of an Ethernet tunnel. This means that in the example below, the operator needs to remove port 1/1/4 and port 1/1/5 before being allowed to modify 1/1/1 for the above parameters.

eth-tunnel 1
  path 1
    member 1/1/1
  path 2
    member 1/1/4
eth-tunnel 2
  path 1
    member 1/1/1
  path 2
    member 1/1/5

The no form of this command is used just to indicate that a member is not configured. The procedure described above, based on the no path command must be used to un-configure/change the member port assigned to the path.

Default

no member

Parameters

port-id

Specifies the port-id associated with the path in the format x/y/z where x represents the IOM, y the MDA and z the port numbers.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

member

Syntax

[no] member encap-id [to encap-id]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>encap-defined-qos>encap-group member)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap egress encap-defined-qos encap-group member

Description

This command adds or removes a member ISID or a range of contiguous ISID members to an encap-group. The user can add or remove members to the encap-group one at a time or as a range of contiguous values using the member command. However, when the qos-per-member option is enabled, members must be added or removed one at a time.

The no form of this command removes the single or range of ISID values from the encap-group.

Parameters

encap-id

Specifies the value of the single encap-id or the start encap-id of the range. ISID is the only encap-id supported.

to encap-id

Specifies the value of the end encap-id of the range. ISID is the only encap-id supported.

Platforms

All

member

Syntax

[no] member interface-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>link-group>level member)

Full Context

configure service vprn isis link-group level member

Description

This command adds or removes a links to the associated link-group. The interface name should already exist before it is added to a link-group.

The no form of this command removes the specified interface from the associated link-group.

Parameters

interface-name

Specifies the name of the interface to be added or removed from the associated link-group.

Platforms

All

member

Syntax

member user-profile-name [user-profile-name]

no member user-profile-name

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>user>console member)

Full Context

configure system security user console member

Description

This command is used to associate the user with a local command authorization profile.

A user can be associated with up to eight profiles.

When a user is a member of multiple profiles, profiles are evaluated in the order that they are configured. Evaluation stops if there is a match, or when the default action of the a profile is deny-all, permit-all or read-only-all. When the profile default action is none and if no match conditions are met in the profile, the next profile is evaluated. When the default action of the last profile is none and no explicit match is found, the command is denied.

The no form of this command removes the association between the user and the profile.

Default

member default

Parameters

user-profile-name

Specifies up to eight user profile names, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

member

Syntax

[no] member interface-name

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>link-group>level member)

Full Context

configure router isis link-group level member

Description

This command adds or removes a link to the associated link-group. The interface name should already exist before it is added to a link-group.

The no form of this command removes the specified interface from the associated link-group.

Parameters

interface-name

Specifies the name of the interface to be added or removed from the associated link-group.

Platforms

All

member-pool

member-pool

Syntax

member-pool name

no member-pool

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>tunnel-grp member-pool)

Full Context

configure isa tunnel-group member-pool

Description

This command associates the tunnel group with a tunnel member pool. This tunnel group is used as the designated standby in an N:M IPsec redundancy configuration.

The no form of this command removes the tunnel member pool from the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the member pool, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

members

members

Syntax

[no] members comm-id [comm-id]

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>community members)

Full Context

configure router policy-options community members

Description

This command adds members to a route policy community list to use in route policy entries.

Each member of a community list is a standard, extended, or large community value or a regular expression that potentially matches many community values. A regular expression incorporates terms and operators that use the terms. An individual numerical digit is an elementary term in the community regular expression. More complex terms can be built from elementary terms. The following are key operators supported by SR OS:

  • .

  • *

  • ?

  • {n}

  • {m,n}

  • {m, }

To reverse the match criteria when specifying a list of ranges or single values using square brackets, use the non-match operator (^) before the elements within the square brackets.

The no version of this command deletes route policy community members.

Parameters

comm-id

Specifies a BGP community value, up to 72 characters. A community ID can be specified in different forms.

Values

[as-num:comm-val | reg-ex | ext-comm | well-known-comm | large-comm]

where:

  • as-num — 0 to 65535

  • comm-val — 0 to 65535

  • reg-ex — A regular expression string. Allowed values are any string up to 72 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (such as "#”, "$”, or spaces), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

  • ext-comm — The extended community, defined as one of the following:

    • {target | origin}:ip-address:comm-val

    • {target | origin}:reg-ex1&reg-ex2

    • {target | origin}:ip-address:reg-ex2

    • {target | origin}:asnum:ext-comm-val

    • {target | origin}:ext-asnum:comm-val

    • bandwidth:asnum:val-in-mbps

    • ext:4300:ovstate

    • ext:value1:value2

    • flowspec-set:ext-asnum:group-id

    • flowspec-set-trans:ext-asnum:group-id

    • ipv6-redirect: ipv6-addr

    • color:co-bits:color-value

    where:

    • target — route target

    • origin — route origin

    • ip-address — a.b.c.d

    • ext-comm-val — 0 to 4294967295

    • ext-asnum — 0 to 4294967295

    • reg-ex1, reg-ex2 — A regular expression string. Allowed values are any string up to 63 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

    • bandwidth — bandwidth

    • val-in-mbps — 0 to 16777215

    • ext:4300 — origin verification

    • ovstate — 0, 1, or 2 (0 for valid, 1 for not found, 2 for invalid)

    • ext — extended

    • value1 — 0000 to FFFF

    • value2 — 0 to FFFFFFFFFFFF

    • flowspec-set — FlowSpec set

    • flowspec-set-trans — FlowSpec set transitive

    • ipv6-addr — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

    • group-id — 0 to 16383

    • co-bits — 00, 01, 10 or 11

    • color-value — 0 to 4294967295

  • well-known-commnull, no-export, no-export-subconfed, no-advertise, llgr-stale, no-llgr, blackhole

  • large-comm — large community, defined as one of the following:

    • ext-asnum:ext-comm-val:ext-comm-val

    • reg-ex3&reg-ex3&reg-ex3

    where:

    • reg-ex3 — A regular expression string. Allowed values are any string up to 68 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

Platforms

All

memory

memory

Syntax

memory memory-size

no memory

Context

[Tree] (config>esa>vm memory)

Full Context

configure esa vm memory

Description

This command configures the amount of memory (in gigabytes) that is allocated to the ESA-VM instance.

The no form of this command removes the memory allocation. To modify the memory allocation, first invoke the no memory command.

Parameters

memory-size

Specifies the amount of memory in GB.

Values

0 to 256

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

memory-alarm

memory-alarm

Syntax

memory-alarm high-threshold high-percentage low-threshold low-percentage

no memory-alarm

Context

[Tree] (config>li>x-interfaces>x3>alarms memory-alarm)

Full Context

configure li x-interfaces x3 alarms memory-alarm

Description

This command configures the thresholds for raising the memory alarm. The low threshold value must be configured with a smaller value than the high threshold.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters

high-percentage

Specifies the high threshold value, as a percentage.

Values

1 to 100

Default

100

low-percentage

Specifies the low threshold value, as a percentage.

Values

0 to 99

Default

0

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

memory-use-alarm

memory-use-alarm

Syntax

memory-use-alarm rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]

no memory-use-alarm

Context

[Tree] (config>system>thresholds memory-use-alarm)

Full Context

configure system thresholds memory-use-alarm

Description

The memory thresholds are based on monitoring the TIMETRA-SYSTEM-MIB sgiMemoryUsed object. This object contains the amount of memory currently used by the system. The severity level is Alarm. The absolute sample type method is used.

The no form of this command removes the configured memory threshold warning.

Parameters

rising-threshold threshold

Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values

-2147483648 to 2147483647

Default

0

falling-threshold threshold

Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a falling threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values

-2147483648 to 2147483647

Default

0

seconds

Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values

1 to 2147483647

rmon-event-type

Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.

Values

log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create an OS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the CLI command.

trap — An SR OS logger event is generated. The SR OS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.

both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and an SR OS logger event are generated.

none — No action is taken.

Default

both

alarm-type

Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, then a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.

Values

rising, falling, either

Default

either

Configuration example

memory-use-alarm rising-threshold 50000000 falling-threshold 45999999 
interval 500 rmon-event-type both start-alarm either

Platforms

All

memory-use-warn

memory-use-warn

Syntax

memory-use-warn rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]

no memory-use-warn

Context

[Tree] (config>system>thresholds memory-use-warn)

Full Context

configure system thresholds memory-use-warn

Description

The memory thresholds are based on monitoring MemoryUsed object. This object contains the amount of memory currently used by the system. The severity level is Alarm.

The absolute sample type method is used.

The no form of this command removes the configured compact flash threshold warning.

Parameters

rising-threshold threshold

Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values

-2147483648 to 2147483647

Default

0

falling-threshold threshold

Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a falling threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values

-2147483648 to 2147483647

Default

0

seconds

Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.

Values

1 to 2147483647

rmon-event-type

Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.

Values

log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence.

This does not create an SR OS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show>system>thresholds CLI command.

trap — An SR OS logger event is generated. The SR OS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.

both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and an SR OS logger event are generated.

none — No action is taken.

Default

both

startup-alarm alarm-type

Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, then a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.

Default

either

Values

rising, falling, either

Configuration example

memory-use-warn rising-threshold 500000 falling-threshold 400000 interval 800 rmon-
event-type log start-alarm falling

Platforms

All

mep

mep

Syntax

[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure eth-tunnel path eth-cfm mep

Description

This command provisions an 802.1ag maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the MA index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure router interface eth-cfm mep

Description

This command configures the maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default

no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the MA index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [vlan vlan-id]

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep

configure lag eth-cfm mep

Description

This command configures the maintenance endpoint (MEP). Port-based MEPs and LAG-based MEPs are mutually exclusive. If a LAG member port includes a MEP, the configuration of a MEP on the LAG fails. If a LAG includes the configuration of a MEP, the configuration of MEPs on the LAG member ports fails.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default

no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the MA index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

vlan-id

Specifies the outer VLAN ID of the tunnel and is specific to tunnel facility MEPs.

Values

1 to 4094

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up | down}] [primary-vlan-enable]

no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap eth-cfm mep

configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep

configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep

Description

This command provisions the maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance endpoint identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

direction {up | down}

Indicates the direction in which the MEP faces on the bridge port. The UP direction is not supported for all Fpipe services. For example, Ipipe does not support the direction of UP for MEPs.

up

Sends ETH-CFM messages toward the MAC relay entity.

down

Sends ETH-CFM messages away from the MAC relay entity.

primary-vlan-enable

Provides a method for linking the MEP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MEP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up | down}] [primary-vlan-enable]

no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure service vpls eth-cfm mep

configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep

configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep

configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep

Description

This command configures the ETH-CFM maintenance endpoint (MEP). A MEP created at the VPLS service level vpls>eth-cfm creates a virtual MEP.

The no version of the command will remove the MEP.

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the MEP identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

direction up | down

Sets the direction in which the MEP faces on the bridge port. Direction is not supported when a MEP is created directly under the vpls>eth-cfm construct (vMEP).

down — Sends ETH-CFM messages away from the MAC relay entity.

up — Sends ETH-CFM messages toward the MAC relay entity.

primary-vlan-enable

Sets a method for linking the MEP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. MEPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MEP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up | down}]

no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep

configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep

Description

This command configures the ETH-CFM maintenance endpoint (MEP).

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the MA index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

direction up | down

The direction in which the maintenance association (MEP) faces on the bridge port. Direction UP is not applicable to IES MEPs.

down — Sends ETH-CFM messages away from the MAC relay entity.

up — Sends ETH-CFM messages towards the MAC relay entity.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep
  • configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep

mep

Syntax

mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up | down}]

no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm mep)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep

configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep

Description

This command configures the ETH-CFM maintenance endpoint (MEP).

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the MA index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

direction up | down

Indicates the direction in which the maintenance association (MEP) faces on the bridge port. Direction UP is not supported on VPRN MEPs.

Values

down — Sends continuity check messages away from the MAC relay entity.

up — Sends continuity check messages towards the MAC relay entity.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep
  • configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep

mep

Syntax

[no] mep

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>protect-tp-path mep)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>working-tp-path mep)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp protect-tp-path mep

configure router mpls lsp working-tp-path mep

Description

This command creates or edits an MPLS-TP maintenance entity group (MEG) endpoint (MEP) on and MPLS-TP path. MEPs represent the termination point for OAM flowing on the path, as well as linear protection for the LSP. Only one MEP can be configured at each end of the path.

The following commands are applicable to a MEP on an MPLS-TP working or protect path: oam-template, bfd-enable, and shutdown. In addition, a protection-template may be configured on a protect path.

The no form of this command removes a MEP from an MPLS-TP path.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (debug>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

debug eth-cfm mep

Description

This command specifies the MEP from which to debug the CFM PDUs.

The no form of this command removes the MEP parameters.

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association endpoint identifier of the launch point.

Values

1 to 8191

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value of the launch point.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value of the launch point.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mep

Syntax

[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm mep)

Full Context

configure eth-ring path eth-cfm mep

Description

This command provisions an 802.1ag maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of the command deletes the MEP.

Parameters

mep-id

Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.

Values

1 to 81921

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the MA index value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mesh-group

mesh-group

Syntax

mesh-group {value | blocked}

no mesh-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if mesh-group)

Full Context

configure service vprn isis interface mesh-group

Description

This command assigns an interface to a mesh group. Mesh groups limit the amount of flooding that occurs when a new or changed LSP is advertised throughout an area.

All routers in a mesh group should be fully meshed. When LSPs need to be flooded, only a single copy is received rather than a copy per neighbor.

To create a mesh group, configure the same mesh group value for each interface that is part of the mesh group. All routers must have the same mesh group value configured for all interfaces that are part of the mesh group.

To prevent an interface from flooding LSPs, the optional blocked parameter can be specified. Configure mesh groups carefully. It is easy to create isolated islands that do not receive updates as (other) links fail.

The no form of this command removes the interface from the mesh group. The interface does not belong to a mesh group.

Default

no mesh-group

Parameters

value

Specifies a unique decimal integer value distinguishes this mesh group from other mesh groups on this or any other router that is part of this mesh group.

Values

1 to 2000000000

blocked

Prevents an interface from flooding LSPs.

Platforms

All

mesh-group

Syntax

mesh-group {value | blocked}

no mesh-group

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface mesh-group)

Full Context

configure router isis interface mesh-group

Description

This command assigns an interface to a mesh group. Mesh groups limit the amount of flooding that occurs when a new or changed LSP is advertised throughout an area.

All routers in a mesh group should be fully meshed. When LSPs need to be flooded, only a single copy is received rather than a copy per neighbor.

To create a mesh group, configure the same mesh group value for each interface that is part of the mesh group. All routers must have the same mesh group value configured for all interfaces that are part of the mesh group.

To prevent an interface from flooding LSPs, the optional blocked parameter can be specified. Configure mesh groups carefully to avoid creating isolated islands that do not receive updates as (other) links fail.

The no form of this command removes the interface from the mesh group.

Parameters

value

Specifies the unique decimal integer value that distinguishes this mesh group from other mesh groups on this or any other router that is part of this mesh group.

Values

1 to 2000000000

blocked

Prevents an interface from flooding LSPs.

Platforms

All

mesh-sdp

mesh-sdp

Syntax

mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id] [vc-type {ether | vlan}] [create]

mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id] [vc-type {ether | vlan}] [create] leaf-ac

mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id] [vc-type {ether | vlan}] [create] root-leaf-tag

no mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mesh-sdp)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp

Description

This command binds a VPLS service to an existing Service Distribution Point (SDP).

Mesh SDPs bound to a service are logically treated like a single bridge "port” for flooded traffic where flooded traffic received on any mesh SDP on the service is replicated to other "ports” (spoke SDPs and SAPs) and not transmitted on any mesh SDPs.

Note:

This command creates a binding between a service and an SDP. The SDP has an operational state which determines the operational state of the SDP within the service. For example, if the SDP is administratively or operationally down, the SDP for the service is down.

The SDP must already be defined in the config>service>sdp context in order to associate the SDP with an Epipe or VPLS service. If the sdp sdp-id is not already configured, an error message is generated. If the sdp-id does exist, a binding between that sdp-id and the service is created.

SDPs must be explicitly associated and bound to a service. If an SDP is not bound to a service, no far-end router devices can participate in the service.

The no form of this command removes the SDP binding from the service. The SDP configuration is not affected; only the binding of the SDP to a service. Once removed, no packets are forwarded to the far-end router.

Default

No sdp-id is bound to a service.

Parameters

sdp-id

Specifies an SDP identifier.

Values

1 to 17407

vc-id

Specifies a virtual circuit identifier. This value is used to validate the VC ID portion of each mesh SDP binding defined in the service. The default value of this object is equal to the service ID. Any value may be used for the vc-id when there is no existing mesh SDP within the service; if a mesh SDP exists then all other mesh SDPs in the service must be configured with the same vc-id.

Values

1 to 4294967295

vc-type

Specifies to override the default VC type signaled for the spoke or mesh binding to the far end of the SDP. The VC type is a 15 bit-quantity containing a value which represents the type of VC. The actual signaling of the VC type depends on the signaling parameter defined for the SDP. If signaling is disabled, the vc-type command can still be used to define the dot1q value expected by the far-end provider equipment. A change of the binding’s VC type causes the binding to signal the new VC type to the far end when signaling is enabled.

VC types are derived according to IETF draft-martini-l2circuit-trans-mpls.

The VC type value for Ethernet is 0x0005.

The VC type value for an Ethernet VLAN is 0x0004.

ether

Defines the VC type as Ethernet. The vlan keyword is mutually exclusive. When the VC type is not defined then the default is Ethernet for spoke SDP bindings. Defining Ethernet is the same as executing no vc-type and restores the default VC type for the spoke SDP binding (hex 5).

vlan

Defines the VC type as VLAN. The top VLAN tag, if a VLAN tag is present, is stripped from traffic received on the pseudowire, and a vlan-tag is inserted when forwarding into the pseudowire. The ethernet and vlan keywords are mutually exclusive. When the VC type is not defined then the default is Ethernet for mesh SDP bindings.

Note:

The system expects a symmetrical configuration with its peer, specifically it expects to remove the same number of VLAN tags from received traffic as it adds to transmitted traffic. As some of the related configuration parameters are local and not communicated in the signaling plane, an asymmetrical behavior cannot always be detected and so cannot be blocked. Consequently, protocol extractions will not necessarily function for asymmetrical configurations as they would with a symmetrical configurations resulting in an unexpected operation.

root-leaf-tag

Specifies a tagging mesh SDP under an E-Tree VPLS. When a tag SDP binding is required, it is created with a root-leaf-tag flag. Only VLAN tag SDP bindings are supported. The VLAN type must be set to VC VLAN type. The root-leaf-tag parameter indicates this SDP binding is a tag SDP that uses a default VID 1 for root and 2 for leaf. The SDP binding tags egress E-Tree traffic with root and leaf VIDs as appropriate. Root and leaf VIDs are only significant between peering VPLS but the values must be consistent on each end. On ingress a tag SDP binding removes the VID tag on the interface between VPLS in the same E-Tree service. The tag SDP receives root tagged traffic and marks the traffic with a root indication internally. This option is not available on BGP EVPN-enabled E-Tree services.

leaf-ac

Specifies an access (AC) mesh SDP binding under a E-Tree VPLS as a leaf access (AC) SDP. The default E-Tree SDP type is a root AC if leaf-ac or root-leaf-tag is not specified at SDP binding creation. This option is only available when the VPLS is designated as an E-Tree VPLS. BGP EVPN-enabled E-Tree VPLS services support the leaf-ac option.

create

Keyword used to create the mesh SDP. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.

Platforms

All

mesh-sdp-binding

mesh-sdp-binding

Syntax

[no] mesh-sdp-binding

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>site mesh-sdp-binding)

Full Context

configure service vpls site mesh-sdp-binding

Description

This command enables applications to all mesh SDPs.

The no form of reverts the default.

Default

no mesh-sdp-binding

Platforms

All

message

message

Syntax

message {eq | neq} pattern pattern [regexp]

no message

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log>filter>entry>match message)

Full Context

configure service vprn log filter entry match message

Description

This command adds system messages as a match criterion.

The no form of this command removes messages as a match criterion.

Parameters

eq

Specifies if the matching criteria should be equal to the specified value.

neq

Specifies if the matching criteria should not be equal to the specified value.

pattern

Specifies a message, up to 400 characters, to be used in the match criteria.

regexp

Specifies the type of string comparison to use to determine if the log event matches the value of message command parameters. When the regexp keyword is not specified, the default matching algorithm used is a basic substring match.

Platforms

All

message

Syntax

message {eq | neq} pattern pattern [ regexp]

no message

Context

[Tree] (config>log>filter>entry>match message)

Full Context

configure log filter entry match message

Description

This command adds system messages as a match criterion.

The no form of this command removes messages as a match criterion.

Parameters

eq

Determines if the matching criteria should be equal to the specified value.

neq

Determines if the matching criteria should not be equal to the specified value.

pattern

Specifies a message up to 400 characters in length to be used in the match criteria.

regexp

Specifies the type of string comparison to use to determine if the log event matches the value of message command parameters. When the regexp keyword is not specified, the default matching algorithm used is a basic substring match.

Platforms

All

message-count

message-count

Syntax

message-count count

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)

[Tree] (config>ipsec>tnl-temp>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tun>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec-tunnel>icmp-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count

configure ipsec tunnel-template icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count

configure router interface ipsec-tunnel icmp-gen pkt-too-big message-count

configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count

Description

This command configures the maximum number of ICMPv6 messages that can be sent during the configured interval.

Parameters

count

Specifies the maximum number of ICMPv6 messages that can be sent during the configured interval

Values

10 to 1000

Default

100

Platforms

VSR

  • configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count
  • configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count
  • configure ipsec tunnel-template icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count

message-count

Syntax

message-count number

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel>icmp-gen>frag-required message-count)

[Tree] (config>ipsec>tnl-temp>icmp-gen>frag-required message-count)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp-gen>frag-required message-count)

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp-gen>frag-required message-count)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp-gen>frag-required message-count)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ip-tunnel>icmp-gen>frag-required message-count)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

configure ipsec tunnel-template icmp-generation frag-required message-count

configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

configure service vprn interface sap ip-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

Description

This command configures the maximum number of ICMP Destination Unreachable "fragmentation needed and DF set" messages (type 3, code 4) that can be sent during the period specified by the interval seconds command.

Default

message-count 100

Parameters

number

Specifies the number of ICMP Destination Unreachable "fragmentation needed and DF set" messages that are transmitted within the interval seconds command time.

Values

10 to 1000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure ipsec tunnel-template icmp-generation frag-required message-count
  • configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count
  • configure service vprn interface sap ip-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

VSR

  • configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count
  • configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count
  • configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp-generation frag-required message-count

message-digest-key

message-digest-key

Syntax

message-digest-key keyid md5 [ key | hash-key] [hash | hash2 | custom]

no message-digest-key keyid

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>sham-link message-digest-key)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>virtual-link message-digest-key)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if message-digest-key)

Full Context

configure service vprn ospf area sham-link message-digest-key

configure service vprn ospf area virtual-link message-digest-key

configure service vprn ospf area interface message-digest-key

Description

This command configures a message digest key when MD5 authentication is enabled on the interface, virtual-link or sham-link. Multiple message digest keys can be configured.

This command is not valid in the OSPF3 context.

The no form of this command removes the message digest key identified by the key-id.

Default

No message digest keys are defined.

Parameters

keyid

Specifies the key ID. The keyid is expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

md5 key

Specifies the MD5 key. The key can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters in length.

md5 hash-key

Specifies the MD5 hash key. The key can be any combination of ASCII characters up to 32 characters in length (encrypted). If spaces are used in the string, enclose the entire string in quotation marks (" ”).

This is useful when a user must configure the parameter, but, for security purposes, the actual unencrypted key value is not provided.

hash

Specifies the key is entered in an encrypted form. If the hash parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in a non-encrypted, cleartext form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash parameter specified.

hash2

Specifies the key is entered in a more complex encrypted form that involves more variables than the key value alone, meaning that the hash2 encrypted variable cannot be copied and pasted. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in an unencrypted, cleartext form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.

custom

Specifies the custom encryption to management interface.

Platforms

All

message-digest-key

Syntax

message-digest-key key-id md5 [key | hash-key | hash2-key] [hash | hash2 | custom]

no message-digest-key key-id

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>virtual-link message-digest-key)

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface message-digest-key)

Full Context

configure router ospf area virtual-link message-digest-key

configure router ospf area interface message-digest-key

Description

This command configures a message digest key when MD5 authentication is enabled on the interface. Multiple message digest keys can be configured.

The no form of this command removes the message digest key identified by the key-id.

By default, no message keys are defined.

Parameters

key-id

Specifies the key ID. The keyid is expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

key

Specifies the MD5 key. The key can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters in length.

hash-key | hash2-key

Specifies the MD5 hash or hash2 key. the hash key. The key can be any combination of ASCII characters up to 32 (hash1-key) or 55 (hash2-key) characters in length (encrypted). If spaces are used in the string, enclose the entire string in quotation marks (" ”).

This is useful when a user must configure the parameter, but, for security purposes, the actual unencrypted key value is not provided.

hash

Specifies the key is entered in an encrypted form. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in an unencrypted, cleartext form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.

hash2

Specifies the key is entered in a more complex encrypted form that involves more variables than the key value alone, meaning that the hash2 encrypted variable cannot be copied and pasted. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in an unencrypted, cleartext form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.

custom

Specifies the custom encryption to management interface.

Platforms

All

message-fast-tx

message-fast-tx

Syntax

message-fast-tx time

no message-fast-tx

Context

[Tree] (config>system>lldp message-fast-tx)

Full Context

configure system lldp message-fast-tx

Description

This command configures the duration of the fast transmission period.

Default

no message-fast-tx

Parameters

time

Specifies the fast transmission period in seconds.

Values

1 to 3600

Default

1

Platforms

All

message-fast-tx-init

message-fast-tx-init

Syntax

message-fast-tx-init count

no message-fast-tx-init

Context

[Tree] (config>system>lldp message-fast-tx-init)

Full Context

configure system lldp message-fast-tx-init

Description

This command configures the number of LLDPDUs to send during the fast transmission period.

Default

no message-fast-tx-init

Parameters

count

Specifies the number of LLDPDUs to send during the fast transmission period.

Values

1 to 8

Default

4

Platforms

All

message-interval

message-interval

Syntax

message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}

no message-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>vrrp message-interval)

Full Context

configure service ies interface ipv6 vrrp message-interval

Description

This command sets the advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer on the virtual router instance. The message-interval setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router. Any VRRP advertisement message received with an Advertisement Interval field different than the virtual router instance configured message-interval value will be silently discarded.

The message-interval command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp virtual-router-id nodal contexts. If the message-interval command is not executed, the default message interval of 1 second will be used.

The no form of this command restores the default message interval value of 1 second to the virtual router instance.

Default

message-interval 1

Parameters

seconds

The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires.

Values

1 to 255

Default

1

milliseconds milliseconds

Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages.

Values

100 to 900

Platforms

All

message-interval

Syntax

message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}

no message-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vrrp message-interval)

Full Context

configure service ies interface vrrp message-interval

Description

This command sets the advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer on the virtual router instance. The message-interval setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router. Any VRRP advertisement message received with an Advertisement Interval field different than the virtual router instance configured message-interval value will be silently discarded.

The message-interval command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp virtual-router-id nodal contexts. If the message-interval command is not executed, the default message interval of 1 second will be used.

The no form of this command restores the default message interval value of 1 second to the virtual router instance.

Parameters

seconds

The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires.

Values

1 to 255

Default

1

milliseconds milliseconds

Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages. This parameter is not supported on non-redundant chassis.

Values

100 to 900

Platforms

All

message-interval

Syntax

message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}

no message-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>vrrp message-interval)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if message-interval)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp message-interval

configure service vprn interface message-interval

Description

This command sets the advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer on the virtual router instance. The message-interval setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router. Any VRRP advertisement message received with an Advertisement Interval field different than the virtual router instance configured message-interval value will be silently discarded.

The message-interval command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp virtual-router-id nodal contexts. If the message-interval command is not executed, the default message interval of 1 second will be used.

The no form of this command restores the default message interval value of 1 second to the virtual router instance.

Parameters

seconds

The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires.

Values

1 to 255

Default

1

milliseconds milliseconds

Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages. This parameter is not supported on single-slot chassis.

Values

100 to 900

Platforms

All

message-interval

Syntax

message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}

no message-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>vrrp message-interval)

[Tree] (config>router>if>vrrp message-interval)

Full Context

configure router interface ipv6 vrrp message-interval

configure router interface vrrp message-interval

Description

This command configures the administrative advertisement message timer used by the master virtual router instance to send VRRP advertisement messages and to derive the master down timer as backup.

For an owner virtual router instance, the administrative advertisement timer directly sets the operational advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer for the virtual router instance.

Non-owner virtual router instances usage of the message-interval setting is dependent on the state of the virtual router (master or backup) and the state of the master-int-inherit parameter.

  • When a non-owner is operating as master for the virtual router, the configured message-interval is used as the operational advertisement timer similar to an owner virtual router instance. The master-int-inherit command has no effect when operating as master.

  • When a non-owner is in the backup state with master-int-inherit disabled, the configured message-interval value is used to match the incoming VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field. If the locally configured message interval does not match the advertisement interval field, the VRRP advertisement is discarded.

  • When a non-owner is in the backup state with master-int-inherit enabled, the configured message-interval is ignored. The master down timer is indirectly derived from the incoming VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field value.

VRRP advertisements messages that are fragmented, or contain IP options (IPv4), or contain extension headers (IPv6) require a longer message interval to be configured.

The in-use value of the message interval is used to derive the master down timer to be used when the virtual router is operating in backup mode based on the following formula:

(3x (in-use message interval) + skew time)

The skew time portion is used to slow down virtual routers with relatively low priority values when competing in the master election process.

The command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp nodal contexts.

By default, a message-interval of 1 second is used.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

message-interval 1 — Advertisement timer set to 1 second.

Parameters

seconds

The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

IPv4: 1 to 255 IPv6: 1 to 40

milliseconds

Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages.

Values

100 to 900 IPv6: 10 to 990

Platforms

All

message-length

message-length

Syntax

message-length message-length

no message-length

Context

[Tree] (config>service>sdp>keep-alive message-length)

Full Context

configure service sdp keep-alive message-length

Description

This command configures the SDP monitoring keepalive request message length transmitted.

The no form of this command reverts the message-length octets value to the default setting.

Default

no message-length — The message length should be equal to the SDP’s operating path MTU as configured in the config>service>sdp path-mtu command. If the default size is overridden, the actual size used will be the smaller of the operational SDP ID Path MTU and the size specified.

Parameters

message-length

Specifies the size of the keepalive request messages in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The size keyword overrides the default keepalive message size.

Values

40 to 9198

Platforms

All

message-path

message-path

Syntax

message-path sap-id

no message-path

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>srrp message-path)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>srrp message-path)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface srrp message-path

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface srrp message-path

Description

This command defines a specific SAP for SRRP in-band messaging. A message-path SAP must be defined prior to activating the SRRP instance. The defined SAP must exist on the SRRP instances group IP interface for the command to succeed and cannot currently be associated with any dynamic or static subscriber hosts. Once a group IP interface SAP has been defined as the transmission path for SRRP Advertisement messages, it cannot be administratively shutdown, will not support static or dynamic subscriber hosts and cannot be removed from the group IP interface.

The SRRP instance message-path command may be executed at any time on the SRRP instance. Changing the message SAP fails if a dynamic or static subscriber host is associated with the new SAP. Once successfully changed, the SRRP instance immediately disables anti-spoof on the SAP and starts sending SRRP Advertisement messages, if the SRRP instance is activated.

Changing the current SRRP message SAP on an active pair of routers should be done in the following manner:

  1. Shutdown the backup SRRP instance.

  2. Change the message SAP on the shutdown node.

  3. Change the message SAP on the active master node.

  4. Re-activate the shutdown SRRP instance.

Shutting down the backup SRRP instance prevents the SRRP instances from becoming master due to temporarily using differing message path SAPs.

If an MCS peering is operational between the redundant nodes and the SRRP instance has been associated with the peering, the designated message path SAP is sent from each member.

The no form of this command can only be executed when the SRRP instance is shutdown. Executing no message-path allows the existing SAP to be used for subscriber management functions. A new message-path SAP must be defined prior to activating the SRRP instance.

Parameters

sap-id

Specifies the physical port identifier portion of the SAP definition.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

message-retransmit

message-retransmit

Syntax

message-retransmit [timeout timeout] [retry-count value]

no message-retransmit

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>gtp>peer-profile message-retransmit)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt gtp peer-profile message-retransmit

Description

This command configures the retry-count and response-timeout for GTP messages.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default

message-retransmit timeout 5 retry-count 3

Parameters

timeout

Specifies the interval, in seconds, between retransmission of signaling request messages towards the same peer Mobile Gateway.

Values

1 to 30

Default

5

value

Specifies the number of times a signaling request message is transmitted towards the same peer Mobile Gateway.

Values

1 to 8

Default

3

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

message-severity-level

message-severity-level

Syntax

message-severity-level

Context

[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli>md-cli>environment message-severity-level)

Full Context

configure system management-interface cli md-cli environment message-severity-level

Description

This command configures the message severity level.

Platforms

All

message-size

message-size

Syntax

message-size max-num-of-routes

no message-size

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group message-size)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group>neighbor message-size)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip message-size)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group>neighbor message-size)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group message-size)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng message-size)

Full Context

configure service vprn rip group message-size

configure service vprn ripng group neighbor message-size

configure service vprn rip message-size

configure service vprn rip group neighbor message-size

configure service vprn ripng group message-size

configure service vprn ripng message-size

Description

This command sets the maximum number of routes per RIP update message.

The no form of this command resets the maximum number of routes back to the default of 25.

Default

no message-size

Parameters

size

An Integer.

Values

25 to 255

Default

25

Platforms

All

message-size

Syntax

message-size max-num-of-routes

no message-size

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group message-size)

[Tree] (config>router>rip>group>neighbor message-size)

[Tree] (config>router>rip>group message-size)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng message-size)

[Tree] (config>router>rip message-size)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group>neighbor message-size)

Full Context

configure router ripng group message-size

configure router rip group neighbor message-size

configure router rip group message-size

configure router ripng message-size

configure router rip message-size

configure router ripng group neighbor message-size

Description

This command configures the maximum number of routes per RIP update message.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

message-size 25

Parameters

max-num-of-routes

The maximum number of RIP routes per RIP update message expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

25 to 255

Platforms

All

message-timeout

message-timeout

Syntax

message-timeout seconds

Context

[Tree] (config>li>x-interfaces>x1>timeouts message-timeout)

Full Context

configure li x-interfaces x1 timeouts message-timeout

Description

This command configures the maximum time that the LIC must reply to an X1 message. If the timer expires, the session is released.

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the maximum timeout value, in seconds.

Values

180 to 300

Default

180

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

message-type

message-type

Syntax

message-type

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter message-type)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter message-type

Description

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing hits due to the GTP filter message type.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

message-type

Syntax

message-type

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-filter message-type)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter message-type

Description

This command specifies the context for configuration of GTP message-type filtering. If no message-type is specified within a filter, then all GTP message types are allowed.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

message-type-gtpv2

message-type-gtpv2

Syntax

message-type-gtpv2

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter message-type-gtpv2)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter message-type-gtpv2

Description

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing hits due to the GTPv2 message type filter.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

message-type-gtpv2

Syntax

message-type-gtpv2

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-fltr message-type-gtpv2)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter message-type-gtpv2

Description

This command specifies the context for the configuration of GTP-v2 message-type filtering. If no message-type-gtpv2 is specified within a filter, then all GTP message types are allowed, except for the messages that are dropped by GTP-C inspection because they violate the expected GTP protocol for the deployment interface (for example, roaming deployment).

The gtpc-inspection command must be enabled before configuring message-type-gtpv2 filtering.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

messages

messages

Syntax

[no] messages

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>ldp>if>event messages)

[Tree] (debug>router>ldp>peer>event messages)

Full Context

debug router ldp interface event messages

debug router ldp peer event messages

Description

This command displays specific information (for example, message type, source, and destination) regarding LDP messages sent to and received from LDP peers.

The no form of the command disables debugging output for LDP messages.

Platforms

All

meta-data

meta-data

Syntax

meta-data

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-svc-chain>vas-filter>entry>action>insert-nsh meta-data)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt isa-service-chaining vas-filter entry action insert-nsh meta-data

Description

Commands in this context configure opaque metadata to be inserted in NSH in the steered traffic if the forward action indicates NSH insertion.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

metering-process

metering-process

Syntax

metering-process {standard | fp-accelerated}

Context

[Tree] (config>cflowd>sample-profile metering-process)

Full Context

configure cflowd sample-profile metering-process

Description

This command specifies the method used to process cflowd samples.

Default

metering-process standard

Parameters

standard

Specifies that the samples are extracted at the CPM and are processed there.

fp-accelerated

Specifies to use FP acceleration for cflowd processing, in which flow processing and reporting is performed by the FP complex on the CPM.

Platforms

7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s, 7950 XRS-20e

metric

metric

Syntax

metric value

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>spb>level metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>spb>level metric)

Full Context

configure service vpls spoke-sdp spb level metric

configure service vpls sap spb level metric

Description

This configures metric for this SPB interface SAP/spoke-sdp. This command is valid only for interfaces on control B-VPLS.

Parameters

value

Specifies the configuration metric value.

Values

1 to 16777215

Default

1000

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric-value

no metric [metric-value]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>black-hole metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>grt metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>ipsec-tunnel metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>indirect metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>next-hop metric)

Full Context

configure service vprn static-route-entry black-hole metric

configure service vprn static-route-entry grt metric

configure service vprn static-route-entry ipsec-tunnel metric

configure service vprn static-route-entry indirect metric

configure service vprn static-route-entry next-hop metric

Description

This command specifies the cost metric for the static route, expressed as a decimal integer. This value is used when importing the static route into other protocols such as OSPF. When the metric is configured as 0 then the metric configured in OSPF, default-import-metric, applies. When modifying the metric of an existing static route, the preference will not change unless specified. This value is also used to determine which static route to install in the forwarding table.

If there are multiple static routes with the same preference but different metrics then the lower cost (metric) route will be installed.

The no form of this command returns the metric to the default value

Default

metric 1

Parameters

metric-value

Specifies the cost metric value.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if>level metric)

Full Context

configure service vprn isis interface level metric

Description

This command configures the metric used for the level on the interface.

In order to calculate the lowest cost to reach a given destination, each configured level on each interface must have a cost. The costs for each level on an interface may be different.

If the metric is not configured, the default of 10 is used unless reference bandwidth is configured.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

no metric

Parameters

metric

The metric assigned for this level on this interface.

Values

1 to 16777215

Default

10

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>sham-link metric)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if metric)

Full Context

configure service vprn ospf area interface metric

configure service vprn ospf area sham-link metric

configure service vprn ospf3 area interface metric

Description

This command configures an explicit route cost metric for the OSPF interface that overrides the metrics calculated based on the speed of the underlying link.

The no form of this command deletes the manually configured interface metric, so the interface uses the computed metric based on the reference-bandwidth command setting and the speed of the underlying link.

Default

no metric

Parameters

metric

The metric to be applied to the interface expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template metric)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>static-lsp metric)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp metric)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp-template metric

configure router mpls static-lsp metric

configure router mpls lsp metric

Description

This command allows the user to override the LSP operational metric with a constant administrative value that will not change regardless of the actual path the LSP is using over its lifetime.

The LSP operational metric will match the metric the active path of this LSP is using at any given time. For a CSPF LSP, this metric represents the cumulative IGP metric of all the links the active path is using. If CSPF for this LSP is configured to use the TE metric, the LSP operational metric is set to the maximum value. For a non-CSPF LSP, the operational metric is the shortest IGP cost to the destination of the LSP.

The LSP operational metric is used by some applications to select an LSP among a set of LSPs that are destined to the same egress router. The LSP with the lowest operational metric will be selected. If more than one LSP with the same lowest LSP metric exists, the LSP with the lowest tunnel index will be selected. The configuration of a constant metric by the user will make sure the LSP always maintains its preference in this selection regardless of the path it is using at any given time. Applications that use the LSP operational metric include LDP-over-RSVP, VPRN auto-bind, and IGP, BGP and static route shortcuts.

The no form of this command disables the administrative LSP metric and reverts to the default setting in which the metric value will represent the LSP metric returned by MPLS. The same behavior is obtained if the user entered a metric of value zero (0).

Default

no metric. The LSP operational metric defaults to the metric returned by MPLS.

Parameters

metric

Specifies the integer value which specifies the value of the LSP administrative metric. A value of zero command reverts to the default setting and disables the administrative LSP metric.

Values

0 to 16777215

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>fwd-policies>fwd-policy metric)

Full Context

configure router mpls forwarding-policies forwarding-policy metric

Description

This command configures the metric of an MPLS forwarding policy.

The metric parameter is supported with the endpoint policy only and is inherited by the routes which resolve their next hop to this policy.

The no form of this command removes the metric parameter from the MPLS forwarding policy.

Parameters

metric

Specifies the metric value.

Values

1 to 16777215

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric [metric]

Context

[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>next-hop metric)

[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect metric)

[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>black-hole metric)

Full Context

configure router static-route-entry next-hop metric

configure router static-route-entry indirect metric

configure router static-route-entry black-hole metric

Description

This command specifies the cost metric for the static route, expressed as a decimal integer. This value is used when importing the static route into other protocols such as OSPF. When the metric is configured as 0 then the metric configured in OSPF, default-import-metric, applies. When modifying the metric of an existing static route, the preference will not change unless specified. This value is also used to determine which static route to install in the forwarding table.

If there are multiple static routes with the same preference but different metrics then the lower cost (metric) route will be installed.

The no form of this command returns the metric to the default value

Default

metric 1

Parameters

metric

Specifies the cost metric value.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>service>sdp metric)

Full Context

configure service sdp metric

Description

This command specifies the metric to be used within the tunnel table manager for decision making purposes. When multiple SDPs going to the same destination exist, this value is used as a tie-breaker by tunnel table manager users such as MP-BGP to select the route with the lower value.

Parameters

metric

Specifies the SDP metric.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>if>level metric)

Full Context

configure router isis interface level metric

Description

This command configures the metric used for the level on the interface.

In order to calculate the lowest cost to reach a given destination, each configured level on each interface must have a cost. The costs for each level on an interface may be different.

If the metric is not configured, the default of 10 is used unless reference bandwidth is configured.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

metric 10

Parameters

metric

Specifies the metric assigned for this level on this interface.

Values

1 to 16777215

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>interface metric)

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface metric)

Full Context

configure router ospf3 area interface metric

configure router ospf area interface metric

Description

This command configures an explicit route cost metric for the OSPF interface that overrides the metrics calculated based on the speed of the underlying link.

The no form of this command deletes the manually configured interface metric, so the interface uses the computed metric based on the reference-bandwidth command setting and the speed of the underlying link.

Default

no metric

Parameters

metric

Specifies the metric to be applied to the interface expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric [equal | or-higher | or-lower]

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>from metric)

Full Context

configure router policy-options policy-statement entry from metric

Description

This command matches BGP routes based on local preference (the value in the MULTI_EXIT_DISC attribute).

If no comparison qualifiers are present (equal, or-higher, or-lower), then equal is the implied default.

A non-BGP route does not match a policy entry if it contains the metric command. In addition, a BGP route without a MED attribute also does not match a policy entry if it contains a metric command.

Default

no metric

Parameters

metric

Specifies the MED value.

Values

0 to 4294967295, or a parameter name delimited by starting and ending at-sign (@) characters

equal

Specifies that matched routes should have the same MED as the value specified.

or-higher

Specifies that matched routes should have the same or a greater MED as the value specified.

or-lower

Specifies that matched routes should have the same or a lower MED as the value specified.

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric {add | subtract} metric

metric set [igp | metric-value]

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>default-action metric)

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>action metric)

Full Context

configure router policy-options policy-statement default-action metric

configure router policy-options policy-statement entry action metric

Description

In a BGP import or export policy, this command assigns a MED value to routes matched by the policy statement entry. The MED value may be set to a fixed value (overriding the received value), set to the routing table cost of the route used to resolve the next hop of the BGP route, or modified by adding or subtracting a fixed value offset.

The no form of this command removes the MED attribute from the matched routes.

Default

no metric

Parameters

add

Specifies that an integer is added to any existing metric. If the result of the addition results in a number greater than 4294967295, the value 4294967295 is used.

subtract

Specified integer is subtracted from any existing metric. If the result of the subtraction results in a number less than 0, the value of 0 is used.

set

Specifies that integer replaces any existing metric.

igp

Sets the MED value to the routing table cost of the route used to resolve the next hop of the BGP route.

metric

Specifies the metric modifier expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

0 to 4294967295

param-name —Specifies the metric parameter variable name. Allowed values are any string up to 32 characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes. Policy parameters must start and end with at-signs (@); for example, "@variable@”

Platforms

All

metric

Syntax

metric metric

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>srv6>locator>level metric)

[Tree] (config>router>isis>srv6>msloc>level metric)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing-v6 locator level metric

configure router isis segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator level metric

Description

This command configures the Level 1 or Level 2 metric to advertise in the locator TLV.

The no form of this command takes the value from the configuration of the Level 1 or Level 2 MT0 default metric parameter config>router>isis>level>default-metric which has a default value of 10.

Default

no metric

Parameters

metric

Specifies the configuration metric value.

Values

1 to 16777215

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

metric

Syntax

metric metric-value

no metric

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host>managed-routes>route-entry metric)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host>managed-routes>route-entry metric)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host managed-routes route-entry metric

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host managed-routes route-entry metric

Description

This command associates a metric with the provisioned managed route.

The no form of this command returns the metric to its default value.

Default

no metric

Parameters

metric-value

Specifies the metric value.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

metric-in

metric-in

Syntax

metric-in metric

no metric-in

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group metric-in)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng metric-in)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group>neighbor metric-in)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip metric-in)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group>neighbor metric-in)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group metric-in)

Full Context

configure service vprn rip group metric-in

configure service vprn ripng metric-in

configure service vprn ripng group neighbor metric-in

configure service vprn rip metric-in

configure service vprn rip group neighbor metric-in

configure service vprn ripng group metric-in

Description

This command sets the metric added to routes received from a RIP neighbor.

The no form of this command reverts the metric value back to the default.

Default

no metric-in

Parameters

metric

The value added to the metric of routes received from a RIP neighbor, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 16

Platforms

All

metric-in

Syntax

metric-in metric

no metric-in

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group>neighbor metric-in)

[Tree] (config>router>rip>group metric-in)

[Tree] (config>router>rip metric-in)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group metric-in)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng metric-in)

[Tree] (config>router>rip>group>neighbor metric-in)

Full Context

configure router ripng group neighbor metric-in

configure router rip group metric-in

configure router rip metric-in

configure router ripng group metric-in

configure router ripng metric-in

configure router rip group neighbor metric-in

Description

This command configures the metric added to routes received from a RIP neighbor.

When applying an export policy to a RIP configuration, the policy overrides the metric values determined through calculations involving the metric-in and metric-out values.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

metric-in 1

Parameters

metric

Specifies the value added to the metric of routes received from a RIP neighbor expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 16

Platforms

All

metric-out

metric-out

Syntax

metric-out metric

no metric-out

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip metric-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group>neighbor metric-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group>neighbor metric-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng metric-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group metric-out)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group metric-out)

Full Context

configure service vprn rip metric-out

configure service vprn ripng group neighbor metric-out

configure service vprn rip group neighbor metric-out

configure service vprn ripng metric-out

configure service vprn rip group metric-out

configure service vprn ripng group metric-out

Description

This command sets the metric added to routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors.

The no form of this command removes the command from the config and resets the metric-in value back to the default.

Default

no metric-out

Parameters

metric

The value added to the metric for routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 16

Platforms

All

metric-out

Syntax

metric-out metric

no metric-out

Context

[Tree] (config>router>rip>group>neighbor metric-out)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group metric-out)

[Tree] (config>router>rip>group metric-out)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng metric-out)

[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group>neighbor metric-out)

[Tree] (config>router>rip metric-out)

Full Context

configure router rip group neighbor metric-out

configure router ripng group metric-out

configure router rip group metric-out

configure router ripng metric-out

configure router ripng group neighbor metric-out

configure router rip metric-out

Description

This command configures the metric assigned to routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors.

When applying an export policy to a RIP configuration, the policy overrides the metric values determined through calculations involving the metric-in and metric-out values.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

metric-out 1

Parameters

metric

Specifies the value added to the metric for routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 16

Platforms

All

metric-type

metric-type

Syntax

metric-type metric-type

no metric-type

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp metric-type)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template metric-type)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp metric-type

configure router mpls lsp-template metric-type

Description

This command specifies the link metric type to use in the RSVP-TE LSP or SR-TE LSP path computation by either the local CSPF or the PCE.

The no form of this command returns the metric to its default value.

Default

metric-type igp

Parameters

metric-type

Specifies the metric type for the LSP.

Values

igp, te

Platforms

All

metric-type

Syntax

metric-type {igp | te-metric | delay}

no metric-type

Context

[Tree] (config>router>fad>flex-algo metric-type)

Full Context

configure router flexible-algorithm-definitions flex-algo metric-type

Description

This command configures the type of metric for the flexible algorithm. The topology graph assumes that all links are configured with the correct metric type.

For example, if the flexible algorithm definition instructs the use of te-metric keyword, it is assumed that all links have te-metric configured. Links without the te-metric configuration are excluded from the flexible algorithm topology graph.

The no form of this command removes the configured metric type and sets it to its default value.

Default

metric-type igp

Parameters

igp

Keyword to use the IGP metric for the flexible algorithm topology graph.

te-metric

Keyword to use the TE metric for the flexible algorithm topology graph.

delay

Keyword to use the delay metric for the flexible algorithm topology graph.

Platforms

All

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Syntax

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

configure service vpls spoke-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Description

Commands in this context configure MFIB-allowed MDA destinations.

The allowed-mda-destinations node and the corresponding mda command are used on spoke and mesh SDP bindings to provide a list of MDA destinations in the chassis that are allowed as destinations for multicast streams represented by [*,g] and [s,g] multicast flooding records on the VPLS service. The MDA list only applies to IP multicast forwarding when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VPLS service. The MDA list has no effect on normal VPLS flooding such as broadcast, L2 multicast, unknown destinations or non-snooped IP multicast.

At the IGMP snooping level, a spoke or mesh SDP binding is included in the flooding domain for an IP multicast stream when it has either been defined as a multicast router port, received a IGMP query through the binding or has been associated with the multicast stream through an IGMP request by a host over the binding. Due to the dynamic nature of the way that a spoke or mesh SDP binding is associated with one or more egress network IP interfaces, the system treats the binding as appearing on all network ports. This causes all possible network destinations in the switch fabric to be included in the multicast streams flooding domain. The MDA destination list provides a simple mechanism that narrows the IP multicast switch fabric destinations for the spoke or mesh SDP binding.

If no MDAs are defined within the allowed-mda-destinations node, the system operates normally and will forward IP multicast flooded packets associated with the spoke or mesh SDP binding to all switch fabric taps containing network IP interfaces.

The MDA inclusion list should include all MDAs that the SDP binding may attempt to forward through. A simple way to ensure that an MDA that is not included in the list is not being used by the binding is to define the SDP the binding is associated with as MPLS and use an RSVP-TE LSP with a strict egress hop. The MDA associated with the IP interface defined as the strict egress hop should be present in the inclusion list. If the inclusion list does not currently contain the MDA that the binding is forwarding through, the multicast packets will not reach the destination represented by the binding.

By default, the MDA inclusion list is empty.

If an MDA is removed from the list, the MDA is automatically removed from the flooding domain of any snooped IP multicast streams associated with a destination on the MDA unless the MDA was the last MDA on the inclusion list. Once the inclusion list is empty, all MDAs are eligible for snooped IP multicast flooding for streams associated with the SDP binding.

Platforms

All

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Syntax

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Context

[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations)

Full Context

configure service pw-template egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Description

Commands in this context configure MFIB-allowed XMA or MDA destinations.

The allowed-mda-destinations node and the corresponding mda command are used on spoke and mesh SDP bindings to provide a list of XMA or MDA destinations in the chassis that are allowed as destinations for multicast streams represented by [*,g] and [s,g] multicast flooding records on the VPLS service. The XMA or MDA list only applies to IP multicast forwarding when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VPLS service. The XMA or MDA list has no effect on normal VPLS flooding such as broadcast, Layer 2 multicast, unknown destinations or non-snooped IP multicast.

At the IGMP snooping level, a spoke or mesh SDP binding is included in the flooding domain for an IP multicast stream when it has either been defined as a multicast router port, received a IGMP query through the binding or has been associated with the multicast stream through an IGMP request by a host over the binding. Due to the dynamic nature of the way that a spoke or mesh SDP binding is associated with one or more egress network IP interfaces, the system treats the binding as appearing on all network ports. This causes all possible network destinations in the switch fabric to be included in the multicast streams flooding domain. The XMA or MDA destination list provides a simple mechanism that narrows the IP multicast switch fabric destinations for the spoke or mesh SDP binding.

If no XMAs or MDAs are defined within the allowed-mda-destinations node, the system operates normally and will forward IP multicast flooded packets associated with the spoke or mesh SDP binding to all switch fabric taps containing network IP interfaces.

The XMA or MDA inclusion list should include all XMAs or MDAs that the SDP binding may attempt to forward through. A simple way to ensure that an XMA or MDA that is not included in the list is not being used by the binding is to define the SDP the binding is associated with as MPLS and use an RSVP-TE LSP with a strict egress hop. The XMA or MDA associated with the IP interface defined as the strict egress hop should be present in the inclusion list.

If the inclusion list does not currently contain the XMA or MDA that the binding is forwarding through, the multicast packets will not reach the destination represented by the binding. By default, the XMA or MDA inclusion list is empty.

If an XMA or MDA is removed from the list, the XMA or MDA is automatically removed from the flooding domain of any snooped IP multicast streams associated with a destination on the XMA or MDA unless the XMA or MDA was the last XMA or MDA on the inclusion list. Once the inclusion list is empty, all XMAs or MDAs are eligible for snooped IP multicast flooding for streams associated with the SDP binding.

Platforms

All

mfib-ping

mfib-ping

Syntax

mfib-ping service service-id source src-ip destination mcast-address [size size] [ttl vc-label-ttl] [count send-count] [return-control] [timeout timeout] [interval interval]

Context

[Tree] (oam mfib-ping)

Full Context

oam mfib-ping

Description

This command determines the list of SAPs which egress a certain IP multicast stream (identified by source unicast and destination multicast IP addresses) within a VPLS service. An MFIB ping packet is always sent via the data plane.

An MFIB ping is forwarded across the VPLS following the MFIB. If an entry for the specified source unicast and destination multicast IP addresses exist in the MFIB for that VPLS, then the packet is forwarded along those paths, provided they are active. A response is generated only when there is an egress SAP binding for the specified IP multicast stream.

An MFIB ping reply can be sent using the data plane or the control plane. The return-control option configures the reply to be sent using the control plane. If return-control is not specified, the reply is sent using the data plane.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the service ID of the VPLS to diagnose or manage.

Values

1 to 2147483647, service-name, up to 64 characters

src-ip

Specifies the source IP address for the OAM request.

Values

ipv4-address - a.b.c.dipv6-address - xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xx [0..FF]H

mcast-address

Specifies the destination multicast address for the OAM request.

Values

ipv4-address - a.b.c.dipv6-address - xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

xx [0..FF]H

size

Specifies the multicast OAM request packet size, in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded to the specified size with a 6-byte PAD header and a byte payload of 0xAA as necessary.

If the octet size specified is less than the minimum packet, the minimum sized packet necessary to send the request is used.

Values

1 to 9786

Default

No OAM packet padding

vc-label-ttl

Specifies the TTL value in the VC label for the OAM request, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Default

255

send-count

Specifies the number of messages to send, expressed as a decimal integer. The count parameter override the default number of message requests sent. Each message request must either time out or receive a reply before the next message request is sent.

The message interval value must be expired before the next message request is sent.

Values

1 to 100

Default

1

return-control

Specifies that the OAM reply must be sent using the control plane instead of the data plane.

timeout

Specifies the value used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the next message request.

Upon the expiration of the message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. A request timeout message is displayed by the CLI for each message request sent that expires. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.

Values

1 to 100

Default

5

interval

Specifies the value used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.

If the interval is set to 1 second where the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.

Values

1 to 10

Default

1

Platforms

All

Output

The following output is an example of multicast FIB connectivity test information

Output Example
A:ALA-A# oam mfib-ping service 10 source 10.10.10.1 destination 225.0.0.1 count 2
Seq Node-id                                               Path     Size  RTT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Send request Seq. 1.]
1   51.51.51.51:sap1/1/1                                 Self     100   0ms
1   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/2                                 In-Band  100   20ms
1   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   10ms
1   52.52.52.52:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   20ms
[Send request Seq. 2.]
2   51.51.51.51:sap1/1/1                                 Self     100   0ms
2   52.52.52.52:sap1/1/2                                 In-Band  100   10ms
2   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/2                                 In-Band  100   10ms
2   52.52.52.52:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   20ms
2   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   30ms
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A:ALA-AIM# oam mfib-ping service 1 source 11.11.0.0 destination 224.0.0.1
Seq Node-id                                               Path     Size  RTT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Send request Seq. 1.]
1   10.20.1.3:sap1/1/5:1                      Not in MFIB Self     40    0ms
1   10.20.1.3:sap1/1/2:1                                  Self     40    10ms
[Echo replies received: 2]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A:ALA-AIM# 

mfib-table-high-wmark

mfib-table-high-wmark

Syntax

[no] mfib-table-high-wmark high-water-mark

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mfib-table-high-wmark)

Full Context

configure service vpls mfib-table-high-wmark

Description

This command specifies the multicast FIB high watermark. When the percentage filling level of the multicast FIB exceeds the configured value, a trap is generated and a log entry is added.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mfib-table-high-wmark 95

Parameters

high-water-mark

Specifies the multicast FIB high watermark as a percentage.

Values

1 to 100

Platforms

All

mfib-table-low-wmark

mfib-table-low-wmark

Syntax

[no] mfib-table-low-wmark low-water-mark

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mfib-table-low-wmark)

Full Context

configure service vpls mfib-table-low-wmark

Description

This command specifies the multicast FIB low watermark. When the percentage filling level of the multicast FIB drops below the configured value, the corresponding trap is cleared and a log entry is added.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mfib-table-low-wmark

Parameters

low-water-mark

Specifies the multicast FIB low watermark as a percentage.

Values

1 to 100

Default

90

Platforms

All

mfib-table-size

mfib-table-size

Syntax

mfib-table-size size

no mfib-table-size

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mfib-table-size)

Full Context

configure service vpls mfib-table-size

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of (s,g) entries in the multicast forwarding database (MFIB) for this VPLS instance.

The mfib-table-size parameter specifies the maximum number of multicast database entries for both learned and static multicast addresses for the VPLS instance. When a table-size limit is set on the mfib of a service which is lower than the current number of dynamic entries present in the mfib then the number of entries remains above the limit.

The no form of this command removes the configured maximum MFIB table size.

Default

no mfib-table-size

Parameters

size

Specifies the maximum number of (s,g) entries allowed in the Multicast FIB

Values

1 to 40959

Platforms

All

mgmt-ethernet

mgmt-ethernet

Syntax

mgmt-ethernet [revert seconds]

no mgmt-ethernet

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy mgmt-ethernet)

Full Context

configure redundancy mgmt-ethernet

Description

This command configures the active CPM to use the management Ethernet port of the standby CPM if the management Ethernet port on the active CPM goes down.

The revert option allows the administrator to control when to revert back to the management Ethernet port of the primary CPM after it comes up again.

The no form of this command disables redundancy, so that connectivity to the active CPM is lost if its Ethernet port goes down.

Default

no mgmt-ethernet

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the wait duration (in seconds) before reverting back to the management Ethernet port of the primary CPM.

Values

1 to 300

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s, 7950 XRS

mh-mode

mh-mode

Syntax

mh-mode {access | network}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>vxlan mh-mode)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-evpn vxlan mh-mode

Description

This command configures multihoming mode.

Default

mh-mode access

Parameters

access

When configured in this mode, the BGP-EVPN instance does not participate in multihoming procedures, such as processing DF election for the service or enabling local bias forwarding mode.

network

When configured in this mode, the BGP-EVPN instance participates in multihoming procedures, such as processing DF election for the service or enable local bias forwarding mode.

In services with two VXLAN instances, only one of the two instances can be configured as network.

Platforms

All

mh-mode

Syntax

mh-mode {access | network}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>mpls mh-mode)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>srv6 mh-mode)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls mh-mode

configure service vpls bgp-evpn segment-routing-v6 mh-mode

Description

This command configures each BGP-EVPN instance in a multi-instance EVPN VPLS service to behave as network or access.

You can only configure one network instance for the service. If the service has a provider tunnel enabled, it requires a network instance.

Default

mh-mode network

Parameters

access

Specifies that the BGP-EVPN instance does not participate in multihoming procedures, such as DF election processing or local bias forwarding.

network

Specifies that the BGP-EVPN instance participates in multihoming procedures, such as DF election processing or local bias forwarding.

In services with two instances, only one of the two instances can be configured as network.

Platforms

All

  • configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls mh-mode

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure service vpls bgp-evpn segment-routing-v6 mh-mode

mh-mode

Syntax

mh-mode {access | network}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn>srv6 mh-mode)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn>mpls mh-mode)

Full Context

configure service epipe bgp-evpn segment-routing-v6 mh-mode

configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls mh-mode

Description

This command configures each BGP-EVPN instance in a multi-instance Epipe service to behave as network or access.

You can only configure one network instance for the service. If the service has a provider tunnel enabled, it requires a network instance.

Default

mh-mode network

Parameters

access

Specifies that the BGP-EVPN instance does not participate in multihoming procedures, such as DF election processing or local bias forwarding.

network

Specifies that the BGP-EVPN instance participates in multihoming procedures, such as DF election processing or local bias forwarding.

In services with two instances, only one of the two instances can be configured as network.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure service epipe bgp-evpn segment-routing-v6 mh-mode

All

  • configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls mh-mode

mhf-creation

mhf-creation

Syntax

mhf-creation {default | none | explicit | static}

no mhf-creation

Context

[Tree] (cfg>eth-cfm>domain>assoc>bridge mhf-creation)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm domain association bridge-identifier mhf-creation

Description

This command defines the MIP method of creation. MIP creation mode and other factors are part of the MIP creation authority (association or default-domain) logic. The MIP creation algorithm may result in multiple potential MIPs. Only the lowest-level valid MIP is installed. The static creation mode is the exception to the single MIP installation rule.

Under the association context, the level level parameter is not supported as part of this command. The level is derived from the level configuration of the domain.

The no form of this command is only available under the association context, and reverts the current mode of creation to the default none. In order to transition to and from the static mode of operation, the active mhf-creation mode must be none.

Default

mhf-creation none

Parameters

default

Specifies MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP without the requirement for a MEP at some lower MA level. If a lower-level MEP exists, the creation method will behave as explicit.

none

Specifies that no MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP.

explicit

Specifies that MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP only if a MEP is created at some lower MD Level. There must be at least one lower MD Level MEP provisioned on the same SAP or spoke SDP.

static

Specifies the exact level of the MHF (MIP) that will be created for this SAP. Multiple MHFs (MIPs) are allowed as long as the MD Level hierarchy is properly configured for the particular Primary VLAN. Ingress MHFs (MIPs) with primary VLAN are not supported on SDP Bindings.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mhf-creation

Syntax

mhf-creation {none | default | explicit | static} level level

no mhf-creation

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>default-domain>bridge-identifier mhf-creation)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm default-domain bridge-identifier mhf-creation

Description

This command defines the MIP method of creation. MIP creation mode and other factors are part of the MIP creation authority (association or default-domain) logic. The MIP creation algorithm may result in multiple potential MIPs. Only the lowest-level valid MIP is installed. The static creation mode is the exception to the single MIP installation rule.

Under the association context, the level level parameter is not supported as part of this command. The level is derived from the level configuration of the domain.

The no form of this command is only available under the association context, and reverts the current mode of creation to the default none. In order to transition to and from the static mode of operation, the active mhf-creation mode must be none.

Default

mhf-creation defer (config>eth-cfm>default-domain>bridge-identifier)

Parameters

none

Specifies that no MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP.

default

Specifies MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP without the requirement for a MEP at some lower MA level. If a lower-level MEP exists, the creation method will behave as explicit.

explicit

Specifies that MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP only if a MEP is created at some lower MD Level. There must be at least one lower MD Level MEP provisioned on the same SAP or spoke SDP.

defer

Defers the MIP creation process to the system-wide read-only values. This parameter is only configurable under the default-domain context.

level

Specifies the requested level of the MIP. This is used by the MIP creation algorithm to determine its validity in comparison to other ETH-CFM MIPs in the same service. If level is configured as "defer”, the level value will be inherited from the global read-only system values, and "-1” will be stored as a MIB value in the table.

Values

0 to 7, defer

Default

defer

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

micro-loop-avoidance

micro-loop-avoidance

Syntax

micro-loop-avoidance [fib-delay fib-delay]

no micro-loop-avoidance

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>segment-routing micro-loop-avoidance)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing micro-loop-avoidance

Description

This command enables, in the IGP instance, the micro-loop avoidance feature to prevent micro-loops from using Segment Routing (SR) loop-free tunnels for packets that are forwarded over SR IS-IS node SIDs.

When enabled, the behavior of the feature is triggered by the receipt of a single event on a on a P2P link or broadcast link with two neighbors:

  • link addition or restoration

  • link removal or failure

  • link metric change

IGP then performs the following procedures.

  1. IGP runs the main SPF and LFA SPFs.

  2. For a node or a prefix in which the SPF resulted in no change to its next hop(s) and metric(s), then IGP takes no action.

  3. For a node or a prefix in which SPF resulted in a change to its next hop(s) or metric(s), IGP marks the route as eligible for micro-loop avoidance.

    1. Activate, for each node SID that uses a micro-loop avoidance eligible route with ECMP next hops, the common set of next hops between the previous and new SPF.

    2. Compute and activate, for each node SID which uses a micro-loop avoidance eligible route, with a single next hop loop-free SR tunnel that is applicable to the specific link event.

      This tunnel acts the micro-loop avoidance primary path for the route and uses the same outgoing interface as the new computed primary next hop.

    3. Program the TI-LFA, base LFA, or remote LFA backup path that protects the new primary next hop for the node SID.

  4. Start the fib-delay timer to delay programming of new main and LFA SPF results into the FIB.

  5. After the expiry of the fib-delay timer, program the new primary next hop(s) for node SIDs routes that were marked eligible for micro-loop avoidance procedures.

The no form of this command disables the micro-loop avoidance feature.

Default

no micro-loop-avoidance

Parameters

fib-delay

Specifies the delay, in 100s of milliseconds, before the system programs the new next hops for the SR tunnel.

Values

1 to 300

Default

15

Platforms

All

micro-loop-avoidance

Syntax

[no] micro-loop-avoidance

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>flex-algos>flex-algo micro-loop-avoidance)

Full Context

configure router isis flexible-algorithms flex-algo micro-loop-avoidance

Description

This command enables flexible algorithms-aware micro-loop avoidance. When enabled, the micro-loop configuration parameters are inherited from the base SPF.

The no form of this command disables the micro-loop avoidance for flexible algorithms.

Default

no micro-loop-avoidance

Platforms

All

micro-segment

micro-segment

Syntax

[no] micro-segment

Context

[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>srv6 micro-segment)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6 micro-segment

Description

Commands in this context configure micro-segment SRv6.

The no form of this command removes the configuration.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

micro-segment-locator

micro-segment-locator

Syntax

[no] micro-segment-locator ms-locator-name

Context

[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>srv6 micro-segment-locator)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator

Description

This command configures the name of an SRv6 micro-segment locator for use by the routing protocols and services. This also creates the context to configure the associated parameters.

A limit of 16 locators (regular and micro) per system is enforced.

The no form of this command removes the micro-segment locator.

Parameters

ms-locator-name

Specifies a micro-segment locator name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

micro-segment-locator

Syntax

[no] micro-segment-locator ms-locator-name

Context

[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>srv6>inst micro-segment-locator)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6 base-routing-instance micro-segment-locator

Description

This command assigns a micro-segment locator to BGP for use with base router routes.

This command refers to a micro-segment locator name defined under the following context.

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6

The no form of this command removes the micro-segment locator.

Parameters

ms-locator-name

Specifies a micro-segment locator name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

micro-segment-locator

Syntax

[no] micro-segment-locator ms-locator-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>srv6 micro-segment-locator)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>srv6 micro-segment-locator)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>srv6 micro-segment-locator)

Full Context

configure service epipe segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator

configure service vpls segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator

configure service vprn segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator

Description

This command assigns a micro-segment locator to the SRv6 instance in the service. The same micro-segment locator can be referenced in multiple BGP instances used by IPVPN or EVPN.

This command refers to a micro-segment locator name defined under the following context.

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6

The no form of this command removes the micro-segment locator name.

Parameters

ms-locator-name

Specifies a micro-segment locator name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

micro-segment-locator

Syntax

[no] micro-segment-locator ms-locator-name

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>srv6 micro-segment-locator)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator

Description

This command assigns a micro-segment locator to each algorithm in an IS-IS instance. The same micro-segment locator of a specific algorithm number can be shared with other IGP instances and BGP instances in IP-VPN or EVPN.

This command refers to a micro-segment locator name defined under the following context.

configure router segment-routing segment-routing-v6

The no form of this command removes the micro-segment locator.

Default

no micro-segment-locator

Parameters

ms-locator-name

Specifies a micro-segment locator name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

micro-segment-locator

Syntax

micro-segment-locator name function end-b6-encaps-red-next-csid [function-value function-value]

no micro-segment-locator

Context

[Tree] (conf>router>segment-routing>sr-policies>policy>srv6>binding-sid micro-segment-locator)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing sr-policies static-policy segment-routing-v6 binding-sid micro-segment-locator

Description

This command configures binding SID micro-segment-locator parameters for a local SRv6 policy.

The no form of the command removes the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the micro-segment-locator, up to 256 characters. A corresponding micro-segment-locator name must exist in the config>router>segment-routing>srv6 context.

end-b6-encaps-red-next-csid

Keyword to configure reduced encapsulation for the microbinding SID.

function-value

Specifies the optional function value of the local SRv6 microbinding SID. If a function value is configured, the router checks whether this function value is available for the named locator. If no function value is configured, the router dynamically allocates a value.

Values

1 to 65535

Default

no function value

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mid-pool

mid-pool

Syntax

[no] mid-pool mid-pool-id

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>hs-pool-policy>mid-tier mid-pool)

Full Context

configure qos hs-pool-policy mid-tier mid-pool

Description

Commands in this context configure mid-pool tier parameters for an HS pool policy. Parameters allow for allocating the percentage of the root pool size, defining a mid-tier pool’s root-pool parent, specifying the port bandwidth oversubscription factor, or specifying a slope policy for the specific mid-tier pool.

The no form of the command reverts the parent root pool association to root-pool 1, reverts to the default allocation-percentage value, the default port-bw-oversub-factor, and default slope-policy to the specified mid-pool.

Parameters

mid-pool-id

Specifies the mid pool ID. This is a required parameter when this command is executed and specifies which mid-pool context is being entered.

Values

1 to 16

Platforms

7750 SR-7/12/12e

mid-tier

mid-tier

Syntax

mid-tier

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>hs-pool-policy mid-tier)

Full Context

configure qos hs-pool-policy mid-tier

Description

Commands in this context configure HS pool policy parameters. Within the mid-tier context, mid-pools can be associated with a root pool, sized as a percentage of the root pool, have an HS slope policy applied, or be configured with a port bandwidth oversubscription factor parameter used to influence the port-class pool sizes associated with the mid-tier pool.

Platforms

7750 SR-7/12/12e

migrant

migrant

Syntax

[no] migrant

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>tunnel-query>ue-state migrant)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw tunnel-query ue-state migrant

Description

This command enables matching on tunnels with migrant UEs.

The no form of this command disables matching on migrant UEs, unless UE state matching is disabled altogether.

Default

no migrant

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

millisecond-event-timestamp

millisecond-event-timestamp

Syntax

[no] millisecond-event-timestamp

Context

[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>acct-include-attributes millisecond-event-timestamp)

Full Context

configure aaa isa-radius-policy acct-include-attributes millisecond-event-timestamp

Description

This command enables the router to include the Alc-Millisecond-Event-Timestamp attribute in the accounting message. This attribute specifies the time the accounting event was logged, in milliseconds since Jan 1, 1970 00:00:00 UTC.

The no form of this command disables the router from including the Alc-Millisecond-Event-Timestamp attribute in the accounting message.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-advertisement

min-advertisement

Syntax

min-advertisement seconds

no min-advertisement

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy min-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if min-advertisement)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 min-advertisement

configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement

configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 min-advertisement

configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy min-advertisement

configure service vprn router-advert interface min-advertisement

Description

This command specifies the minimum time allowed between sending unsolicited router advertisements.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

min-advertisement 900

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum advertisement interval, in seconds.

Values

900 to 1350

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-advertisement-interval

min-advertisement-interval

Syntax

[no] min-advertisement-interval seconds

Context

[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if min-advertisement-interval)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if min-advertisement-interval)

Full Context

configure router router-advertisement interface min-advertisement-interval

configure service vprn router-advertisement interface min-advertisement-interval

Description

This command configures the minimum interval between sending ICMPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement messages.

Default

min-advertisement-interval 200

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum interval in seconds between sending ICMPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement messages.

Values

3 to 1350

Platforms

All

min-auth-interval

min-auth-interval

Syntax

min-auth-interval min-auth-interval

no min-auth-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>arp-host min-auth-interval)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>arp-host min-auth-interval)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>arp-host min-auth-interval)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if min-auth-interval)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap arp-host min-auth-interval

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters arp-host min-auth-interval

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface arp-host min-auth-interval

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface min-auth-interval

Description

This command configures the minimum authentication interval.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

min-auth-interval 15

Parameters

min-auth-interval

Specifies the minimum authentication interval, in minutes.

Values

1 to 6000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-auth-interval

Syntax

min-auth-interval [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

no min-auth-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-sol min-auth-interval)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-solicit min-auth-interval

Description

This command specify the minimum interval between two consecutive authentication attempts from the same host.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

days

Specifies the number of days that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.

hours

Specifies the number of hours that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.

minutes

Specifies the number of minutes that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.

seconds

Specifies the number of seconds that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-auth-interval

Syntax

min-auth-interval [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

min-auth-interval infinite

no min-auth-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session min-auth-interval)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session min-auth-interval)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipoe-session min-auth-interval

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipoe-session min-auth-interval

Description

Re-authentication for IPoE sessions enable dynamic policy changes.

This command configures the maximum frequency of re-authentications by specifying a minimum interval between two non-forced authentications for the same IPoE session.

A forced authentication is by default triggered by a circuit-id, interface-id or remote-id change (see the force-auth [config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session force-auth, config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session force-auth] command).

Re-authentications are, by default, disabled and can be enabled by configuring a min-auth-interval.

Setting the min-auth-interval to zero seconds always re-authenticates on each trigger packet.

The no form of this command reverts to the default behavior.

Default

min-auth-interval infinite

Parameters

days

Specifies the min number of days between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.

Values

0 to 365

hours

Specifies the min number of hours between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.

Values

0 to 23

minutes

Specifies the min number of minutes between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.

Values

0 to 59

seconds

Specifies the min number of seconds between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.

Values

0 to 59

infinite

Specifies that non-forced re-authentications for IPoE sessions is not performed.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-bandwidth

min-bandwidth

Syntax

min-bandwidth bandwidth-in-mbps

no min-bandwidth

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth

configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth

Description

This command configures the minimum bandwidth that auto-bandwidth allocation is allowed to request for an LSP.

The LSP minimum applies whether the bandwidth adjustment is triggered by normal adjust-timer expiry or manual request.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

min-bandwidth 0

Parameters

bandwidth-in-mbps

Specifies the minimum bandwidth in Mb/s.

Values

0 to 6400000

Platforms

All

min-delay

min-delay

Syntax

min-delay [delay]

no min-delay

Context

[Tree] (config>log>event-handling>handler>action-list>entry min-delay)

Full Context

configure log event-handling handler action-list entry min-delay

Description

This command specifies the minimum delay in seconds between subsequent executions of the action specified in this entry. This is useful, for example, to ensure that a script does not get triggered to execute too often.

Default

no min-delay

Parameters

delay

Specifies the unit in seconds.

Values

1 to 604800

Platforms

All

min-first-fragment-size-rx

min-first-fragment-size-rx

Syntax

min-first-fragment-size-rx mtu-bytes

no min-first-fragment-size-rx

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>inside>dslite>address min-first-fragment-size-rx)

[Tree] (config>router>nat>inside>dslite>address min-first-fragment-size-rx)

Full Context

configure service vprn nat inside dual-stack-lite address min-first-fragment-size-rx

configure router nat inside dual-stack-lite address min-first-fragment-size-rx

Description

This command configures the minimum MTU size for the first fragment in the upstream direction. This command can be used to enable processing of first IPv6 fragments smaller than 1280 bytes. RFC 8200 recommends the minimum MTU in IPv6 be 1280 bytes which allows fragmentation only for packets that are larger than 1280 bytes. If a first fragment is smaller than 1280 bytes, DS-lite implementation in the SR OS, by default, drops the first fragment.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default

min-first-fragment-size-rx 1280

Parameters

mtu-bytes

Specifies the minimum MTU size for the first fragment in the upstream direction

Values

512 to 1280

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-frame-length

min-frame-length

Syntax

min-frame-length byte-length

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet min-frame-length)

Full Context

configure port ethernet min-frame-length

Description

This command configures the minimum transmitted frame length.

Note: The byte-length value of 72 is only supported on FP4 and newer generations of XMA, MDA-e-XP, and MDA-s.

Parameters

byte-length

Specifies the number of bytes for the minimum frame length.

Values

64, 68, 72

Default

64

Platforms

All

min-lease-time

min-lease-time

Syntax

min-lease-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

no min-lease-time

Context

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool min-lease-time)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool min-lease-time)

Full Context

configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool min-lease-time

configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool min-lease-time

Description

This command configures the minimum lease time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

min-lease-time min 10

Parameters

min-lease-time

Specifies the minimum lease time.

Values

days

0 to 3650

hours

0 to 23

minutes

0 to 59

seconds

0 to 59

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-num-ue

min-num-ue

Syntax

min-num-ue minimum

no min-num-ue

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>tunnel-query min-num-ue)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw tunnel-query min-num-ue

Description

This command enables matching only on tunnels that have at least the specified number of UEs connected.

The no form of this command disables matching on a minimum number of UEs.

Default

no min-num-ue

Parameters

minimum

Specifies the minimum number of UEs.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-route-advertisement

min-route-advertisement

Syntax

min-route-advertisement seconds

no min-route-advertisement

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>bgp-prng-plcy min-route-advertisement)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt bgp-peering-policy min-route-advertisement

Description

This command configures the minimum interval, in seconds, at which a prefix can be advertised to a peer.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default

min-route-advertisement 30

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum route advertising interval, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-route-advertisement

Syntax

min-route-advertisement seconds

no min-route-advertisement

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group min-route-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp min-route-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor min-route-advertisement)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp group min-route-advertisement

configure service vprn bgp min-route-advertisement

configure service vprn bgp group neighbor min-route-advertisement

Description

This command configures the minimum interval, in seconds, at which a prefix can be advertised to a peer.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default

min-route-advertisement 30

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum route advertising interval, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

All

min-route-advertisement

Syntax

min-route-advertisement seconds

no min-route-advertisement

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp min-route-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group min-route-advertisement)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor min-route-advertisement)

Full Context

configure router bgp min-route-advertisement

configure router bgp group min-route-advertisement

configure router bgp group neighbor min-route-advertisement

Description

This command configures the minimum interval, in seconds, between successive updates of a prefix towards a peer.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group), or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

The rapid-update command can be used to override the peer-level min-route-advertisement time and applies the minimum setting (0 seconds) to routes belonging to address families specified by the rapid-update command; routes of other address families continue to be advertised according to the session-level MRAI setting.

The rapid-update and rapid-withdrawal commands may result in the routes being sent before the peer-level MRAI timer expires.

Default

min-route-advertisement 30

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum route advertising interval, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

All

min-thresh-separation

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [bytes | kilobytes]

no min-thresh-separation

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>egress>policer-control-policy>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>ingress>policer-control-policy>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile egress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile ingress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

The min-thresh-separation command defines the minimum required separation between each in-use discard threshold maintained for each parent policer context associated with the policer-control-policy. The min-thresh-separation value may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile to which the policy is applied.

The system uses the default or specified min-thresh-separation value in order to determine the minimum separation required between each of the of the parent policer discard thresholds. The system enforces the minimum separation based on the following behavior in two ways. The first is determining the size of the shared-portion for each priority level (when the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is not specified):

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has less than two child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level is zero.

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has two or more child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level is equal to the current value of min-thresh-separation.

The second function the system uses the min-thresh-separation value for is determining the value per priority level for the fair-portion:

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has no child policers associated, the fair-portion for the level is zero.

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has one child policer associated, the fair-portion is equal to the maximum of the min-thresh-separation value and the priority level’s mbs-contribution value.

  • When a parent policer instance's priority level has two or more child policers associated, the fair-portion is equal to the maximum of the following:

    • min-thresh-separation value

    • The priority level’s mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

When the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is defined for a priority level within the policy, the system will treat the defined mbs-contribution value as an explicit definition of the priority level’s MBS. While the system will continue to track child policer associations with the parent policer priority levels, the association counters will have no effect. Instead the following rules is used to determine a fixed priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion:

  • If a fixed priority level’s mbs-contribution value is set to zero, both the shared-portion and fair-portion is set to zero

  • If the mbs-contribution value is not set to zero:

    • The shared-portion is set to the current min-thresh-separation value

    • The fair-portion is set to the maximum of the following:

min-thresh-separation value

mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

Each time the min-thresh-separation value is modified, the thresholds for all instances of the parent policer created through association with this policer-control-policy are reevaluated.

Determining the Correct Value for the Minimum Threshold Separation Value

The minimum value for min-thresh-separation should be set equal to the maximum size packet that is handled by the parent policer. This ensures that when a lower priority packet is incrementing the bucket, the size of the increment will not cause the bucket's depth to equal or exceed a higher priority threshold. It also ensures that an unfair packet within a priority level cannot cause the PIR bucket to increment to the discard-all threshold within the priority.

When evaluating maximum packet size, each child policer’s per-packet-offset setting should be taken into consideration. If the maximum size packet is 1518 bytes and a per-packet-offset parameter is configured to add 20 bytes per packet, min-thresh-separation should be set to 1538 due to the fact that the parent policer will increment its PIR bucket using the extra 20 bytes.

In most circumstances, a value larger than the maximum packet size is not necessary. Management of priority level aggregate burst tolerance is intended to be implemented using the priority level mbs-contribution command. Setting a value larger than the maximum packet size will not adversely affect the policer performance, but it may increase the aggregate burst tolerance for each priority level.

Note:

A priority level’s shared-portion of the parent policer’s PIR bucket depth is only necessary to provide some separation between a lower priority’s discard-all threshold and this priority’s discard-unfair threshold. It is expected that the burst tolerance for the unfair packets is relatively minimal since the child policers feeding the parent policer priority level all have some amount of fair burst before entering into an FIR exceed or unfair state. The fair burst amount for a priority level is defined using the mbs-contribution command.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s min-thresh-separation value to the default value.

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when executing the min-thresh-separation command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the shared portion in bytes or kilobytes that is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is the assumed value. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the min-thresh-separation value has been overridden.

Values

0 to 16777216

[bytes | kilobytes]

The bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [bytes | kilobytes]

no min-thresh-separation

Context

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>network>queue-group>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>access>queue-group>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

This command defines the minimum required separation between each in-use discard threshold maintained for each parent policer context associated with the policer-control-policy. The min-thresh-separation value may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile to which the policy is applied.

The system uses the default or specified min-thresh-separation value in order to determine the minimum separation required between each of the of the parent policer discard thresholds. The system enforces the minimum separation based on the following behavior in two ways. The first is determining the size of the shared-portion for each priority level (when the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is not specified):

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has less than two child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be zero.

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has two or more child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be equal to the current value of min-thresh-separation.

The second function the system uses the min-thresh-separation value for is determining the value per priority level for the fair-portion:

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has no child policers associated, the fair-portion for the level will be zero.

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has one child policer associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the min-thresh-separation value and the priority level’s mbs-contribution value.

  • When a parent policer instance's priority level has two or more child policers associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the following:

    • min-thresh-separation value

    • The priority level’s mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

When the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is defined for a priority level within the policy, the system will treat the defined mbs-contribution value as an explicit definition of the priority level’s MBS. While the system will continue to track child policer associations with the parent policer priority levels, the association counters will have no effect. Instead the following rules will be used to determine a fixed priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion:

  • If a fixed priority level’s mbs-contribution value is set to zero, both the shared-portion and fair-portion will be set to zero

  • If the mbs-contribution value is not set to zero:

    • The shared-portion will be set to the current min-thresh-separation value

    • The fair-portion will be set to the maximum of the following:

      • min-thresh-separation value

      • mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

Each time the min-thresh-separation value is modified, the thresholds for all instances of the parent policer created through association with this policer-control-policy are reevaluated except for parent policer instances that currently have a min-thresh-separation override.

Determining the Correct Value for the Minimum Threshold Separation Value

The minimum value for min-thresh-separation should be set equal to the maximum size packet that will be handled by the parent policer. This ensures that when a lower priority packet is incrementing the bucket, the size of the increment will not cause the bucket's depth to equal or exceed a higher priority threshold. It also ensures that an unfair packet within a priority level cannot cause the PIR bucket to increment to the discard-all threshold within the priority.

When evaluating maximum packet size, each child policer’s per-packet-offset setting should be taken into consideration. If the maximum size packet is 1518 bytes and a per-packet-offset parameter is configured to add 20 bytes per packet, min-thresh-separation should be set to 1538 due to the fact that the parent policer will increment its PIR bucket using the extra 20 bytes.

In most circumstances, a value larger than the maximum packet size is not necessary. Management of priority level aggregate burst tolerance is intended to be implemented using the priority level mbs-contribution command. Setting a value larger than the maximum packet size will not adversely affect the policer performance, but it may increase the aggregate burst tolerance for each priority level.

One thing to note is that a priority level’s shared-portion of the parent policer’s PIR bucket depth is only necessary to provide some separation between a lower priority’s discard-all threshold and this priority’s discard-unfair threshold. It is expected that the burst tolerance for the unfair packets is relatively minimal since the child policers feeding the parent policer priority level all have some amount of fair burst before entering into an FIR exceed or unfair state. The fair burst amount for a priority level is defined using the mbs-contribution command.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s min-thresh-separation value to the default value. This has no effect on instances of the parent policer where min-thresh-separation is overridden unless the override is removed.

Default

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters

size

Specifies that the size parameter is required when executing the min-thresh-separation command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the shared portion in bytes or kilobytes that is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is the assumed value. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the min-thresh-separation value has been overridden. Clearing an override on parent policer instance causes this value to be enforced.

Values

0 to 16777216

bytes | kilobytes

Specifies that the bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Values

bytes or kilobytes

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [bytes | kilobytes]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policy-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policy-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policy-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policy-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policy-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policy-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters

size

The minimum discard threshold separation override value.

Values

1 to 16777216 | default

bytes

Signifies that size is expressed in bytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.

kilobytes

Signifies that size is expressed in kilobytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
  • configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

  • configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
  • configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
  • configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
  • configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service vpls sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

This command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying min-thresh-separation override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 16777216 or default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service ies interface sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

This command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying min-thresh-separation override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 16777216 or default

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [{bytes | kilobytes}]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-ctrl-over priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-ctrl-over priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

This command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters

size

This parameter is required when specifying min-thresh-separation override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.

Values

0 to 16777216 or default

Default

kilobytes

min-thresh-separation

Syntax

min-thresh-separation size [bytes | kilobytes]

no min-thresh-separation

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)

Full Context

configure qos policer-control-policy root priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation

Description

The min-thresh-separation command defines the minimum required separation between each in-use discard threshold maintained for each parent policer context associated with the policer-control-policy. The min-thresh-separation value may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile to which the policy is applied.

The system uses the default or specified min-thresh-separation value in order to determine the minimum separation required between each of the of the parent policer discard thresholds. The system enforces the minimum separation based on the following behavior in two ways. The first is determining the size of the shared-portion for each priority level (when the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is not specified):

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has less than two child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be zero.

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has two or more child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be equal to the current value of min-thresh-separation.

The second function the system uses the min-thresh-separation value for is determining the value per priority level for the fair-portion:

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has no child policers associated, the fair-portion for the level will be zero.

  • When a parent policer instance’s priority level has one child policer associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the min-thresh-separation value and the priority level’s mbs-contribution value.

  • When a parent policer instance's priority level has two or more child policers associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the following:

    • min-thresh-separation value

    • mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

When the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is defined for a priority level within the policy, the system will treat the defined mbs-contribution value as an explicit definition of the priority level’s MBS. While the system will continue to track child policer associations with the parent policer priority levels, the association counters will have no effect. Instead, the following rules will be used to determine a fixed priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion:

  • If a fixed priority level’s mbs-contribution value is set to zero, both the shared-portion and fair-portion will be set to zero

  • If the mbs-contribution value is not set to zero:

    • The shared-portion will be set to the current min-thresh-separation value

    • The fair-portion will be set to the maximum of the following:

      min-thresh-separation value

      mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

Each time the min-thresh-separation value is modified, the thresholds for all instances of the parent policer created through association with this policer-control-policy are reevaluated.

Determining the Correct Value for the Minimum Threshold Separation Value

The minimum value for min-thresh-separation should be set equal to the maximum size packet that will be handled by the parent policer. This ensures that when a lower priority packet is incrementing the bucket, the size of the increment will not cause the bucket's depth to equal or exceed a higher priority threshold. It also ensures that an unfair packet within a priority level cannot cause the PIR bucket to increment to the discard-all threshold within the priority.

When evaluating maximum packet size, each child policer’s per-packet-offset setting should be taken into consideration. If the maximum size packet is 1518 bytes and a per-packet-offset parameter is configured to add 20 bytes per packet, min-thresh-separation should be set to 1538 due to the fact that the parent policer will increment its PIR bucket using the extra 20 bytes.

In most circumstances, a value larger than the maximum packet size is not necessary. Management of priority level aggregate burst tolerance is intended to be implemented using the priority level mbs-contribution command. Setting a value larger than the maximum packet size will not adversely affect the policer performance, but it may increase the aggregate burst tolerance for each priority level.

Note:

A priority level’s shared-portion of the parent policer’s PIR bucket depth is only necessary to provide some separation between a lower priority’s discard-all threshold and this priority’s discard-unfair threshold. It is expected that the burst tolerance for the unfair packets is relatively minimal since the child policers feeding the parent policer priority level all have some amount of fair burst before entering into an FIR exceed or unfair state. The fair burst amount for a priority level is defined using the mbs-contribution command.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s min-thresh-separation value to the default value.

Parameters

size

The size parameter is required when executing the min-thresh-separation command. It is expressed as an integer. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the min-thresh-separation value has been overridden.

Values

0 to 4194304 or default (applies to the 7450 ESS)

0 to 16777216 or default (applies to the 7750 SR or 7950 XRS)

Default

1536

bytes | kilobytes

This parameter indicates whether the size is expressed in bytes or kilobytes.

Default

kilobytes

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

min-wait-to-advertise

min-wait-to-advertise

Syntax

min-wait-to-advertise seconds

no min-wait-to-advertise

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>convergence min-wait-to-advertise)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp convergence min-wait-to-advertise

Description

This command configures the minimum amount of time that BGP waits, after the first session establishment following a restart of the BGP instance, until it can start advertising IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers, to allow time for re-convergence.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router.

The no form of this command implements the default time limit of 0 seconds, which disables all forms of delayed route advertisement. In other words, it causes IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to be re-advertised as soon as possible after BGP instance restart.

Default

no min-wait-to-advertise

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes can be advertised to peers.

Values

0 to 3600

Platforms

All

min-wait-to-advertise

Syntax

min-wait-to-advertise seconds

no min-wait-to-advertise

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>convergence min-wait-to-advertise)

Full Context

configure router bgp convergence min-wait-to-advertise

Description

This command configures the minimum amount of time that BGP waits, after the first session establishment following a restart of the BGP instance, until it can start advertising IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers, to allow time for re-convergence.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router.

The no form of this command implements the default time limit of 0 seconds, which disables all forms of delayed route advertisement. In other words, it causes IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to be re-advertised as soon as possible after BGP instance restart.

Default

no min-wait-to-advertise

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes can be advertised to peers.

Values

0 to 3600

Platforms

All

minimum

minimum

Syntax

minimum [percent [percent]] [number [number]]

no minimum

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>prefix>thresholds>minimum-free minimum)

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>prefix>thresholds>minimum-free minimum)

Full Context

configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool prefix thresholds minimum-free minimum

configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool prefix thresholds minimum-free minimum

Description

This command configures a percentage-based or number-based threshold which represents the minimal available percentage or number of the prefix with a configured length in the provisioned prefix. The system sends out a warning if the actual percentage or number is lower than the configured threshold.

For example:

prefix 2001:0:0:ffe0::/50 pd wan-host create
   thresholds
       minimum-free prefix-length 64
           minimum number 3

With the above configuration, the system sends a warning when the number of available /64 in prefix 2001:0:0:ffe0::/50 is less than 3.

The no form of this command removes the command parameters from the configuration.

Parameters

percent

Specifies the percentage of used prefixes with the minimum free threshold length in the pool compared to the number of provisioned prefixes.

Values

0 to 100

number

Specifies the number of prefixes.

Values

0 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

minimum-age

minimum-age

Syntax

minimum-age [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]

no minimum-age

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>password minimum-age)

Full Context

configure system security password minimum-age

Description

Configure the minimum required age of a password before it can be changed again.

Default

minimum-age min 10

Parameters

days

Specifies the minimum required days of a password before it can be changed again.

Values

0 to 1

hours

Specifies the minimum required hours of a password before it can be changed again.

Values

0 to 23

minutes

Specifies the minimum required minutes of a password before it can be changed again.

Values

0 to 59

seconds

Specifies the minimum required seconds of a password before it can be changed again.

Values

0 to 59

Note:

This command applies to local users.

Platforms

All

minimum-change

minimum-change

Syntax

minimum-change distance

no minimum-change

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>password minimum-change)

Full Context

configure system security password minimum-change

Description

This command configures the minimum number of characters required to be different in the new password from a previous password.

The no form of this command reverts to default value.

Default

minimum-change 5

Parameters

distance

Specifies how many characters must be different in the new password from the old password.

Values

1 to 20

Note:

This command applies to local users.

Platforms

All

minimum-classes

minimum-classes

Syntax

minimum-classes minimum

no minimum-classes

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>password>complexity-rules minimum-classes)

Full Context

configure system security password complexity-rules minimum-classes

Description

Force the use of at least this many different character classes

The no form of this command resets to default.

Default

no minimum-classes

Parameters

minimum

Specifies the minimum number of classes to be configured.

Values

2 to 4

Platforms

All

minimum-free

minimum-free

Syntax

minimum-free minimum-free [percent] [event-when-depleted]

no minimum-free

Context

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool minimum-free)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool minimum-free)

Full Context

configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool minimum-free

configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool minimum-free

Description

This command specifies the desired minimum number of free addresses in this pool.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

minimum-free 1

Parameters

minimum-free

Specifies the minimum number of free addresses.

Values

0 to 255

percent

Specifies that the value indicates a percentage.

event-when-depleted

This parameter enables a system-generate event when all available addresses in the pool/subnet of local DHCP server are depleted.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

minimum-free

Syntax

minimum-free minimum-free [percent] [event-when-depleted]

no minimum-free

Context

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>subnet minimum-free)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>subnet minimum-free)

Full Context

configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet minimum-free

configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet minimum-free

Description

This command configures the minimum number of free addresses in this subnet. If the actual number of free addresses in this subnet falls below this configured minimum, a notification is generated.

The no form of the reverts to the default.

Default

minimum-free 1

Parameters

minimum-free

Specifies the minimum number of free addresses in this subnet.

Values

0 to 255

percent

Specifies that the value indicates a percentage.

event-when-depleted

Enables a system-generate event when all available addresses in the pool or subnet of local DHCP server are depleted.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

minimum-free

Syntax

[no] minimum-free prefix-length [prefix-length]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>thresholds minimum-free)

[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>thresholds minimum-free)

Full Context

configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool thresholds minimum-free

configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool thresholds minimum-free

Description

This command creates a threshold for a given prefix length on the pool level. Up to 128 thresholds could be created. For example, with minimum-free prefix-length 64, then the usage of /64 prefix in the pool is counted.

There are two types of thresholds that could be defined at the pool level:

  • Depleted — The system sends out a warning when the prefix with the configured length is no long available in the pool.

  • Minimum free — A percentage-based threshold which represents the minimal available percentage of prefix with the configured length in the pool. The system will send out warning if the actual percentage is lower than the configured percentage.

Configuring this command also enables the system stats collection for configure prefix length, which could be displayed with the show router router-id dhcp6 local-dhcp-server dhcp6-server-name pool-threshold-stats command.

The no form of this command removes the prefix-length from the configuration.

Parameters

prefix-length

Specifies the IPv6 prefix length.

Values

1 to 128

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

minimum-isa-generation

minimum-isa-generation

Syntax

minimum-isa-generation min-isa-generation

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>aa-grp minimum-isa-generation)

Full Context

configure isa application-assurance-group minimum-isa-generation

Description

This command configures the scale parameters for the ISA group. When min-isa-generation is configured as 1, the group and per-ISA limits are the MS-ISA scale.

If there is a mix of ISA 1s and 2s, the min-isa-generation must be left as 1.

When min-isa-gen is configured as 2, the per-isa resource limits shown in the show isa application-assurance-group 1 load-balance output will increase to show ISA2 limits.

Default

minimum-isa-generation 1

Parameters

min-isa-generation

Specifies the minimum ISA Generation allowed in this group.

Values

1 – ISA (ISA1)

2 – ISA2

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

minimum-length

minimum-length

Syntax

minimum-length length

no minimum-length

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>password>complexity-rules minimum-length)

Full Context

configure system security password complexity-rules minimum-length

Description

This command configures the minimum number of characters required for locally administered passwords, HMAC-MD5-96, HMAC-SHA-96, and des-keys configured in the system security section.

If multiple minimum-length commands are entered each command overwrites the previous entered command.

The no form of this command reverts to default value.

Default

minimum-length 6

Parameters

value

Specifies the minimum number of characters required for a password.

Values

6 to 50

Platforms

All

minimum-lifetimes

minimum-lifetimes

Syntax

minimum-lifetimes

Context

[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache minimum-lifetimes)

Full Context

configure python python-policy cache minimum-lifetimes

Description

Commands in this context configure minimum-lifetime of Python cache information.

Platforms

All

minute

minute

Syntax

minute {minute-number [..minute-number] | all}

no minute

Context

[Tree] (config>system>cron>sched minute)

Full Context

configure system cron schedule minute

Description

This command specifies the minute to schedule a command. Multiple minutes of the hour can be specified. When multiple minutes are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to occur. If a minute is configured, but no hour or day is configured, the event will not execute. If a minute is configured without configuring the month, weekday, day-of-month, and minute, the event will not execute.

The no form of this command removes the specified minute from the configuration.

Default

no minute

Parameters

minute-number

Specifies the minute to schedule a command.

Values

0 to 59 (maximum 60 minute-numbers)

all

Specifies all minutes.

Platforms

All

minutes

minutes

Syntax

minutes {minutes | disable}

no minutes

Context

[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>client minutes)

[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>server minutes)

Full Context

configure system security ssh key-re-exchange client minutes

configure system security ssh key-re-exchange server minutes

Description

This command configures the maximum time, in minutes, before a key re-exchange is initiated by the server.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

minutes 60

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the time interval, in minutes, after which the SSH client will initiate the key-re-exchange.

Values

1 to 1440

Default

60

disable

Specifies that a session will never timeout. To re-enable minutes, enter the command without the disable option.

Platforms

All

minutes

Syntax

minutes minutes

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>sath>svc-test>dur>cir-pir minutes)

[Tree] (config>test-oam>sath>svc-test>dur>policing minutes)

[Tree] (config>test-oam>sath>svc-test>dur>perf minutes)

[Tree] (config>test-oam>sath>svc-test>dur>cir minutes)

Full Context

configure test-oam service-activation-testhead service-test test-duration cir-pir minutes

configure test-oam service-activation-testhead service-test test-duration policing minutes

configure test-oam service-activation-testhead service-test test-duration performance minutes

configure test-oam service-activation-testhead service-test test-duration cir minutes

Description

This command configures the minutes portion of the duration of performance tests belonging to the service test.

Default

minutes 5

Parameters

minutes

Specifies the number of minutes to run the test.

Values

0 to 59

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mip

mip

Syntax

mip [mac mac-address] [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id] [cfm-vlan-tag qtag1[.qtag2]]

mip default-mac [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id] [cfm-vlan-tag qtag1[.qtag2]]

no mip [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm mip)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mip)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm mip)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mip)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm mip)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mip

configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mip

configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mip

configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mip

configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mip

Description

This command configures Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs). The creation rules of the MIP are dependent on the mhf-creation configuration for the MA.

The MIP can be created with a primary VLAN using the primary-vlan-enable vlan-id parameter matching the VLAN configured under the applicable association. Optional VLANs can be added the to the locally-generated CFM frames for egress processing using the cfm-vlan-tag option.

The no form of this command removes the MIP creation request.

Default

no mip

Parameters

qtag1

Specifies the outer VLAN ID.

Values

1 to 4094

qtag2

Specifies the inner VLAN ID and can only be specified if qtag1 is configured.

Values

1 to 4094

mac

Provides a method for manually configuring the MIP MAC address.

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the MIP.

Values

6-byte mac-address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MIP. The MAC address must be unicast. Using the all-zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

default-mac

Specifies to change the MAC address back to the default MAC without having to delete and reconfigure the MIP.

primary-vlan-enable

Provides a method for linking the MIP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This is only allowed if the mhf-creation method is static. MIPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions without first being deleted. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MIP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.

vlan-id

Specifies the VLAN ID. This parameter must match the VLAN ID under the bridge-identifier for the MA that is appropriate for this service.

Values

0 to 4094

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mip

Syntax

mip primary-vlan-enable [vlan vlan-id]

no mip

Context

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>eth-cfm mip)

Full Context

configure service template vpls-sap-template eth-cfm mip

Description

This command allows Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs). The creation rules of the MIP are dependent on the mhf-creation configuration for the MA. This MIP option is only available for default and static mhf-creation methods.

Parameters

primary-vlan-enable

Provides a method for linking the MIP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This is only allowed if the mhf-creation method is static. MIPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions without first being deleted. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MEP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Ethernet SAPs.

vlan

A required parameter when including primary-vlan-enable. Provides a method for associating the VLAN under the bride-identifier under the MA with the MIP.

vlan-id

Must match the vlan-id under the bridge-identifier for the MA that is appropriate for this service.

Values

0 to 4094

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mip

Syntax

[no] mip

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>mpls-tp>transit-path>forward-path mip)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>mpls-tp>transit-path>reverse-path mip)

Full Context

configure router mpls mpls-tp transit-path forward-path mip

configure router mpls mpls-tp transit-path reverse-path mip

Description

This command creates a context for maintenance entity group intermediate point (MIP) parameters for the forward path and the reverse path of an MPLS-TP LSP at an LSR.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mip

Syntax

[no] mip domain md-index association ma-index

Context

[Tree] (debug>eth-cfm mip)

Full Context

debug eth-cfm mip

Description

This command specifies the MIP from which to debug the CFM PDUs.

The no form of this command removes the MIP parameters.

Parameters

md-index

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value of the launch point.

Values

1 to 4294967295

ma-index

Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value of the launch point.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mip-ltr-priority

mip-ltr-priority

Syntax

mip-ltr-priority priority

Context

[Tree] (cfg>eth-cfm>domain>assoc>bridge mip-ltr-priority)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm domain association bridge-identifier mip-ltr-priority

Description

This command allows the operator to set the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP for this association.

Default

7

Parameters

priority

Specifies the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP.

Values

0 to 7

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mip-ltr-priority

Syntax

mip-ltr-priority priority

Context

[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>default-domain>bridge-identifier mip-ltr-priority)

Full Context

configure eth-cfm default-domain bridge-identifier mip-ltr-priority

Description

This command allows the operator to set the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP for this association.

Default

defer

Parameters

priority

Specifies the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP. The "defer” value is only supported under the default-domain context and causes mip-ltr-priority to inherit values from the global read-only-system values.

Values

0 to 7, defer

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mirror-dest

mirror-dest

Syntax

mirror-dest service-id [create] [type mirror-type] [name name]

no mirror-dest service-id

Context

[Tree] (config>mirror mirror-dest)

Full Context

configure mirror mirror-dest

Description

This command creates a context to set up a service that is intended for packet mirroring. It is configured as a service to allow mirrored packets to be directed locally (within the same router) or remotely, over the core of the network and have a far-end decode mirror encapsulation.

The mirror destination service is comprised of destination parameters that define where the mirrored packets are to be sent. It also specifies whether the defined service-id will receive mirrored packets from far-end router over the network core.

The mirror destination service IDs are persistent between boots of the router and are included in the configuration saves. The local sources of mirrored packets for the service ID are defined within the debug mirror mirror-source command that references the same service-id. Up to 255 mirror destination service IDs can be created within a single system.

The mirror-dest command creates or edits a service ID for mirroring purposes. If the service-id does not exist within the context of all defined services, the mirror destination service is created and the context of the CLI is changed to that service ID. If the service-id exists within the context of defined mirror destination services, the CLI context is changed for editing parameters on that service ID. If the service-id exists within the context of another service type, an error message is returned and CLI context is not changed from the current context.

LI source configuration is saved using the li>save command.

The no form of this command removes a mirror destination from the system. The mirror source or li-source associations with the mirror destination service-id do not need to be removed or shutdown first. The mirror destination service-id must be shutdown before the service ID can be removed. When the service ID is removed, all mirror-source or li-source commands that have the service ID defined will also be removed from the system.

Parameters

service-id

The service identification identifies the service in the service domain. This ID is unique to this service and cannot be used by any other service, regardless of service type. The same service ID must be configured on every router that this particular service is defined on.

If particular a service ID already exists for a service, then the same value cannot be used to create a mirror destination service ID with the same value. For example:

If an Epipe service ID 11 exists, then a mirror destination service ID 11 cannot be created. If a VPLS service ID 12 exists, then a mirror destination service ID 12 cannot be created.

If an IES service ID 13 exists, then a mirror destination service ID 13 cannot be created.

Values

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

64 characters maximum

create

Keyword used to create a mirror destination service.

mirror-type

The type describes the encapsulation supported by the mirror service.

Values

The following values apply to the 7750 SR:

ether, ip-only

Values

The following values apply to the 7950 XRS:

ether, ip-only

Values

The following values apply to the 7450 ESS:

ether

name

Configures an optional service name identifier, up to 64 characters, to a given service. This service name can then be used in configuration references, display, and show commands throughout the system. A defined service name can help the service provider or administrator to identify and manage services within the SR OS platforms.

To create a service, you must assign a service ID; however, after it is created, either the service ID or the service name can be used to identify and reference a service.

If a name is not specified at creation time, then SR OS assigns a string version of the service-id as the name.

Service names may not begin with an integer (0 to 9).

Platforms

All

mirror-dest-reservation

mirror-dest-reservation

Syntax

mirror-dest-reservation service-id to service-id

no mirror-dest-reservation

Context

[Tree] (config>li mirror-dest-reservation)

Full Context

configure li mirror-dest-reservation

Description

This command configures a range of service IDs reserved for RADIUS-triggered mirror destination. The range can be expanded or reduced in real time. The range cannot conflict with other service IDs.

The no form of this command removes the service IDs reserved for LI mirror destination services.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the starting or ending service ID in the range for the mirror destination.

Values

1 to 2147483647

Platforms

All

mirror-dest-template

mirror-dest-template

Syntax

mirror-dest-template name [type mirror-type] [create]

no mirror-dest-template name

Context

[Tree] (config>li mirror-dest-template)

Full Context

configure li mirror-dest-template

Description

This command creates a template used by RADIUS-triggered mirror destinations. RADIUS provides the IP destination (and other optional attributes) for the mirror destination and the mirror template provides the remaining mirror destination attributes for mirroring packets remotely over the core of an IP network.

The system supports up to eight mirror destination templates and allows a mirror destination to be swapped in real time. Only new LI sources will use the new attribute of the mirror destination template. Existing LI sources remain unchanged and continue to use the attribute of the previous mirror destination template.

The no form of this command removes a mirror destination template from the system.

Parameters

name

Specifies the template name, up to 32 characters.

mirror-type

Specifies the type of encapsulation supported by the mirror service.

Values

ether, frame-relay, ppp, ip-only, atm-sdu, satop-e1, satop-t1, cesopsn, cesopsn-cas

create

Keyword required to create a template.

Platforms

All

mirror-dest-template

Syntax

mirror-dest-template template-name

no mirror-dest-template

Context

[Tree] (config>li>radius mirror-dest-template)

Full Context

configure li radius mirror-dest-template

Description

This command enables or disables the use of a RADIUS triggered mirror destination template to be used by new LI sources.

Parameters

template-name

Specifies the template name, up to 32 characters. The template must already exist.

Platforms

All

mirror-source

mirror-source

Syntax

mirror-source [all-inclusive] mirror-service-id

no mirror-source

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policy>aqp>entry>action mirror-source)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group policy app-qos-policy entry action mirror-source

Description

This command configures an application-based policy mirroring service that uses this AA ISA group’s AQP entry as a mirror source. When configured, AQP entry becomes a mirror source for IP packets seen by the AA (the mirrored packet is an IP packet analyzed by AA and does not include encapsulations present on the incoming interfaces).

Default

no mirror-source

Parameters

all-inclusive

Specifies that all packets during identification phase that could match a given AQP rule are mirrored in addition to packets after an application identification completes that match the AQP rule. This ensures all packets of a given flow are mirrored at a cost of sending unidentified packets that once the application is identified will no longer match this AQP entry.

mirror-service-id

Specifies the mirror source service ID to use for flows that match this policy.

Values

1 to 2147483647

svc-name: 64 characters maximum

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mirror-source

Syntax

[no] mirror-source service-id

Context

[Tree] (config>mirror mirror-source)

Full Context

configure mirror mirror-source

Description

This command configures mirror source parameters for a mirrored service.

The mirror-source command is used to enable mirroring of packets specified by the association of the mirror-source to sources of packets defined within the context of the mirror-dest-service-id. The mirror destination service must already exist within the system.

A mirrored packet cannot be mirrored to multiple destinations. If a packet matches multiple mirror source entries (for example, a SAP on one mirror-source and a port on another mirror-source), then the packet is mirrored to a single mirror-dest-service-id based on the following precedence:

  1. Filter entry

  2. Subscriber (applies to the 7750 SR and 7450 ESS)

  3. SAP

  4. Physical port

The precedence is structured so the most specific match criteria has precedence over a less specific match. For example, if a mirror-source defines a port and a SAP on that port, then a packet arriving on the SAP will be mirrored using the SAP mirror (and not mirrored using the Port mirror) because the SAP is more specific than the port.

The no form of this command deletes all related source commands within the context of the mirror-source service-id. The command does not remove the service ID from the system.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the service identification identifies the service in the service domain. This ID is unique to this service and cannot be used by any other service, regardless of service type. The same service ID must be configured on every router that this particular service is defined on.

Values

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

64 characters maximum

Platforms

All

mirror-source

Syntax

[no] mirror-source service-id

Context

[Tree] (debug mirror-source)

Full Context

debug mirror-source

Description

This command configures mirror source parameters for a mirrored service.

The mirror-source command is used to enable mirroring of packets specified by the association of the mirror-source to sources of packets defined within the context of the mirror-dest-service-id. The mirror destination service must already exist within the system.

A mirrored packet cannot be mirrored to multiple destinations. If a packet matches multiple mirror source entries (for example, a SAP on one mirror-source and a port on another mirror-source), then the packet is mirrored to a single mirror-dest-service-id based on the following precedence:

  1. Filter entry

  2. Subscriber (applies to the 7750 SR and 7450 ESS)

  3. SAP

  4. Physical port

The precedence is structured so the most specific match criteria has precedence over a less specific match. For example, if a mirror-source defines a port and a SAP on that port, then a packet arriving on the SAP will be mirrored using the SAP mirror (and not mirrored using the Port mirror) because the SAP is more specific than the port.

The mirror-source configuration is not saved when a configuration is saved. A mirror-source manually configured within an ASCII configuration file will not be preserved if that file is overwritten by a save command. Define the mirror-source within a file associated with a config exec command to make a mirror-source persistent between system reboots.

By default, all mirror destination service IDs have a mirror-source associated with them. The mirror-source is not technically created with this command. Instead the service ID provides a contextual node for storing the current mirroring sources for the associated mirror destination service ID. The mirror-source is created for the mirror service when the operator enters the debug>mirror-source svcId for the first time. If the operator enters li>li-source svcId for the first time, an LI source is created for the mirror service. The mirror-source is also automatically removed when the mirror destination service ID is deleted from the system.

The no form of this command deletes all related source commands within the context of the mirror-source service-id. The command does not remove the service ID from the system.

Parameters

service-id

Specifies the mirror destination service ID for which match criteria will be defined. The service-id must already exist within the system.

Values

service-id: 1 to 2147483647

svc-name: 64 characters maximum

Platforms

All

misc

misc

Syntax

[no] misc

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>igmp misc)

Full Context

debug router igmp misc

Description

This command enables debugging for IGMP miscellaneous information.

The no form of the command disables the debugging.

Platforms

All

Output

The following output is an example of debugged IGMP miscellaneous information.

Output Example
A:ALA-CA# debug router 100 igmp misc 
*A:ALA-CA# show debug 
debug
    router "100"
        igmp
            misc
        exit
    exit
exit
*A:ALA-CA# 

misc

Syntax

misc [detail]

no misc

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>rsvp>event misc)

[Tree] (debug>router>mpls>event misc)

Full Context

debug router rsvp event misc

debug router mpls event misc

Description

This command debugs miscellaneous events.

The no form of the command disables the debugging.

Parameters

detail

Displays detailed information about miscellaneous events.

Platforms

All

misc

Syntax

[no] misc

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>mtrace2 misc)

[Tree] (debug>router>mtrace misc)

Full Context

debug router mtrace2 misc

debug router mtrace misc

Description

This command enables debugging for mtrace and mtrace2 miscellaneous.

Platforms

All

misc

Syntax

[no] misc

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>isis misc)

Full Context

debug router isis misc

Description

This command enables debugging for IS-IS misc.

The no form of the command disables debugging.

Platforms

All

misc

Syntax

[no] misc

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>ospf misc)

[Tree] (debug>router>ospf3 misc)

Full Context

debug router ospf misc

debug router ospf3 misc

Description

This command enables debugging for miscellaneous OSPF events.

Platforms

All

mismatch-reaction

mismatch-reaction

Syntax

mismatch-reaction {squelch-rx}

no mismatch-reaction

Context

[Tree] (config>port>otu>pm-tti mismatch-reaction)

Full Context

configure port otu pm-tti mismatch-reaction

Description

This command allows the user to configure the consequent action to a pm-tti mismatch.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

n/a, the received traffic is passed through.

Parameters

squelch-rx

Specifies that the received traffic is blocked.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mismatch-reaction

Syntax

mismatch-reaction {none | squelch-rx}

Context

[Tree] (config>port>otu>psi-payload mismatch-reaction)

Full Context

configure port otu psi-payload mismatch-reaction

Description

This command allows the user to configure the consequent action to a psi-payload type mismatch.

Parameters

none

Specifies the received traffic is passed through.

squelch-rx

Specifies the received traffic is blocked.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mismatch-reaction

Syntax

mismatch-reaction {none | squelch-rx}

Context

[Tree] (config>port>otu>sm-tti mismatch-reaction)

Full Context

configure port otu sm-tti mismatch-reaction

Description

This command allows the user to configure the consequent action to a sm-tti mismatch.

Default

n/a

Parameters

none

Specifies that the received traffic is passed through.

squelch-rx

Specifies that the received traffic is blocked.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

missing-mandatory-ie

missing-mandatory-ie

Syntax

missing-mandatory-ie direction direction [create]

no missing-mandatory-ie direction direction

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter missing-mandatory-ie)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter missing-mandatory-ie

Description

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing drops due to the GTP filter missing mandatory IE check. A missing-mandatory-ie drop TCA can be created for traffic generated from the subscriber side of AA (from-sub) or for traffic generated from the network toward the AA subscriber (to-sub). The create keyword is mandatory when creating a missing-mandatory-ie TCA.

Parameters

direction

Specifies the traffic direction.

Values

from-sub, to-sub

create

Keyword used to create the TCA.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mixed-lsp-mode

mixed-lsp-mode

Syntax

[no] mixed-lsp-mode

Context

[Tree] (config>service>sdp mixed-lsp-mode)

Full Context

configure service sdp mixed-lsp-mode

Description

This command enables the use by an SDP of the mixed-LSP mode of operation. This command indicates to the service manager that it must allow a primary LSP type and a backup LSP type in the same SDP configuration. For example, the lsp and ldp commands are allowed concurrently in the SDP configuration. The user can configure one or two types of LSPs under the same SDP. Without this command, these commands are mutually exclusive.

The user can configure an RSVP LSP as a primary LSP type with an LDP LSP as a backup type. The user can also configure an RFC 8277 BGP LSP as a backup LSP type.

If the user configures an LDP LSP as a primary LSP type, then the backup LSP type must be an RFC 8277 BGP labeled route.

At any given time, the service manager programs only one type of LSP in the linecard that will activate it to forward service packets according to the following priority order:

  • RSVP LSP type. Up to 16 RSVP LSPs can be entered by the user and programmed by the service manager in ingress linecard to load balance service packets. This is the highest priority LSP type.

  • LDP LSP type. One LDP FEC programmed by the service manager but the ingress card can use up to 16 LDP ECMP paths for the FEC to load balance service packets when ECMP is enabled on the node.

  • BGP LSP type. One RFC 8277-labeled BGP prefix programmed by the service manager. The ingress card can use more than one next-hop for the prefix.

In the case of the RSVP/LDP SDP, the service manager will program the NHLFE(s) for the active LSP type preferring the RSVP LSP type over the LDP LSP type. If no RSVP LSP is configured or all configured RSVP LSPs go down, the service manager will re-program the card with the LDP LSP if available. If not, the SDP goes operationally down.

When a higher priority type LSP becomes available, the service manager reverts back to this LSP at the expiry of the sdp-revert-time timer or the failure of the currently active LSP, whichever comes first. The service manager then re-programs the card accordingly. If the infinite value is configured, then the SDP reverts to the highest priority type LSP only if the currently active LSP failed.

Note:

LDP uses a tunnel down damp timer which is set to three seconds by default. When the LDP LSP fails, the SDP will revert to the RSVP LSP type after the expiry of this timer. For an immediate switchover, this timer must be set to zero. Use the config>router>ldp>tunnel-down-damp-time command.

If the user changes the value of the sdp-revert-time timer, it will take effect only at the next use of the timer. Any timer which is outstanding at the time of the change will be restarted with the new value.

If class based forwarding is enabled for this SDP, the forwarding of the packets over the RSVP LSPs will be based on the FC of the packet as in current implementation. When the SDP activates the LDP LSP type, then packets are forwarded over the LDP ECMP paths using the regular hash routine.

In the case of the LDP/BGP SDP, the service manager will prefer the LDP LSP type over the BGP LSP type. The service manager will re-program the card with the BGP LSP if available otherwise it brings down the SDP operationally.

Also note the following difference in behavior of the LDP/BGP SDP compared to that of an RSVP/LDP SDP. For a given /32 prefix, only a single route will exist in the routing table: the IGP route or the BGP route. Thus, either the LDP FEC or the BGP label route is active at any given time. The impact of this is that the tunnel table needs to be re-programmed each time a route is deactivated and the other is activated. Furthermore, the SDP revert-time cannot be used since there is no situation where both LSP types are active for the same /32 prefix.

The no form of this command disables the mixed-LSP mode of operation. The user first has to remove one of the LSP types from the SDP configuration or the command will fail.

Default

no mixed-lsp-mode

Platforms

All

mka-hello-interval

mka-hello-interval

Syntax

mka-hello-interval interval

no mka-hello-interval

Context

[Tree] (config>macsec>conn-assoc>static-cak mka-hello-interval)

Full Context

configure macsec connectivity-association static-cak mka-hello-interval

Description

This command specifies the MKA hello interval.

The no form of this command disables the MKA hello interval.

Default

mka-hello-interval 2

Parameters

interval

Specifies the MKA hello interval, in seconds.

Values

1 to 6 s in 1-s increments, 500ms

Platforms

All

mka-key-server-priority

mka-key-server-priority

Syntax

mka-key-server-priority priority

no mka-key-server-priority

Context

[Tree] (config>macsec>conn-assoc>static-cak mka-key-server-priority)

Full Context

configure macsec connectivity-association static-cak mka-key-server-priority

Description

This command specifies the key server priority used by the MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) protocol to select the key server when MACsec is enabled using static connectivity association key (CAK) security mode.

The no form of this command disables the mka-key-server-priority.

Default

mka-key-server-priority 16

Parameters

priority

Specifies the priority of the server.

Values

0 to 255

Platforms

All

mka-over-ip

mka-over-ip

Syntax

mka-over-ip

Context

[Tree] (config>anysec mka-over-ip)

Full Context

configure anysec mka-over-ip

Description

Commands in this context configure the MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) over IP.

Platforms

7750 SR-1-24D, 7750 SR-1-46S, 7750 SR-1-48D, 7750 SR-1-92S, 7750 SR-1x-48D, 7750 SR-1x-92S, 7750 SR-1se

mka-udp-port

mka-udp-port

Syntax

mka-udp-port port

no mka-udp-port

Context

[Tree] (config>anysec>mka-ip mka-udp-port)

Full Context

configure anysec mka-over-ip mka-udp-port

Description

This command configures the UDP port that identifies the MKA packet on the system.

Nokia recommends configuring this UDP port network wide. In addition, the user should ensure the UDP port is not used by any other protocols in the network.

The no form of this command removes the configured UDP port.

Default

no mka-udp-port

Parameters

port

Specifies the UPD port that identifies the MKA packet.

Values

1024 to 49151

Platforms

7750 SR-1-24D, 7750 SR-1-46S, 7750 SR-1-48D, 7750 SR-1-92S, 7750 SR-1x-48D, 7750 SR-1x-92S, 7750 SR-1se

mld

mld

Syntax

[no] mld

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync mld)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync mld

Description

This command specifies whether MLD protocol information should be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer.

Default

no mld

Platforms

All

mld

Syntax

[no] mld

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn mld)

Full Context

configure service vprn mld

Description

Commands in this context configure Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) parameters.

The no form of this command disables MLD.

Default

no mld

Platforms

All

mld

Syntax

[no] mld

Context

[Tree] (config>router mld)

Full Context

configure router mld

Description

Commands in this context configure Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) parameters.

The no form of the command disables MLD.

Default

no mld

Platforms

All

mld-parameters

mld-parameters

Syntax

mld-parameters

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host mld-parameters)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host mld-parameters)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host mld-parameters

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host mld-parameters

Description

Commands in this context configure an MLD import policy.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mld-policy

mld-policy

Syntax

mld-policy mld-policy-name [create]

no mld-policy mld-policy-name

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt mld-policy)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy

Description

Commands in this context create an MLD policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

mld-policy-name

Specifies the MLD policy name up to 32 characters.

create

Keyword required to create the configuration context.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mld-policy

Syntax

mld-policy policy name

no mld-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof mld-policy)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile mld-policy

Description

This command enables Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) processing per subscriber host.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no mld-policy

Parameters

policy-name

Specifies the name of the MLD policy, up to 32 characters. The MLD policy must be defined in the config>subscr-mgmt context.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mld-snooping

mld-snooping

Syntax

mld-snooping

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp mld-snooping)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap mld-snooping)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>allow-ip-int-bind mld-snooping)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp mld-snooping)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mld-snooping)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping

configure service vpls sap mld-snooping

configure service vpls allow-ip-int-bind mld-snooping

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping

configure service vpls mld-snooping

Description

Commands in this context configure MLD snooping parameters.

Platforms

All

mld-snooping

Syntax

[no] mld-snooping

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync mld-snooping)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync mld-snooping

Description

This command is not supported. It is not blocked for backwards-compatibility reasons but has no effect on the system if configured.

Default

no mld-snooping

Platforms

All

mld-snooping

Syntax

[no] mld-snooping

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id mld-snooping)

Full Context

debug service id mld-snooping

Description

This command enables and configures MLD-snooping debugging.

The no form of this command disables MLD-snooping debugging.

Platforms

All

mld-snooping

Syntax

mld-snooping

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan mld-snooping)

Full Context

configure service vpls vxlan mld-snooping

Description

This command enables the MLD snooping context.

Platforms

All

mld-snooping

Syntax

mld-snooping

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls mld-snooping)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sdp mld-snooping)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sap mld-snooping)

Full Context

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls mld-snooping

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sdp mld-snooping

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sap mld-snooping

Description

This command configures MLD snooping attributes for I-VPLS.

Platforms

All

mldp

mldp

Syntax

[no] mldp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>provider-tunnel>inclusive mldp)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>provider-tunnel>selective mldp)

Full Context

configure service vpls provider-tunnel inclusive mldp

configure service vpls provider-tunnel selective mldp

Description

This command configures the use of MLDP as a protocol for an LDP P2MP LSP that is used for forwarding Broadcast, Unicast unknown, and Multicast (BUM) packets of a VPLS or B-VPLS instance. This command is also used for forwarding IP multicast packets of an EVPN VPLS or R-VPLS service (when used under the selective context).

The no form of this command disables the use of MLDP as a protocol to set up the P2MP LSP.

Platforms

All

mldp

Syntax

[no] mldp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective mldp)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>inclusive mldp)

Full Context

configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective mldp

configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel inclusive mldp

Description

This command enables use of P2MP mLDP LSP as inclusive or selective PMSI tunnels.

For multi-stream S-PMSI, either LDP or RSVP-TE must first be configured before multi-stream policy can be configured.

Default

no mldp

Platforms

All

mlppp

mlppp

Syntax

mlppp

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>ppp-policy mlppp)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt ppp-policy mlppp

Description

Commands in this context configure multi-link PPP parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

mme

mme

Syntax

mme

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>gtp>peer-profile mme)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt gtp peer-profile mme

Description

This command configures parameters specific to a Mobility Management Entity (MME) peer.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mmrp

mmrp

Syntax

mmrp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mrp mmrp)

Full Context

configure service vpls mrp mmrp

Description

This command configures MMRP parameters.

Platforms

All

mmrp-impm-override

mmrp-impm-override

Syntax

[no] mmrp-impm-override

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>chassis-level mmrp-impm-override)

Full Context

configure mcast-management chassis-level mmrp-impm-override

Description

This command enables ingress Multicast Path Management (IMPM) from monitoring PIM and IGMP.

The no form of this command disables the IMPM monitoring.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-1x-48D, 7750 SR-1x-92S, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mmrp-mac

mmrp-mac

Syntax

[no] mmrp-mac ieee-address

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>mrp mmrp-mac)

Full Context

debug service id mrp mmrp-mac

Description

This command filters debug events and only shows events related to the MAC address specified.

The no form of this command removes the debug filter.

Parameters

ieee-address

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx (cannot be all zeros)

Platforms

All

mobility

mobility

Syntax

mobility

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw mobility)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw mobility)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility

Description

Commands in this context configure mobility parameters.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mobility-acct-updates

mobility-acct-updates

Syntax

[no] mobility-acct-updates

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>vlan-tag-ranges>range>xconnect mobility-acct-updates)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>vlan-tag-ranges>range>xconnect mobility-acct-updates)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range xconnect mobility-acct-updates

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range xconnect mobility-acct-updates

Description

This command enables the administrative state to send mobility-triggered accounting interim updates.

The no form of this command disables sending the mobility-triggered accounting updates.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mobility-triggered-acct

mobility-triggered-acct

Syntax

mobility-triggered-acct

Context

[Tree] (config>router>wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct)

Full Context

configure router wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct

configure service vprn wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct

Description

Commands in this context configure the mobility-triggered-accounting in wlan-gw context under router or VPRN service.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

mode

Syntax

mode {dropped-only | ingr-and-dropped | egr-ingr-and-dropped}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>ip>dhcp6 mode)

[Tree] (debug>router>ip>dhcp mode)

[Tree] (debug>router>local-dhcp-server mode)

Full Context

debug router ip dhcp6 mode

debug router ip dhcp mode

debug router local-dhcp-server mode

Description

This command debugs the DHCP tracing detail level.

Parameters

dropped-only

Displays only dropped packets.

ingr-and-dropped

Displays only ingress packet and dropped packets.

egr-ingr-and-dropped

Displays ingress, egress and dropped packets.

Platforms

All

  • debug router ip dhcp6 mode
  • debug router ip dhcp mode

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • debug router local-dhcp-server mode

mode

Syntax

mode {dropped-only | ingr-and-dropped | egr-ingr-and-dropped}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp>packet mode)

Full Context

debug service id ppp packet mode

Description

This command specifies PPP packet debug mode.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

Parameters

dropped-only

Displays only dropped packets.

ingr-and-dropped

Displays only ingress packet and dropped packets.

egr-ingr-and-dropped

Displays ingress, egress and dropped packets.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

Syntax

mode {strict | loose | strict-no-ecmp}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>urpf-check mode)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface urpf-check mode

configure service vprn interface ipv6 urpf-check mode

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 urpf-check mode

configure service ies interface urpf-check mode

configure service ies interface ipv6 urpf-check mode

configure service vprn network-interface urpf-check mode

configure service vprn interface urpf-check mode

Description

This command specifies the mode of unicast RPF check.

The no form of this command reverts to the default (strict) mode.

Default

mode strict

Parameters

strict

When specified, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has a source address that matches a prefix in the routing table, and whether the interface expects to receive a packet with this source address prefix.

loose

In loose mode, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has source address with a corresponding prefix in the routing table. However, the loose mode does not check whether the interface expects to receive a packet with a specific source address prefix. This object is valid only when urpf-check is enabled.

strict-no-ecmp

When a packet is received on an interface in this mode and the SA matches an ECMP route the packet is dropped by uRPF.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 urpf-check mode
  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface urpf-check mode

All

  • configure service vprn interface urpf-check mode
  • configure service ies interface urpf-check mode
  • configure service vprn network-interface urpf-check mode
  • configure service vprn interface ipv6 urpf-check mode
  • configure service ies interface ipv6 urpf-check mode

mode

Syntax

mode {strict | loose | strict-no-ecmp}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>git>ipv4>urpf-check mode)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt group-interface-template ipv4 urpf-check mode

Description

This command configures the mode of Unicast RPF (uRPF) check.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mode strict

Parameters

strict

Specifies that the uRPF checks whether the incoming packet has a source IP address that matches a prefix in the routing table, and whether the interface expects to receive a packet with this source IP address prefix.

loose

Specifies that the uRPF checks whether the incoming packet has a source IP address with a corresponding prefix in the routing table. However, the loose mode does not check whether the interface expects to receive a packet with a specific source IP address prefix. This object is valid only when the urpf-check command is enabled.

strict-no-ecmp

Specifies that when a packet is received on an interface in this mode and the SA matches an ECMP route, the packet is dropped by uRPF.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

Syntax

mode {none | basic | advanced}

Context

[Tree] (config>system>pwr-mgmt mode)

Full Context

configure system power-management mode

Description

This command sets the power mode.

Default

mode basic

Parameters

none

Specifies that there is no management of power to modules. In this mode, no gradual shutdown of active XCMs and XMAs is enforced. No spare capacity is reserved and any APEQ failure may result in brownouts or card failures.

basic

Specifies that the node will bring up as many provisioned modules (in order of priority) as possible using the N+1 algorithm. In basic mode the system shuts down IO cards when power capacity drops below the Power Safety Level.

advanced

Specifies that the operator can maintain a spare APEQ as long as possible to make it immune to the possibility of power brown-outs. In advanced mode, the system starts shutting down IO cards when the power capacity drops below the Power Safety Level + Max rated APEQ.

Platforms

7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-2se, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s, 7950 XRS

mode

Syntax

mode {automatic | manual}

Context

[Tree] (config>port>dwdm>coherent mode)

Full Context

configure port dwdm coherent mode

Description

This command configures the mode used to compensate for chromatic dispersion.

Parameters

automatic

Sets to automatic mode.

manual

Sets to manual mode.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mode

Syntax

mode {none | uni-n}

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>elmi mode)

Full Context

configure port ethernet elmi mode

Description

This command configures the Ethernet LMI mode.

Parameters

none

Specifies that the E LMI mode is set to none.

uni-n

Specifies that the E LMI mode is set to UNI-N.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network | hybrid}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>lag mode)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group mode)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3 mode)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mode)

[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path mode)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mode)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group mode)

Full Context

configure lag mode

configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mode

configure port tdm e3 mode

configure port ethernet mode

configure port sonet-sdh path mode

configure port tdm ds3 mode

configure port tdm e1 channel-group mode

Description

This command configures an Ethernet port, TDM channel, or SONET/SDH path (sub-port) for access, network, or hybrid mode operation.

An access port or channel is used for customer facing traffic on which services are configured. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel. When a port is configured for access mode, the appropriate encap-type must be specified to distinguish the services on the port or SONET path. Once an Ethernet port, a TDM channel or a SONET path has been configured for access mode, multiple services can be configured on the Ethernet port, a TDM channel or SONET path.

A network port or channel participates in the service provider transport or infrastructure network when a network mode is selected. When the network option is configured, the encap-type cannot be configured for the port/channel.

When network mode is selected on a SONET/SDH path, the appropriate control protocols are activated when the need arises. For example, configuring an IP interface on the SONET path activates IPCP while the removal of the IP interface causes the IPCP to be removed. The same applies for MPLS, MPLSCP, and OSICP. When configuring a SONET/SDH port, the mode command must be entered in the channel context or an error message is generated.

A hybrid Ethernet port allows the combination of network and access modes of operation on a per-VLAN basis and must be configured as either dot1q or QinQ encapsulation.

When the hybrid port is configured to the dot1q encapsulation, the user configures a SAP inside a service simply by providing the SAP ID which must include the port-id value of the hybrid mode port and an unused VLAN tag value. The format is <port-id>:qtag1. A SAP of format <port-id>:* also supported.

The user configures a network IP interface under config>router>if>port by providing the port name which consists of the port-id of the hybrid mode port and an unused VLAN tag value. The format is <port-id>:qtag1. The user must explicitly enter a valid value for qtag1. The <port-id>:* value is not supported on a network IP interface. The 4096 VLAN tag space on the port is shared among VLAN SAPs and VLAN network IP interfaces.

When the hybrid port is configured to QinQ encapsulation, the user configures a SAP inside a service simply by providing the SAP ID which must include the port-id value of the hybrid mode port and the outer and inner VLAN tag values. The format is <port-id>:qtag1.qtag2. A SAP of format <port-id>: qtag1.* is also supported. The outer VLAN tag value must not have been used to create an IP network interface on this port. In addition, the qtag1.qtag2 value combination must not have been used by another SAP on this port.

The user configures a network IP interface under config>router>if>port by providing the port name which consists of the port-id of the hybrid mode port and a VLAN tag value. The format is <port-id>:qtag1.*. An outer VLAN tag qtag2 of * creates an IP network interface. In addition, the qtag1.qtag2 value combination must not have been used on another SAP or IP network interface on this port.

The no form of this command restores the default.

Default

mode network — For Ethernet ports

mode access — For TDM channel or SONET paths

Parameters

access

Configures the Ethernet port, TDM channel or SONET path as service access.

network

Configures the Ethernet port, TDM channel or SONET path for transport network use.

hybrid

Configures the Ethernet port for hybrid use.

Platforms

All

  • configure port ethernet mode
  • configure lag mode

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

  • configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mode
  • configure port tdm e1 channel-group mode
  • configure port tdm e3 mode
  • configure port tdm ds3 mode

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure port sonet-sdh path mode

mode

Syntax

mode {active | passive}

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>efm-oam mode)

Full Context

configure port ethernet efm-oam mode

Description

This command configures the mode of OAM operation for this Ethernet port. These two modes differ in that active mode causes the port to continually send out efm-oam info PDUs while passive mode waits for the peer to initiate the negotiation process. A passive mode port cannot initiate monitoring activities (such as loopback) with the peer.

Default

mode active

Parameters

active

Provides capability to initiate negotiation and monitoring activities.

passive

Relies on peer to initiate negotiation and monitoring activities.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {manual | auto | off}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn>eth-seg>service-carving mode)

Full Context

configure service system bgp-evpn ethernet-segment service-carving mode

Description

This command configures the service-carving mode. This determines how the DF is elected for a specified Ethernet-Segment and service.

Default

mode auto

Parameters

auto

This mode is the service-carving algorithm defined in RFC 7432. The DF for the service is calculated based on the modulo function of the service (identified by either the evi or the isid) and the number of PEs.

manual

In this mode the DF is elected based on the manual configuration added in the service-carving>manual context.

off

In this mode all the services elect the same DF PE (assuming the same PEs are active for all the configured services). The PE with the lowest IP is elected as DF for the Ethernet-Segment.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode mode

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pim-snooping mode)

Full Context

configure service vpls pim-snooping mode

Description

This command sets the PIM snooping mode to proxy or plain snooping.

Parameters

mode

Specifies PIM snooping mode

Values

snoop, proxy

Default

proxy

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {rstp | comp-dot1w | dot1w | mstp | pmstp}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mode)

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template>stp mode)

Full Context

configure service vpls stp mode

configure service template vpls-template stp mode

Description

This command specifies the version of Spanning Tree Protocol the bridge is currently running.

See section Spanning Tree Operating Modes for more information about these modes.

The no form of this command returns the STP variant to the default.

Default

mode rstp

Parameters

rstp

Corresponds to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol specified in IEEE 802.1D/D4-2003

dot1w

Corresponds to the mode where the Rapid Spanning Tree is backward compatible with IEEE 802.1w

compdot1w

Corresponds to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol in conformance with IEEE 802.1w

mstp

Sets MSTP as the STP mode of operation. Corresponds to the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol specified in 802.1Q REV/D5.0-09/200

pmstp

The PMSTP mode is only supported in VPLS services where the M-VPLS flag is configured

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {all | dropped-only}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>arp-host mode)

Full Context

debug service id arp-host mode

Description

This command configures the ARP host tracing mode.

Parameters

all

Debugs all dropped packets.

dropped-only

Only displays dropped packets.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

Syntax

mode {dropped-only | ingr-and-dropped | egr-ingr-and-dropped}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>igmp-snooping mode)

Full Context

debug service id igmp-snooping mode

Description

This command enables and configures the IGMP tracing mode.

The no form of this command disables the configures the IGMP tracing mode.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {dropped-only | ingr-and-dropped | egr-ingr-and-dropped}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>mld mode)

Full Context

debug service id mld-snooping mode

Description

This command enables and configures the MLD tracing mode.

The no form of this command disables the configures the MLD tracing mode.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {mesh-group | standard}

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>msdp>group mode)

Full Context

configure service vprn msdp group mode

Description

This command configures groups of peers in a full mesh topology to limit excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) peers can be configured grouped in a full-mesh topology that prevents excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

In a meshed configuration, all members of the group must have a peer connection with every other mesh group member. If this rule is not adhered to, then unpredictable results may occur.

Default

mode standard

Parameters

mesh-group

Specifies that source-active message received from a mesh group member are always accepted but are not flooded to other members of the same mesh group. These source-active messages are only flooded to non-mesh group peers or members of other mesh groups.

standard

Specifies a non-meshed mode.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {auto | napt | one-to-one}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>outside>pool mode)

Full Context

configure service vprn nat outside pool mode

Description

This command configures the mode of operation of this NAT address pool.

The mode value is only relevant while the value of pool type is equal to largeScale; while the value of pool type is equal to l2Aware, the mode of operation is always NAPT.

Default

mode auto

Parameters

napt

Specifies NAPT (Network Address Port Translation)

auto

The system selects the actual mode based upon other configuration parameters; the actual mode can be NAPT or 1:1 NAT (also known as 'Basic NAT').

one-to-one

Indicates 1:1 NAT (also known as 'Basic NAT')

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

Syntax

mode {dropped-only | ingr-and-dropped | egr-ingr-and-dropped}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>dhcp mode)

Full Context

debug service id dhcp mode

Description

This command configures the DHCP tracing mode.

The no form of the command disables debugging.

Parameters

dropped-only

Only displays dropped packets.

ingr-and-dropped

Only displays ingress packet and dropped packets.

egr-ingr-and-dropped

Displays ingress, egress and dropped packets.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode mode

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp mode)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group gtp mode

Description

This command is used to either untunnel GTP-U traffic received on UDP port number 2152, or apply GTP filtering/firewall rules as specified under this GTP CLI context.

Default

mode filtering

Parameters

mode

Specifies the operational mode of the command.

Values

filtering — AA applies GTP filtering rules to GTP-U traffic, without further analysis of IP traffic tunneled within GTP.

untunneling — AA untunnels GTP traffic and provides analytical reporting of the applications running within the GTP tunnels. The rest of the commands under GTP CLI context (such as GTP-filter and event-log) are not applicable in this mode.

For AA to untunnel GTP traffic, the operator must configure "gtp” under the partition by using the config>app-assure>group>gtp command.

The following caveats apply:

  • Only GTP-U traffic with TID <> 0 is untunneled.

  • Any UDP but non-GTP traffic that uses port 2152 will be identified as UDP traffic.

  • Only GTP-U packets with message type: G-PDU (0xFF) is untunneled. Other GTP-U packets with different message types are reported as GTP Protocol.

  • Only GTP-u packets with non-fragmented outer IP and no IPv4 options or IPv6 extension headers are untunneled. Otherwise, no inner GTP tunnel classification is performed and the traffic is identified and reported as GTP protocol.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

Syntax

mode {auto | napt | one-to-one}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>router>nat>outside>pool mode)

Full Context

configure router nat outside pool mode

Description

This command specifies the mode of operation of this NAT address pool.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default

auto

Parameters

{auto | napt | one-to-one}

Specifies the mode of operation of this NAT pool.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mode

Syntax

mode {mesh-group | standard}

Context

[Tree] (config>router>msdp>group mode)

Full Context

configure router msdp group mode

Description

This command configures groups of peers in a full mesh topology to limit excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) peers can be configured grouped in a full-mesh topology that prevents excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

In a meshed configuration, all members of the group must have a peer connection with every other mesh group member. If this rule is not adhered to, then unpredictable results may occur.

Default

mode standard

Parameters

mesh-group

Specifies that source-active message received from a mesh group member are always accepted but are not flooded to other members of the same mesh group. These source-active messages are only flooded to non-mesh group peers or members of other mesh groups.

standard

Specifies a non-meshed mode.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {strict | loose | strict-no-ecmp}

Context

[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)

[Tree] (config>router>if>urpf-check mode)

Full Context

configure router interface ipv6 urpf-check mode

configure router interface urpf-check mode

Description

This command specifies the mode of unicast RPF check.

The no form of this command reverts to the default (strict) mode.

Default

mode strict

Parameters

strict

When specified, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has a source address that matches a prefix in the routing table, and whether the interface expects to receive a packet with this source address prefix.

loose

In loose mode, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has source address with a corresponding prefix in the routing table. However, the loose mode does not check whether the interface expects to receive a packet with a specific source address prefix. This object is valid only when urpf-check is enabled.

strict-no-ecmp

When a packet is received on an interface in this mode and the SA matches an ECMP route the packet is dropped by uRPF.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {ecmp-protected | linear}

no mode

Context

[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>maintenance-policy mode)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing maintenance-policy mode

Description

This command specifies the data path programming and protection mechanism for SR policy candidate paths to which the maintenance policy is applied.

In both the linear mode and ecmp-protected modes, if two or more candidate paths of the same {headend, color, endpoint} and also have the same mode, then the best preference path is treated as the primary while the next best preference path is the standby. If a third path is present in the linear mode, then this is treated as a tertiary and also programmed in the IOM.

If the currently active path goes unavailable due to S-BFD, the system failovers to the next best preference available candidate path. If S-BFD is down on all segment lists of all programmed candidate paths of an SR Policy, then the SR Policy is marked as down in TTM.

If the default mode is specified, the router only programs the segment lists of the best preference paths in the IOM.

The no form of this command removes the configured mode.

Default

no mode

Parameters

ecmp-protected

Specifies only the top two routes (paths) are programmed in the IOM. Up to 32 segment lists can be programmed for each path.

linear

Specifies the top three routes are programmed in the IOM. Only one segment list is allowed per path.

Platforms

All

mode

Syntax

mode {target-defined | on-change | sample}

Context

[Tree] (config>system>telemetry>persistent-subscriptions>subscription mode)

Full Context

configure system telemetry persistent-subscriptions subscription mode

Description

This command configures the subscription path mode for telemetry notifications that are sent for the persistent subscription.

Default

mode target-defined

Parameters

target-defined

Keyword specifying that target defined mode is used.

on-change

Keyword specifying that on change mode is used.

sample

Keyword specifying that sample mode is used.

Platforms

All

mode-annexb

mode-annexb

Syntax

[no] mode-annexb

Context

[Tree] (config>port>aps mode-annexb)

Full Context

configure port aps mode-annexb

Description

This command configures the APS group for 1+1 Optimized operation as described in Annex B of ITU.T G.841. Note that Annex B operates in non-revertive bi-directional switching mode only as defined in G.841.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

modify-buffer-allocation-rate

modify-buffer-allocation-rate

Syntax

modify-buffer-allocation-rate

Context

[Tree] (config>port modify-buffer-allocation-rate)

Full Context

configure port modify-buffer-allocation-rate

Description

Commands in this context configure ingress and egress percentage of rate parameters. This command only applies to physical ports (for example, it will not work on APS or similar logical ports). The percentage of rate commands are used to define a percentage value that affects the amount of buffers used by ingress and egress port managed buffer space. Enter the modify-buffer-allocation-rate context when editing the port’s percentage of rate commands.

Platforms

All

module

module

Syntax

module cpm-slot

Context

[Tree] (config>system>bluetooth module)

Full Context

configure system bluetooth module

Description

Commands in this context define Bluetooth parameters for the specific CPM slot.

Parameters

cpm-slot

Specifies the CPM slot.

Values

{A | B | C | D}

Platforms

7750 SR-1, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS-20e

mofrr

mofrr

Syntax

[no] mofrr

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>pim mofrr)

Full Context

debug router pim mofrr

Description

This command enables debugging for PIM multicast fast failover (MoFRR).

The no form of this command disables MoFRR debugging.

Platforms

All

mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch

mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch

Syntax

[no] mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>egress mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>egress>vport mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch)

Full Context

configure port ethernet egress mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch

configure port ethernet access egress vport mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch

Description

This command enables congestion monitoring of the hardware aggregate shaper scheduler on the specified port or vport.

The no form of this command disables congestion monitoring.

Default

no mon-hw-agg-shaper-sch

Platforms

7750 SR-1, 7750 SR-s

mon-port-sch

mon-port-sch

Syntax

[no] mon-port-sch

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>egress>vport mon-port-sch)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mon-port-sch)

Full Context

configure port ethernet access egress vport mon-port-sch

configure port ethernet mon-port-sch

Description

This command enables congestion monitoring on an Egress Port Scheduler (EPS) that is applied to a physical port or to a Vport.

Congestion monitoring must be further configured under the port-scheduler CLI hierarchy. Once the congestion monitoring is in effect, the offered rate (incoming traffic) is compared to the configured port-scheduler congestion threshold. The results of these measurements are stored as the number of samples representing the number of times the offered rates exceeded the configured congestion threshold since the last clearing of the stats. Therefore, the results represent the number of times that the port-scheduler that is applied to a port/Vport was congested since the last reset of the stats (via a clear command).

The no form of this command disables congestion monitoring.

Default

no mon-port-sch

Platforms

All

monitor

monitor

Syntax

monitor ip-prefix/length

no monitor

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>wlan-gw>redundancy monitor)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface wlan-gw redundancy monitor

Description

This command specifies an IPv4 route (prefix/length) per subscriber-interface to be monitored in the FDB to determine liveness of the subscriber-interface (and consequently all associated group-interfaces of type wlangw) on a peer WLAN-GW. This route is the one that is advertised in routing by the peer WLAN-GW when the subscriber-interface and WLAN-GW group are operationally up.

Parameters

ip-prefix/length

Specifies the IP prefix and length.

Values

ip-prefix: a.b.c.d

ip-prefix-length: 0 to 32

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor

Syntax

monitor ip-prefix/length

no monitor

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>outside>pool>redundancy monitor)

[Tree] (config>router>nat>outside>pool>redundancy monitor)

Full Context

configure service vprn nat outside pool redundancy monitor

configure router nat outside pool redundancy monitor

Description

This command configures the monitoring route based on which the NAT multi-chassis switchover is triggered. Monitoring route of a NAT pool on the local node must match the export route of a corresponding NAT pool on the peering node. Presence of the monitoring route in the routing table is an indication that the peering NAT pool is active (since it is advertising its export route). The disappearance of the monitoring route from the routing table is an indication that the peering pool has failed and consequently the nodal switchover is triggered, the local pool becomes active and its export route is consequently advertised. The export route can be advertised only from:

  • The active lead pool.

  • Active pool for which fate-sharing is disabled.

Default

no monitor

Parameters

ip-prefix/length

Specifies the IP prefix and length.

Values

ip-prefix/length:

ip-prefix

a.b.c.d

ip-prefix-length

0 to 32

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor

Syntax

[no] monitor

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor monitor)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group monitor)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp monitor)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor monitor)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group monitor)

Full Context

configure router bgp group neighbor monitor

configure service vprn bgp group monitor

configure router bgp monitor

configure service vprn bgp group neighbor monitor

configure router bgp group monitor

Description

Commands in this context configure monitor parameters.

The no form of this command disables BGP BMP monitoring.

Platforms

All

monitor

Syntax

[no] monitor

Context

[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>ip-id-asst>pdns monitor)

Full Context

configure application-assurance group ip-identification-assist passive-dns monitor

Description

This command configures the router to collect IP addresses by passively monitoring DNS traffic. The router uses the collected IP addresses to build its internal database.

The no form of this command disables passive DNS monitoring.

Default

monitor

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats

monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats

Syntax

[no] monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats

Context

[Tree] (config>port monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats)

Full Context

configure port monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats

Description

This command enables the monitoring of aggregate egress queue statistics on the port. All queues on the port are monitored, including SAP egress, network egress, subscriber egress, and egress queue group queues, as well as system queues that can be used, for example, to send port-related protocol packets (LACP, EFM, and so on). The aggregate in-profile, out-of-profile, and total statistics are provided for both forwarded and dropped packets and octets.

Monitoring of aggregate statistics is supported on PXC sub-ports but not on a PXC physical port. It is also not supported on satellite ports.

The no form of this command disables aggregate egress queue statistics monitoring on the specified port.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

monitor-bandwidth

monitor-bandwidth

Syntax

[no] monitor-bandwidth

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth

configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth

Description

This command enables the collection and display of auto-bandwidth measurements, but prevents any automatic bandwidth adjustments from taking place.

The no form of this command disables the collection and display of auto-bandwidth measurements.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name priority-step step

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>srrp monitor-oper-group)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>srrp monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface srrp monitor-oper-group

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface srrp monitor-oper-group

Description

This command will configure the association between the SRRP instance in a Fate Sharing Group and the operational-group that contains messaging SAPs. A state transition of a messaging SAP within an operational-group will trigger calculation of the priority for all SRRP instances that are associated with that operational-group.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the operational-group, up to 32 characters, that is tracking operational state of SRRP messaging SAPs

priority-step

Specifies the priority step for which the priority of an SRRP instance is changed. If a messaging SAP within an operational-group transition to a non-UP state, the priority is decreased by the step value. If the messaging SAP within the operational-group transition into the UP state, the priority of the SRRP instance is increased by the step value.

Values

1 to 10

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>lag monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure lag monitor-oper-group

Description

This command, supported on access LAG only, specifies the operational group to monitor. The state of the operational group affects the state of this LAG. When the operational group is inactive, the state of the LAG goes down and the LAG uses the configured lag>standby-signaling mechanism (lacp or power-off) to signal the CE that the LAG is not available.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the oper-group, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap monitor-oper-group)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>site monitor-oper-group)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp>pw-template-binding monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service vpls spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group

configure service vpls sap monitor-oper-group

configure service vpls site monitor-oper-group

configure service vpls bgp pw-template-binding monitor-oper-group

Description

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

group-name

Specifies a character string of maximum 32 ASCII characters identifying the group instance.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group group-name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap monitor-oper-group)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service epipe sap monitor-oper-group

configure service epipe spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group

Description

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association.

Parameters

group-name

Specifies an oper group name.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group group-name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>pw-port monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service epipe pw-port monitor-oper-group

Description

This command configures the monitoring operational group name, up to 32 characters in length, associated with this PW-port entry.

Parameters

group-name

Specifies an operational group to monitor.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service ies interface monitor-oper-group

Description

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association from the configuration.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

name

Specifies a character string of maximum 32 ASCII characters identifying the group instance.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface monitor-oper-group

Description

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association from the configuration.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

name

Specifies a character string, up to 32 ASCII characters, identifying the group instance.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 | ipv6} add [1..4294967295]

monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 | ipv6} set [1..4294967295]

monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 | ipv6} subtract [1..4294967295]

no monitor-oper-group [family {ipv4 | ipv6}]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim interface monitor-oper-group

Description

This command configures PIM to monitor the state of an operational group to provide a redundancy mechanism. PIM monitors the operational group and changes its DR priority to the specified value when the status of the operational group is up. This enables the router to become the PIM DR only when the operational group is up. If the operational group status changes to down, PIM changes its DR priority to the default or the value configured with priority under config>service>vprn>pim>if. The oper-group group-name must already be configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command. Two operational groups are supported per PIM interface.

The no form of this command removes the operational group from the configuration.

Parameters

group-name

Specifies the operational group identifier up to 32 characters in length.

family

Specifies the address family.

ipv4

Specifies the IPv4 designated router priority.

ipv6

Specifies the IPv6 designated router priority.

add

Specifies that the value is to be added to the existing priority to become the designated router.

subtract

Specifies that the value is to be subtracted from the existing priority to become the designated router.

set

Specifies the priority to become the designated router.

value

Specifies the priority modifier expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name health-drop drop

no monitor-oper-group name

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>nat-group>inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure isa nat-group inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-oper-group

Description

This command enables monitoring of the objects, such as SAPs, BFD sessions, or VRRP sessions for the purpose of adjusting the overall health of the node in a redundant inter- chassis NAT system. A state change of the objects in the oper-group influences the health of a NAT node in a redundant configuration.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

name

Specifies the name of the operational group that is being monitored, up to 32 characters.

drop

A state change of an object in the oper-group influences the overall health of the system in the context of NAT inter-chassis redundancy. For example, a transition into a non-operational (down) state of an object within the monitored oper-group triggers a decrease of the overall health of the node for the amount specified by the health-drop value.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name health-drop drop

no monitor-oper-group name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>subscriber-mgmt>up-resiliency monitor-oper-group)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>subscriber-mgmt>up-resiliency monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-mgmt up-resiliency monitor-oper-group

configure service vprn subscriber-mgmt up-resiliency monitor-oper-group

Description

This command defines parameters to derive the service health based on monitored operational groups. The BNG-UP sends the health value to the MAG-c. The MAG-c uses the value to determine the need for a BNG-UP status change (active or standby).

The no form of the command removes the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the operational group name, up to 32 characters.

drop

Specifies the drop in the health value for every operational group member failure. Every failure of an operational group member decreases the base health value to a possible minimum of 0.

Values

1 to 100

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group name health-drop drop

no monitor-oper-group name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>pfcp>up-resiliency monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap pfcp up-resiliency monitor-oper-group

Description

This command defines parameters to derive the service health based on monitored operational groups. The BNG-UP sends the health value to the BNG CPF. The BNG CPF uses the value to determine the need for a BNG-UP status change (active or standby).

If the configured groups are not the same for all capture SAPs sharing the same underlying port or LAG, the configuration of a Layer 2 access ID alias is required, or else the system chooses arbitrarily one set of configured groups.

The no form of the command removes the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the operational group name, up to 32 characters.

drop

Specifies the drop in the health value for every operational group member failure. Every failure of an operational group member decreases the base health value to a possible minimum of 0.

Values

1 to 100

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 | ipv6} add [value]

monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 | ipv6} set [value]

monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 | ipv6} subtract [value]

no monitor-oper-group [family {ipv4 | ipv6}]

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim>if monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure router pim interface monitor-oper-group

Description

This command configures PIM to monitor the state of an operational group to provide a redundancy mechanism. PIM monitors the operational group and changes its DR priority to the specified value when the status of the operational group is up. This enables the router to become the PIM DR only when the operational group is up. If the operational group status changes to down, PIM changes its DR priority to the default or the value configured with priority under config>router>pim>if. The oper-group group-name must already be configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command. Two operational groups are supported per PIM interface.

The no form of this command removes the operational group from the configuration.

Parameters

group-name

Specifies the operational group identifier, up to 32 characters.

family

Specifies the address family.

ipv4

Specifies the IPv4 designated router priority.

ipv6

Specifies the IPv6 designated router priority.

add

Specifies that the value is to be added to the existing priority to become the designated router.

subtract

Specifies that the value is to be subtracted from the existing priority to become the designated router.

set

Specifies the priority to become the designated router.

value

Specifies the priority modifier expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 4294967295

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group group name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>sdp>binding>pw-port monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure service sdp binding pw-port monitor-oper-group

Description

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of the command removes the association from the configuration.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

name

Specifies a character string of maximum 32 ASCII characters identifying the group instance.

Platforms

All

monitor-oper-group

Syntax

monitor-oper-group group-name

no monitor-oper-group

Context

[Tree] (config>port monitor-oper-group)

Full Context

configure port monitor-oper-group

Description

This command configures the operational group to monitor the operational group state. The state of the operational group affects the state of this port. When the operational group is inactive, the state of the port goes down and powers off the port to signal the CE that the connected port is not available.

Default

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters

group-name

Specifies operational group name to monitor, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

monitor-port

monitor-port

Syntax

monitor-port port-id health-drop drop

no monitor-port port-id

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>nat-group>inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-port)

Full Context

configure isa nat-group inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-port

Description

This command enables monitoring of the ports to adjust the overall health of the node in a redundant inter-chassis NAT system. A state change of a monitored port influences the health of a NAT node in a redundant configuration.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no monitor-port

Parameters

port-id

Specifies the port being monitored.

Values

slot/mda/port

drop

A state change of an object in the oper-group influences the overall health of the system in the context of NAT inter-chassis redundancy. For example, a transition into a non-operational (down) state of an object within the monitored oper-group triggers a decrease of the overall health of the node for the amount specified by the health-drop value.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

monitor-ptsf-unusable

monitor-ptsf-unusable

Syntax

monitor-ptsf-unusable

Context

[Tree] (config>system>ptp>ptsf monitor-ptsf-unusable)

Full Context

configure system ptp ptsf monitor-ptsf-unusable

Description

Commands in this context configure the monitoring of neighbor clocks for the Packet Timing Signal Fail (PTSF) unusable state (condition) when the profile is set to g8275dot1-2014.

When enabled, the local clock monitors the noise level of PTP event messages exchanged between external neighbor PTP ports and the local clock. If there is too much noise and the expectation is these event message would not allow the clock to meet its output performance requirements, that neighbor port is considered unusable. This relates to declaring the PTSF-unusable state as defined in the profile.

Once a neighbor port is declared unusable, its Announce messages are excluded from the BTCA and the port cannot be selected as the parent clock.

The unusable condition can be cleared using the following command:

clear system ptp port port-id neighbor mac-address ptsf-unusable

When disabled, PTP clears the PTSF-unusable state from all neighbor PTP ports.

Deleting or disabling the local PTP port clears the PTSF-unusable state from all neighbor PTP ports that are accessed through the local PTP port.

Disabling the monitor-ptsf-unusable function of the PTP clock clears the PTSF-unusable state from all neighbor PTP ports.

In addition, if no PTP messages have been received from a neighbor for 15 minutes, the neighbor information is purged, which also clears the PTSF-unusable state.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

monitor-queue-depth

monitor-queue-depth

Syntax

monitor-queue-depth [fast-polling] [violation-threshold percentage]

no monitor-queue-depth

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egress-port-queue-overrides>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egr>qgrp>qover>q monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>egr>qgrp>qover>q monitor-queue-depth)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure port ethernet network egress-port-queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service vpls sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth

Description

This command configures queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

The no form of this command disables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

Parameters

fast-polling

Keyword used to specify that fast queue polling is enabled. Fast queue polling is only supported on FP3- and FP4-based hardware.

percentage

Specifies a percentage, up to two decimal places, of the queue MBS. When the depth of the queue exceeds this percentage, a violation is registered.

Values

00.01 to 99.99

Platforms

All

  • configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service vpls sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure port ethernet network egress-port-queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

monitor-queue-depth

Syntax

monitor-queue-depth [fast-polling]

no monitor-queue-depth

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)

[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>ingress>qgrp>qover>q monitor-queue-depth)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service cpipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service vpls sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service ies interface sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure service ipipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

configure port ethernet access ingress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth

Description

This command enters the context for queue depth monitoring for the specified queue. The fast-polling option is not supported at ingress.

The no form of this command disables queue depth monitoring.

Platforms

All

  • configure service ipipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service vprn interface sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure port ethernet access ingress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service vpls sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
  • configure service ies interface sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth

monitor-threshold

monitor-threshold

Syntax

monitor-threshold percent

no monitor-threshold

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy>group monitor-threshold)

[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy monitor-threshold)

Full Context

configure qos port-scheduler-policy group monitor-threshold

configure qos port-scheduler-policy monitor-threshold

Description

This command defines the congestion monitoring threshold for the desired monitoring entity under the port-scheduler for per aggregate port-scheduler rate, per individual level, and per group that is aggregating multiple levels.

The congestion threshold is specified in percentages of the configured PIR rate for the entity for which congestion monitoring is desired. For example, if the configured PIR rate for level 1 is 100,000 kb/s, and the monitoring threshold is set to 90%, then an event where the offered rate is >90,000 kb/s will be recorded. This event is shown as part of the cumulative count of congestion threshold exceeds since the last clearing of the counters.

The no form of this command removes the congestion monitoring threshold.

Default

no monitor-threshold

Parameters

percent

Specifies the percent of the configured rate. If the offered rate exceeds the configured threshold, a counter monitoring the threshold will be increased.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

All

monitor-threshold

Syntax

monitor-threshold percent

no monitor-threshold

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>hw-agg-shap-sched-plcy monitor-threshold)

Full Context

configure qos hw-agg-shaper-scheduler-policy monitor-threshold

Description

This command configures the egress scheduler monitor threshold for the hardware aggregate shaper scheduler policy. The value is expressed as a percentage of the scheduler rate, which is considered as a limit for determining congestion.

The no form of this command removes the congestion monitoring threshold.

Default

no monitor-threshold

Parameters

percent

Specifies the percent of the configured rate.

Values

0 to 100

Platforms

7750 SR-1, 7750 SR-s

month

month

Syntax

month {month-number [..month-number] | month-name [..month-name] | all}

no month

Context

[Tree] (config>system>cron>sched month)

Full Context

configure system cron schedule month

Description

This command specifies the month when the event should be executed. Multiple months can be specified. When multiple months are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to trigger. If a month is configured without configuring the month, weekday, day-of-month, and minute, the event will not execute.

The no form of this command removes the specified month from the configuration.

Default

no month

Parameters

month-number

Specifies a month number.

Values

1 to 12 (maximum 12 month-numbers)

month-name

Specifies a month by name.

Values

january, february, march, april, may, june, july, august, september, october, november, december (maximum 12 month names)

all

Specifies all months.

Platforms

All

more

more

Syntax

[no] more

Context

[Tree] (environment more)

Full Context

environment more

Description

This command enables per-screen CLI output, meaning that the output is displayed on a screen-by- screen basis. The terminal screen length can be modified with the terminal command.

The following prompt appears at the end of each screen of paginated output:

Press any key to continue (Q to quit)

The no form of the command displays the output all at once. If the output length is longer than one screen, the entire output will be displayed, which may scroll the screen.

Default

more

Platforms

All

more

Syntax

[no] more

Context

[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli>md-cli>environment more)

Full Context

configure system management-interface cli md-cli environment more

Description

This command configures pagination of the output text.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

more

Platforms

All

more-fragments

more-fragments

Syntax

more-fragments more-fragments

no more-fragments

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>build-packet>header>ipv4 more-fragments)

[Tree] (debug>oam>build-packet>packet>field-override>header>ipv4 more-fragments)

Full Context

configure test-oam build-packet header ipv4 more-fragments

debug oam build-packet packet field-override header ipv4 more-fragments

Description

This command defines if the MF flag should be set in the associated IPv4 header.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

more-fragments 0

Parameters

more-fragments

Specifies an MF flag for an IPv4 packet header to be launched by the OAM find-egress tool. A value of 1 means there are more fragments to be sent.

Values

0, 1

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

motd

motd

Syntax

motd {url url-prefix: source-url | text motd-text-string}

no motd

Context

[Tree] (config>system>login-control motd)

Full Context

configure system login-control motd

Description

This command creates the message of the day displayed after a successful console login. Only one message can be configured.

The no form of this command removes the message.

Default

no motd

Parameters

url url-prefix: source-url

When the message of the day is present as a text file, provide both url-prefix and the source-url of the file containing the message of the day. The URL prefix can be local or remote.

text motd-text-string

Specifies the text of the message of the day. The motd-text-string must be enclosed in double quotes. Multiple text strings are not appended to one another.

Some special characters can be used to format the message text. The \n character can be used to create multi-line messages. A \n in the message moves to the beginning of the next line by sending ASCII/UTF-8 chars 0xA (LF) and 0xD (CR) to the client terminal. An \r in the message sends the ASCII/UTF-8 char 0xD (CR) to the client terminal.

Platforms

All

move

move

Syntax

move old-file-url new-file-url [force] [no-redirect] [client-tls-profile profile] [proxy proxy-url]

Context

[Tree] (file move)

Full Context

file move

Description

This command moves a local file, system file, or a directory. If the target already exists, the command fails and an error message displays.

The following prompt appears if the destination file already exists:

"Overwrite destination file (y/n)?”

Parameters

old-file-url

Specifies the file or directory to be moved.

Values

local-url

[cflash-id/][file-path] up to 200 characters, including cflash-id directory length up to 99 each

remote-url

[{ftp:// | tftp:// | http:// | https://}login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]

up to 247 characters

directory length up to 99 characters each

remote-locn

[hostname | ipv4-address | [ipv6-address]]

ipv4-address

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

interface - up to 32 characters, for link local addresses 255

cflash-id

cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

new-file-url

Specifies the new destination to place the old-file-url.

Values

local-url

[cflash-id/][file-path] up to 200 characters, including cflash-id directory length up to 99 each

remote-url

[{ftp:// | tftp://}login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]

up to 247 characters

directory length up to 99 characters each

remote-locn

[hostname | ipv4-address | [ipv6-address]]

ipv4-address

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

interface - up to 32 characters, for link local addresses 255

cflash-id

cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

force

Forces an immediate move of the specified file(s).

The file move force command moves the specified file(s) without displaying a user prompt message. This command also automatically accepts HTTP redirects unless overridden by the no-redirect parameter.

profile

Specifies the TLS client profile configured under config>system>security>tls>client-tls-profile to use.

proxy-url

Specifies the URL of an HTTP proxy. For example, http://proxy.mydomain.com:8000. This URL must be an HTTP URL and not an HTTPS URL.

no-redirect

Specifies to automatically refuse any HTTP redirects without prompting the user.

Platforms

All

move-frequency

move-frequency

Syntax

move-frequency frequency

no move-frequency

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mac-move move-frequency)

[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template>mac-move move-frequency)

Full Context

configure service vpls mac-move move-frequency

configure service template vpls-template mac-move move-frequency

Description

This command indicates the maximum rate at which MACs can be relearned in the VPLS service before the SAP where the moving MAC was last seen is automatically disabled to protect the system against undetected loops or duplicate MACs. The rate (relearns per second) is measured in a 5-second window.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

2 (relearns per second, when mac-move is enabled). For example, the value 2 requires 10 MAC relearns in a 5-second period for the MAC to be considered duplicate.

Parameters

frequency

Specifies the rate, in relearns per second.

Values

1 to 10

Platforms

All

mp-bgp-keep

mp-bgp-keep

Syntax

[no] mp-bgp-keep

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp mp-bgp-keep)

Full Context

configure router bgp mp-bgp-keep

Description

As a result of enabling this command, route refresh messages are no longer needed, or issued when VPN route policy changes are made; RIB-IN will retain all MP-BGP routes.

The no form of this command is used to disable this feature.

Default

no mp-bgp-keep

Platforms

All

mp-mbb-time

mp-mbb-time

Syntax

mp-mbb-time interval

no mp-mbb-time

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp mp-mbb-time)

Full Context

configure router ldp mp-mbb-time

Description

This command configures the maximum time a P2MP transit/bud node must wait before switching over to the new path if the new node does not send MBB TLV to inform of the availability of data plane.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

no mp-mbb-time (which equals a value of 3 seconds)

Parameters

interval

Specifies the MP MBB time, in seconds.

Values

0 to 10

Platforms

All

mpls

mpls

Syntax

mpls [bgp bgp] [endpoint endpoint-name]

no mpls [bgp bgp]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn mpls)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-evpn mpls)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn mpls)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls

configure service vprn bgp-evpn mpls

configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure the BGP EVPN MPLS parameters. In VPLS, either instance BGP 1 or BGP 2 can be configured, but not both simultaneously in the same service. Epipe and VPRN services only support instance 1. If the bgp bgp parameter is not specified, the instance is set to 1.

The endpoint option is only supported for Epipe services. When configured, the same endpoint name can be configured for the bgp-evpn>mpls context and an additional spoke SDP. An EVPN MPLS destination always has higher preference than a spoke SDP.

The no form of this command removes the MPLS instance from the service.

Parameters

bgp

Indicates the BGP instance identifier.

Values

1, 2

endpoint-name

Specifies the endpoint name for Epipe services, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

All

mpls

Syntax

mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-ipvpn mpls)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp-ipvpn mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure the BGP IPVPN parameters.

Platforms

All

mpls

Syntax

[no] mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>router mpls)

Full Context

configure router mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure MPLS parameters. MPLS is not enabled by default and must be explicitly enabled (no shutdown).

The no form of this command deletes this MPLS protocol instance and removes all configuration parameters for this MPLS instance.

You must remove all SDP bindings and use the shutdown command to administratively disable the MPLS instance before deleting it.

Platforms

All

mpls

Syntax

mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>router>rib-api mpls)

Full Context

configure router rib-api mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure MPLS parameters related to the RIB-API gRPC service.

Platforms

All

mpls

Syntax

mpls [lsp lsp-name] [sender source-address] [endpoint endpoint-address] [tunnel-id tunnel-id] [lsp-id lsp-id]

no mpls

Context

[Tree] (debug>router mpls)

Full Context

debug router mpls

Description

This command enables and configures debugging for MPLS.

Parameters

lsp lsp-name

Specifies the LSP name up to 64 characters in length.

sender source-address

Specifies the IP address of the sender.

endpoint endpoint-address

Specifies the far-end IP address.

tunnel-id tunnel-id

Specifies the MPLS SDP ID.

Values

0 to 4294967295

lsp-id lsp-id

Specifies the LSP ID.

Values

1 to 65535

Platforms

All

mpls

Syntax

mpls

Context

[Tree] (debug>oam>build-packet>packet>field-override>header mpls)

[Tree] (config>test-oam>build-packet>header mpls)

Full Context

debug oam build-packet packet field-override header mpls

configure test-oam build-packet header mpls

Description

This command causes the associated header to be defined as an MPLS label header template and enables the context to define the MPLS parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls

Syntax

mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session mpls)

Full Context

configure oam-pm session mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure MPLS-specific source and destination, LSP type and tunnel information, the priority, and the MPLS DM test configuration on the launch point.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls

Syntax

[no] mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>cflowd>collector>export-filter>family mpls)

Full Context

configure cflowd collector export-filter family mpls

Description

This command filters MPLS flow data from being sent to the associated collector.

The no form of this command removes the filter, allowing MPLS flow data to be sent to the associated collector.

Default

no mpls

Platforms

All

mpls

Syntax

mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>system>ip mpls)

Full Context

configure system ip mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure system-wide MPLS parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls

Syntax

[no] mpls

Context

[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>ip>tunnel mpls)

Full Context

configure oam-pm session ip tunnel mpls

Description

Commands in this context configure the MPLS packet tunneling options for the session. Configure the tunnel oam-pm session ip router-instance to Base to configure commands in the MPLS context. When entering a context under MPLS, the system removes any previous configuration of any sibling context. You can only configure one of the contexts for each OAM-PM session.

The no form of this command deletes the mpls context and all configurations under it.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls-dm

mpls-dm

Syntax

mpls-dm

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam mpls-dm)

Full Context

configure test-oam mpls-dm

Description

Commands in this context configure global MPLS delay measurement parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls-echo-request-downstream-map

mpls-echo-request-downstream-map

Syntax

mpls-echo-request-downstream-map {dsmap | ddmap}

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam mpls-echo-request-downstream-map)

Full Context

configure test-oam mpls-echo-request-downstream-map

Description

This command specifies which format of the downstream mapping TLV to use in all LSP trace packets and LDP tree trace packets originated on this node. The Downstream Mapping (DSMAP) TLV is the original format in RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) and is the default value. The new Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV is the new enhanced format specified in RFC 6424 and RFC 8029.

This command applies to LSP trace of an RSVP P2P LSP, a MPLS-TP LSP, or LDP unicast FEC, and to LDP tree trace of a unicast LDP FEC. It does not apply to LSP trace of an RSVP P2MP LSP which always uses the DDMAP TLV.

The global DSMAP/DDMAP setting impacts the behavior of both OAM LSP trace packets and SAA test packets of type lsp-trace and is used by the sender node when one of the following events occurs:

  1. An SAA test of type lsp-trace is created (not modified) and no value is specified for the per-test downstream-map-tlv {dsmap | ddmap | none} option. In this case, the SAA test downstream-map-tlv value defaults to the global mpls-echo-request-downstream-map value.

  2. An OAM test of type lsp-trace test is executed and no value is specified for the per-test downstream-map-tlv {dsmap | ddmap | none} option. In this case, the OAM test downstream-map-tlv value defaults to the global mpls-echo-request-downstream-map value.

A consequence of the rules above is that a change to the value of mpls-echo-request-downstream-map option does not affect the value inserted in the downstream mapping TLV of existing tests.

Following are the details of the processing of the new DDMAP TLV:

  1. When either the DSMAP TLV or the DDMAP TLV is received in an echo request message, the responder node includes the same type of TLV in the echo reply message with the proper downstream interface information and label stack information.

  2. If an echo request message without a Downstream Mapping TLV (DSMAP or DDMAP) expires at a node which is not the egress for the target FEC stack, the responder node always includes the DSMAP TLV in the echo reply message. This can occur in the following cases:

    1. The user issues a LSP trace from a sender node with a min-ttl value higher than 1 and a max-ttl value lower than the number of hops to reach the egress of the target FEC stack. This is the sender node behavior when the global configuration or the per-test setting of the DSMAP/DDMAP is set to DSMAP.

    2. The user issues a LSP ping from a sender node with a ttl value lower than the number of hops to reach the egress of the target FEC stack. This is the sender node behavior when the global configuration of the DSMAP/DDMAP is set to DSMAP.

    3. The behavior in (a) is changed when the global configuration or the per-test setting of the Downstream Mapping TLV is set to DDMAP. The sender node includes in this case the DDMAP TLV with the Downstream IP address field set to the all-routers multicast address as per Section 3.4 of RFC 8029. The responder node then bypasses the interface and label stack validation and replies with a DDMAP TLV with the correct downstream information for the target FEC stack.

  3. A sender node never includes the DSMAP or DDMAP TLV in an lsp-ping message.

In addition to performing the same features as the DSMAP TLV, the new DDMAP TLV addresses the following scenarios:

  1. Full validation of an LDP FEC stitched to a BGP IPv4 label route. In this case, the LSP trace message is inserted from the LDP LSP segment or from the stitching point.

  2. Full validation of a BGP IPv4 label route stitched to an LDP FEC. This includes the case of explicit configuration of the LDP-BGP stitching in which the BGP label route is active in Route Table Manager (RTM) and the case of a BGP IPv4 label route resolved to the LDP FEC due to the IGP route of the same prefix active in RTM. In this case, the LSP trace message is inserted from the BGP LSP segment or from the stitching point.

  3. Full validation of an LDP FEC which is stitched to a BGP LSP and stitched back into an LDP FEC. In this case, the LSP trace message is inserted from the LDP segments or the or from the stitching points.

  4. Full validation of an LDP FEC tunneled over an RSVP LSP using LSP trace.

To properly check a target FEC which is stitched to another FEC (stitching FEC) of the same or a different type, or which is tunneled over another FEC (tunneling FEC), it is necessary for the responding nodes to provide details about the FEC manipulation back to the sender node. This is achieved via the use of the new FEC stack change sub-TLV in the Downstream Detailed Mapping TLV (DDMAP) defined in RFC 6424.

When the user configures the use of the DDMAP TLV on a trace for an LSP that does not undergo stitching or tunneling operation in the network, the procedures at the sender and responder nodes are the same as in the case of the DSMAP TLV.

This feature however introduces changes to the target FEC stack validation procedures at the sender and responder nodes in the case of LSP stitching and LSP hierarchy. These changes pertain to the processing of the new FEC stack change sub-TLV in the new DDMAP TLV and the new return code of value 15 Label switched with FEC change.

The no form of this command reverts to the default behavior of using the DSMAP TLV in a LSP trace packet and LDP tree trace packet.

Default

mpls-echo-request-downstream-map dsmap

Parameters

dsmap

Specifies that the DSMAP TLV should be used in all LSP trace packets and LDP tree trace packets originating on the node.

ddmap

Specifies that the DDMAP TLV should be used in all LSP trace packets and LDP tree trace packets originating on the node.

Platforms

All

Output

The following output is an example of mpls-echo-request-downstream-map information.

Output Example: LDP-over-RSVP
A          B          D          F          E          C  
o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o  
| \______/ | \____________________________/ | \______/ |  
 \  RSVP  /               LDP                \  RSVP  /   
  \______/                                    \______/    
    LDP                                         LDP       

Testing LDP FEC of Node C with DSMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# 
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.3/32 downstream-map-tlv dsmap detail 
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.3/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 104 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=3.90ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.4.4 ifaddr=10.10.4.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=3(LDP)
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.69ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.9.6 ifaddr=10.10.9.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131066 protocol=3(LDP)
3  10.20.1.6  rtt=7.88ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.5 ifaddr=10.10.10.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131060 protocol=3(LDP)
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=23.2ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.3 ifaddr=10.10.5.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
5  10.20.1.3  rtt=12.0ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-A# 


Testing LDP FEC of Node C with DDMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.3/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail 
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.3/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 136 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=4.00ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=3.48ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.4.4 ifaddr=10.10.4.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=3(LDP)
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.34ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.9.6 ifaddr=10.10.9.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131066 protocol=3(LDP)
3  10.20.1.6  rtt=7.78ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.5 ifaddr=10.10.10.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131060 protocol=3(LDP)
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=12.8ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.3 ifaddr=10.10.5.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131054 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
           label[2]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.3 remotepeer=10.10.5.3
5  10.20.1.3  rtt=12.8ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
5  10.20.1.3  rtt=13.4ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-A# 



D          F          E          C          A          B  
o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o  
  \_________________/ | \_________________/ | \______/ |  
          LDP          \     RSVP ECA      / \  RSVP  /   
                        \_________________/   \______/    
                                LDP             LDP       

Testing LDP FEC of Node B with DDMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-D# 
*A:Dut-D# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.2/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail 
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.2/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1  10.20.1.6  rtt=3.17ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.5 ifaddr=10.10.10.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131065 protocol=3(LDP)
2  10.20.1.5  rtt=8.27ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.3 ifaddr=10.10.5.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
           label[2]=131065 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.1 remotepeer=10.10.5.3
3  10.20.1.3  rtt=9.50ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.2.1 ifaddr=10.10.2.1 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
4  10.20.1.1  rtt=10.4ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
4  10.20.1.1  rtt=10.2ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.1.2 ifaddr=10.10.1.2 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131066 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
           label[2]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.2 remotepeer=10.10.1.2
5  10.20.1.2  rtt=13.7ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
5  10.20.1.2  rtt=13.6ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-D# 
Output Example: LDP-BGP Stitching
A         B          C           D         E         F   
o ------- o -------- o --------- o ------- o ------- o   
  \_____/ |            \_______/           | \_____/     
    LDP   |              RSVP              |   LDP          
          |\______________________________/|             
          |              LDP               |             
           \______________________________/              
                         BGP                             

Testing LDP FEC of Node F with DSMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# *A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 downstream-map-
tlv dsmap detail lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 104 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=2.65ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
2  10.20.1.3  rtt=4.89ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
3  10.20.1.4  rtt=6.49ms rc=5(DSMappingMismatched) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-A#

Testing LDP FEC of Node F with DDMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail lsp-
trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=3.50ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.3.3 ifaddr=10.10.3.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
            label[1]=131068 protocol=3(LDP)
            label[2]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
            fecchange[1]=POP  fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 
(Unknown)
            fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=BGP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=10.20.1.5
            fecchange[3]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.5 remotepeer=10.10.3.3
2  10.20.1.3  rtt=6.53ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
          label[1]=131060 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
          label[2]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[3]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
          fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.4 remotepeer=10.10.11.4
3  10.20.1.4  rtt=7.94ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
3  10.20.1.4  rtt=6.69ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.6.5 ifaddr=10.10.6.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
            label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
            label[2]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=10.1ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=8.97ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.6 ifaddr=10.10.10.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
           label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=POP  fectype=BGP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 
(Unknown)
           fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=10.10.10.6
5  10.20.1.6  rtt=11.8ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-A#


A         B          C           D         E 
o ------- o -------- o --------- o ---3--- o 
  \_____/ |            \_______/           | 
    LDP   |              RSVP              |             
          |\______________________________/|             
          |              LDP               |             
           \______________________________/              
                         BGP                             
Testing BGP Label Route of Node E with DDMAP TLV
-------------------------------------------------
*A:Dut-B# oam lsp-trace prefix 11.20.1.5/32 bgp-label downstream-map-
tlv ddmap detail lsp-trace to 11.20.1.5/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 124 byte packets
1  10.20.1.3  rtt=2.35ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
          label[1]=131060 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
          label[2]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[3]=131070 protocol=2(BGP)
          fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.4 remotepeer=10.10.11.4
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=4.17ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=4.50ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.6.5 ifaddr=10.10.6.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
            label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
            label[2]=131070 protocol=2(BGP)
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=7.78ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=6.80ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-B#

B          C           D         E         F   
o -------- o --------- o ---3--- o ---3--- o   
|            \_______/           | \_____/     
|              RSVP              |             
|\______________________________/|             
|              LDP               |             
 \______________________________/              
               BGP                             

Testing with DDMAP TLV LDP FEC of Node F when stitched to a BGP Label Route
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

*A:Dut-B# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 bgp-label downstream-map-
tlv ddmap detail lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 124 byte packets
1  10.20.1.3  rtt=3.21ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
          label[1]=131060 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
          label[2]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[3]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
          fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.4 remotepeer=10.10.11.4
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.50ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.37ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.6.5 ifaddr=10.10.6.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
          label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[2]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=7.82ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=6.11ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.6 ifaddr=10.10.10.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
          label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
          fecchange[1]=POP  fectype=BGP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 
(Unknown)
          fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=10.10.10.6
4  10.20.1.6  rtt=10.2ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-B#

mpls-fwd-policy

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax

[no] mpls-fwd-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-ipvpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

Full Context

configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

configure service vprn bgp-ipvpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

configure service vprn bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

Description

This command selects the MPLS forwarding policy type.

The mpls-fwd-policy value instructs BGP to use the MPLS forwarding policy to determine the address of the BGP next hop.

The no form of this command removes the selected the MPLS forwarding policy type.

Default

no mpls-fwd-policy

Platforms

All

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax

[no] mpls-fwd-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect>tunnel-next-hop>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

Full Context

configure router static-route-entry indirect tunnel-next-hop resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

Description

This command enables the use of the MPLS forwarding policy to resolve the indirect next hops of statically-configured routes.

Default

no mpls-fwd-policy

Platforms

All

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax

[no] mpls-fwd-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-resolution>labeled-routes>transport-tunnel>family>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-resolution>shortcut-tunn>family>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

Full Context

configure router bgp next-hop-resolution labeled-routes transport-tunnel family resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

configure router bgp next-hop-resolution shortcut-tunnel family resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

Description

This command selects MPLS forwarding policy to be used for next-hop resolution.

Platforms

All

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax

mpls-fwd-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>auto-bind-tunnel>res-filter mpls-fwd-policy)

Full Context

configure service vprn auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy

Description

Note: This command is no longer supported and will be removed in a future release.

Platforms

All

mpls-label

mpls-label

Syntax

mpls-label value

no mpls-label

Context

[Tree] (conf>router>segment-routing>sr-policies>policy>seg-list>segment mpls-label)

Full Context

configure router segment-routing sr-policies static-policy segment-list segment mpls-label

Description

This command configures the MPLS label value this is associated with a segment.

The no form of this command removes the label value.

Default

no mpls-label

Parameters

value

Specifies the MPLS label value.

Values

0 to 1048575

Platforms

All

mpls-labels

mpls-labels

Syntax

mpls-labels

Context

[Tree] (config>router mpls-labels)

Full Context

configure router mpls-labels

Description

This command creates a context for the configuration of global parameters related to MPLS labels.

Platforms

All

mpls-time-stamp-format

mpls-time-stamp-format

Syntax

mpls-time-stamp-format {rfc4379 | unix}

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam mpls-time-stamp-format)

Full Context

configure test-oam mpls-time-stamp-format

Description

This command configures the format of the timestamp used by for lsp-ping, lsp-trace, p2mp-lsp-ping and p2mp-lsp-trace, vccv-ping, vccv-trace, and lsp-trace.

If rfc4379 is selected, then the timestamp is in seconds and microseconds since 1900, otherwise it is in seconds and microseconds since 1970.

Changing this system-wide setting does not affect tests that are currently in progress, but SAAs starts to use the new timestamp when they are restarted. When an SR OS receives an echo request, it replies with the locally configured timestamp format, and does not try to match the timestamp format of the incoming echo request message.

Default

mpls-time-stamp-format unix

Parameters

rfc4379

Specifies the RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) time stamp format. The timestamp's seconds field holds the integral number of seconds since 1-Jan-1900 00:00:00 UTC. The timestamp's microseconds field contains a microseconds value in the range 0 to 999999. This setting is used to inter-operate with network elements which are fully compliant with RFC 4379, Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures, (such as an SR OS system with the same setting, or any other RFC 4379 compliant router).

unix

Specifies the Unix time stamp format. The time stamps seconds field holds a Unix time, the integral number of seconds since 1-Jan-1970 00:00:00 UTC. The time stamps microseconds field contains a microseconds value in the range 0 to 999999. This setting is used to inter-operate with network elements which send and expect a 1970-based timestamp in MPLS Echo Request/Reply PDUs (such as an SR OS system with the same setting, or an SR OS system running software earlier than R8.0 R4).

Platforms

All

mpls-tp

mpls-tp

Syntax

[no] mpls-tp

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls mpls-tp)

Full Context

configure router mpls mpls-tp

Description

Generic MPLS-TP parameters and MPLS-TP transit paths are configured under this context. If a user configures no mpls, normally the entire mpls configuration is deleted. However, in the case of mpls-tp, a check is made that there is no other mpls-tp configuration (e.g., services or LSPs using mpls-tp on the node). The mpls-tp context cannot be deleted if MPLS-TP LSPs or SDPs exist on the system.

A shutdown of mpls-tp will bring down all MPLS-TP LSPs on the system.

Default

no mpls-tp

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls-tp-mep

mpls-tp-mep

Syntax

[no] mpls-tp-mep

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>interface mpls-tp-mep)

Full Context

configure router mpls interface mpls-tp-mep

Description

Commands in this context configure a section layer MEP for MPLS-TP on an MPLS interface.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mpls-tp-static

mpls-tp-static

Syntax

mpls-tp-static

Context

[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>mpls>lsp mpls-tp-static)

Full Context

configure oam-pm session mpls lsp mpls-tp-static

Description

Commands in this context configure an MPLS TP LSP and its attributes to be tested.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

mrib

mrib

Syntax

mrib [group grp-ip-address] [source ip-address] [detail]

no mrib

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>pim mrib)

Full Context

debug router pim mrib

Description

This command enables debugging for PIM MRIB.

The no form of this command disables debugging for PIM MRIB.

Parameters

grp-ip-address

Debugs information associated with the specified PIM MRIB.

Values

multicast group address (ipv4, ipv6)

ip-address

Debugs information associated with the specified PIM MRIB.

Values

source address (ipv4, ipv6)

detail

Debugs detailed MRIB information.

Platforms

All

mrinfo

mrinfo

Syntax

mrinfo {ip-address | dns-name} [router router-instance | service-name service-name]

Context

[Tree] (mrinfo)

Full Context

mrinfo

Description

This command is used to print relevant multicast information from the target multicast router. Information displayed includes adjacency information, protocol, metrics, thresholds, and flags from the target multicast route.

Parameters

ip-address

Specifies the IP address of the multicast-capable target router.

Values

ipv4 unicast address (a.b.c.d)

dns-name

Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.

router-instance

Specifies the router name or service ID for the router instance.

Values

router-name: Base

vprn-service-id: 1 to 2147483647

Default

Base

service-name

Specifies the service name, up to 64 characters.

Platforms

All

Output

The following output is an example of mrinfo information. The output fields are described in the following table.

Output Example
A:dut-f# mrinfo 10.1.1.2

10.1.1.2  [version 3.0,prune,genid,mtrace]:
  10.1.1.2 -> 10.1.1.1 [1/0/pim]
  10.1.1.3 -> 0.0.0.0 [1/0/pim/down/disabled]
  10.1.1.4 -> 0.0.0.0 [1/0/pim/querier/leaf]
  239.200.200.3 -> 239.200.200.5 [1/0/tunnel/pim]... 
Table 21. Mrinfo Output Fields

Label

Description

General flags

version

Indicates software version on queried router

prune

Indicates that router understands pruning

genid

Indicates that router sends generation IDs

mtrace

Indicates that the router handles mtrace requests

Neighbors flags

1

Metric

0

Threshold (multicast time-to-live)

pim

PIM enabled on interface

down

Operational status of interface

disabled

Administrative status of interface

leaf

No downstream neighbors on interface

querier

Interface is IGMP querier

tunnel

Neighbor reached via tunnel

mrouter-dest

mrouter-dest

Syntax

[no] mrouter-dest mac-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>mld-snooping mrouter-dest)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>igmp-snooping mrouter-dest)

Full Context

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls mld-snooping mrouter-dest

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls igmp-snooping mrouter-dest

Description

This command configures the destination B-MAC address name to be used in the related backbone VPLS to reach a specific IGMP or MLD snooping MRouter. The name is associated at system level with the MAC address, using the command config>service>pbb mac-name.

Parameters

mac-name

Specifies the MAC name.

Values

32 chars max

Platforms

All

mrouter-port

mrouter-port

Syntax

[no] mrouter-port

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bind>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bind>mld-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

Full Context

configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls allow-ip-int-bind igmp-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls allow-ip-int-bind mld-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mrouter-port

Description

This command specifies whether a multicast router is attached behind this SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface.

Configuring these objects as an mrouter-port will have a double effect. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface will be copied to this SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface. Secondly, IGMP/MLD reports generated by the system as a result of a router joining or leaving a multicast group, will be sent to this SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface.

If two multicast routers exist in the network, one of them will become the active querier. While the other multicast router (non-querier) stops sending IGMP queries, it should still receive reports to keep its multicast trees up-to-date. To support this, the mrouter-port should be enabled on all SAPs, SDPs, or routed VPLS IP interfaces connecting to a multicast router.

Note:

The IGMP version to be used for the reports (v1, v2, or v3) can only be determined after an initial query has been received. Until such time, no reports are sent on the SAP, spoke-SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface, even if mrouter-port is enabled.

If the send-queries command is enabled on this SAP or spoke-SDP, the mrouter-port parameter cannot be set.

When PIM-snooping is enabled within a VPLS service, all IP multicast traffic and PIM messages will be sent to any SAP or SDP binding configured with an IGMP-snooping mrouter port. This occurs even without IGMP-snooping enabled, but is not supported in a BGP-VPLS or M-VPLS service.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no mrouter-port

Platforms

All

mrouter-port

Syntax

[no] mrouter-port

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

Full Context

configure service vpls vxlan igmp-snooping mrouter-port

Description

This command enables all VXLAN binds to be mrouter ports, indicating that a multicast router is attached behind each VXLAN binding. Configuring these objects as an mrouter-port has two effects. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another object is copied to each VXLAN binding. Secondly, IGMP reports generated by the system as a result of a router joining or leaving a multicast group is sent to all VXLAN bindings. When PIM snooping for IPv4 is enabled within a VPLS service, all IP multicast traffic and PIM for IPv4 messages are sent to all VXLAN bindings configured with an igmp-snooping mrouter-port. This occurs even without igmp-snooping enabled.

Default

no mrouter-port

Platforms

All

mrouter-port

Syntax

[no] mrouter-port

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan>mld-snooping mrouter-port)

Full Context

configure service vpls vxlan mld-snooping mrouter-port

Description

This command enables all VXLAN binds to be mrouter ports, indicating that a multicast router is attached behind each VXLAN binding. Configuring these objects as an mrouter-port has two effects. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another object is copied to each VXLAN binding. Secondly, MLD reports generated by the system as a result of a router joining or leaving a multicast group is sent to all VXLAN bindings.

Default

no mrouter-port

Platforms

All

mrouter-port

Syntax

[no] mrouter-port

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sdp>mld-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sap>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sdp>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sap>mld-snooping mrouter-port)

Full Context

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sdp mld-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sap igmp-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sdp igmp-snooping mrouter-port

configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sap mld-snooping mrouter-port

Description

This command specifies whether a multicast router is attached behind this SAP or spoke-SDP.

Configuring a SAP or spoke-SDP as an mrouter-port will have a double effect. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another SAP or spoke-SDP will be copied to this SAP or spoke-SDP. Secondly, IGMP or MLD reports generated by the system as a result of someone joining or leaving a multicast group, will be sent to this SAP or SDP.

If two multicast routers exist in the local area network, one of them will become the active querier. The other multicast router (non-querier) stops sending IGMP or MLD queries, but it should still receive reports to keep its multicast trees up to date. To support this, the mrouter-port should be enabled on all SAPs or spoke-SDPs connecting to a multicast router.

The IGMP version to be used for the reports (v1, v2 or v3) or MLD version (v1 or v2) can only be determined after an initial query has been received. Until such time no reports are sent on the SAP, even if mrouter-port is enabled.

If the send-queries command is enabled on this SAP or spoke-SDP, the mrouter-port parameter cannot be set.

Default

no mrouter-port

Platforms

All

mrp

mrp

Syntax

mrp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp mrp)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls mrp)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap mrp)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp mrp)

Full Context

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mrp

configure service vpls mrp

configure service vpls sap mrp

configure service vpls mesh-sdp mrp

Description

This command configures Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP) parameters. MRP is valid only under B-VPLS.

Platforms

All

mrp

Syntax

mrp

Context

[Tree] (config>service mrp)

Full Context

configure service mrp

Description

This command configures a Multi-service Route Processor (MRP).

Platforms

All

mrp

Syntax

[no] mrp

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id mrp)

Full Context

debug service id mrp

Description

This command enables and configures MRP debugging.

Platforms

All

mrp-policy

mrp-policy

Syntax

mrp-policy policy-name [create]

no mrp-policy policy-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>mrp mrp-policy)

Full Context

configure service mrp mrp-policy

Description

Commands in this context configure an MRP policy. The mrp-policy specifies either a forward or a drop action for the Group B-MAC attributes associated with the ISIDs specified in the match criteria. The mrp-policy can be applied to multiple BVPLS services as long as the scope of the policy is template.

Any changes made to the existing policy, using any of the sub-commands, will be applied immediately to all services where this policy is applied. For this reason, when many changes are required on a mrp-policy, Nokia recommends that the policy be copied to a work area. That work-in-progress policy can be modified until complete and then written over the original mrp-policy. Use the config mrp-policy copy command to maintain policies in this manner.

The no form of this command deletes the mrp-policy. An MRP policy cannot be deleted until it is removed from all the SAPs or SDPs where it is applied.

Default

no mrp-policy

Parameters

policy-name

Specifies the redirect policy name. Allowed values are any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, etc.), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

create

This keyword is required when first creating the configuration context. When the context is created, it is possible to navigate into the context without the create keyword.

Platforms

All

mrp-policy

Syntax

mrp-policy policy-name

no mrp-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mrp mrp-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mrp mrp-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mrp mrp-policy)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp mrp mrp-policy

configure service vpls spoke-sdp mrp mrp-policy

configure service vpls sap mrp mrp-policy

Description

This command instructs MMRP to use the mrp-policy specified in the command to control which Group B-MAC attributes will be declared and registered on the egress SAP/Mesh-SDP/Spoke-SDP. The Group B-MACs will be derived from the ISIDs using the procedure used in the PBB solution. The Group MAC is standard OUI with the last 24 bits being the ISID value. If the policy-name refers to a non-existing mrp-policy the command should return error. Changes to a mrp-policy are allowed and applied to the SAP/SDPs under which the policy is referenced.

Default

no mrp-policy

Parameters

policy-name

Specifies the redirect policy name. Allowed values are any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

Platforms

All

mrpdu

mrpdu

Syntax

[no] mrpdu

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>mrp mrpdu)

Full Context

debug service id mrp mrpdu

Description

This command enables debugging of the MRP PDUs that are received or transmitted.

The no form of this command disables debugging of MRP PDUs.

Platforms

All

mru

mru

Syntax

mru mru-bytes

no mru

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>pppoe-client-policy mru)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt pppoe-client-policy mru

Description

This command defines which Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) value is signaled by the PPPoE client.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mru 1492

Parameters

mru-bytes

Specifies the MRU value in octets.

Values

512 to 9154

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mru-mismatch-detection

mru-mismatch-detection

Syntax

mru-mismatch-detection

no mru-mismatch-detection

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis mru-mismatch-detection)

[Tree] (config>router>isis mru-mismatch-detection)

Full Context

configure service vprn isis mru-mismatch-detection

configure router isis mru-mismatch-detection

Description

This command verifies that the received IS-IS Hello (IIH) packet size does not exceed the maximum configured port MTU size. The received IIH packet is dropped when its size exceeds the maximum port MTU size.

By default, FP-based hardware does not send IS-IS packets larger than the configured port MTU size, but can accept IS-IS packets larger than the configured port MTU size.

The no form of this command allows the IS-IS router instance not to drop oversized received IIH packets.

Default

no mru-mismatch-detection

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

msap

msap

Syntax

[no] msap msap-id

Context

[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp msap)

Full Context

debug service id ppp msap

Description

This command enable PPP debug for the specified managed SAP.

Multiple msap filters could be specified in the same debug command.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

Parameters

msap-id

Specifies the managed SAP ID.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

msap-defaults

msap-defaults

Syntax

msap-default

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap msap-defaults)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host msap-defaults)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host msap-defaults)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap msap-defaults

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host msap-defaults

configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host msap-defaults

Description

This command configures MSAP authentication defaults.

Platforms

All

  • configure service vpls sap msap-defaults

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host msap-defaults
  • configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host msap-defaults

msap-policy

msap-policy

Syntax

msap-policy msap-policy-name [create]

no msap-policy msap-policy-name

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt msap-policy)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy

Description

This command configures a managed SAP policy. Managed SAPs allow the use of policies and a SAP template for the creation of a SAP.

The no form of this command removes the MSAP policy from the configuration.

Parameters

msap-policy-name

Specifies the managed SAP policy name, up to 32 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

create

Keyword used to create the managed SAP policy. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

msdp

msdp

Syntax

[no] msdp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn msdp)

Full Context

configure service vprn msdp

Description

This command enables a Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) instance. When an MSDP instance is created, the protocol is enabled. To start or suspend execution of the MSDP protocol without affecting the configuration, use the [no] shutdown command.

For the MSDP protocol to function, at least one peer must be configured.

When MSDP is configured and started, an appropriate event message should be generated.

When the no form of this command is executed, all sessions must be terminated and an appropriate event message should be generated.

When all peering sessions are terminated, an event message per peer is not required.

The no form of this command deletes the MSDP protocol instance, removing all associated configuration parameters.

Default

no msdp

Platforms

All

msdp

Syntax

[no] msdp

Context

[Tree] (debug>router msdp)

Full Context

debug router msdp

Description

This command enables debugging for Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP).

The no form of the command disables MSDP debugging.

Platforms

All

msdp

Syntax

[no] msdp

Context

[Tree] (config>router msdp)

Full Context

configure router msdp

Description

This command enables a Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) instance. When an MSDP instance is created, the protocol is enabled. To start or suspend execution of the MSDP protocol without affecting the configuration, use the [no] shutdown command.

For the MSDP protocol to function, at least one peer must be configured.

When MSDP is configured and started an appropriate event message should be generated.

When the no form of the command is executed, all sessions must be terminated and an appropriate event message should be generated.

When all peering sessions are terminated, an event message per peer is not required.

The no form of the command deletes the MSDP protocol instance, removing all associated configuration parameters.

Default

no msdp

Platforms

All

msg

msg

Syntax

[no] msg

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>pim msg)

Full Context

debug router pim msg

Description

This command enables debugging for PIM messaging.

The no form of this command disables debugging for PIM messaging.

Platforms

All

msg

Syntax

msg [detail]

no msg

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>pcep>pcc>conn msg)

[Tree] (debug>router>pcep>pcc msg)

Full Context

debug router pcep pcc connection msg

debug router pcep pcc msg

Description

This command enables debugging for PCC or connection messaging events.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

Parameters

detail

Keyword used to specify detailed information about PCC or connection messaging events.

Platforms

All

msg

Syntax

msg [detail]

no msg

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>pcep>pce>conn msg)

[Tree] (debug>router>pcep>pce msg)

Full Context

debug router pcep pce connection msg

debug router pcep pce msg

Description

This command enables debugging for PCE or connection messaging events.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

Parameters

detail

Keyword used to specify detailed information about PCE or connection messaging events.

Platforms

VSR-NRC

msg-pacing

msg-pacing

Syntax

[no] msg-pacing

Context

[Tree] (config>router>rsvp msg-pacing)

Full Context

configure router rsvp msg-pacing

Description

This command enables RSVP message pacing in which the specified number of RSVP messages, specified in the max-burst command, are sent in a configured interval, specified in the period command. A count is kept of the messages that were dropped because the output queue for the interface used for message pacing was full.

Default

no msg-pacing

Platforms

All

msisdn

msisdn

Syntax

[no] msisdn

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>auth-plcy>include-radius-attribute msisdn)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>acct-plcy>include-radius-attribute msisdn)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt authentication-policy include-radius-attribute msisdn

configure subscriber-mgmt radius-accounting-policy include-radius-attribute msisdn

Description

This command enables the inclusion of the MSISDN in AAA protocols as signaled in the incoming GTP setup message.

The no form of this command disables the inclusion of the attribute.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mss-adjust-group

mss-adjust-group

Syntax

mss-adjust-group bb-group-id segment-size segment-size

no mss-adjust-group

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn mss-adjust-group)

[Tree] (config>router mss-adjust-group)

Full Context

configure service vprn mss-adjust-group

configure router mss-adjust-group

Description

This command associates the MSS adjust group consisting of multiple ISAs with the routing context in which the application requiring TCP MSS adjust resides.

Parameters

bb-group-id

Specifies the group used for TCP MSS adjust

segment-size

Specifies the value to put into the TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) option if it is not already present, or if the present value is higher

Values

160 to 10240

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mst-instance

mst-instance

Syntax

mst-instance mst-inst-number

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp mst-instance)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap stp mst-instance

Description

Commands in this context configure MSTI related parameters at SAP level. This context can be open only for existing mst-instances defined at the service level (see config>service>vpls>stp mst-instance).

Parameters

mst-inst-number

Specifies an existing Multiple Spanning Tree Instance number.

Values

1 to 4094

Platforms

All

mst-instance

Syntax

mst-instance mst-inst-number [create]

no mst-instance [mst-inst-number]

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-instance)

Full Context

configure service vpls stp mst-instance

Description

This command creates the context to configure MST instance (MSTI) related parameters. Up to 16 instances will be supported by MSTP. The instance 0 is mandatory by protocol and therefore, it cannot be created by the CLI. The software will maintain this instance automatically.

Parameters

mst-inst-number

Specifies the Multiple Spanning Tree instance

Values

1 to 4094

Platforms

All

mst-max-hops

mst-max-hops

Syntax

mst-max-hops hops-count

no mst-max-hops

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-max-hops)

Full Context

configure service vpls stp mst-max-hops

Description

This command specifies the number of hops in the region before BPDU is discarded and the information held for the port is aged out. The root bridge of the instance sends a BPDU (or M-record) with remaining-hop-count set to configured <max-hops>. When a bridge receives the BPDU (or M-record), it decrements the received remaining-hop-count by 1 and propagates it in BPDU (or M-record) it generates.

The no form of this command sets the hops-count to its default value.

Default

mst-max-hops 20

Parameters

hops-count

Specifies the maximum number of hops.

Values

1 to 40

Platforms

All

mst-name

mst-name

Syntax

mst-name region-name

no mst-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-name)

Full Context

configure service vpls stp mst-name

Description

This command defines an MST region name. Two bridges are considered as a part of the same MST region as soon as their configuration of the MST region name, the MST-revision and VLAN-to-instance assignment is identical.

The no form of this command removes region-name from the configuration.

Default

no mst-name

Parameters

region-name

Specifies an MST-region name up to 32 characters in length.

Platforms

All

mst-path-cost

mst-path-cost

Syntax

mst-path-cost inst-path-cost

no mst-path-cost

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp>mst-instance mst-path-cost)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap stp mst-instance mst-path-cost

Description

This commands specifies path-cost within a specified instance, expressing probability that a specified port will be put into the forwarding state in case a loop occurs (the highest value expresses lowest priority).

The no form of this command sets port-priority to its default value.

Default

The path-cost is proportional to link speed.

Parameters

inst-path-cost

Specifies the contribution of this port to the MSTI path cost of paths toward the spanning tree regional root that include this port.

Values

1 to 200000000

Platforms

All

mst-port-priority

mst-port-priority

Syntax

mst-port-priority stp-priority

no mst-port-priority

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp>mst-instance mst-port-priority)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap stp mst-instance mst-port-priority

Description

This commands specifies the port priority within a specified instance, expressing probability that a specified port will be put into the forwarding state if a loop occurs.

The no form of this command sets port-priority to its default value.

Default

mst-port-priority 128

Parameters

stp-priority

Specifies the value of the port priority field.

Platforms

All

mst-priority

mst-priority

Syntax

mst-priority bridge-priority

no mst-priority

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp>mst-instance mst-priority)

Full Context

configure service vpls stp mst-instance mst-priority

Description

This command specifies the bridge priority for this specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance for this service. The bridge-priority value reflects likelihood that the switch will be chosen as the regional root switch (65535 represents the least likely). It is used as the highest 4 bits of the Bridge ID included in the MSTP BPDUs generated by this bridge.

The priority can only take on values that are multiples of 4096 (4k). If a value is specified that is not a multiple of 4K, then the value will be replaced by the closest multiple of 4K, which is lower than the value entered.

All instances created by the configure service vpls stp mst-instance vlan-range command and not having explicit definition of bridge-priority inherit the default value.

The no form of this command sets the bridge-priority to its default value.

Default

mst-priority 32768

Parameters

bridge-priority

Specifies the priority of this specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance for this service.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

All

mst-revision

mst-revision

Syntax

mst-revision revision-number

no mst-revision

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-revision)

Full Context

configure service vpls stp mst-revision

Description

This command defines the MST configuration revision number. Two bridges are considered as a part of the same MST region as soon as their configuration of MST-region name, MST-revision and VLAN-to-instance assignment is identical.

The no form of this command returns MST configuration revision to its default value.

Default

mst-revision 0

Parameters

revision-number

Specifies the MSTP region revision number to define the MSTP region.

Values

0 to 65535

Platforms

All

mstat

mstat

Syntax

mstat source [ip-address | dns-name] group {ip-address | dns-name} [destination ip-address | dns-name] [hop hop] [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [wait-time wait-time]

Context

[Tree] (mstat)

Full Context

mstat

Description

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver and displays multicast packet rate and loss information.

Parameters

source ip-address

Specifies the ip-address of the multicast capable target router.

Values

ipv4 address (a.b.c.d)

dns-name

Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.

group ip-address

Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that will be used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) is used. This will suffice if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.

destination ip-address

Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted the IP address of the system where the command is entered will be used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response is also returned to the address specified as the receiver.

hop

Specifies the maximum number of hops that will be traced from the receiver back toward the source.

Values

1 to 255

Default

32 hops (infinity for the DVMRP routing protocol)

router-instance

Specifies the router name or service ID used to identify the router instance.

Values

router-name:

Base

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

Default

Base

service-name

Specifies the service name up to 64 characters in length.

wait-time

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the response.

Values

1 to 60

Platforms

All

Output

The following output is an example of mstat information. The output fields are described in the following table.

Output Example
  Source          Response Dest     Overall       Packet Statistics for Traffic From
10.10.16.9        10.20.1.6        Mcast Pkt       10.10.16.9 to 239.5.6.7
     |         __/  rtt   29 ms      Rate          Lost/Sent = Pct Rate
     v        /                    ---------       --------------------
10.10.16.3
10.10.2.3         ?
     |       ^      ttl   2          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.2.1
10.10.1.1         ?
     |       ^      ttl   3          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.1.2
10.10.4.2         ?             Reached RP/Core
     |       ^      ttl   4          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.4.4
10.10.6.4         ?
     |       ^      ttl   5          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.6.5
10.10.10.5        ?
     |       \__    ttl   6          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v          \
10.10.10.6       10.20.1.6
Receiver         Query Source
Table 22. Mstat Output Fields

Label

Description

hop

The number of hops from the source to the listed router

router name

The number of the router for this hop or "?” when not reverse DNS translated

address

The address of the router for this hop

protocol

The protocol used

ttl

The forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it is forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

Forwarding information/error code for this hop

For each interface between two nodes a line is printed, following the same layout as other routers with an implementation derived from mrouted. Consider the following:

  • The forwarding information/error code is only displayed when different from "No Error”.

  • "?” means there is no reverse DNS translation.

  • There is no "Overall Mcast Pkt Rate” available in the PE for the VPRN case.

mstat2

mstat2

Syntax

mstat2 source [ip-address | dns-name | starg] group {ip-address | dns-name} [destination ip-address | dns-name] [hop hop] [router router-instance | service-name vprn-service-name] [wait-time seconds]

Context

[Tree] (mstat2)

Full Context

mstat2

Description

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver and displays multicast packet rate and loss information.

Parameters

source ip-address

Specifies the ip-address of the multicast capable target router.

Values

ipv4-prefix:

  • a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

  • x: [0 to FFFF]H

  • d: [0 to 255]D

dns-name

Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.

starg

Specifies a static (*,G) entry. This command can only be enabled if no existing source addresses for this source is specified.

group ip-address

Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that will be used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) is used. This will suffice if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.

Values

ipv4-prefix:

  • a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

  • x: [0 to FFFF]H

  • d: [0 to 255]D

destination ip-address

Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted the IP address of the system where the command is entered will be used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response is also returned to the address specified as the receiver.

Values

ipv4-prefix:

  • a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

  • x: [0 to FFFF]H

  • d: [0 to 255]D

hop

Specifies the maximum number of hops that are traced from the receiver back toward the source.

Values

1 to 255

Default

32

router-instance

Specifies the router name or service ID used to identify the router instance.

Values

router-name:

Base

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

Default

Base

vprn-service-name

Specifies the service name, up to 64 characters.

seconds

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the response.

Values

1 to 60

Default

3

Platforms

All

Output

Table 23. Mstat2 Output Fields

Label

Description

hop

Number of hops from the source to the listed router.

router name

Name of the router for this hop or "?” when not reverse DNS translated.

address

Address of the router for this hop.

protocol

Protocol used.

ttl

Forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it will be forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

Forwarding information/error code for this hop.

For each interface between two nodes a line is printed, following the same layout as other routers with an implementation derived from mrouted. Consider the following:

  • The forwarding information/error code is only displayed when different from "No Error”.

  • "?” means there is no reverse DNS translation.

  • There is no "Overall Mcast Pkt Rate” available in the PE for the VPRN case.

Output Example
*A:Dut-A# mstat2 group 239.225.6.1 source 10.0.1.66
Mtrace2 from 150.0.1.66 via group 225.6.6.1 Querying full reverse path...
Waiting to accumulate statistics...Results after 10 seconds:
 Source        Response Dest    Overall     Packet Statistics For 
Traffic From
10.0.1.66      10.0.0.1         Mcast Pkt    10.10.1.66 To 239.5.6.7
      |       __/  rtt 24.0ms     Rate       Lost/Sent = Pct  Rate
      v      /                    -------     ---------------------
10.0.1.6
10.0.1.6       ?
      |     ^      ttl    2        10 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
10.0.1.4
10.10.4.4       usilhc03-hb2.ndc.lucent.com Reached RP/Core
      |     ^      ttl    3        10 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
10.10.4.2
10.0.1.2       10.1.0.110.ap.yournet.ne.jp
      |      \__   ttl    4        10 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v         \
10.0.1.1       10.0.0.1
   Receiver      Query Source

*A:Dut-A# mstat2  group ff05::225:6:6:1 source 3ffe::150:0:1:66
Mtrace2 from source
<S> = 3ffe::150:0:1:66
via group
<G> = ff05::225:6:6:1
Querying full reverse path...
Waiting to accumulate statistics...Results after 10 seconds:
Destination <D> = 3ffe::120:0:1:1
Response Destination <RD> = 3ffe::1
   Source        Response Dest    Overall     Packet Statistics For 
Traffic From
<S>             <RD>            Mcast Pkt    Source <S> To Group <G>
      |       __/  rtt 23.0ms     Rate       Lost/Sent = Pct  Rate
      v      /                    -------     ---------------------
Remote Address ::
Incoming IF 4
3ffe::6 ?
Outgoing IF 3
      |     ^      ttl    2        20 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
Remote Address fe80::a248:1ff:fe01:2
Incoming IF 2
3ffe::5 ? Reached RP/Core
Outgoing IF 3
      |     ^      ttl    3        20 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
Remote Address fe80::a246:1ff:fe01:1
Incoming IF 3
3ffe::3 ?
Outgoing IF 2
      |      \__   ttl    4        30 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v         \
<D>             <RD>
   Receiver      Query Source

mt

mt

Syntax

mt {ipv4-unicast | ipv4-multicast | ipv6-unicast | ipv6-multicast}

no mt

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bier>template>sub-domain mt)

Full Context

configure router bier template sub-domain mt

Description

This command specifies the multi-topology for this sub-domain.

The no form of this command removes the multi-topology from this sub-domain.

Parameters

ipv4-unicast

Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv4 unicast topology. IPv4 unicast imports routes into the unicast RTM.

ipv4-multicast

Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv4 multicast topology. IPv4 multicast imports routes into the multicast RTM.

ipv6-unicast

Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv6 unicast topology. IPv6 unicast imports routes into the unicast RTM.

ipv6-multicast

Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv6 multicast topology. IPv6 multicast imports routes into the multicast RTM.

Platforms

All

mtrace

mtrace

Syntax

mtrace source [ip-address | dns-name] group {ip-address | dns-name} [destination ip-address | dns-name] [hop hop] [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [wait-time wait-time]

Context

[Tree] (mtrace)

Full Context

mtrace

Description

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver.

Parameters

source ip-address

Specifies the ip-address of the multicast capable target router.

Values

ipv4 address (a.b.c.d)

dns-name

Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured). 63 characters maximum.

group ip-address

Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that will be used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) will be used. This will suffice if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.

destination ip-address

Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted the IP address of the system where the command is entered will be used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response will also be returned to the address specified as the receiver.

hop

Specifies the maximum number of hops that will be traced from the receiver back toward the source.

Values

1 to 255

Default

32 hops (infinity for the DVMRP routing protocol)

router-instance

Specifies the router name or service ID used the identify the router instance.

Values

router-name:

"Base”

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

Default

Base

service-name

Specifies the service name up, to 64 characters.

wait-time

Specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for the response.

Values

1 to 60

Platforms

All

Output

The following output is an example of mtrace information.

Output Example
A:Dut-F# mtrace source 10.10.16.9 group 239.5.6.7

Mtrace from 10.10.16.9 via group 239.5.6.7
Querying full reverse path...

 0 ? (10.10.10.6)
-1 ? (10.10.10.5) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-2 ? (10.10.6.4) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-3 ? (10.10.4.2) PIM thresh^ 1 Reached RP/Core
-4 ? (10.10.1.1) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-5 ? (10.10.2.3) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-6 ? (10.10.16.9)

Round trip time 29 ms; total ttl of 5 required.
Table 24. Mtrace Output Fields

Label

Description

hop

The number of hops from the source to the listed router

router name

The name of the router for this hop. If a DNS name query is not successful a "?” displays.

address

The address of the router for this hop

protocol

The protocol used

ttl

The forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it will be forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

The forwarding information/error code for this hop

mtrace

Syntax

[no] mtrace

Context

[Tree] (debug>router mtrace)

Full Context

debug router mtrace

Description

This command configures debugging for mtrace.

Platforms

All

mtrace2

mtrace2

Syntax

mtrace2

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn mtrace2)

[Tree] (config>router mtrace2)

Full Context

configure service vprn mtrace2

configure router mtrace2

Description

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver.

Platforms

All

mtrace2

Syntax

mtrace2 source [ip-address | dns-name | starg] group {ip-address | dns-name} [destination ip-address | dns-name] [hop hop-count] [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [wait-time wait-time]

Context

[Tree] (mtrace2)

Full Context

mtrace2

Description

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver.

Parameters

source ip-address

Specifies the IP address of the multicast capable target router.

Values

ipv4-prefix:

  • a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

  • x: [0 to FFFF]H

  • d: [0 to 255]D

dns-name

Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.

starg

Specifies a static (*,G) entry. This command can only be enabled if no existing source addresses for this source is specified.

group ip-address

Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that is used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) is used. This suffices if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.

Values

ipv4-prefix:

  • a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

  • x: [0 to FFFF]H

  • d: [0 to 255]D

destination ip-address

Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted, the IP address of the system where the command is entered is used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response is returned to the address specified as the receiver.

Values

ipv4-prefix:

  • a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

  • x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

  • x: [0 to FFFF]H

  • d: [0 to 255]D

hop-count

Specifies the maximum number of hops that are traced from the receiver back toward the source.

Values

1 to 255

Default

32 hops (infinity for the DVMRP routing protocol)

router-instance

Specifies the router name or service ID used the identify the router instance.

Values

router-name:

"Base”

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

Default

Base

service-name

Specifies the service name, up to 64 characters.

wait-time

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the response.

Values

1 to 60

Platforms

All

mtrace2

Syntax

[no] mtrace2

Context

[Tree] (debug>router mtrace2)

Full Context

debug router mtrace2

Description

This command configures debugging for mtrace2.

Platforms

All

mtu

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel>ppp mtu)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>ppp mtu)

[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel>ppp mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>ppp mtu)

Full Context

configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel ppp mtu

configure router l2tp group ppp mtu

configure router l2tp group tunnel ppp mtu

configure service vprn l2tp group ppp mtu

Description

This command configures the maximum PPP MTU size.

Default

mtu 1500

Parameters

mtu-bytes

Specifies, in bytes, the maximum PPP MTU size.

Values

512 to 9212

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu bytes

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)

[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if mtu)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 mtu

configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 mtu

configure service vprn router-advertisement interface mtu

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu

configure router router-advertisement interface mtu

configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy mtu

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu

configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu

Description

This command specifies the value to be placed in link MTU options sent by the router on this interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

no mtu — The MTU option is not sent in the router advertisement messages.

Parameters

bytes

Specifies the advertised MTU value in bytes for this interface.

Values

1280 to 9800 (for config>router>router-advert>if and config>service>vprn>router-advert>if contexts only)

1280 to 9212 (for subscriber management context, ies and vprn service subscriber-interface contexts)

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 mtu
  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 mtu
  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
  • configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy mtu

All

  • configure service vprn router-advertisement interface mtu
  • configure router router-advertisement interface mtu

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>pppoe-client-policy mtu)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt pppoe-client-policy mtu

Description

This command defines which Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is applied, by default, for packets egressing the PPP link. If a lower MRU is sent during PPP link establishment, the MRU value is used.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

mtu 1492

Parameters

mtu-bytes

Specifies the MTU value in octets.

Values

512 to 9154

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mtu)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group mtu)

[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path mtu)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3 mtu)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mtu)

[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group mtu)

Full Context

configure port ethernet mtu

configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mtu

configure port sonet-sdh path mtu

configure port tdm e3 mtu

configure port tdm ds3 mtu

configure port tdm e1 channel-group mtu

Description

This command configures the maximum payload MTU size for an Ethernet port, PPP-enabled port or sub-port and Frame Relay-enabled port or subport. The Ethernet port level MTU parameter indirectly defines the largest physical packet the port can transmit or the far-end Ethernet port can receive. Packets that cannot be fragmented at egress and exceed the MTU are discarded.

The value specified for the MTU includes the destination MAC address, source MAC address, the Ethertype or Length field and the complete Ethernet payload. The MTU value does not include the preamble, start of frame delimiter or the trailing CRC.

PoS channels use the MTU to define the largest PPP payload a PoS frame may contain. A significant difference between SONET/SDH PoS channel and Ethernet physical MTU values the overhead considered part of the framing method and the overhead considered to be part of the application using the frame. In Ethernet, the preamble, start of frame delimiter and the CRC are considered part of the framing overhead and not part of the frame payload. For a PoS channel, the HDLC framing overhead is not included in the physical MTU; only the PPP and PPP payload are included. If the port mode or encapsulation type is changed, the MTU assumes the default values of the new mode or encapsulation type.

The no form of this command restores the default values.

Default

The default MTU value depends on the (sub-)port type, mode and encapsulation and are listed in Default MTU Values:

Table 25. Default MTU Values

Type

Mode

Encap Type

Default (Bytes)

10/100, Gig, or 10GigE

Access

null

1514

10/100, Gig, or 10GigE

Access

dot1q

1518

10/100, Gig, or 10GigE

Access

q-in-q

1522

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

mpls

1506

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

bcp-null

1518

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

bcp-dot1q

1522

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

ipcp

1502

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

frame-relay

1578

ATM, SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

atm

1524

10/100 or 100FX Ethernet

Network

null

1514

10/100 or 100FX Ethernet

Network

dot1q

1518

SONET/SDH

Network

ppp-auto

1524

Parameters

mtu-bytes

Sets the maximum allowable size of the MTU, expressed as an integer.

Values

512 to 9212

config>port>ethernet

512 to 9800

config>port>ethernet (for FP4-based connector ports)

512 to 9208

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>ds3

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>e3

Platforms

All

  • configure port ethernet mtu

7450 ESS, 7750 SR-7/12/12e, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e

  • configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mtu
  • configure port tdm e3 mtu
  • configure port tdm e1 channel-group mtu
  • configure port tdm ds3 mtu

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure port sonet-sdh path mtu

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if mtu)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if mtu)

Full Context

configure service vprn ospf area interface mtu

configure service vprn ospf3 area interface mtu

Description

This command configures the OSPF packet size used on this interface. If this parameter is not configured, OSPF derives the MTU value from the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in the following contexts:

config>port>ethernet, config>port>sonet-sdh>path, config>port>tdm>t3-e3, config>port>tdm>t1-e1>channel-group

If this parameter is configured, the smaller value between the value configured here and the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in an above-mentioned contexts is used.

To determine the actual packet size, add 14 bytes for an Ethernet packet and 18 bytes for a tagged Ethernet packet to the size of the OSPF (IP) packet MTU configured in this command.

The no form of this command reverts to default value derived from the MTU configured in the config>port context.

Default

no mtu

Parameters

mtu-bytes

Specifies the MTU to be used by OSPF for this logical interface, in bytes.

Values

512 to 9786

Platforms

All

mtu

Syntax

mtu value

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>outside mtu)

Full Context

configure service vprn nat outside mtu

Description

This command configures the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for downstream traffic flowing through this router (as outside NAT router). The system fragments IP datagrams exceeding the MTU.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default

no mtu

Parameters

value

Specifies the MTU for downstream traffic.

Values

512 to 9000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-size

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>router>nat>outside mtu)

Full Context

configure router nat outside mtu

Description

This command configures the MTU for downstream traffic flowing through this router (as outside NAT router). The system fragments IP datagrams exceeding the MTU.

Default

no mtu

Parameters

mtu-size

Specifies the MTU for downstream traffic.

Values

512 to 9000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipfix>export-policy>collector mtu)

Full Context

configure service ipfix ipfix-export-policy collector mtu

Description

This command sets the MTU size of the UDP packet containing IPFIX records destined for the collector node. Multiple records will be stuffed into a single IP packet until stuffing an additional data record would exceed MTU or the internal timer of 250 ms expires.

Default

mtu 1500

Parameters

mtu

Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit range.

Values

512 to 9212

Platforms

All

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-size

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>syslog>syslog-export-policy mtu)

Full Context

configure service nat syslog syslog-export-policy mtu

Description

The command defines the MTU, the maximum size of the IP frame that can be transmitted. The size of the frame includes the syslog message and the IP header. This is an IP-MTU value.

When aggregation is enabled (the max-tx-delay command), generation of a syslog frame carrying multiple flow logs is triggered by one of the two events (whichever occurs first):

  • Expiry of the max-tx-delay timer

  • Exceeding MTU size

Default

mtu 1500

Parameters

mtu-size

Specifies the MTU size in bytes.

Values

512 to 9000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-size

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>service>nat>map-domain mtu)

Full Context

configure service nat map-domain mtu

Description

This command configures the IPv6 MTU in a MAP domain. The configured MTU applies to traffic in the downstream direction, towards the CE. The configured MTU value must be lower than the MTU of the outgoing port for the traffic, which includes L2 overhead.

Default

mtu 8686

Parameters

mtu-size

Specifies the IPMTU size of the translated IPv6 packet.

Values

160 to 8686

Platforms

VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu bytes

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>interface mtu)

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface mtu)

Full Context

configure router ospf3 area interface mtu

configure router ospf area interface mtu

Description

This command configures the OSPF packet size used on this interface. If this parameter is not configured OSPF derives the MTU value from the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in the following contexts:

  • config>port>ethernet

  • config>port>sonet-sdh>path

  • config>port>tdm>t3-e3

  • config>port>tdm>t1-e1>channel-group

If this parameter is configured, the smaller value between the value configured here and the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in an above-mentioned context is used.

To determine the actual packet size, add 14 bytes for an Ethernet packet and 18 bytes for a tagged Ethernet packet to the size of the OSPF (IP) packet MTU configured in this command.

The no form of this command reverts to the default derived from the MTU configured in the config>port context.

Default

no mtu

Parameters

bytes

Specifies the MTU to be used by OSPF for this logical interface in bytes.

Values

512 to 9786 in the config>router>ospf>area>interface context.

1280 to 9786 in the config>router>ospf3>area>interface context.

Platforms

All

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-size

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>fwd-path-ext>fpe>srv6>interface-b mtu)

Full Context

configure fwd-path-ext fpe srv6 interface-b mtu

Description

This command configures the Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) of interface-b of the SRv6 originating FPE.

The MTU is used to check if an IPv4 service packet should be fragmented and if an IPv6 service packet should be dropped when tunneled over SRv6.

The minimum value is the IPv6 minimum MTU value. The maximum value is set to the FP4 or FP5 maximum Ethernet port MTU of 9800 minus 14 bytes for Null Ethernet encapsulation.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

mtu 9786

Parameters

mtu-size

Specifies the MTU size, in bytes.

Values

1280 to 9786

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-size

no mtu

Context

[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>servers>ipv6 mtu)

Full Context

configure aaa isa-radius-policy servers ipv6 mtu

Description

This command configures the MTU used to fragment outgoing IPv6 RADIUS packets.

The no form of this command configures the router to use the default value.

Default

mtu 9000

Parameters

mtu-size

Specifies the MTU size, in bytes.

Values

1280 to 9000

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mtu-over-head

mtu-over-head

Syntax

mtu-over-head mtu-value

no mtu-over-head

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mtu-over-head)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim mtu-over-head

Description

This commands subtracts the specified value from the MVPN MTU to allow a BIER header to be added without exceeding the network MTU.

Default

no mtu-over-head

Parameters

mtu-value

Specifies the value subtracted from the MVPN MTU.

Values

44, 76, 140, 268, 536

Platforms

All

multi-access

multi-access

Syntax

[no] multi-access

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access multi-access)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access multi-access)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access multi-access

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access multi-access

Description

This command enables access from multiple APs into a per-tenant BD and the associated vRGW (BRG) instance.

The no form of this command disables access from multiple APs and limits access from a single AP into per tenant bridge domain (BD) and the associated vRGW (BRG) instance.

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-active

multi-active

Syntax

[no] multi-active

Context

[Tree] (config>isa>tunnel-grp multi-active)

Full Context

configure isa tunnel-group multi-active

Description

This command enables configuring multiple active MS-ISA in the tunnel-group. IPsec traffic will be load balanced to configured active MS-ISAs.

Operational notes:

  • A shutdown of group and removal of all existing configured tunnels of the tunnel-group are needed before provisioning command "multi-active”.

  • If the tunnel-group is admin-up with "multi-active” configured then the configuration of "primary” and "backup” are not allowed.

  • The active-mda-number must be =< total number of ISA configured.

    • If active-mda-number is less than total number of ISA configured then the delta number of ISA will become backup ISA.

Default

no multi-active

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-chassis

multi-chassis

Syntax

multi-chassis

Context

[Tree] (config>redundancy multi-chassis)

Full Context

configure redundancy multi-chassis

Description

Commands in this context configure multi-chassis parameters.

Platforms

All

multi-chassis-redundancy

multi-chassis-redundancy

Syntax

multi-chassis-redundancy seconds

no multi-chassis-redundancy

Context

[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache>minimum-lifetimes multi-chassis-redundancy)

Full Context

configure python python-policy cache minimum-lifetimes multi-chassis-redundancy

Description

This command specifies the minimum lifetime for a cache entry to be synchronized with the MCS peer.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

seconds

Specifies the multi-chassis redundancy time in second.

Values

1 to 600

Platforms

All

multi-chassis-shunt-id

multi-chassis-shunt-id

Syntax

multi-chassis-shunt-id id

no multi-chassis-shunt-id

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>subscriber-mgmt multi-chassis-shunt-id)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>subscriber-mgmt multi-chassis-shunt-id)

Full Context

configure service ies subscriber-mgmt multi-chassis-shunt-id

configure service vprn subscriber-mgmt multi-chassis-shunt-id

Description

This command configures the shunt ID that is used to shunt downstream traffic from a standby node to an active node. Because this ID identifies the traffic service on the standby node, the same ID must be configured per service on each node. This configuration is required for BNG CUPS inter-BNG-UP resiliency shunting, not for non- BNG-UP shunting. However, when configured, it is also used for shunting non- BNG-UPsessions in the same service.

The no form of the command removes the configuration.

Parameters

id

Specifies the shunt ID.

Values

1 to 8191

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-chassis-shunt-interface

multi-chassis-shunt-interface

Syntax

multi-chassis-shunt-interface ip-int-name [create]

no multi-chassis-shunt-interface ip-int-name

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ipsec multi-chassis-shunt-interface)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ipsec multi-chassis-shunt-interface)

Full Context

configure router ipsec multi-chassis-shunt-interface

configure service vprn ipsec multi-chassis-shunt-interface

Description

Commands in this context configure a multi-chassis IPsec shunt interface.

The no form of this command removes the interface name from the configuration.

Parameters

ip-int-name

Specifies the shunt interface name, up to 32 characters.

create

Keyword used to create the command instance.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-chassis-shunt-interface

Syntax

multi-chassis-shunt-interface ip-int-name

no multi-chassis-shunt-interface ip-int-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ipsec>mc-shunt-profile>peer multi-chassis-shunt-interface)

[Tree] (config>router>ipsec>mc-shunt-profile>peer multi-chassis-shunt-interface)

Full Context

configure service vprn ipsec multi-chassis-shunting-profile peer multi-chassis-shunt-interface

configure router ipsec multi-chassis-shunting-profile peer multi-chassis-shunt-interface

Description

This command associates a multi-chassis-shunt-interface for the peer. The specified interface shunts traffic to the peer.

The no form of this command removes association from the configuration.

Parameters

ip-int-name

Specifies the shunt interface name, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-chassis-shunting-profile

multi-chassis-shunting-profile

Syntax

multi-chassis-shunting-profile name [create]

no multi-chassis-shunting-profile name

Context

[Tree] (config router ipsec multi-chassis-shunting-profile)

[Tree] (config service vprn ipsec multi-chassis-shunting-profile)

Full Context

configure router ipsec multi-chassis-shunting-profile

configure service vprn ipsec multi-chassis-shunting-profile

Description

Commands in this context configure a multi-chassis IPsec shunting profile.

The no form of this command removes the name from the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the profile name of a MC shunting profile, up to 32 characters.

create

Keyword used to create the command instance.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-chassis-shunting-profile

Syntax

multi-chassis-shunting-profile name

no multi-chassis-shunting-profile

Context

[Tree] (config service ies if multi-chassis-shunting-profile)

[Tree] (config service vprn if multi-chassis-shunting-profile)

Full Context

configure service ies interface multi-chassis-shunting-profile

configure service vprn interface multi-chassis-shunting-profile

Description

This command associates an existing multi-chassis IPsec shunting profile with the service interface.

The no form of this command removes the name from the configuration.

Parameters

name

Specifies the profile name of a multi-chassis-shunting profile, up to 32 characters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-homed-prefix

multi-homed-prefix

Syntax

[no] multi-homed-prefix

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf>lfa multi-homed-prefix)

Full Context

configure router ospf loopfree-alternates multi-homed-prefix

Description

This command enables multi-homed prefix LFA for OSPF routes (IP FRR) and SR-OSPF node SID tunnels.

This feature makes use of the multi-homed prefix model described in RFC 8518 to compute a backup IP next hop using an alternate ABR or ASBR for external prefixes and to an alternate router owner for local anycast prefixes.

This feature further enhances the multi-homed prefix backup path calculation beyond RFC 8518 with the addition of repair tunnels that make use of a PQ node or a P-Q set to reach the alternate exit ABR or ASBR of external prefixes or the alternate owner router of local anycast prefixes.

The computed IP next-hop based backup path is added to OSPF routes of external /32 prefixes (OSPFv2 routes types 3, 4, 5, and 7) and local /32 anycast prefixes in the RTM if the prefix is not protected by base LFA or if the user set leaf preference value to all. The user must enable the ip-fast-reroute leaf to have these backup paths programmed into the FIB in data path.

The computed IP next hop or repair tunnel based backup path is also programmed for SR-OSPF node SID tunnels of external /32 prefixes and to /32 prefixes in same area as the computing node S and which are advertised by multiple routers (anycast prefix) in both algorithm 0 and flexible-algorithm numbers.

The no form of this command disables multi-homed prefix LFA.

Default

no multi-homed-prefix

Platforms

All

multi-homed-prefix

Syntax

[no] multi-homed-prefix

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>lfa multi-homed-prefix)

Full Context

configure router isis loopfree-alternates multi-homed-prefix

Description

This command enables multihomed prefix LFA for IS-IS routes (IP FRR), SR-ISIS tunnels, and SRv6-ISIS tunnels.

This feature uses the multihomed prefix model described in RFC 8518 to compute a backup IP next hop using an alternate ABR or ASBR for external prefixes and to an alternate router owner for local anycast prefixes.

This feature further enhances the multihomed prefix backup path calculation beyond RFC 8518 with the addition of repair tunnels that make use of a PQ node or a P-Q set to reach the alternate exit ABR or ASBR of external prefixes or the alternate owner router of intra-area anycast prefixes.

The computed IP next hop-based backup path is added to IS-IS routes of external /32 or /128 prefixes and intra-area /32 or /128 anycast prefixes in the RTM if the prefix is not protected by base LFA or if the user set leaf preference command option to all. The user must enable the ip-fast-reroute leaf to have these backup paths programmed into the FIB in datapath.

The computed IP next hop or repair tunnel-based backup path is also programmed for:

  1. SR-ISIS node SID tunnels of external /32 IPv4 prefixes and /128 IPv6 prefixes, and node SID tunnels of intra-area /32 IPv4 anycast prefixes and /128 anycast IPv6 prefixes, in both algorithm 0 and flexible-algorithms
  2. SRv6-ISIS locator routes and tunnels of external prefixes and of intra-area anycast prefixes of any size, in both algorithm 0 and flexible algorithm numbers

As a result, an SR-TE LSP, an SR-MPLS policy, or an SRv6 policy which uses an SR-ISIS SID or an SRv6-ISIS SID of those same prefixes in its configured or computed SID list benefits from the multi-homed prefix LFA protection.

Once the IP next-hop based multihomed prefix LFA is enabled, the extensions to compute an SR-TE repair tunnel for the multihomed prefix LFA in the case of SR-ISIS and SRv6-ISIS are automatically enabled if the user also enabled TI-LFA or Remote LFA. The computation reuses the SID list of the primary path or of the TI-LFA or Remote LFA backup path of the alternate ABR or ASBR or alternate owner router.

The no form of this command disables multihomed prefix LFA.

Default

no multi-homed-prefix

Platforms

All

multi-homing

multi-homing

Syntax

multi-homing single-active [no-esi-label]

multi-homing all-active

no multi-homing

Context

[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn>eth-seg multi-homing)

Full Context

configure service system bgp-evpn ethernet-segment multi-homing

Description

This command configures the multi-homing mode for the Ethernet-Segment as single-active or all-active multi-homing, as defined in RFC7432.

By default, the use of esi-label is enabled for all-active and single-active as defined in RFC7432 (for single-active multi-homing, the esi-label is used to avoid transient loops).

When single-active no-esi-label is specified, the system will not allocate a label for the esi and hence advertise esi label 0 to peers. Even if the esi is configured to not send the esi-label, upon reception of an esi-label from a peer, the PE will always send traffic to that peer using the received esi-label.

Default

no multi-homing

Parameters

single-active

Configures single-active mode for the Ethernet-Segment.

all-active

Configures the system to not send an esi-label for single-active mode.

no-esi-label

Configures single-active mode for the Ethernet-Segment.

Platforms

All

multi-instance

multi-instance

Syntax

[no] multi-instance

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf multi-instance)

Full Context

configure router ospf multi-instance

Description

This command enables OSPF multi-instance RFC 6549, OSPFv2 Multi-Instance Extensions, support in the BASE router. This support is enabled per instance and allows flexibility when migrating a specific instance from the classic OSPFv2 to a multi-instance OSPFv2.

The no form of this command disables OSPF multi-instance support in the BASE router.

Default

no multi-instance

Platforms

All

multi-path

multi-path

Syntax

multi-path

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp multi-path)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp multi-path

Description

This command configures ECMP multipath parameters to apply to address families that support BGP multipath.

Platforms

All

multi-path

Syntax

multi-path

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp multi-path)

Full Context

configure router bgp multi-path

Description

This command configures ECMP multipath parameters to apply to address families that support BGP multipath.

Platforms

All

multi-path

Syntax

[no] multi-path

Context

[Tree] (config>fwd-path-ext>fpe multi-path)

Full Context

configure fwd-path-ext fpe multi-path

Description

This command enables configuration of multipath FPEs that can contain multiple port cross-connect (PXC) ports or LAGs of PXC ports.

The no form of the command disables multipath FPE.

Default

no multi-path

Platforms

All

multi-path-list

multi-path-list

Syntax

multi-path-list

Context

[Tree] (config>fwd-path-ext>fpe multi-path-list)

Full Context

configure fwd-path-ext fpe multi-path-list

Description

This command enables the context to configure a multipath FPE list instance, which can contain multiple PXC ports or LAGs of PXC ports.

Platforms

All

multi-service-site

multi-service-site

Syntax

[no] multi-service-site customer-site-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap multi-service-site)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap multi-service-site)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap multi-service-site)

Full Context

configure service ies interface sap multi-service-site

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap multi-service-site

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap multi-service-site

Description

This command creates a new customer site or edits an existing customer site with the customer-site-name parameter. A customer site is an anchor point to create an ingress and egress virtual scheduler hierarchy. When a site is created, it must be assigned to a chassis slot or port. When scheduler policies are defined for ingress and egress, the scheduler names contained in each policy are created according to the parameters defined in the policy. Multi-service customer sites exist for the sole purpose of creating a virtual scheduler hierarchy and making it available to queues on multiple Service Access Points (SAPs).

The scheduler policy association with the customer site normally prevents the scheduler policy from being deleted until after the scheduler policy is removed from the customer site. The multi-service-site object generates a log message indicating that the association was deleted due to scheduler policy removal.

When the multi-service customer site is created, an ingress and egress scheduler policy association does not exist. This does not prevent the site from being assigned to a chassis slot or prevent service SAP assignment. After the site has been created, the ingress and egress scheduler policy associations can be assigned or removed at any time.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Default

n/a — Each customer site must be explicitly created.

Parameters

customer-site-name

Each customer site must have a unique name within the context of the customer. If customer-site-name already exists for the customer ID, the CLI context changes to that site name for the purpose of editing the site scheduler policies or assignment. Any modifications made to an existing site affects all SAPs associated with the site. Changing a scheduler policy association may cause new schedulers to be created and existing policers and queues on the SAPs to no longer be orphaned. Existing schedulers on the site may cease to exist, causing policers and queues relying on that scheduler to be orphaned.

If the customer-site-name does not exist, it is assumed that an attempt is being made to create a site of that name in the customer ID context. The success of the command execution depends on the following:

The maximum number of customer sites defined for the chassis slot has not been met.

The customer-site-name is valid.

The create keyword is included in the command line syntax (if the system requires it).

When the maximum number of customer sites has been exceeded a configuration error occurs, the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

If the customer-site-name is invalid, a syntax error occurs, the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

Values

Valid names consist of any string, up to 32 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters excluding double quotes. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

Platforms

All

  • configure service ies interface sap multi-service-site

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap multi-service-site
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap multi-service-site

multi-service-site

Syntax

multi-service-site customer-site-name

no multi-service-site

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap multi-service-site)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sap multi-service-site)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap multi-service-site)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap multi-service-site

configure service ies sap multi-service-site

configure service vpls sap multi-service-site

Description

This command associates the SAP with a customer-site-name. If the specified customer-site-name does not exist in the context of the service customer ID an error occurs and the command is not executed. If customer-site-name exists, the current and future defined queues on the SAP (ingress and egress) attempts to use the scheduler hierarchies created within customer-site-name as parent schedulers.

This command is mutually exclusive with the SAP ingress and egress scheduler policy commands. If a scheduler policy has been applied to either the ingress or egress nodes on the SAP, the multi-service-site command fails without executing. The locally applied scheduler policies must be removed prior to executing the multi-service-site command.

The no form of this command removes the SAP from any multi-service customer site the SAP belongs to. Removing the site can cause existing or future policers and queues to enter an orphaned state.

Parameters

customer-site-name

Specifies an existing customer site name, up to 32 characters. If the customer-site-name exists and local scheduler policies have not been applied to the SAP, the current and future policers queues defined on the SAP looks for their parent schedulers within the scheduler hierarchies defined in the customer-site-name.

Platforms

All

multi-service-site

Syntax

multi-service-site customer-site-name

no multi-service-site customer-site-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap multi-service-site)

Full Context

configure service vprn interface sap multi-service-site

Description

This command creates a new customer site or edits an existing customer site with the customer-site-name parameter. A customer site is an anchor point to create an ingress and egress virtual scheduler hierarchy. When a site is created, it must be assigned to a chassis slot or port on the 7750 SR. When scheduler policies are defined for ingress and egress, the scheduler names contained in each policy are created according to the parameters defined in the policy. Multi-service customer sites exist for the sole purpose of creating a virtual scheduler hierarchy and making it available to queues on multiple Service Access Points (SAPs).

The scheduler policy association with the customer site normally prevents the scheduler policy from being deleted until after the scheduler policy is removed from the customer site. The multi-service-site object will generate a log message indicating that the association was deleted due to scheduler policy removal.

When the multi-service customer site is created, an ingress and egress scheduler policy association does not exist. This does not prevent the site from being assigned to a chassis slot or prevent service SAP assignment. After the site has been created, the ingress and egress scheduler policy associations can be assigned or removed at any time.

Parameters

customer-site-name

Each customer site must have a unique name within the context of the customer. If customer-site-name already exists for the customer ID, the CLI context changes to that site name for the purpose of editing the site scheduler policies or assignment. Any modifications made to an existing site will affect all SAPs associated with the site. Changing a scheduler policy association may cause new schedulers to be created and existing policers and queues on the SAPs to no longer be orphaned. Existing schedulers on the site may cease to exist, causing policers and queues relying on that scheduler to be orphaned.

If the customer-site-name does not exist, it is assumed that an attempt is being made to create a site of that name in the customer ID context. The success of the command execution depends on the following:

  • The maximum number of customer sites defined for the chassis slot has not been met.

  • The customer-site-name is valid.

  • The create keyword is included in the command line syntax (if the system requires it).

When the maximum number of customer sites has been exceeded a configuration error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

If the customer-site-name is invalid, a syntax error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

Values

Valid names consist of any string up to 32 characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed between double quotes.

Platforms

All

multi-service-site

Syntax

multi-service-site customer-site-name

no multi-service-site

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap multi-service-site)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap multi-service-site)

[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap multi-service-site)

Full Context

configure service ipipe sap multi-service-site

configure service epipe sap multi-service-site

configure service cpipe sap multi-service-site

Description

This command associates the SAP with a customer-site-name. If the specified customer-site-name does not exist in the context of the service customer ID an error occurs and the command will not execute. If customer-site-name exists, the current and future defined queues on the SAP (ingress and egress) will attempt to use the scheduler hierarchies created within customer-site-name as parent schedulers.

The no form of this command removes the SAP from any multi-service customer site the SAP belongs to. Removing the site can cause existing or future queues to enter an orphaned state.

Parameters

customer-site-name

The customer-site-name must exist in the context of the customer-id defined as the service owner. If customer-site-name exists and local scheduler policies have not been applied to the SAP, the current and future queues defined on the SAP will look for their parent schedulers within the scheduler hierarchies defined on customer-site-name.

Values

Any valid customer-site-name created within the context of the customer-id.

Platforms

All

  • configure service epipe sap multi-service-site
  • configure service ipipe sap multi-service-site

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service cpipe sap multi-service-site

multi-service-site

Syntax

multi-service-site customer-site-name [create]

no multi-service-site customer-site-name

Context

[Tree] (config>service>cust multi-service-site)

Full Context

configure service customer multi-service-site

Description

This command creates a new customer site or edits an existing customer site with the customer-site-name parameter. A customer site is an anchor point to create an ingress and egress virtual scheduler hierarchy. When a site is created, it must be assigned to a chassis slot or port. When scheduler policies are defined for ingress and egress, the scheduler names contained in each policy are created according to the parameters defined in the policy. Multi-service customer sites exist for the sole purpose of creating a virtual scheduler hierarchy and making it available to queues on multiple Service Access Points (SAPs).

The scheduler policy association with the customer site normally prevents the scheduler policy from being deleted until after the scheduler policy is removed from the customer site. The multi-service-site object will generate a log message indicating that the association was deleted due to scheduler policy removal.

When the multi-service customer site is created, an ingress and egress scheduler policy association does not exist. This does not prevent the site from being assigned to a chassis slot or prevent service SAP assignment. After the site has been created, the ingress and egress scheduler policy associations can be assigned or removed at any time.

Parameters

customer-site-name

Specifies the customer site name. Each customer site must have a unique name within the context of the customer. If customer-site-name already exists for the customer ID, the CLI context changes to that site name for the purpose of editing the site scheduler policies or assignment. Any modifications made to an existing site will affect all SAPs associated with the site. Changing a scheduler policy association may cause new schedulers to be created and existing policers and queues on the SAPs to no longer be orphaned. Existing schedulers on the site may cease to exist, causing policers and queues relying on that scheduler to be orphaned.

If the customer-site-name does not exist, it is assumed that an attempt is being made to create a site of that name in the customer ID context. The success of the command execution depends on the following:

  • The maximum number of customer sites defined for the chassis has not been met.

  • The customer-site-name is valid.

  • The create keyword is included in the command line syntax (if the system requires).

When the maximum number of customer sites has been exceeded a configuration error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

If the customer-site-name is invalid, a syntax error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

Values

Valid names consist of any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

Platforms

All

multi-session-id

multi-session-id

Syntax

[no] multi-session-id

Context

[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>acct-include-attributes multi-session-id)

Full Context

configure aaa isa-radius-policy acct-include-attributes multi-session-id

Description

This command enables the inclusion of the multi-session-id attributes.

The no form of the command excludes the multi-session-id attributes.

Default

no multi-session-id

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-sub-sap

multi-sub-sap

Syntax

multi-sub-sap [subscriber limit]

no multi-sub-sap

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap

Description

This command defines the maximum number of subscribers (dynamic + static) that can be simultaneously active on an MSAP.

If the limit is reached, a new host is denied access and the corresponding DHCP ACK is dropped.

The no form of this command reverts back to the default setting.

Default

multi-sub-sap 1

Parameters

limit

Specifies the maximum number of subscribers allowed.

Note:

The operational maximum value may be smaller due to equipped hardware dependencies.

Values

1 to 131071

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-sub-sap

Syntax

multi-sub-sap subscriber-limit

no multi-sub-sap

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap

configure service vpls sap sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap

Description

This command defines the maximum number of subscribers (dynamic and static) that can be simultaneously active on this SAP.

If the limit is reached, a new host is denied access and the corresponding DHCP ACK is dropped.

The no form of this command reverts back to the default setting.

Parameters

subscriber-limit

Specifies the maximum number of subscribers allowed for this SAP. The operational maximum value may be smaller than the configured value due to equipped hardware dependencies.

Values

2 to 131071

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multi-topology

multi-topology

Syntax

[no] multi-topology

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis multi-topology)

Full Context

configure service vprn isis multi-topology

Description

This command enables IS-IS multi-topology support.

The no form of this command disables IS-IS multi-topology.

Default

no multi-topology

Platforms

All

multi-topology

Syntax

[no] multi-topology

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis multi-topology)

Full Context

configure router isis multi-topology

Description

This command enables IS-IS multi-topology support.

Default

no multi-topology

Platforms

All

multi-topology

Syntax

multi-topology mt2

no multi-topology

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>segment-routing multi-topology)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing multi-topology

Description

This command configures SR-MPLS for SR-ISIS MT, which enables Segment Routing in MT2.

The no form of this command disables Segment Routing in MT2.

Default

no multi-topology

Platforms

All

multi-topology

Syntax

multi-topology [mt0] [mt2]

no multi-topology

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>srv6>locator multi-topology)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing-v6 locator multi-topology

Description

This command configures the use of a local SRv6 locator in an IS-IS IPv6 topology. A user can enable one or more locators in an IS-IS instance. Each locator can be enabled in a single topology of an IS-IS instance, topology 0 (MT0) or topology 2 (MT2). A local locator can be used in multiple IS-IS instances, but can only be assigned to at most one IPv6 topology independently within each IS-IS instance.

Note:

To enable the processing of local and remote IPv6 prefixes and SRv6 locators in MT0 and MT2, use the configure router isis segment-routing-v6 no shutdown command. In addition, to enable SRv6 forwarding in the MT0, MT2, or both topologies, use the configure router isis ipv6-routing native, configure router isis multi-topology ipv6-unicast, or both commands.

By default, a locator name added to an IS-IS instance is enabled in MT0.

The no form of this command returns to the default operation of the locator.

Default

multi-topology mt0

Parameters

mt0

Specifies to use the standard topology (topology 0) in an IS-IS instance.

mt2

Specifies to use the IPv6 routing topology (topology 2) in an IS-IS instance.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

multi-topology

Syntax

multi-topology [mt0] [mt2]

no multi-topology

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis>srv6>msloc multi-topology)

Full Context

configure router isis segment-routing-v6 micro-segment-locator multi-topology

Description

This command configures the use of a local SRv6 micro-segment locator in an IS-IS IPv6 topology. A user can enable one or more micro-segment locators in an IS-IS instance. Each micro-segment locator can be enabled in a single topology of an IS-IS instance, topology 0 (MT0) or topology 2 (MT2). A local micro-segment locator can be used in multiple IS-IS instances, but can only be assigned to at most one IPv6 topology independently within each IS-IS instance.

Note:

To enable the processing of local and remote IPv6 prefixes and SRv6 locators in MT0 and MT2, use the configure router isis segment-routing-v6 no shutdown command. In addition, to enable SRv6 forwarding in the MT0, MT2, or both topologies, use the configure router isis ipv6-routing native, configure router isis multi-topology ipv6-unicast, or both commands.

By default, a micro-segment locator name added to an IS-IS instance is enabled in MT0.

The no form of this command returns to the default operation of the micro-segment locator.

Default

multi-topology mt0

Parameters

mt0

Specifies to use the standard topology (topology 0) in an IS-IS instance.

mt2

Specifies to use the IPv6 routing topology (topology 2) in an IS-IS instance.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

multi-tunnel-type

multi-tunnel-type

Syntax

[no] multi-tunnel-type

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>mobility multi-tunnel-type)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>mobility multi-tunnel-type)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility multi-tunnel-type

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility multi-tunnel-type

Description

This command enables terminating multiple types of tunnels.

The no form of this command disables terminating multiple types of tunnels.

Default

no multi-tunnel-type

Platforms

7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multicast

multicast

Syntax

multicast

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>bonding-parameters multicast)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>bonding-parameters multicast)

Full Context

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface bonding-parameters multicast

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface bonding-parameters multicast

Description

Commands in this context configure multicast in a bonding environment.

multicast

Syntax

multicast [key-id key-id | authentication-keychain keychain-name] [version version]

no multicast

Context

[Tree] (config>system>time>ntp multicast)

Full Context

configure system time ntp multicast

Description

This command configures NTP the node to transmit multicast packets on the CPM/CCM MGMT port. Broadcast and multicast messages can easily be spoofed; authentication is strongly recommended.

The no form of this command removes the multicast address from the configuration.

Parameters

key-id

Specifies the configured authentication key and authentication type used by this version to transmit NTP packets. If this command is omitted from the configuration, packets are sent unencrypted.

Values

1 to 255

keychain-name

Identifies the keychain name, up to 32 characters.

version

Specifies the NTP version number that is generated by this node. This parameter does not need to be configured when in client mode in which case all three versions are accepted.

Values

2 to 4

Default

4

Platforms

All

multicast-fast-failover

multicast-fast-failover

Syntax

[no] multicast-fast-failover

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim multicast-fast-failover)

Full Context

configure router pim multicast-fast-failover

Description

This command configures the option to enable Multicast-Only Fast Reroute (MoFRR) functionality for IPv4 PIM-SSM interfaces in the global routing table instance.

The no form of this command disables MoFRR for IPv4 PIM-SSM interfaces.

Default

no multicast-fast-failover

Platforms

All

multicast-import

multicast-import

Syntax

[no] multicast-import

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis multicast-import)

Full Context

configure service vprn isis multicast-import

Description

This command enables ISIS to submit routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM).

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default

no multicast-import

Platforms

All

multicast-import

Syntax

[no] multicast-import

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3 multicast-import)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf multicast-import)

Full Context

configure service vprn ospf3 multicast-import

configure service vprn ospf multicast-import

Description

This command enables the submission of routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM) by OSPF.

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default

no multicast-import

Platforms

All

multicast-import

Syntax

[no] multicast-import [{both | ipv4 | ipv6}]

Context

[Tree] (config>router>isis multicast-import)

Full Context

configure router isis multicast-import

Description

This command enables the submission of routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM) by IS-IS.

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default

no multicast-import

Parameters

both

Allows submission of both IPv4 and IPv6 routes.

ipv4

Allows submission of IPv4 routes only.

ipv6

Allows submission of IPv6 routes only.

Platforms

All

multicast-import

Syntax

[no] multicast-import

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ospf multicast-import)

[Tree] (config>router>ospf3 multicast-import)

Full Context

configure router ospf multicast-import

configure router ospf3 multicast-import

Description

This command enables the submission of routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM) by OSPF.

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default

no multicast-import

Platforms

All

multicast-info-policy

multicast-info-policy

Syntax

multicast-info-policy policy-name [create]

no multicast-info-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>mcast-management multicast-info-policy)

Full Context

configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy

Description

This command configures a multicast information policy. Multicast information policies are used to manage parameters associated with Layer 2 and Layer 3 multicast records. Multiple features use the configured information within the policy. The multicast ingress path manager uses the policy to decide the inactive and active state behavior for each multicast record using the ingress paths to the switch fabric. The system’s multicast ECMP join decisions are influenced by the channel information contained within the policy.

Multicast Bundles:

A multicast information policy consists of one or multiple named bundles. Multicast streams are mapped to a bundle based on matching the destination address of the multicast stream to configured channel ranges defined within the bundles. Each policy has a bundle named 'default’ that is used when a destination address does not fall within any of the configured channel ranges.

Each bundle has a set of default parameters used as the starting point for multicast channels matching the bundle. The default parameters may be overridden by optional exception parameters defined under each channel range. Further optional parameter overrides are possible under explicit source address contexts within each channel range.

Default Multicast Information Policy

A multicast information policy always exists with the name 'default’ and cannot be edited or deleted. The following parameters are contained in the default multicast information policy:

Policy Description:

Default policy, cannot be edited or deleted.

Bundle:

default

Bundle Description:

Default Bundle, cannot be edited or deleted.

Congestion-Priority-Threshold:

4

ECMP-Optimization-Limit-Threshold:

7

Bundle Defaults:

Administrative Bandwidth:

0 (undefined)

Preference:

0

CAC-Type:

Optional

Bandwidth Activity:

Dynamic with no black-hole rate

Explicit Ingress SF Path:

None (undefined)

Configured Channel Ranges:

None

The default multicast information policy is applied to all VPLS and VPRN services and all routing contexts until an explicitly defined multicast information policy has been mapped.

Explicit Multicast Information Policy Associations

Each VPLS service and each routing context (including VPRN routing contexts) supports an explicit association with an pre-existing multicast information policy. The policy may need to be unique per service or routing context since that each context has its own multicast address space. The same multicast channels may be and most likely be used for completely different multicast streams and applications in each forwarding context.

Interaction with Ingress Multicast Path Management

When ingress multicast path management is enabled on an MDA, the system automatically creates a bandwidth manager context that manages the multicast path bandwidth into the switch fabric used by the ingress ports on the MDA. As routing or snooping protocols generate Layer 2 or Layer 3 multicast FIB records that are populated on the MDA’s forwarding plane, they are processed though the multicast information policy that is associated with the service or routing context associated with the record. The policy returns the following information for the record to be used by the ingress bandwidth manager:

  • The records administrative bandwidth (0 if undefined)

  • Preference level (0 to 7 with 7 being highest)

  • Bandwidth activity monitoring setting (use admin bw or dynamic monitoring) If admin bw is indicated, also returns active and inactive thresholds

  • Initial switch fabric multicast path (primary or secondary)

  • Explicit switch fabric multicast path (primary, secondary, or none)

Interaction with Multicast ECMP Optimization

The multicast information policy is used by the multicast ECMP optimization function to derive each channels administrative bandwidth. The ECMP function tallies all bandwidth information for channels joined and attempts to equalize the load between the various paths to the sender. The multicast information policy returns the following information to the ECMP path manager:

  • Administrative bandwidth (0 if undefined)

  • Preference (0 to 7 with 7 the highest preference value)

Default

multicast-info-policy "default”

Parameters

policy-name

Identifies the name of the policy to be either created or edited. Each multicast information policy must be uniquely named within the system. Names of up to 32 ASCII characters are supported with the normal character restrictions.

create

The create keyword is required if creating a new multicast information policy when the system is configured to require the explicit use of the keyword to prevent accidental object creation. Objects may be accidentally created when this protection is disabled and an object name is mistyped when attempting to edit the object. This keyword is not required when the protection is disabled. The keyword is ignored when the multicast information policy name already exists.

Platforms

All

multicast-info-policy

Syntax

multicast-info-policy policy-name

no multicast-info-policy

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn multicast-info-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>ies multicast-info-policy)

[Tree] (config>router multicast-info-policy)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls multicast-info-policy)

Full Context

configure service vprn multicast-info-policy

configure service ies multicast-info-policy

configure router multicast-info-policy

configure service vpls multicast-info-policy

Description

This command overrides the default multicast information policy on a service or routing context. When the policy association is changed, all multicast channels in the service or routing context must be reevaluated.

If a multicast information policy is not explicitly associated with the service or routing context, the default multicast information policy is used when ingress multicast path management is enabled.

While a multicast information policy is associated with a service or routing context, the policy cannot be deleted from the system.

The no form of the command removes an explicit multicast information policy from the service or routing context and restores the default multicast information policy.

Parameters

policy-name

Specifies the policy name, up to 32 characters. The policy-name parameter is required and specifies an existing multicast information policy that should be associated with the service or routing context.

Platforms

All

multicast-leave-sync-propagation

multicast-leave-sync-propagation

Syntax

multicast-leave-sync-propagation time

Context

[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn multicast-leave-sync-propagation)

Full Context

configure service system bgp-evpn multicast-leave-sync-propagation

Description

This command configures the additional amount of time that the system waits before removing a multicast state that was synchronized in an Ethernet Segment via Multicast Join or Leave Synch routes. This value represents a delta corresponding to the time it takes for a BGP advertisement to propagate to ES peers.

The node triggering the route computes the maximum response time as the product of the locally configured values, Last Member Query Count and Last Member Query Interval (this value is taken from the config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping>last-member-query-interval or config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping> last-member-query-interval commands depending on the Ethernet Segment being used), and adds the delta value to the Maximum Response Time. Increasing the Maximum Response Time by this value can help minimize the churn of removing and recreating the state on the node.

The maximum response time value should be configured consistently in all ES peers. For example, in a scenario where a maximum response time of five seconds is advertised by PE-A and there is a delay of four seconds in the BGP propagation to PE-B, the timer could already expire on PE-A while PE-B is still in LMQ time and can still receive joins (which would recreate state in A after a join synch route from B). To minimize this situation, adding an extra delta timer on PE-A, reduces the potential churn of PE-A removing and recreating the state.

Default

multicast-leave-sync-propagation 5

Parameters

time

Specifies the multicast leave sync propagation delay time, in seconds.

Values

0 to 300

Default

5

Platforms

All

multicast-lsp

multicast-lsp

Syntax

multicast-lsp lsp-name

no multicast-lsp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>sdp>class-forwarding multicast-lsp)

Full Context

configure service sdp class-forwarding multicast-lsp

Description

This command specifies the RSVP or static LSP in this SDP to use to forward VPLS multicast and broadcast packets. The LSP name must exist and must have been associated with this SDP using the command config>service>sdp>lsp. In the absence of an explicit configuration by the user, the default LSP is used.

Default

no multicast-lsp — traffic mapped to default-lsp name

Parameters

lsp-name

Specifies the RSVP or static LSP to use.

Platforms

All

multicast-network-domain

multicast-network-domain

Syntax

multicast-network-domain multicast-network-domain

no multicast-network-domain

Context

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if multicast-network-domain)

Full Context

configure service ies interface multicast-network-domain

Description

This command is used to enable efficient multicast replication over a spoke SDP. Multicast traffic is copied to only a subset of network interfaces that may be used as egress for a spoke SDP. A network domain is defined by associating multiple interfaces to a logical group that may participate in multicast replication for a spoke SDP.

The no form of command disables efficient multicast replication to a network domain for a spoke SDP and traffic is replicated to all forwarding complexes.

Default

no multicast-network-domain

Platforms

All

multicast-policer

multicast-policer

Syntax

multicast-policer policer-id [fp-redirect-group]

no multicast-policer

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>fc multicast-policer)

Full Context

configure qos sap-ingress fc multicast-policer

Description

Within a sap-ingress QoS policy forwarding class context, the multicast-policer command is used to map packets that match the forwarding class and are considered multicast in nature to the specified policer-id. The specified policer-id must already exist within the sap-ingress QoS policy. While the system is determining the forwarding class of a packet, it is also looking up its forwarding destination based on the ingress service type and the service instance forwarding records. Two basic types of services support multicast packets: routed services (IES and VPRN) and L2 multipoint services (VPLS, I-VPLS, and B-VPLS). For the routed service types, a multicast packet is destined to an IPv4 or IPv6 multicast address. For the L2 multipoint services, a multicast packet is a packet destined to a multicast MAC address (multicast bit set in the destination MAC address but not the ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff broadcast address). The VPLS services also support two other multipoint forwarding types (broadcast and unknown), which are considered separate from the multicast forwarding type.

If ingress forwarding logic has resolved a packet to the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class, it will be mapped to either an ingress multipoint queue (using the multicast queue-id or multicast queue-id group ingress-queue-group commands) or an ingress policer (multicast-policer policer-id). The multicast and multicast-policer commands within the forwarding class context are mutually exclusive. By default, the multicast forwarding type is mapped to the SAP ingress default multipoint queue. If the multicast-policer policer-id command is executed, any previous policer mapping or queue mapping for the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class is overridden if the policer mapping is successful.

A policer defined within the sap-ingress policy is not actually created on an ingress SAP or a subscriber using an sla-profile where the policy is applied until at least one forwarding type (unicast, broadcast, unknown, or multicast) from one of the forwarding classes is mapped to the policer. If insufficient policer resources exist to create the policer for a SAP or subscriber or multiservice site, or ingress policing is not supported on the port associated with the SAP or subscriber or multiservice site, the initial forwarding class forwarding type mapping will fail.

The multicast-policer command is ignored for instances of the policer applied to SAPs subscribers or multiservice site where broadcast packets are not supported.

When the multicast forwarding type within a forwarding class is mapped to a policer, the multicast packets classified to the subclasses within the forwarding class are also mapped to the policer.

The no form of this command is used to restore the mapping of the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class to the default multipoint queue. If all forwarding class forwarding types had been removed from the default multipoint queue, the queue will not exist on the SAPs subscribers or multiservice site associated with the QoS policy, and the no multicast-policer command will cause the system to attempt to create the default multipoint queue on each object. If the system cannot create the queue on each instance, the no multicast-policer command will fail and the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class will continue its mapping to the existing policer-id. If the no multicast-policer command results in a policer without any current mappings, the policer will be removed from the SAPs and subscribers associated with the QoS policy. All statistics associated with the policer on each SAP and subscriber will be lost.

Parameters

policer-id

When the forwarding class multicast-policer command is executed, a valid policer-id must be specified. The parameter policer-id references a policer-id that has already been created within the sap-ingress QoS policy.

Values

1 to 63

fp-redirect-group

Redirects a forwarding class to a forwarding plane queue-group as specified in a SAP QoS policy.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS, VSR

multicast-queue

multicast-queue

Syntax

multicast-queue queue-id [group queue-group-name]

no multicast-queue

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>fc multicast-queue)

Full Context

configure qos sap-ingress fc multicast-queue

Description

This command overrides the default multicast forwarding type queue mapping for fc fc-name. The specified queue-id must exist within the policy as a multipoint queue before the mapping can be made. When the forwarding class mapping is executed, all multicast traffic on a SAP using this policy is forwarded using the queue-id.

The multicast forwarding type includes the unknown unicast forwarding type and the broadcast forwarding type unless each is explicitly defined to a different multipoint queue. When the unknown and broadcast forwarding types are left as default, they will track the defined queue for the multicast forwarding type.

The no form of this command sets the multicast forwarding type queue-id back to the default queue for the forwarding class. If the broadcast and unknown forwarding types were not explicitly defined to a multipoint queue, they will also be set back to the default multipoint queue (queue 11).

Parameters

queue-id

The queue-id parameter specified must be an existing, multipoint queue defined in the config>qos>sap-ingress context.

Values

Any valid multipoint queue-ID in the policy including 2 through 32.

Default

11

group queue-group-name

This optional parameter is used to redirect the forwarding type within the forwarding class to the specified queue-id within the queue-group-name. When the policy is applied, all packets matching the forwarding class and forwarding type will be redirected to the queue within the specified queue group. The queue-group-name are configured in the config>qos>queue-group-templates egress and ingress contexts.

Platforms

All

multicast-queue

Syntax

multicast-queue queue-id

no multicast-queue

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>network-queue>fc multicast-queue)

Full Context

configure qos network-queue fc multicast-queue

Description

This command overrides the default multicast forwarding type queue mapping for fc fc-name. The specified queue-id must exist within the policy as a multipoint queue before the mapping can be made. When the forwarding class mapping is executed, all multicast traffic using this policy is forwarded using the queue-id.

The multicast forwarding type includes the unknown unicast forwarding type and the broadcast forwarding type, unless each is explicitly defined to a different multipoint queue. When the unknown and broadcast forwarding types are left as default, they will track the defined queue for the multicast forwarding type.

The no form of this command sets the multicast forwarding type queue-id back to the default queue for the forwarding class. If the broadcast and unknown forwarding types were not explicitly defined to a multipoint queue, they will also be set back to the default multipoint queue (queue 11).

Resource Utilization

When a multipoint queue is created and at least one forwarding class is mapped to the queue using the multipoint-queue command, a single ingress multipoint hardware queue is created per instance of the applied network-queue policy, using the queue-policy command at the ingress network FP level. Multipoint queues are not created at egress and the multipoint queues defined in the network-queue policy are ignored when the policy is applied to an egress port.

Parameters

queue-id

Specifies any valid multipoint queue-ID in the policy. The queue-id parameter specified must be an existing, multipoint queue defined in the config>qos>network-queue>queue context.

Values

1 to 16

Default

11

Platforms

All

multicast-queue

Syntax

multicast-queue queue-id

Context

[Tree] (config>qos>shared-queue>fc multicast-queue)

Full Context

configure qos shared-queue fc multicast-queue

Description

This command configures the multicast forwarding type queue mapping for fc fc-name. The specified queue-id must exist within the policy as a multipoint queue before the mapping can be made. When the forwarding class mapping is executed, all multicast traffic on a SAP using this policy is forwarded using the queue-id.

The multicast forwarding type includes the unknown unicast forwarding type and the broadcast forwarding type unless each is explicitly defined to a different multipoint queue. When the unknown and broadcast forwarding types are left as default, they will track the defined queue for the multicast forwarding type.

The no form of this command sets the multicast forwarding type queue-id back to the default queue for the forwarding class. If the broadcast and unknown forwarding types were not explicitly defined to a multipoint queue, they will also be set back to the default multipoint queue (queue 11).

Parameters

queue-id

The queue-id parameter specified must be an existing, multipoint queue defined in the config>qos>sap-ingress context policer-output-queues profile. For the 7950 XRS, this is not configurable in the policer-output-queues profile.

Values

9 to 16

Default

11

Platforms

All

multicast-redirection

multicast-redirection

Syntax

multicast-redirection [fwd-service service-id] ip-int-name

no multicast-redirection

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>action multicast-redirection)

Full Context

configure router policy-options policy-statement entry action multicast-redirection

Description

This command configures the interface where to redirect IGMP multicast traffic to.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multicast-redirection

Syntax

multicast-redirection [fwd-service service-id] ip-int-name

no multicast-redirection

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>default-action multicast-redirection)

Full Context

configure router policy-options policy-statement default-action multicast-redirection

Description

This command enables a redirection under a filtering policy. The filtering policy in this case becomes a redirection policy and it is defined under the router>policy-option hierarchy.

After the redirection policy is applied to the subscriber, all IGMP messages will be processed per subscriber host before they get redirected to the referenced interface (and possibly service). However, multicast traffic will not be replicated directly per subscriber host but instead it will be forwarded on the interface that is referenced in the redirection policy. The redirected interface must have IGMP enabled.

Currently all traffic is redirected and there is no ability to selectively redirect multicast traffic based on match conditions (such as, multicast-groups, source IP address of IGMP messages). Multicast redirection is supported between VPRN services and also between interfaces within the Global Routing Context. Multicast redirection is not supported between the VPRN services and the Global Routing Context. Multicast redirection is supported in the wholesale/retail VPRN context.

Note:

Redirecting from a VPRN instance to the GRT is not supported. Redirecting from a VPRN to a different VPRN is supported and redirecting from an IES to another IES is also supported.

Default

no multicast-redirection

Parameters

fwd-service service-id

Specifies the service to which traffic should be redirected. This option is applied only in the VPRN context. It is possible to redirect the multicast group into another service instance routing interface.

ip-int-name

specifies the alternate interface to which IGMP messages are redirected.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multicast-senders

multicast-senders

Syntax

multicast-senders {auto | always | never}

no multicast-senders

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if multicast-senders)

Full Context

configure service vprn pim interface multicast-senders

Description

This command configures the way subnet matching is done for incoming data packets on this interface. An IP multicast sender is an user entity to be authenticated in a receiving host.

Parameters

auto

Subnet matching is automatically performed for incoming data packets on this interface.

always

Subnet matching is always performed for incoming data packets on this interface.

never

Subnet matching is never performed for incoming data packets on this interface.

Platforms

All

multicast-senders

Syntax

multicast-senders {auto | always | never}

no multicast-senders

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim>interface multicast-senders)

Full Context

configure router pim interface multicast-senders

Description

This command configures how traffic from directly-attached multicast sources should be treated on broadcast interfaces. It can also be used to treat all traffic received on an interface as traffic coming from a directly-attached multicast source. This is particularly useful if a multicast source is connected to a point-to-point or unnumbered interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

multicast-senders auto

Parameters

auto

Specifies that, on broadcast interfaces, the forwarding plane performs subnet-match check on multicast packets received on the interface to determine if the packet is from a directly-attached source. On unnumbered/point-to-point interfaces, all traffic is implicitly treated as coming from a remote source.

always

Treats all traffic received on the interface as coming from a directly-attached multicast source.

never

Specifies that, on broadcast interfaces, traffic from directly-attached multicast sources will not be forwarded; however, traffic from a remote source will still be forwarded if there is a multicast state for it. On unnumbered/point-to-point interfaces, it means that all traffic received on that interface must not be forwarded.

Platforms

All

multicast-service

multicast-service

Syntax

multicast-service service-id

no multicast-service

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>video-interface multicast-service)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>video-interface multicast-service)

Full Context

configure service vprn video-interface multicast-service

configure service ies video-interface multicast-service

Description

This command adds a multicast service association to the video interface. This parameter is not required on the video interface when the service carries both unicast and multicast traffic.

When multicast and unicast are carried in separate service instances, the operator can set this parameter on the unicast video interface to form an association with the multicast service when replies need to be sent in the multicast service instance.

When multicast and unicast are carried in separate services when a downstream device (such as a DSLAM) can perform a service cross connect between the services and performs multicast replication.

The no form of the command removes the multicast service association.

Parameters

service-id

The service ID of the associated multicast service.

Values

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

64 characters maximum

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-1s, 7750 SR-2s, 7750 SR-7s, 7750 SR-14s

multicast6-fast-failover

multicast6-fast-failover

Syntax

[no] multicast6-fast-failover

Context

[Tree] (config>router>pim multicast6-fast-failover)

Full Context

configure router pim multicast6-fast-failover

Description

This command enables Multicast-Only Fast Reroute (MoFRR) functionality for IPv6 PIM-SSM interfaces in the global routing table instance.

The no form of this command disables MoFRR for IPv6 PIM-SSM interfaces.

Default

no multicast6-fast-failover

Platforms

All

multicastclient

multicastclient

Syntax

multicastclient [authenticate]

no multicastclient

Context

[Tree] (config>system>time>ntp multicastclient)

Full Context

configure system time ntp multicastclient

Description

This command configures the node to receive multicast NTP messages on the CPM MGMT port. If multicastclient is not configured, received NTP multicast traffic will be ignored. Use the show command to view the state of the configuration.

The no construct of this message removes the multicast client for the specified interface from the configuration.

Parameters

authenticate

Specifies to make authentication a requirement (optional). If authentication is required, the authentication key-id received must have been configured in the authentication-key command, and that key-id type and key value must also match.

Platforms

All

multihop

multihop

Syntax

multihop ttl-value

no multihop

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>bgp-prng-plcy multihop)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt bgp-peering-policy multihop

Description

This command configures the time to live (TTL) value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away.

This parameter is meaningful only when configuring EBGP peers. It is ignored if set for an IBGP peer.

The no form of this command is used to convey to the BGP instance that the EBGP peers are directly connected.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default

multihop 1 (EBGP peers are directly connected)

multihop 64 (IBGP)

Parameters

ttl-value

Specifies the TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multihop

Syntax

multihop ttl-value

no multihop

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp multihop)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group multihop)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor multihop)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp multihop

configure service vprn bgp group multihop

configure service vprn bgp group neighbor multihop

Description

This command configures the time to live (TTL) value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away.

This parameter is meaningful only when configuring EBGP peers. It is ignored if set for an IBGP peer.

The no form of this command is used to convey to the BGP instance that the EBGP peers are directly connected.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default

multihop 1 (EBGP peers are directly connected)

multihop 64 (IBGP)

Parameters

ttl-value

Specifies the TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

All

multihop

Syntax

multihop ttl-value

no multihop

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group multihop)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp multihop)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor multihop)

Full Context

configure router bgp group multihop

configure router bgp multihop

configure router bgp group neighbor multihop

Description

This command configures the time to live (TTL) value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away.

The no form of this command is used to convey to the BGP instance that the EBGP peers are directly connected.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

Default

multihop 1 — EBGP peers are directly connected.

multihop 64 — IBGP

Parameters

ttl-value

Specifies the TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.

Values

1 to 255

Platforms

All

multipath-eligible

multipath-eligible

Syntax

[no] multipath-eligible

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>neighbor multipath-eligible)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group multipath-eligible)

Full Context

configure service vprn bgp neighbor multipath-eligible

configure service vprn bgp group multipath-eligible

Description

This command specifies that a BGP neighbor or the set of BGP neighbors in a peer group should be part of a selective multipath set. Selective multipaths are only supported by the ipv4, label-ipv4, ipv6, and label-ipv6 address families.

If no candidate multipath route for an IP prefix came from a multipath-eligible peer, multipaths are selected without further constraints.

If the best route for an IP prefix is received from a neighbor marked as multipath-eligible, other routes for the same prefix are not eligible to be used as multipaths unless they also came from peers marked as multipath-eligible.

If the best route for an IP prefix did not come from a multipath-eligible peer but there is at least one candidate multipath route for the same prefix from a multipath-eligible peer, multipath is not used.

The no form of this command marks a neighbor or group as non-multipath eligible. The effect of this depends on whether other neighbors and groups are marked as multipath eligible.

Default

no multipath-eligible

Platforms

All

multipath-eligible

Syntax

[no] multipath-eligible

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group multipath-eligible)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor multipath-eligible)

Full Context

configure router bgp group multipath-eligible

configure router bgp group neighbor multipath-eligible

Description

This command specifies that a BGP neighbor or the set of BGP neighbors in a peer group should be part of a selective multipath set. Selective multipaths are only supported by the ipv4, label-ipv4, ipv6, and label-ipv6 address families.

If no candidate multipath route for an IP prefix came from a multipath-eligible peer then multipaths are selected without further constraints.

If the best route for an IP prefix is received from a neighbor marked as multipath-eligible, then other routes for the same prefix are not eligible to be used as multipaths unless they also came from peers marked as multipath-eligible.

If the best route for an IP prefix did not come from a multipath-eligible peer but there is at least one candidate multipath route for the same prefix from a multipath-eligible peer then multipath is not used.

The no form of this command marks a neighbor or group as non-multipath eligible. The effect of this depends on whether other neighbors and groups are marked as multipath eligible.

Default

no multipath-eligible

Platforms

All

multiple-option

multiple-option

Syntax

multiple-option {true | false}

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>egr-ip>entry>match multiple-option)

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>ingr-ip>entry>match multiple-option)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level egress-ip-filter-entries entry match multiple-option

configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level ingress-ip-filter-entries entry match multiple-option

Description

This command configures the multiple-option match condition.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters

true

Enables checking the number of IP options in the IP header.

false

Disables checking the number of IP options in the IP header.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

multiple-option

Syntax

multiple-option {true | false}

no multiple-option

Context

[Tree] (config>filter>ip-filter>entry>match multiple-option)

Full Context

configure filter ip-filter entry match multiple-option

Description

This command configures matching packets that contain one or more than one option fields in the IP header as an IP filter match criterion.

The no form of the command removes the checking of the number of option fields in the IP header as a match criterion.

Default

no multiple-option

Parameters

true

Specifies matching on IP packets that contain more than one option field in the header.

false

Specifies matching on IP packets that do not contain multiple option fields present in the header.

Platforms

All

multiple-option

Syntax

multiple-option {true | false}

no multiple-option

Context

[Tree] (cfg>sys>sec>cpm>ip-filter>entry>match multiple-option)

Full Context

configure system security cpm-filter ip-filter entry match multiple-option

Description

This command configures matching packets that contain more than one option fields in the IP header as an IP filter match criterion.

The no form of this command removes the checking of the number of option fields in the IP header as a match criterion.

Default

no multiple-option

Parameters

true

Specifies matching on IP packets that contain more than one option field in the header.

false

Specifies matching on IP packets that do not contain multiple option fields present in the header.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

multiplier

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier [multiplier]

no multiplier

Context

[Tree] (config>lag>bfd>family multiplier)

Full Context

configure lag bfd family multiplier

Description

This command specifies the detect multiplier used for a micro-BFD session over the associated LAG links. If a BFD control packet is not received for a period of multiplier X receive-interval then the session is declared down.

The no form of this command removes multiplier from the configuration.

Default

multiplier 3

Parameters

multiplier

Specifies the multiplier value.

Values

3 to 20

Platforms

All

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier multiplier-value

no multiplier

Context

[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (cfg>lag>eth-cfm>mep>csf multiplier)

Full Context

configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure lag eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

Description

This command configures the multiplier used for timing out the CSF.

Parameters

multiplier-value

Specifies the multiplier used for timing out CSF.

Values

0.0, 2.0 to 30.0

Default

3.5

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier multiplier-value

no multiplier

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)

Full Context

configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep multiplier

configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm csf-enable multiplier

configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

Description

This command configures the multiplication factor applied to the receive time that is used to clear the CSF condition.

The no form of this command disables the multiplier used for timing out CSF.

Default

multiplier 3.5

Parameters

multiplier-value

Specifies the multiplication factor applied to the receive time that is used to clear the CSF condition. This value can only be configured in increments of 0.5. Configuring a value of 0.0 means that the CSF condition is cleared only when C-DCI is received.

Values

0.0, 2.0 to 30.0

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

  • configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s

  • configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
  • configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep multiplier

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier multiplier

no multiplier

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bfd>bfd-template multiplier)

Full Context

configure router bfd bfd-template multiplier

Description

This command specifies the detect multiplier for a BFD session. If a BFD control packet is not received for a period of multiplier x receive-interval (the parameter value of the receive-interval command), the session is declared down.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

multiplier 3

Parameters

multiplier

Specifies the multiplier.

Values

3 to 20

Default

3

Platforms

All

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier sample-window-durations

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>link-meas>template>asw multiplier)

Full Context

configure test-oam link-measurement measurement-template aggregate-sample-window multiplier

Description

This command configures the number of sample windows in an aggregate sample window.

Default

multiplier 12

Parameters

sample-window-durations

Specifies the number of sample windows

Values

1 to 12

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier interval-durations

Context

[Tree] (config>test-oam>link-meas>template>sw multiplier)

Full Context

configure test-oam link-measurement measurement-template sample-window multiplier

Description

This command configures the number of probe results that should be in the sample window. For example, a multiplier of 10 and an interval of 5 results in 50 probes being transmitted from an individual sample window. Consequently, 50 probe results are expected within the 50 second duration that the sample window is "In-progress”.

Default

multiplier 10

Parameters

interval-durations

Specifies the number of intervals in a sample window.

Values

1 to 900

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, 7950 XRS

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier multiplier

no multiplier

Context

[Tree] (config>router>lsp-bfd>tail-end multiplier)

Full Context

configure router lsp-bfd tail-end multiplier

Description

This command configures the LSP BFD multiplier for the tail end of LSP BFD sessions.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

multiplier 3

Parameters

multiplier

Specifies the multiplier.

Values

1 to 20

Default

3

Platforms

All

multipliers

multipliers

Syntax

multipliers sample-multiplier num1 adjust-multiplier num2

no multipliers

Context

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth multipliers)

[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth multipliers)

Full Context

configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth multipliers

configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth multipliers

Description

This command configures the sample-multiplier and adjust-multiplier applicable to one particular LSP.

The sample-multiplier configures the number of collection intervals between measurements of the number of bytes that have been transmitted on the LSP. The byte counts include the layer 2 encapsulation of MPLS packets and represent traffic of all forwarding classes and priorities (in-profile vs, out-of-profile) belonging to the LSP. The router calculates the average data rate in each sample interval. The maximum of this average data rate over multiple sample intervals is the measured bandwidth input to the auto-bandwidth adjustment algorithms.

The adjust-multiplier is the number of collection intervals between periodic evaluations by the ingress LER about whether to adjust the LSP bandwidth. The router keeps track of the maximum average data rate of each LSP since the last reset of the adjust-count.

The adjust-multiplier is not allowed to be set to a value less than the sample-multiplier. It is recommended that the adjust-multiplier be a multiple of the sample-multiplier.

The no form of this command instructs the system to take the value from the auto-bandwidth-multipliers command.

Default

no multipliers

Parameters

number1

Specifies the number of collection intervals in a sample interval.

Values

1 to 511

number2

Specifies the number of collection intervals in an adjust interval.

Values

1 to 16383

Platforms

All

multistream-spmsi

multistream-spmsi

Syntax

multistream-spmsi index [create]

no multistream-spmsi index

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective multistream-spmsi)

Full Context

configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective multistream-spmsi

Description

This command creates a multi-stream S-PMSI policy. Having multiple multi-stream S-PMSIs per MVPN creates a link list, in which the first match (lowest index) will be chosen for a multicast stream. The number of configured multi-stream S-PMSIs cannot exceed the configured maximum S-PMSI for a given MVPN.

Parameters

index

Specifies the index number.

Values

1 to 1024

Platforms

All

mvpn

mvpn

Syntax

mvpn

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vprn mvpn)

Full Context

configure service vprn mvpn

Description

Commands in this context configure MVPN-related parameters for the IP VPN.

Platforms

All

mvpn

Syntax

[no] mvpn

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp>import-pmsi-routes mvpn)

Full Context

configure router ldp import-pmsi-routes mvpn

Description

This command specifies that the SR OS is to cache inter-as MVPN PMSI AD routes for option B.

The no form of this command disables caching of MVPN PMSI AD routes. The default is disabled, however when an upgrade from a software load that does not supports this command is performed, this command will be enabled after the upgrade.

This command is not enabled if the user is using an older config file.

Default

no mvpn

Platforms

All

mvpn

Syntax

[no] mvpn

Context

[Tree] (config>router>gtm mvpn)

Full Context

configure router gtm mvpn

Description

This command enables and disables the context to configure MVPN-related parameters.

Platforms

All

mvpn-ipv4

mvpn-ipv4

Syntax

mvpn-ipv4 send send-limit receive [none]

mvpn-ipv4 send send-limit

no mvpn-ipv4

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mvpn-ipv4)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mvpn-ipv4)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mvpn-ipv4)

Full Context

configure router bgp group add-paths mvpn-ipv4

configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mvpn-ipv4

configure router bgp add-paths mvpn-ipv4

Description

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast VPN IPv4 routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast VPN IPv4 routes.

The maximum number of paths per multicast VPN IPv4 NRLI to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast VPN IPv4 routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast VPN IPv4 to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default

no mvpn-ipv4

Parameters

send-limit

Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast VPN IPv4 NRLI that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast VPN IPv4 AFI/SAFI.

Default

1 to 16, none

receive

Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple routes per multicast VPN IPv4 NRLI.

none

Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple routes per multicast VPN IPv4 NRLI.

Platforms

All

mvpn-ipv6

mvpn-ipv6

Syntax

mvpn-ipv6 send send-limit receive [none]

mvpn-ipv6 send send-limit

no mvpn-ipv6

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mvpn-ipv6)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mvpn-ipv6)

[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mvpn-ipv6)

Full Context

configure router bgp add-paths mvpn-ipv6

configure router bgp group add-paths mvpn-ipv6

configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mvpn-ipv6

Description

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast VPN IPv6 routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast VPN IPv6 routes.

The maximum number of paths per multicast VPN IPv6 NRLI to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast VPN paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast VPN IPv6 routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast VPN IPv6 to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default

no mvpn-ipv6

Parameters

send-limit

Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast VPN IPv6 NRLI that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast VPN IPv6 AFI/SAFI.

receive

Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple routes per multicast VPN IPv6 NRLI.

none

Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple routes per multicast VPN IPv6 NRLI.

Platforms

All

mvpn-no-export

mvpn-no-export

Syntax

[no] mvpn-no-export

Context

[Tree] (config>router>ldp>import-pmsi-routes mvpn-no-export)

Full Context

configure router ldp import-pmsi-routes mvpn-no-export

Description

This command specifies that the SR OS is to cache intra-as MVPN PMSI AD routes for option B.

The no form of this command disables caching of intra-as MVPN PMSI AD routes. The default is disabled, however when an upgrade from a software load that does not supports this command is performed, this command will be enabled after the upgrade.

This command is enabled if the user is using an older config file.

Default

no mvpn-no-export

Platforms

All

mvpn-rtcache

mvpn-rtcache

Syntax

mvpn-rtcache [group grp-ip-address] [peer ip-address]

no mvpn-rtcache

Context

[Tree] (debug>router>pim mvpn-rtcache)

Full Context

debug router pim mvpn-rtcache

Description

This command enables debugging for the PIM MVPN route cache.

The no form of this command disables debugging for the PIM MVPN route cache.

Parameters

grp-ip-address

Debugs information associated with the specified group.

Values

multicast group address (ipv4, ipv6) or zero

peer-ip-address

Debugs information associated with the specified peer.

Values

peer address (ipv4, ipv6)

Platforms

All

mvpn-type

mvpn-type

Syntax

mvpn-type {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}

no mvpn-type

Context

[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>from mvpn-type)

Full Context

configure router policy-options policy-statement entry from mvpn-type

Description

This command allows match on ng-MVPN BGP route type when the policy is used for VRF-import/VRF-export/BGP global export policy. The policy will only be applied to multicast routes.

The no form of this command disables mvpn-type in the policy evaluation.

Default

no mvpn-type

Parameters

1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7

BGP MVPN route-type as per RFC 6514.

Platforms

All

mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

Syntax

[no] mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

Context

[Tree] (config>router>bgp mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new)

Full Context

configure router bgp mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

Description

When enabled, the type/subtype in advertised routes is encoded as 0x010b.

The no form of this command (the default) encodes the type/subtype as 0x010a (to preserve backwards compatibility).

Default

no mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

Platforms

All

mvr

mvr

Syntax

mvr

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping mvr)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mld-snooping mvr)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping mvr)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>igmp-snooping mvr)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap mld-snooping mvr

configure service vpls mld-snooping mvr

configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mvr

configure service vpls igmp-snooping mvr

Description

Commands in this context configure Multicast VPLS Registration (MVR) parameters.

Platforms

All

mvr

Syntax

mvr

Context

[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp mvr)

Full Context

configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping mvr

Description

Commands in this context configure Multicast VPLS Registration (MVR) parameters.

Platforms

7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7750 SR-a, 7750 SR-e, 7750 SR-s, VSR

mvrp

mvrp

Syntax

mvrp

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mrp mvrp)

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mrp mvrp)

Full Context

configure service vpls sap mrp mvrp

configure service vpls mrp mvrp

Description

This object consolidates the MVRP attributes. MVRP is only supported initially in the management VPLS so the object is not supported under BVPLS, IVPLS or regular VPLS not marked with the m-vpls tag.

Platforms

All

mvrp-control

mvrp-control

Syntax

[no] mvrp-control

Context

[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vpls-group mvrp-control)

Full Context

configure service vpls vpls-group mvrp-control

Description

This command enables MVRP control in the VPLS instances instantiated using the templates for the specified vpls-group. That means the flooding FDB will be created empty and will be populated with endpoints whenever MVRP receives a declaration and a registration on a specific endpoint. Also the VLAN ID associated by the control VPLS with the instantiated VPLS will be declared on service activation by MVRP on all virtual MVRP ports in the control VPLS. Service activation takes place when at least one other SAP is provisioned and brought up under the data VPLS. This is usually a customer facing SAP or a SAP leading outside of the MVRP controlled domain.

The no form of this command disallows MVRP control over this VPLS. The VPLS will be created with a regular FDB and will become as a result active upon creation time. Command change is allowed only when the related vpls-group is in shutdown state.

Default

no mvrp-control

Platforms

All